Alstom Micom

MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
Directional/Non-directional Relay
Version 11
Technical Guide
P12Y/EN T/A63
Technical Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN T/A63 Page 1/2
MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Directional/Non-directional Relay CONTENT
Safety Section Getting Started Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions User Guide Technical Data and Curve Characteristics Application Guide Communication Database Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Connection Diagrams Commissioning Test and Record Sheet
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 P12y/EN GS/A63 P12y/EN IN/A63 P12y/EN FT/A63 P12y/EN TD/A63 P12y/EN AP/A63 P12y/EN CT/A63 P12y/EN CM/A63 P12y/EN CO/A63 P12y/EN RS/A63
P12y/EN T/A63 Page 2/2
Technical Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
BLANK PAGE
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 Safety Section 1/8
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR AREVA T&D EQUIPMENT
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
Symbols Labels
2 2 3
3 3
4. 5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective fuse rating Protective Class Installation Category Environment
3 6 6 6
6 6 6 7
8. 9.
COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA
7 8
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 2/8 Safety Section
1.
INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA T&D is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient. The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipments rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected, are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it, are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices, are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 Safety Section 3/8
3.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.
Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal
Note This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2
Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/E11) for typical equipment labeling information.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning, or servicing the equipment. be consulted before installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 4/8 Protection Class I Equipment Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar. Safety Section
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation), CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections, Protective fuse rating, Integrity of applicable), the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA listed or recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA listed or recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 Safety Section Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed. 5/8
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning. Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
6.
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

Electrical adjustments It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock. Exposure of live parts Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts, these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.
7.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
7.1
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. DANGER - CTS MUST NOT BE FUSED SINCE OPEN CIRCUITING THEM MAY PRODUCE LETHAL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES.
7.2
Protective Class IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
7.3
Installation Category IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 Safety Section 7.4 Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Altitude - Operation up to 2000m IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2005 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards. 7/8
8.
COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

The following European directives may be applicable to the equipment, if so it will carry the relevant marking(s) shown below: Compliance with all Community directives. relevant European
Marking Product safety: Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC EN 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-5: 2001
Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC. The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity: EN 50263: 2000 Where applicable:
Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.
II (2) G
The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, Ex e, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas.
ATEX Potentially Explosive CAUTION - Equipment with this marking is not itself Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, suitable for operation within a potentially explosive for equipment. atmosphere. Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance.
Radio and Telecommunications Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Terminal Equipment (R & TTE) Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, directive 99/5/EC. down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.
9.
RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

CSA - Canadian Standards Association UL - Underwriters Laboratory of America
If applicable, the following marks will be present on the equipment: UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements
UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements
Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN GS/A63
GETTING STARTED
P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 1/48
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Receipt of Relays Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
3
3 3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
8.1
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RELAY MOUNTING UNPACKING STORAGE USE OF THIS SECTION INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE GENERAL ON MiCOM P125, P126 & P127
MiCOM P125, P126 & P127
4 5 5 5 5 6 7
7
9.
9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.3 9.4
RELAY DESCRIPTION
Relay Overview Front Panel Description Relay Identification Battery compartment (no longer used) and Communication Port The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay) Withdrawing Module from Case Main Functions
8
8 9 10 11 11 12 13
10. 11.
11.1 11.2
OVERWIEW DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ENERGISING THE RELAY

System Connections Auxiliary Power Supply Connections
14 15
15 15
12.
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3
MENU STRUCTURE
P125 Menu Structure P126 & P127 Menu Structure Access to the Menu Password Protection Password Entry HMI language
16
16 16 16 16 17 17
13. 14.
14.1 14.2
DEFAULT SETTINGS AND SETTING RANGE DESCRIPTION REAR TERMINAL BLOCK FOR P125, P126 & P127
Description Rear Terminal Block for P125 Description Rear Terminal Block for P126 & P127
18 38
38 39
15.
15.1
LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC
Configuration
40
40
16. 17.
17.1 17.2 17.3
REMOTE CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR P125, P126 & P127

P125 Wiring Diagram P126 Wiring Diagram P127 Wiring Diagram
40 43
43 44 45
18.
18.1 18.2
CASE DIMENSIONS
P126 & P127 Case Dimension P125 Case Dimension
46
46 46
19.
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
47
1.
1.1
Receipt of Relays Protection relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation at a site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D Protection & Control should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unpacked and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conductive antistatic bag. There are no hardware setting adjustments possible within the module and it is advised that it is not necessary to withdraw the module from its case. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are only a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board (PCB) should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the person handling the PCB. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/D11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
2.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

The normal movements of a person can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. These electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed within the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor components. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. 2. 3. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Both persons must achieve equipotential for instance by wearing antistatic belts. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. Store or transport the module only in a conductive bag.
4. 5.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of any equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M . If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static electricity. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should only be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
3.
RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel or rack assembly. If a MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack. For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in in the P12y/EN IN/xxx document showing the panel dimensions and hole centres. When you install the relay remove the film applied on the LCD window for a better visualisation, this is a protection against scratches.
4.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged or the settings altered. Only skilled personnel must handle the relays. The installation site should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration; moreover it should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays removed from their cases should not be left in dusty or damp situations. This applies especially to such installation sites that are undergoing construction work.
5.
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in their original cartons in a place free from dust and moisture. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions. It may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton. Dust, which collects on a carton, may find its way into the relay on subsequent unpacking. In damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the dehumidifier bags will lose its efficiency. Storage temperature: 25C to +70C.
6.
USE OF THIS SECTION

This section includes information on installing the relay and first operation. A correct use of this information helps the user to a successful first operation of this MiCOM directional overcurrent and directional earth fault relay.
7.
INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE

MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises of a range of components, systems and services from AREVA T&D. Flexibility is central to the MiCOM concept. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate this solution with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: P range protection relays C range control products M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring S range versatile PC support and substation control packages
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of a power system, using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the power system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical publications, which can be obtained from: AREVA or your local sales office; alternatively visit our web site.
8.
GENERAL ON MiCOM P125, P126 & P127

The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have been designed for controlling, protecting and monitoring industrial installations, public distribution networks and substations. They can also be used as part of a protection scheme for transformers and generator transformers. The P125, P126 & P127 relays can also provide back-up protection for HV and EHV transmission systems.
8.1
MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays are based on the successful K, MODN and MX3 range. Each relay includes a large number of protection and control functions for most demanding applications. On the front panel the relays are equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16 backlit alphanumeric characters, a tactile 7-button keypad (to gain access to all parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs to display the status of the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127. A dedicated AREVA setting software package is available that allows the user to read, initialise and change the relay parameter settings via the RS485 rear communications port and/or the RS232 front port. The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays provide comprehensive directional overcurrent protection for utilities networks, industrial plants and networks in addition to other applications where directional or non-directional overcurrent protection is required. The directional earth fault element is sensitive enough to be used in impedance-earthed systems (such as resistance or Peterson Coil) or insulated systems. The models available are: MiCOM P125: MiCOM P126: MiCOM P127: Directional earth fault relay with earth fault wattmetric element. Three phase overcurrent and directional earth fault relay with earth fault wattmetric element and autoreclose function. Directional overcurrent and directional earth fault relay with earth fault wattmetric element, overvoltage/undervoltage protection and autoreclose function.
9.
9.1
RELAY DESCRIPTION
Relay Overview The next figures show the P125 and P127 (P126) relays.
P125
P127 (P126)
As can be seen in above figures the case width dimensions differ between the P125 and the P127 (P126). The table shows the case size for the relays. Version Type P125 Type P126 & P127 Height 4U (177mm) 4U (177mm) Depth 226mm 226mm 20 TE 30 TE Width
The hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay are shown closed. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover; this allows read only access to the relays settings and data but does not affect the relays IP rating. When full access to the relay keypad is required to edit the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom hinged covers are open.
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 9.2 Front Panel Description
The front panel components are shown below. The front panel functionality is identical for the P125, P126 & P127 relays. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): A 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). When you install the relay remove the film applied on the LCD window for a better visualisation, this is a protection against scratches. Keypad: A keypad with 7 keys comprising a clear key a read key, 4 arrow keys and an enter key.
Clear key Enter key Read key
Arrow keys Arrow key
P0065ENa
8 LEDs: 4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel. The LED labels are in English by default. Trip LED: Red LED L1, labelled Trip, indicates when a trip command has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker, protection trip). This LED copies the trip command issued to the trip output relay contact (RL1). In its normal state the LED is not lit. It is illuminated as soon as a trip order is issued. It is reset when the associated alarm is acknowledged. Alarm LED: Orange LED L2, labelled Alarm, indicates that an alarm has been registered by MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays. The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous) or tripping orders (time delayed). The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read key), after which the LED will change to constant illumination. It will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared (clear key) and the trip cause is reset.
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8
P0250ENa
P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 10/48 Warning LED: Orange LED L3, labelled Warning, is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays. When a "non critical" internal alarm (i.e. a communication fault) is detected, the LED flashes continuously. When the fault is classed as "critical", the LED is illuminated continuously. The LED only extinguishes after the cause that provoked this fault has been removed (i.e. repair of the module, disappearance of the fault). Auxiliary Supply LED: Green LED L4, labelled Healthy (Vaux). Supply, indicates that MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are in correct working order and the auxiliary power supply is present. Programmable LEDs: L5 to L8 with label printed by user. These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed). The user selects the information he wishes to see associates with each LED from the menu element (Logic OR). Each LED illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinguishing of each LED is linked to the acknowledgement of the associated alarms. 9.2.1 Relay Identification
Under the top hinged cover there is an adhesive paper label that contains the relay model number, serial number, sensitive earth current range, rating information and the Cortec code for ordering etc. Each item on the label is described below: P127CAF11: CORTEC code This code allows the user to identify the characteristics of the relay. No.: 0000000: Serial number Cde: 00000/000: Reference to the purchasing order. These numbers are needed when contacting AREVA in case of problems. Un = 57 130V: Voltage input range. Modbus: Communication protocol of the RS485 communication port situated on the rear of the relay. 0.002 Ien: Sensitivity of the earth fault current (available are three sensitivity levels). Ua = 48-150V DC: Auxiliary power supply range. In this example, the power supply must be a DC voltage.
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 9.2.2 Battery compartment (no longer used) and Communication Port
Under the bottom hinged cover of the relay there was a battery compartment to hold the AA size battery, which is no longer used. Starting from Hardware 5, disturbance, fault and event records are stored on a flash memory card that doesnt need to be backed up by a battery. Therefore battery in the front compartment of the relay are no longer needed. Next to the (empty) battery compartment there is a 9-pin female D-type socket, which can be used to communicate with a local PC (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data link cable (SK1 port).
ATTENTION ! !
STARTING FROM HARDWARE 5, THERE IS NO NEED OF A BATTERY. EVENT AND DISTURBANCE FILES ARE STORED IN A FLASH MEMORY CARD. THEN, THE SPACE TO FIT THE BATTERY SHOULD BE LEFT EMPTY.
9.2.3
The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay) The USB/RS232 cable is able to perform the following functions: 1. It is able to power the relay from its front port. This allows the user to view or modify data on the relay even when the auxiliary power supply of the relay has failed or when the relay is not connected to any power supply. The USB port of the PC supplies the power necessary to energize the relay. This lasts as long as the battery of the PC can last. It provides an USB / RS 232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC. This allows the user to be able to change the setting of the relay using a PC with its USB port.
2.
It eases the use of the relay allowing the retrieval of records and disturbance files for example when the auxiliary supply has failed or is not available. The associated driver (supplied with the relay) needs to be installed in the PC.
P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 12/48 9.3 Withdrawing Module from Case
The withdrawal of the MiCOM module active part (chassis) from its case is achieved by inserting a 3mm screwdriver into a hole situated under the upper hinged cover above the LCD, and turning the lock pin 90 to the left. Then the screwdriver is inserted into a second hole situated under the lower hinged cover, and the lower lock pin is turned 90 to the right. By this turning action the module is pushed slightly forward in its case and can be easily extracted by pulling on both sides of the front panel.
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 9.4 Main Functions The following table shows the functions available with the models. ANSI CODES 50/51P/N 50/51 50/51N 67P 67N 51V 37 46 27/59 59N 32 32N 81U/O 49 86 79 50BF 46BC FEATURES 1 phase or earth overcurrent 3 phase overcurrent Earth overcurrent 3 phase directional overcurrent Earth fault directional overcurrent Voltage controlled overcurrent 3 phase undercurrent Negative phase sequence overcurrent Phase under/over voltage (AND 1 OR mode) Residual over voltage Directional power Wattmetric Earth Fault Under/over frequency Thermal overload Output relay latching Autoreclose Circuit breaker failure detection Broken conductor detection I2/I1 Blocking Logic Test of output relays (Maintenance) CB control Local/remote Circuit Breaker Maintenance and Trip Circuit Supervision Cold load pick up Selective relay scheme logic Inruch blocking Switch on to fault (SOFT) Phase rotation VT supervision (VTS) o o o o o o o P125 o
P126
P127
o o
o o o
o o
o o
o o o
o o
o o
o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o
10.
OVERWIEW DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The directional overcurrent and directional earth fault protection functions provide the setting current thresholds, torque angle and tripping zone. The tripping zone for the directional protection function is shown in the drawing.
ngle
Torq
ue A
Ue
Ie Forward tripping zone
Reverse tripping zone
Tripping zone is settable from : 10 to 170 step 1 with reference to RCA (torque angle). RCA is settable from 0 to 359 in steps of 1.
P0066ENa
The directional earth fault protection also provides a non-sensitive area to avoid instability due to small dissymetries and unbalances that can generally be present in the systems. This condition is represented by the characteristic reproduced below, where the hatched area is the tripping zone. The tripping zone is limited by the equation: Ie+5 x Ue<90 in case of Ien=5A; Ie+Ue<18 in case of Ien=1A.
Ie [mA]
30
Ie [mA]
100 90 80
Ue> Ue>> Ue>> > Tripping Zone Ie + 5 x Ue= 90
25 20 15 10
Ue> Ue>> Ue>>> Tripping Zone Ie + Ue= 18
60 40 20 0
Ie> Ie>> Ie>> >

5 10 15 20 25 30
Ie> Ie>> Ie>>>

5 10 15 20 25 30
Ue [V]
P0067ENa
Ue [V]
P0068ENa
11.
ENERGISING THE RELAY

To energise the relay correctly, follow the following instructions carefully.
11.1
System Connections 1. 2. Check the wiring scheme of your installation. Check that the contacts of output relay RL1 are included in your trip circuit.
11.2
Auxiliary Power Supply Connections Connect a DC or AC (according to nominal supply rating Ua) voltage power supply. POSITIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 33 NEGATIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 34 DO NOT FORGET TO CONNECT THE EARTH REFERENCE TO TERMINAL 29! Turn on the auxiliary power supply and set to approximately rated voltage as shown on the front panel of the relay. The display should show: IA 1.00 A Displays the A phase current (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO submenu).
LEDs should be in the following configuration: Green LED L3 "Healthy" (Vaux) is iluminated All the other LEDs should be off
12.
MENU STRUCTURE
A simple menu structure allows setting and reading of parameters and functionality. The menu structure is shown below.
12.1
P125 Menu Structure

Default / Alarm Display OP.Parameters Submenu Protection G1 Submenu Configuration Submenu Protection G2 Submenu Measurements Submenu Automat. CTRL Submenu
P0069ENb
Communication
Submenu
NOTE: 12.2
To reach the default display from any menu item press
P126 & P127 Menu Structure

Default / Alarm Display OP.Parameters Submenu Protection G1 Submenu Configuration Submenu Protection G2 Submenu Measurements Submenu Automat. CTRL Submenu
Communication
Submenu Records Submenu

P0070ENa
NOTE: 12.3 Access to the Menu
To reach the default display from any menu item press
Before the initial operation of the MiCOM P125, P126 or P127 relay, some of the parameter settings must be checked or modified. Lift the upper and lower hinged covers and remove the transparent cover over the front panel. When the keypad is exposed, it provides full access to the menu options of the relay. The relevant information is displayed on the LCD. 12.3.1 Password Protection Password protection is applicable to most of the relay parameter settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of logic inputs and logic outputs. The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is set to AAAA. The user can define any combination of four characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of stored parameters is blocked. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent and by specifying the serial number of the relay, a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned may be obtained. NOTE: The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad).
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 12.3.2 Password Entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be entered. Password AAAA The password entry is made character by character using to go up or down in the alphabet. After each character, press to enter the following character. At the end press to validate the password. If the password is correct, the following message is displayed on the LCD: PASSWORD OK
As soon as the password has been entered, no setting change will be accepted via the remote or local communication port (RS485 or RS232). Alternatively, the password can be entered by using the Password window in the OP.PARAMETERS menu. This password entry procedure is the same as above. NOTE: 12.3.3 HMI language The operator can select the language used by the relay by entering the language menu and selecting among the many language available. Language ITALIANO To switch to a different language, press , then choose the desired language using the arrows. In case of loss of password a back up password can be provided contacting AREVA sale office or factory.
13.
DEFAULT SETTINGS AND SETTING RANGE

When the relay is delivered from the factory, the parameter are set to default values and stored in the non-volatile memory. Following tables show default setting values for functions and protection elements of the P125, P126 & P127 directional relays.
DEFAULT VALUE P125 P126 P127 Mode Min Setting Range Max Step
OP.PARAMETERS Password Description: AAAA P125-0-1- 2 AAAA P126-0-1-2 AAAA P127-0-1-2 R/W R Alphabetic uppercase characters 0 is for Ien from 0.1 to 40 Ien 1 is for Ien from 0.01 to 8 Ien 2 is for Ien from 0.002 to 1 Ien Alphanumeric uppercase characters
Reference Software Version Frequency Input Status Relay Status Date Time CONFIGURATION General Options VT Connection Default Display Default Display Transfo. Ratio Line CT primary Line CT sec E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT sec= 57130V Input voltage Line VT primary Line VT sec E/Gnd VT primary E/Gnd VT sec 220480V Input voltage Line VT primary E/Gnd VT primary Led Led 5 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>>
AREV X.X 50Hz XXXX XXXXXX N.A N.A
AREV X.X 50Hz XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX
AREV X.X 50Hz XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX/XX/XX XX:XX:XX
R/W R R/W R R R/W R/W
50Hz
60Hz
50/60Hz
0131 / 0112 / 0099 0023: 0059: 0059
N.A. IN
N.A.
2Vpp+Vr
R/W R/W
3Vpn or 2Vpp+Vr or 2Vpn+Vr IN IA or IB or IC or IN
IA
IA
R/W
N.A N.A 1A 1A
1A 1A 1A 1A
1A 1A 1A 1A
R/W R/W R/W R/W
1A 1A 1A 1A
9999A 5A 9999A 5A
1A 1A/5A 1A 1A/5A
Cortec code: P12--AX---X N.A N.A 0.10 kV 100 N.A N.A 0.10 kV 100 0.10 kV 100V 0.10 kV 100 R/W R/W R/W R/W 0.10kV 57V 0.10kV 57V 1000.00kV 130V 1000.00kV 130V 0.01kV 0.1V 0.01kV 0.1V
Cortec code: P12--BX---X N.A 220V N.A 220V 220V 220V R/W R/W 220V 220V 480V 480V 1V 1V
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
No No No No No No
No No No No No No
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
No No No No No No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Thermal Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input1 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 Input6 Input7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No N.A N.A No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A P126 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No P127 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 tAux2 t SOTF Led 6 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Therm Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input1 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A P126 No No P127 No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 Input6 Input7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 tAux2 t SOTF Led 7 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Therm Trip I< tI tU> U>> N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A P126 No No No No No No No No No No No P127 No No No No No No No No No No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input1 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 Input6 Input7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 tAux2 t SOTF Led 8 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No N.A N.A No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A P126 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No P127 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Therm Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input1 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 Input6 Input7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 tAux2 t SOTF Inputs Configuration Inputs Voltage Input Start /Stop tAUX1 by input Start /Stop tAUX2 by input Start /Stop tAUX3 by input Start /Stop tAUX4 by input RL1 Output relay Fail safe relay Group select Change Group By input No 1 LEVEL No 1 LEVEL No 1 LEVEL R/W R/W DC LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL DC LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL DC LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No N.A N.A No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A P126 No No No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No P127 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Active Low or active High DC LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL AC EDGE EDGE EDGE DC/AC LEVEL/EDGE LEVEL/EDGE LEVEL/EDGE
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
R/W
LEVEL 1 No 1 LEVEL
EDGE 2 Yes 2 EDGE
LEVEL/EDGE 1 No/Yes 1 LEVEL/EDGE

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Alarms Inst. Self-reset Reset Led on Fault. Battery Alarm. Rel. Maintenance . Rel. Maintenance . Relays Cmd. Date Date Format COMMUNICATION Communication ? Baud Rate Parity Stop Bit Relay Address PROTECTION G1-G2 [67] Phase OC I> ? I> Delay Type N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No 25 In DMT R/W R/W R/W No or DIR or Yes 0.1 In 25 In No 19200 None 1 1 No 19200 None 1 1 No 19200 None 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Yes/No Private Private Private Private IEC No 65W4321 0000000 No 876W54321 000000000 No 876W54321 000000000 R/W R/W Yes 0 No 1 1 No No No P126 1 No No No P127 1 No No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 Yes Yes Yes

Setting Range Max 2 No No No Step 1 Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No 1
Private/IEC
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 9600, 19200, 38400 None-Even-Odd 1 or 2 1 255 1
0.01 In
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0.100 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0s No or Yes 0 10 359 170 1 1 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150s 1.5 10.000 0.01s 0.025 0.005
tI> I> TMS K I> Reset Delay Type I> RTMS I> tReset Interlock I> by I>>I>>>? I> Torque angle I> Trip zone I>> ? I>> Delay Type
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
0s 1 0.100 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 0 85 No 40 In DMT
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
No or Yes or DIR 0.5 In 40 In 0.01 In
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0.100 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0s 0 10 3.2 100 s 359 170 0.025 0.01 s 1 1 150s 1.5 10.000 0.01s 0.025 0.005
tI>> I>> TMS K
N.A N.A N.A
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
0s 1 0.100 DMT 0.025 0.04 s 0 85
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
I>> Reset Delay Type N.A I>> RTMS I>> tReset I>> Torque angle I>> Trip zone N.A N.A N.A N.A

DEFAULT VALUE P125 I>>> ? I>>> tI>>> I>>> Torque angle I>>> Trip zone [50/51] Phase OC I> ? I> Delay Type N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No 25 In DMT P126 N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A P127 No 40 In 0s 0 85 N.A N.A N.A N.A R/W R/W R/W No/Yes 0.1 In Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W

Setting Range Max Step
No or Yes or DIR or Peak 0.5 In 0s 0 10 40 In 150s 359 170 0.01 In 0.01s 1 1
25 In
0.01 In
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0.100 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0.04 s No/Yes No or Yes or DIR 0.5 In 40 In 0.01 In 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150s 1.5 10.000 0.01s 0.025 0.005
tI> I> TMS K I> Reset Delay Type I> RTMS I> tReset Interlock I> by I>>I>>> I>> ? I>> Delay Type
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
0 1 0.100 DMT 0.025 0s No No 40 In DMT
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0.100 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0.04 s 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150s 1.5 10.000 0.01s 0.025 0.005
tI>> I>> TMS K
N.A N.A N.A
0 1 0.100 DMT 0.025 0s No 40 In 0s
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
I>> Reset Delay Type N.A I>> RTMS I>> tReset I>>> ? I>>> tI>>> [67N] E/Gnd Sensitivity Ranges High sensitivity: Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Med. sensitivity Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
No or Yes or Peak 0.5 In 0s 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01 s
Cortec code P12-C-X---X
1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien
1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien
1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien
R/W R/W R/W
0.002 Ien 0.002 Ien 0.002 Ien
1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien
0.001 Ien 0.001 Ien 0.001 Ien
Cortec code P12-B-X---X
8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien
8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien
8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien
R/W R/W R/W
0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien
8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien
0.005 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.005 Ien

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Low sensitivity Current input from 0.1to 40 Ien Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie> ? Delay Type P126 P127 Mode Min

Cortec code P12-A-X---X
25 Ien 40 Ien 40 Ien No DMT
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0.1 Ien 0.5 Ien 0.5 Ien
25 Ien 40 Ien 40 Ien
0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien
No or Yes or DIR DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0.0 s No/Yes 0 10 359 170 1 1 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150s 1.5 10 0.01s 0.025 0.001
tIe> Ie> TMS K Ie> Reset Delay Type Ie> RTMS Ie> tReset Interlock Ie> by Ie>>Ie>>> Ie> Torque angle Ie> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage Ue> 220480V Input voltage Ue> Ie>> ? Delay Type
0s 1 0 DMT 0.025 0 .04s No 0 85
0s 1 0 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 0 85
0s 1 0 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 0 85
Cortec code: P12-XAX---X 260V 260V 260V R/W 1V 260 V 0.1 V
Cortec code: P12-XBX---X 960V No DMT 960V No DMT 960V No DMT R/W R/W R/W 4V 960 V 0.5 V
No or Yes or DIR DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0.0 s 0 10 0.0 s 3.2 100 s 359 170 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 1 1 0.01 s 150s 1.5 10 0.01s 0.025 0.001
tIe>> Ie>> TMS K Ie>> Rst Delay Type Ie>> RTMS Ie>> tReset Ie>> Torque angle Ie>> Trip zone Ie>> tReset 57130V Input voltage Ue>> 220480V Input voltage Ue>> Ie>>> ? tIe>>> Ie>>> Torque angle
0s 1 0 DMT 0.025 0 .04s 0 85 0.04 s
0s 1 0 DMT 0.025 0.04 s 0 0 0.04 s
0s 1 0 DMT 0.025 0.04 s 0 85 0.04 s
Cortec code: P12-XBX---X 960V No 0s 0 960V No 0s 0 960V No 0s 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W 4V 960 V 0.5 V
No or Yes or DIR or Peak 0s 0 150s 359 0.01s 1

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Ie>>> Trip zone Ie>>> tReset 57130V Input voltage Ue>>> 220480V Input voltage Ue>>> [32N] Earth Wattmetric [32N] Mode: Sensitivity Ranges High sensitivity: Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien 57130V Input voltage Pe> Pe>> 220480V Input voltage Pe> Pe>> Med. sensitivity 57130V Input voltage Pe> Pe>> 220480V Input voltage Pe> Pe>> Low sensitivity 57130V Input voltage Pe> Pe>> 220480V Input voltage Pe> Pe>> Pe> ? Delay Type 3200 x K W(*) 3200 x K W(*) 3200 x K W(*) R/W 3200 x K W(*) 3200 x K W(*) 3200 x K W(*) R/W No DMT No DMT No DMT R/W R/W 40 x K W(*) 40 x K W(*) No/Yes Cortec code: P12-CAX---X 20 x K W(*) 20 x K W(*) 20 x K W(*) 20 x K W(*) 20 x K W(*) 20 x K W(*) R/W R/W 0.2 x K W(*) 0.2 x K W(*) Pe Pe Pe R/W Pe or IeCos 85 0 .04 s P126 85 0.04 s P127 85 0.04 s Mode Min R/W R/W 10 0.0 s

Setting Range Max 170 100 s Step 1 0.01 s
Cortec code: P12-XBX---X 960V 960V 960V R/W 4V 960 V 0.5 V
20 x K W(*) 20 x K W(*)
0.02 x K W(*) 0.02 x K W(*)
Cortec code: P12-CBX---X 80 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) R/W R/W 1 x K W(*) 1 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) 80 x K W(*) 0.1 x K W(*) 0.1 x K W(*)
Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien Cortec code: P12-BAX---X 160 x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) R/W R/W 1. x K W(*) 1. x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) 160 x K W(*) 0.1 x K W(*) 0.1 x K W(*)
Cortec code: P12-BBX---X 640 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) R/W R/W 4 x K W(*) 4 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) 640 x K W(*) 0.5 x K W(*) 0.5 x K W(*)
Current input from 0.1 to 40 Ien Cortec code: P12-AAX---X 800 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) R/W R/W 10 x K W(*) 10 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) 800 x K W(*) 1 x K W(*) 1 x K W(*)
3200 x K W(*) 5 x K W(*) 3200 x K W(*) 5 x K W(*)
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DMT or IDMT 0.025 1.5 0.025 150s 1.5 0.01s 0.025
tPe> Pe> TMS Pe> Reset Delay Type Pe> RTMS
0s 1 DMT 1
0s 1 DMT 1
0s 1 DMT 1
R/W R/W R/W R/W

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Pe> tReset Pe>> ? tPe>> Pe>> tReset High sensitivity IeCos set IeCos> IeCos>> Med. sensitivity Iecos set IeCos> IeCos>> 0s No 1s 0s P126 0s No 1s 0s P127 0s No 1s 0s Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W 0.0 s No/Yes 0s 0.0 s 150s 100 s

Setting Range Max 100 s Step 0.01 s
0.01s 0.01 s
Cortec code P12-C-X---X 1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien R/W R/W 0.002 Ien 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien 0.001 Ien
Cortec code P12-B-X---X 8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien R/W R/W 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.005 Ien
Low sensitivity Iecos Cortec code P12-A-X---X set IeCos> IeCos>> IeCos> ? Delay Type 25 Ien 40 Ien No DMT 25 Ien 40 Ien No DMT 25 Ien 40 Ien No DMT R/W R/W R/W R/W 0.1 Ien 0.5 Ien Yes or No 25 Ien 40 Ien Yes or No 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien Yes/No
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0.0 s Yes or No 0s 0.0 s 0 1.5 100 s Yes or No 150s 100 s 359 0.025 0.01 s Yes/No 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 1.5 0.01s 0.025
tIeCos> IeCos> TMS IeCos> Reset Delay Type IeCos> RTMS IeCos> tReset IeCos>> ? tIeCos>> IeCos>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle [46] Neg Seq. OC I2> ? I2> Delay Type
0s 1 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 1s 0.04 s 0 N.A N.A N.A N.A
0s 1 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 1s 0.04 s 0
0s 1 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 1s 0.04 s 0
No 25 In DMT
No 25 In
R/W R/W R/W
No/Yes 0.1 In 25 In 0.01 In
DMT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DMT or IDMT 0.025 0.0 s No/Yes 0.5 In 0s No/Yes 0.5 In 0s 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01s 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01s 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150s 1.5 0.01s 0.025
tI2> I2> TMS I2> Reset Delay Type I2> RTMS I2> tReset I2>> ? I2>> tI2>> I2>>> ? I2>>> tI2>>>
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A
0s 1 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 40 In 0s No 40 In 0s
0s 1 DMT 0.025 0.04 s No 40 In 0s No 40 In 0s
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W

DEFAULT VALUE P125 [49] Therm OL Therm OL ? I> Te K Trip Alarm ? Alarm [37] Under Current I< ? I< tI< [59] Phase Over Voltage U> ? 57130V Input voltage. U> 220480V Input voltage. U> tU> U>> ? 57130V Input voltage. U>> 220480V Input voltage. U>> tU>> [27] Phase Under Voltage U< ? 57130V Input voltage. U< 220480V Input voltage. U< tU< U<< ? 57130V Input voltage. U<< 220480V Input voltage. U<< tU<< N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No 0.1 In 0s N.A N.A No R/W No or AND or OR No 0.1 In 0s R/W R/W R/W No/Yes 0.1 In 0s No 0.1 1 1.05 100% No 90% No 0.1 1 1.05 100% No 90% R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No/Yes 0.1 In 1 mn 1 50% No/Yes 50% P126 P127 Mode Min

3.2 In 200 mn 1,5 200%
0.01 1mn 0.01 1%
200%
1%
1 In 150 s
0.01 In 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A N.A 260V R/W 2V 260 V 0.1 V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 720V 0s No R/W R/W R/W 10 V 0s 720 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
No or AND or OR
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A N.A 260V R/W 2V 260V 0.1 V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No R/W No or AND or OR 960V 0s R/W R/W 10 V 0s 960V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A N.A 5V R/W 2V 130 V 0.1V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 20 V 0s No R/W R/W R/W 10 V 0s 480 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
No or AND or OR
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A N.A 5V R/W 2V 130 V 0.1V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A N.A N.A N.A 20V 0.5 s R/W R/W 10 V 0s 480 V 600 s 0.5V 0.01 s

DEFAULT VALUE P125 [59N] Residual Over Voltage Ue>>>> ? 57130V Input voltage. Ue>>>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>>>> tUe>>>> [79] Autoreclose Autoreclose ? Ext. CB Fail? Ext. CB Fail Time Aux1 ((I>) Aux2 (Ie>) Ext. Block ? Dead Time td1 td2 td3 td4 Reclaim Time tR Inhib Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tPIe/Iecos> tIPe/Iecos>> tAux1 tAux2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Trip Commands Trip tI> ? Trip tI>> ? Trip tI>>> ? Trip tIe> ? N.A N.A N.A No No No No No No No No No R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No R/W P126 P127 Mode Min

Cortec code: P12--AX---X 260 V 260 V 260 V R/W 1V 260V 0.1V
Cortec code: P12--BX---X 960 V 0s N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A 0.02 s 0 0 4321 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0.02 s 0 0 4321 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W 0.02 s 0 0 600 s 4 4 0.01 s 1 1 0.02 s 0.02 s R/W 0.02 s 600 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s R/W R/W R/W R/W 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 300 s 300 s 600 s 600 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s No No 0.01s No No No No No 0.01s No No No R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Yes/No Yes/No 0.01s Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 600s 0.01 s 960 V 0s 960 V 0s R/W R/W 5V 0s 960 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
Yes or No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Trip tIe>> ? Trip tIe>>> ? Trip tPe/IeCos> ? Trip tPe/IeCos>> Trip tI2> ? Trip tI2>> ? Trip tI2>>> ? Thermal Trip ? Trip tI< ? Trip tU> ? Trip tU>> ? Trip tU< ? Trip tU<< ? Trip tUe>>>> ? Trip Brkn. Cond ? Trip tAux1 ? Trip tAux2 ? Trip tAux3 ? Trip tAux4 ? Trip SOTF Ctrl Trip Equation A ? Equation B ? Equation C ? Equation D ? Latch Relays Relay Latch: Blocking Logic 1 / 2 Block tI> ? 654321 000000 1 N.A. N.A. 87654321 00000000 1 No 2 No 87654321 00000000 1 No 2 No R/W No R/W 0 1 No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A No N.A No No No No N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A P126 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No P127 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Yes
Yes / No
Block tI>> ? Block tI>>> ? Block tIe> ? Block tIe>> ? Block tIe>>> ? Block tPe/IeCos> ? Block tPe/IeCos>> ? Block tI2> ? Block tI2>> ? Block tI2>>> ? Block tThermal ? Block tI< ? Block tU> ?
N.A. N.A. No No No No No N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A.
No No No No No No No No No No No No N.A.
No No No No No No No No No No No No No
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Block tU>> ? Block tU< ? Block tU<< Block tUe>>>> ? Block Brkn. Cond ? Block tAux1 ? Block tAux2 ? Block tAux3 ? Block tAux4 ? Logic Select 1 / 2 Sel tI>> ? Sel tI>>> ? Sel tIe>> ? Sel tIe>>> ? t Sel Output Relays Trip I> tI> I_R> I>> tI>> I_R>> I>>> tI>>> I_R>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie_R> Ie>> tIe>> Ie_R>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Ie_R>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> N.A. N.A. N.A. No N.A. No No No No 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 65432 00000 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 N.A. N.A. N.A. No No No No No No 1 No No No No 0s N.A. N.A. N.A. No No No No No No 2 No No No No 0s P127 No No No No No No No No No 1 No No No No 0s No No No No No No No No No 2 No No No No 0s R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No 0s No Yes Yes Yes 150 s Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No No No No No No No No No

Setting Range Max Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Step Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
Yes Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 0.01 s
Yes/No
8765432 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000
8765432 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DEFAULT VALUE P125 I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Therm Alarm Therm Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Alarm 52 Fail CB Fail CB Close tAux1 tAux2 tAux3 tAux4 79 Run 79 Trip SOTF Control Trip Control Close Active Group t EQU A t EQU B t EQU C t EQU D Inputs Input 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 00000 00000 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 00000 00000 00000 00000 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 00000 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 4 None 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 7 None P126 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 P127 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 7 None R/W Mode Min R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Setting Range Max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local

DEFAULT VALUE P125 Input 2 None P126 None P127 None Mode Min R/W

None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local None, Unlatch, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, 52 a, 52 b, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block_79, Trip Circ, Start t BF, Maint. M, Man. Close, Local 0 0 0 0 200s 200s 200s 200s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
Input 3
None
None
None
R/W
Input 4
None
None
None
R/W
Input 5
N.A
None
None
R/W
Input 6
N.A
None
None
R/W
Input 7
N.A
None
None
R/W
tAux1 time tAux2 time tAux3 time tAux4 time Broken Conductor Brkn.Cond ? Brkn.Cond Brkn.Cond Time Cold Load Pick Up Cold Load PU ? Cold Load PU tI> ? Cold Load PU tI>> ? Cold Load PU tI>>> ? Cold Load PU tIe> ? Cold Load PU tIe>> ?
0 0 0 0 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
No 20% 0s
No 20% 0s
R/W R/W R/W
Yes/No 20% 0s 100% 14400 s 1% 1s
No No No No
No No No No
R/W R/W R/W R/W
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
N.A. N.A.
No No No No No No No 100% 0.1 s
No No No No No No No 100% 0.1 s
Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 100% 0.1 s 500% 3600 s 1% 0.1 s
Cold Load PU tIe>>>? N.A. Cold Load PU tI2> ? Cold Load PU tI2>> ? N.A. N.A.
Cold Load PU tI2>>>? N.A. Cold Load PU tTherm>? Level tCL N.A. N.A. N.A.

DEFAULT VALUE P125 51V (57-130V) (U<ORV2>)&I>>? V2> N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. No 480V No 480V No No R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W No 20V No 20V No No No 130V No 130V R/W R/W R/W R/W No 3V No 3V P127 Mode Min

Yes 200V Yes 200V
Yes/No 0.1V Yes/No 0.1V
(U<<ORV2>>)&I>>>? N.A. V2>> 51V (220-480V) (U<ORV2>)&I>>? V2> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
Yes 720V Yes 720V Yes Yes
Yes/No 0.5V Yes/No 0.5V Yes/No Yes/No
(U<<ORV2>>)&I>>>? N.A. V2>> VTS Blocks 51V? VTS Alarm? CB Fail CB Fail ? CB Fail Time tBF I< BF Block I>? Block Ie>? CB Supervision TC Supervision? t trip circuit tSUP CB Open Svision CB Open Time CB Close Svision CB Close Time CB Open Alarm? CB Open NB Amps(n) Amps(n) n tOpen Pulse tClose Pulse SOTF Sotf? tSotf I>> I>>> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 0.1 s 0.1 s N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
No 0.10 s 0.1 In No No
No 0.10.s 0.1 In No No
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Yes/No 0s 0.02 In Yes Yes 10 s 1 In No No 0.01 s 0.01 In Yes/No Yes/no
No 0.1 s No 0.05 s No 0.05 s No 0 No 0 1 0.1 s 0.1 s
No 0.1 s No 0.05 s No 0.05 s No 0 No 0 1 0.1 s 0.1 s
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
No 0.1 s Yes/No 0.05 s No 0.05 s No 0 No 0 Exp6 A 1 0.1 s 0.1 s
Yes 10 s
Yes/No 0.1 s
1s Yes 1s Yes 50000 Yes 4000 Exp6 A 2 5s 5s
0.01 s Yes/No 0.01 s Yes/No 1 Yes/No 1 Exp6 A 1 0.01 s 0.01 s
No 500ms No No
No 500ms No No
R/W R/W R/W R/W
No 0 ms No No
Yes 500 ms Yes Yes
Yes/No 10 ms Yes/No Yes/No

DEFAULT VALUE P125 AND LOGIC EQUAT I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Thermal Alarm Thermal Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond 79 Trip tAux1 tAux2 tAux3 tAux4 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 DCBA 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 P127 DCBA 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mode Min

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DEFAULT VALUE P125 AND LOGIC EQUAT T delay EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset EQU. E Toperat EQU. E Treset EQU. F Toperat EQU. F Treset EQU. G Toperat EQU. G Treset EQU. H Toperat EQU. H Treset RECORDS Fault Record Record Number Istantaneous Number Disturb Record Pre-Time Post-Time Disturb rec Trig Time Peak Value Time Window N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 5 mn 5 mn R/W 0.1 0.1 ON INST 0.1 0.1 ON INST R/W R/W R/W 0.1 0.1 3 3 25 25 R/W 1 25 5 5 R/W 1 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s P126 P127 Mode Min

600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s
0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s
0.1 0.1
ON TRIP or ON INST.
5 mn,10 mn,15mn,30mn, 60mn
(*) Please note

The Pe thresholds are displayed in the format: ##.## x Ien W The threshold value is in Watt [W] secondary. If Ien = 1A, the shownrelay setting value will be equal to 20 x 1 = 20W. If Ien = 5A, the shown relay setting value will be equal to 20 x 5 = 100W.
14.
14.1
DESCRIPTION REAR TERMINAL BLOCK FOR P125, P126 & P127

Description Rear Terminal Block for P125
Case earth
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
Module terminal blocks viewed from rear (with integral case earth link)
P0071ENb
Output 5 Common output 5 Output 6 Common output 6
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Common output 1 Output 1 (NC) Output1 (NO) Common output 2 Output 2 (NC) Output 2 (NO) Output 3 Common output 3 Output 4 Common output 4 Input 1 + terminal Input 1 terminal Input 2 + terminal Input 2 terminal
Case earth connection RS485 terminal Vaux + terminal Relay failed (WD) Relay healthy (WD) Residual volt. input
29 31 33 35
30 32 34 36
Terminal RS485 RS485 + Vaux terminal Common "Watchdog "
9 11 13 15 Input 3 + terminal Input 3 terminal Input 4 + terminal Input 4 terminal 17 19 21 23 25 27
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
37 39 41 43 45
38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 Current input (1A) Current input (5A) Residual volt. input
Current input (5A)
47 49 51 53
Current input (1A)
55
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 14.2 Description Rear Terminal Block for P126 & P127
Case earth
57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
P0072ENb
Input 7 + terminal Input 7 terminal
57 59 61 63 65
58 60 62 64 66
Input 6 + terminal Input 6 terminal
Output 5 Common output 5 Output 6 Common output 6 Common output 7 Output 7
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
Common output 1 Output 1 (NC) Output1 (NO) Common output 2 Output 2 (NC) Output 2 (NO) Output 3 Common output 3 Output 4 Common output 4 Input 1 + terminal Input 1 terminal Input 2 + terminal Input 2 terminal
Case earth connection RS485 terminal Vaux + terminal Relay failed (WD) Relay healthy (WD)
29 31 33 35 37
30 32 34 36 38
Terminal RS485 RS485 + Vaux terminal Common "Watchdog"
67 () Voltage input VA () Voltage input VB () Voltage input VC/Vr 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83
68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 Voltage input VA Voltage input VB Voltage input VC/Vr
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
39 41 () Current input IA (5A) 43 () Current input IB (5A) () Current input IC(5A) 45
40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 Current input IA (5A) Current input IB (5A) Current input IC(5A) Current input Ie(5A) Current input IA (1A) Current input IB (1A) Current input IC (1A) Current input Ie (1A)
Common output 8 Output 8 Input 3 + terminal Input 3 terminal Input 4 + terminal Input 4 terminal Input 5 + terminal Input 5 terminal
47 () Current input Ie (5A) 49 () Current input IA (1A) 51 () Current input IB (1A) 53 () Current input IC (1A) 55 () Current input Ie (1A)
NOTE:
() shows primary transformer polarity. Voltage inputs VA, VB and VC only for P127 relay. Vr (residual voltage), internally derived value for P126 and P127 relays
15.
15.1
LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC
Configuration
For a local connection between a PC and the relay a serial cable with metallic shield should be used. The wiring of the RS232 cable must be as shown in the following drawing.
RS232 PC PORT 9 pin male connector MiCOM P125/6/7 end 9 pin female connector
P0073ENa
A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay
16.
REMOTE CONNECTION
The figure shows the recommended way to connect a RS485 cable to the relay to build a local network.
Case earth connection 29 32
30 31
shield RS485 cable
Products plugged in the same panel :

1. Connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth connection of each product (with screw). 2. The pin number 29 of each terminal block must be connected to the case earth connection of each product (with screw). 3. The communication cable shield must be connected to the pin number 29 of each product.
P0248ENa
Communication between distant products
EARTH
1. To connect a cable (green/yellow wire) on the case earth connection of each product (with screw). 2. The communication cable shield must be connected to the pin number 29 of each product. 3. The pin number 29 has to be connected to the case earth connection (with srecw) to only ONE panel (do not leave the cable shield "floating").
Earth
P0249ENa
17.
17.1
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR P125, P126 & P127

P125 Wiring Diagram
P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 44/48 17.2 P126 Wiring Diagram

A C B
35
Phase rotation
A B C
P1 S1
~/+ 33 Auxiliary Voltage ~/_ 34

49
WD
37 36 4 6 2 10 12 8 14 16 18 20 3 1 7 5 9 11 13 15 22 24 26 28 17 19 21
RL1
1A
S1
50 51
50 67N
51 50N 46 79 TCS
32N 51N 49
RL2 RL RL4
P1
1A
S1
52 53
P1
37 59N 50BF
1A
RL5 54 55
Trip direction
BC
P1 S1
RL6 RL7 RL8
1A
56 41
5A
42 43
Programmable input L1 Programmable input L2 Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4 Programmable input L5 Programmable input L6 Programmable input L7
5A
44 45
5A
46
47
5A
A da
48
MiCOM P126
_ +
23 25 27 58 60 57 59
B 29 C 73 30 31 Case earth connection Communication cable shield Terminal RS485
dn
74
RS485 Communication
32
P0075ENb
Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 17.3 P127 Wiring Diagram
A C
Phase rotation
B
/ ~ + 33 Auxiliary Voltage / ~ _ 34 49 S1 WD
35 37 36 4 6 2 10 12 8 14 16 18 20 3 1 7 5 9 11 13 15 22 24 26 28 17 19 46
A B C
P1
RL1
1A
P1 S1 50 51
50 32N
51 50N 37 79
67 51N 46
RL2 RL RL4
1A
52 53 S1
P1
67N 49 50BF 59
1A
RL5 54 55
Trip direction
BC
P1 S1
RL6 RL7 RL8
1A
56 41
TCS
5A
42 43
59N 81
27 32
5A
44 45
5A
47
5A
48 A a 69
MiCOM P127
*
_
21 23 25 27 58 60 57 59
70 B b 71
Case earth connection

29 30 31
Communication cable shield Terminal RS485 RS485 Communication
72 C c 73
74
32
Internal reconstruction voltage Ue
terminating resistor for the last * relay to be connected between 30-32
Two phase-neutral plus Open Delta connection

A B C
Ad a a 69
Two phase to phase plus Open Delta connection

A B C
Ad a a 69
70 B b 71 B b
70 71
n C
72 73 C c
72
dn
74
dn
73
Internal reconstruction voltage UC

74
Internal reconstruction voltage UCA

P0076ENc
18.
18.1
CASE DIMENSIONS
P126 & P127 Case Dimension
P0077ENb
18.2
P125 Case Dimension
P0078ENb
19.
COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

If you need information pertaining to the operation of this MiCOM product that you have purchased, please contact your local AREVA T&D agent or the After Sales Service Department of AREVA T&D. Do not forget to give the serial number and reference of the MiCOM product. The MiCOM product reference and serial numbers are documented under the upper hinged cover on the front of the relay. For more precise information, refer to the section "Relay Identification" in this chapter. PLEASE GIVE THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN MAKING A CALL TO AREVA: CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay Serial number of the MiCOM relay AREVAs order reference AREVAs operator reference
AREVA After Sales Service department address, phone and fax number: Service Aprs Vente/After Sales Service AREVA T&D EAI 95 avenue de la Figuires BP75 F-34975 Lattes Cedex FRANCE Phone: +33 (0)467 205558 or +33 (0)467 205555 Fax: +33 (0)467 205600 Website: www.areva-td.com
BLANK PAGE
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN IN/A63
HANDLING, INSTALLATION AND CASE DIMENSIONS
P12y/EN IN/A63 Page 1/12
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
Receipt of relays Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
3
3 3
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RELAY MOUNTING UNPACKING STORAGE CONNECTIONS

Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals Communication port RS485 Protective Conductor (Earthing)
4 5 6 7 8
8 9 9
7.
7.1 7.2
CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P126 & P127 MiCOM P125
10
11 11
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
Receipt of relays Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags.
1.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag. There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
2.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k 10M. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents.
3.
RELAY MOUNTING
Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack. If external test blocks are connected to the relay, great care should be taken when using the associated test plugs such as MMLB and MiCOM P992 since their use may make hazardous voltages accessible. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. NOTE: NOTE: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe.
For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.
4.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
5.
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton. Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the dehumifier will lose its efficiency. Storage temperature: 25C to +70C.
6.
6.1
CONNECTIONS
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. The individual equipment is delivered with sufficient M4 screws and washers to connect the relay via insulated crimp ring terminals. The maximum number of crimped terminations, per terminal block terminal, is two. If necessary, AREVA T&D can provide 4 types of insulated crimp terminals (see below) according to the cross sectional area of the wire and the type of terminal. Each reference corresponds to a sachet of 100 terminals.
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm) AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business reference: ZB9128 015
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm) AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business reference: ZB9128 016
P0166ENb
M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm) AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901
M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm) AREVA T&D'S Automation & Information Systems Business reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900
P0167ENb
To ensure the isolation of adjacent terminals, and to respect the security and safety instructions, an insulated sleeve must be used. We recommend the following cable cross-sections: Auxiliary sources Communication Port Other circuits Vaux: 1.5 mm see paragraph 6.2 1.0 mm
Because of the limitations of the ring terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is 6mm by using noninsulated ring terminals. When only pre-insulated terminals can be used, the maximum wire cross-section is reduced to 2,63 mm per ring terminal. If a more significant wire crosssection is necessary, two wires can be connected in parallel, each one terminated by a separate ring terminal.
Except for the RS485 port all the terminal blocks used for connections, can withstand a maximum working voltage of 300V. We recommend the auxiliary supply is protected by a NIT or TIA fuse type with a maximum breaking capacity of 16A. For safety reasons, never install fuses in current transformers circuits. Other circuits must be protected by fuses. 6.2 Communication port RS485 Connections to RS485 are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a two core screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a 200nF total cable capacitance. Typical specification: 6.3 Each core: Nominal conductor area: Screen: 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated 0.5 mm per core Overall braid, PVC sheathed
Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 100pF/m
Protective Conductor (Earthing) The equipment must be connected to the protective conductor via the M4 earth terminal of the terminal block numbered 1 to 28, marked with the earth symbol. We recommend a wire of minimal cross section of 2,5 mm. Because of the limitations of the ring terminals, the maximum possible wire cross section is 6mm. If a larger section is necessary, one can use cables connected in parallel, each one terminated with a ring terminal. Alternatively a suitably sized metal strip may be used. NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass conductors and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the case a plated nickel washer or by using tinned terminations.
7.
CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting. Weight P125 approx.: Weight P126/7 approx.: 3.0 Kg 4.0 Kg
The table shows the case size of the different models: Version Type P125 Type P126 & P127 Height 4U (177mm) 4U (177mm) Depth 230mm 230mm 20 TE 30 TE Width
Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 7.1 MiCOM P126 & P127
P0077ENb
7.2
MiCOM P125
P0078ENb
NOTE:
The chassis is normally secured in the case by four screws (Self tapping screws 6x1,4), to ensure good seating. The fixing screws should be fitted in normal service (do not add washers). Do not discard these screws.
BLANK PAGE
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN FT/A63
USER GUIDE
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 1/92
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2
INTRODUCTION PASSWORD
Password Protection Password Entry Changing the Password Change of Setting Invalidation Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages Electrical Network Alarms Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages
3 4
4 4 4 4 4 5 5
3.
3.1
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Analogue Inputs
9
9
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3
MENU
Menu OP PARAMETERS Additional OP PARAMETERS Menu Points for P126 & P127 Menu CONFIGURATION Submenu General Options Submenu Transfo. Ratio Submenus to Configure LEDs 5 to 8 Example: Setting LED 5 for P126: Submenu Logic Inputs Choice: Active High/Low (P125) Submenu Logic Inputs Choice: Active High/Low (P126 & P127) Configuration Output Relays sub-menu Submenu Selecting Active Protection Group (P125, P126 & P127) Menu MEASUREMENTS Voltage Connections Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection): 2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection): Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection): Menu MEASUREMENTS for P125 MEASUREMENTS Menu Points for P126 Additional Measurements Menu Points for P127 Menu COMMUNICATION Menu ModBus COMMUNICATION Menu IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu
11
11 12 13 14 14 15 19 22 22 24 24 26 26 26 26 26 27 28 30 33 33 34 34
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 2/92 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 4.6.10 4.6.11 4.6.12 4.6.13 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.7 4.7.8 4.7.9 4.7.10 4.7.11 4.7.12 4.7.13 4.7.14 4.7.15 4.7.16 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 Menu PROTECTION Submenu [67/50/51] Directional Three Phase Overcurrent (P127) Submenu [67N/50N/51N] Directional Earth Overcurrent Submenu [50/51] Three Phase Overcurrent (P126) Submenu [32] Phase Power Submenu [32N] Earth Wattmetric Protection Submenu [46] Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (P126 & P127) Submenu [49] Thermal Replica Overload (P126 & P127) Submenu [37] Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127) Submenu [59] Over-voltage Protection (P127) Submenu [27] Under-voltage Protection (P127) Submenu [59N] Earth Over-voltage Protection Submenu [79] AUTORECLOSE (P126 & P127) Submenu [81] Frequency (P127) Menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Submenu Trip Commands Submenu Latch Relays Submenu Blocking Logic Inrush Blocking Logic submenu (P127 only) Submenu Logic Select Submenu Outputs Relays Submenu Inputs Setting auxiliary timers at the end of submenu Inputs Submenu Broken Conductor (P126 & P127) Submenu Cold Load PU (P126 & P127) Submenu 51V (Overcurrent controlled by voltage transformer control (P127)) Submenu VT Supervision Submenu Circuit Breaker Fail (P126 & P127) Submenu Circuit Breaker Supervision (P126 & P127) Submenu SOTF (Switch on to fault) (P126 & P127) Submenu Logic Equations (P126 & P127 only) Menu RECORDS Submenu CB Monitoring (P126 & P127) Submenu Disturb Record
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 35 36 40 45 48 48 52 54 55 55 56 56 57 59 60 60 64 65 67 68 69 77 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 82 83 86 86 89
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2
WIRING
Auxiliary Power Supply Current Measurement Inputs Logic Inputs Output Relays Communication RS485 Rear Communication Port RS232 Front Communication Port
90
90 90 90 90 91 91 91
1.
INTRODUCTION
MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 are fully numerical relays designed to perform electrical protection and control functions. The following sections describe content and structure of the menu. The five keys situated in the middle of the MiCOM relay front panel are dedicated to set parameters. With the keys of the menus. The key it is possible to move in the direction indicated to the various levels
validates the settings modification.
The two keys and are dedicated to acknowledging/clearing and displaying/reading of data. For example if successive alarms are to be displayed, press on key . The alarms are presented in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest last). The user can either acknowledge and clear each alarm from the LCD by using or go to the end of the ALARM menu and carry out a general acknowledgement.
2.
2.1
PASSWORD
Password Protection Password protection is applicable to most of the relay settings, especially to the selection of the various alarm thresholds, trip thresholds, communication parameters, allocation of logic inputs and outputs. The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is set to AAAA. The user can define any combination of four characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, modification of the stored parameters is blocked. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent and a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned may be obtained. The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad).
2.2
Password Entry The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for any one of the six/eight menus and the submenus. The user enters each of the 4 characters and then validates the entire password with . After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu. If no key is pressed inside of 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new password request is associated with any subsequent parameter modification.
2.3
Changing the Password To change an active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the Password submenu. Enter the current password and validate. Then press and enter the new password character by character and validate the new password using . The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the new password has been accepted.
2.4
Change of Setting Invalidation The procedure to modify a setting is shown in the next part of this document. If during this action it occurs the need to get back to the old setting it is necessary push the key before validating the setting change. After this action the following message will appear on the LCD for some seconds and the old setting will be maintained. UPGRADE CANCEL
2.5
Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages Alarm messages are displayed directly on the front panel LCD. They have priority over the default current value. As soon as an alarm situation is detected by the relay (threshold crossing for example), the associated message is displayed on the MiCOM relay front panel LCD and the LED Alarm (LED 2) lights up. The alarm and warning messages are classed as follows: Alarm messages generated by the electrical power network. Warning messages caused by hardware or software faults from the relay.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.5.1 Electrical Network Alarms
Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network alarm". The involved threshold is indicated. Regarding the phase thresholds, the phase designation (A, B or C) is also displayed. If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance and presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last). Each alarm message is numbered and the total stored is shown. The user can read all the alarm messages by using . .
The user acknowledges and clears the alarm messages from the LCD by using
The user can acknowledge each alarm message one by one or all by going to the end of the list to acknowledge, and clear, all the alarm messages by using . The control of the ALARM LED (LED 2) is directly assigned to the status of the alarm messages stored in the memory. If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2) flashes. If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2) lights up continuously. If all the messages have been ACKNOWLEDGED, and cleared, if the cause was reset, the ALARM LED (LED 2) is extinguished. 2.5.2 Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages Any software or hardware fault internal to MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software alarm" that is stored in memory as a "Hardware Alarm". If several hardware alarms are detected they are all stored in their order of appearance. The warning messages are presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each warning message is numbered and the total stored is shown. The user can read all warning messages by using , without entering the password.
The acknowledgement, and clearing, of warning messages caused by internal relay hardware or software faults is not possible. A warning message can only be made to disappear if the cause of the fault has been removed. The control of the WARNING LED (LED 3) is directly assigned to the status of the warning messages stored in the memory. If the internal hardware or software fault is major (i.e. the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) lights up continuously. If the internal hardware or software fault is minor (i.e. a communication failure that has no influence on the protection and automation functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) will flash. Warning messages caused by internal hardware or software faults are: < CALIBRATION ERROR >> << CLOCK ERROR >> << DEFAULT SETTINGS (*) >> << SETTING ERROR (**) >> << CT ERROR >> << COMMUNIC. ERROR >> << WATCH DOG >> << RAM ERROR >> (*) DEFAULT SETTINGS: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check its memory contents to determine whether the settings are set to the factory defaults. If the relay detects
that the default settings are loaded an alarm is raised. The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated. Only one parameter in the relay's menu needs to be changed to suppress these messages and to reset the watch dog. This alarm is only an indication to the user that the relay has its default settings applied. (**) SETTING ERROR: Should the CPU fails to get correctly store data during a setting change, a "HARDWARE" ALARM will appear on the LCD display followed by "SETTING ERROR" message (when pushing on the button). In addition, the ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated To reset this alarm it is necessary to power ON and OFF the relay. Following this, the last unsuccessful setting change will then need to be re-applied. If the alarm persists, i.e. the "SETTING ERROR" alarm is still displayed, please contact AREVA After Sales Services for advice and assistance. Possible software alarm messages are: I> tI> instantaneous 1st threshold directional/non directional overcurrent time delayed 1st threshold directional/non directional overcurrent
For the I> and tI> a particular attention has to be taken. The P126 & P127 are able to identify the phase where the fault occurs, and the relevant alarm messages are shown in the below listed table. Menu ALARMS I> PHASE A A B B C C A A A A A A A A A ABC ABC I>> I>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> tIe> tI> PHASE A A B B C C A AB AB A AB ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC
2nd alarm threshold directional/non directional overcurrent 3rd alarm threshold directional/non directional overcurrent 1st trip threshold directional/non directional overcurrent 2nd trip threshold directional/non directional overcurrent 3rd trip threshold directional/non directional overcurrent 1st alarm threshold directional/non directional earth fault 2nd alarm threshold directional/non directional earth fault 3rd alarm threshold directional/non directional earth fault 1st trip threshold directional/non directional earth fault
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 tIe>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos>> Thermal Alarm Thermal Overload I< tI< I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Brkn.Cond.
2nd trip threshold directional/non directional earth fault 3rd trip threshold directional/non directional earth fault 1st alarm threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault 2nd alarm threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault 1st trip threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault 2nd trip threshold wattmetric/IeCos earth fault threshold thermal alarm thermal overload trip alarm threshold undercurrent fault trip threshold undercurrent fault 1st alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent 1st trip threshold negative sequence overcurrent 2nd alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent 2nd trip threshold negative sequence current 3rd alarm threshold negative sequence current 3rd trip threshold negative sequence current broken conductor signal. I2/I1 element threshold exceeded for longer than tBC; tBC is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken Conductor menu. 1st alarm threshold overvoltage 2nd alarm threshold overvoltage 1st trip threshold overvoltage 2nd trip threshold overvoltage 1st alarm threshold undervoltage 2nd alarm threshold undervoltage 1st trip threshold undervoltage 2nd trip threshold undervoltage alarm threshold residual overvoltage trip threshold residual overvoltage timer t AUX1 associated with logic input Aux1 Alarm occurs when the timer is expired and for any output relay assignement timer t AUX2 associated with logic input Aux2 Alarm occurs when the timer is expired and for any output relay assignement timer t AUX3 associated with logic input Aux3 Alarm occurs when the timer is expired is assignment to relay 1 (Trip Command) only. timer t AUX4 associated with logic input Aux4 Alarm occurs when the timer is expired is assignment to relay 1 (Trip Command) only.
U> U>> tU> tU>> U< U<< t U< t U<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> tAUX 1
tAUX 2
tAUX 3
tAUX 4
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 8/92 CB Fail SF6 Low Toperating CB Trip Circuit Super. CB Open NB Amps(n) LATCHED RELAYS
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 circuit breaker failure signal; the CB does not trip on Tbf (time-out). tBF is settable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu. faulty circuit breaker signal at assignable logic input (set in AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu). operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Circuit breaker trip circuit failure for longer than the supervision timer t SUP settable in the AUTOMAT.CTRL/CB Supervision menu. number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. total measured current broken by CB is higher than the value set in AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. at least one output relay is latched.
Recloser Successful successful re-close signal. Indicates that the fault has been cleared upon circuit breaker re-closure, and has not re- appeared before expiry of the reclaim time. Recloser Blocked re-close blocking signal. Generated by: external breaker failure signal (ex. SF6 low). signal provided via logic input assigned to the CB Fail function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. external blocking signal. External blocking can be set by the user in the PROTECTION G1 / [79] AUTORECLOSE/Ext Block menu. This blocking signal is provided via a logic input assigned to the Block_79 function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. definitive trip. breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer than the set time, but only if the function is enabled. Trip of protection (See AP document for further information) configuration conflict of the re-close function. This signal is generated by: None digital input assigned to the position of the CB 52a no output relay assigned to the CB Close function (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu ). None protection is assigned to the trip command no re-close cycle assigned to the protection functions (PROTECTION G1/ [79] Autoreclose menu ). The relay is in Maintenance mode VTS alarm if enable Equation logic A set Equation logic B set Equation logic C set Equation logic D set
Recloser Conflict
Maintenance mode VTS EQU. A EQU. B EQU. C EQU. D
3.
3.1
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Analogue Inputs The analogue inputs for each relay are shown in the following table: Type of Analogue Inputs Phase current inputs Earth current inputs (high, medium, low sensitivity by Cortec code) Residual voltage input Phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage inputs Total analogue inputs 2 5 1 1 MiCOM P125 MiCOM P126 3 1 1 MiCOM P127 3 1 1/0 2/3 7
Following is a description of the voltage inputs connection for the P127 relay. Case A 2 phase to neutral voltage inputs 1 residual voltage input VC is then calculated as VC= VA+ VB + Ve To obtain a correct reading of the input voltage the exact voltage transformer ratio for Ve has to be set. Case B 2 phase to phase voltage inputs VCA is then calculated as VCA= VAB + VBC Case C 3 phase to phase voltage inputs No residual voltage input Ve can be calculated as Ve = (VA+ VB+ VC )/3 On the MiCOM P125 relays rear terminals there is one current input rated 1A and one current input rated 5A available and one voltage input. On the MiCOM P126 relay rear terminals there are four current inputs rated 1A and four current inputs rated 5A available and one voltage input. On the MiCOM P127 relay rear terminals there are four current inputs rated 1A and four current inputs rated 5A available and three voltages input. By using the Cortec code (see the appropriate section) the user can choose the voltage range for voltage inputs for the MiCOM P125 & P126 (one input) and P127 (three inputs).
All logic outputs can be programmed to respond to any of the available control or protection functions. Logic inputs can be assigned to various control functions. All logic digital inputs can be programmed to respond to any of the available control or protection functions. Their supply level is the same as the power supply selected of the relay by Cortec. They can be supplied in A.C or D.C current by Cortec choice. The MiCOM relays are powered either from a DC or an AC auxiliary power supply. Any short time voltage interruption (<50ms) is filtered and regulated through the auxiliary power supply.
The front panel enables the user to navigate through the menu to access data, change settings, read measurements etc. Eight LEDs on the front panel allow a clear and simple presentation of events. The various detected alarms are stored and can be displayed on the back-lit LCD. No Password is required to read and acknowledge (clear) these alarm messages. On their rear terminals the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have a standard RS485 port available. The user can choose, by ordering, the communication protocol ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 (when available). Using the communication channel RS485, all stored information (measurements, alarms, and parameters) can be read and the settings can be modified if this functionality is allowed by the chosen protocol. Evaluation and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a normal PC and the appropriate AREVA software. RS485 based communication allows MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays to be directly linked to a digital control system. All the available data is then placed at the disposal of the supervisor and can be processed either local or remotely.
4.
MENU
The menu of the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays is organised into main menus and submenus. The available content depends on the MiCOM model. The menu for the MiCOM P125 relay is divided into 7 sections and for the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays into 8 sections: OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION MEASUREMENTS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION G1 / G2 AUTOMAT. CTRL RECORDS (P126 & P127 only) . .
To access these menus from the default display press
To return to the default display from these menus or submenus press 4.1 Menu OP PARAMETERS
To gain access to the OP PARAMETERS menu from the default display, press OP PARAMETERS Heading of OP PARAMETERS menu. To gain access to the menu content, press
Password **** Password AAAA
Entry of the password to be able to modify the MiCOM relay settings and parameters. To enter the password, press . The password entry is made letter by letter, using or to go up or down in the alphabet. After each letter, press to enter the following letter. At the end press to validate the password. If the password is correct, the following message is displayed on the LCD: PASSWORD OK. Note: The password is initially set in the factory to AAAA.
WARNING:
NO SETTING CHANGES DONE EITHER LOCALLY (THROUGH RS232) OR REMOTELY (THROUGH RS485) WILL BE ALLOWED DURING THE 5 FIRST MINUTES FOLLOWING A CHANGE OF PASSWORD. Indicates the language used in the display. To switch to a different language, press , then choose the desired language using the arrows.
Language ENGLISH
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 12/92 Description P125-2
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Indicate the type of relay, the near number is the sensitivity for the earth input circuit. from 0.1 to 40 Ien from 0.01 to 8 Ien 0.002 to 1 Ien Displays the reference number that lists the equipment associated with the relay. The entry of the reference is made character by character using . After each character (letter, number or sign), press to enter the following character. Press to validate the reference entry. Note: The reference is initially set in the factory to ALST. Displays the software version downloaded Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. To modify this value, press and press to select the desired value. Press to validate choice. This window displays the active protection and automatic features group. The display value can be 1 or 2. Displays the status of the logic Inputs. The logic inputs are numbered from 1 to 4 for P125 and 1 to 7 for P126 and P127 reading from the right. When the indicated status is 0 the logic input is inactive; when the indicated status is 1 the logic input is active. Displays the status of the logic outputs. The logic output relays are numbered from 1 to 6 for P125 and 1 to 8 for P126 and P127 reading from the right. When the indicated status is 1 the logic output relay is active; when the indicated status is 0 the logic output relay is inactive. NOTE: To reset a latched logic output relay press . To activate an unlatching operation the password is requested.
Reference ALST
Software Version 10.A Frequency 50 Hz Active Group 1 Input Status 7654321 0110110
Relay Status
87654321 01011101
NOTE: 4.1.1
The logic output relay (RL0) WATCHDOG is not displayed in the output status window.
Additional OP PARAMETERS Menu Points for P126 & P127 Date 10/11/01 Time 13:57:44 Displays the date. To modify this date press then using enter the required value. Enable your choice using . In this example the date is: November 10th 2001 Displays the time. To modify the time press then using enter the required value. Enable your choice using . In this example the time is: 1:57:44 pm.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.2 Menu CONFIGURATION The following parameters can be set in the CONFIGURATION menu: labels used to display currents and voltages ratios for the earth and phase current transformers (CT)
ratios for the residual voltage and phase voltage transformers (VT) LEDs 5 to 8 assigned to several functions. The setting group change by a dedicated digital input working on the level or on the edge. The polarisation of the digital inputs by voltage present or lacking The possibility to have the trip relay normally ON or OFF The choice to enable alarms functionality as well as self reset on trip or instantaneous protection or other function . By the maintenance way to drive the output relays. To set the management date for the network in using
The submenus are: General Options CT Ratio Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Inputs Configuration RL1 Output relay Group Select Alalrms Rel. maintenance Date followed
To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, press by until the desired submenu header is displayed.
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 14/92 4.2.1 Submenu General Options
The following submenu displays the connection mode only for the P127 and the default and phase rotation display only for the P126. The General Options submenu is not available for the P125 relay. The default display is fixed to IN and there is no VT connection setting choice. CONFIGURATION Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the General Options submenu, press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of General Options submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Displays the type of VT connection. Select choice using the above instructions. The available options are: 3Vpn, 2Vpp+Vr, 2Vpn+Vr. To gain access to the next window press . To gain access to the previous window press . Choose the phase rotation between either A-B-C or A-C-B. Press to change the phase rotation then to scroll through the available selections. Press to validate your choice. Displays the default current value (by selecting either Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, or Earth N). To modify this default value, follow the above instructions. To gain access to the next window press . To gain access to the previous window press . Set the voltage threshold below which frequency protection is blocked. The setting range is from 5 to 130V
General Options
VT Connection 2Vpp+Vr
PHASE ROTATION A-B-C
Default Displays RMS I A
Prot. Freq. Block 5V 4.2.2 Submenu Transfo. Ratio CONFIGURATION
Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Transfo. Ratio submenu, press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of Transfo. Ratio submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. To gain access to the next window press . To gain access to the previous window press .
Transfo. Ratio
Line CT primary 5A Line CT sec 5A E/Gnd CT primary 5A E/Gnd CT sec 5A
Displays the rated primary current of the line CT. The setting range is from 1 to 9999. This setting is only available in P126 and P127 relays. Displays the rated secondary current of the line CT. The setting value is either 1or 5. This setting is only available in P126 and P127 relays. Displays the rated primary current of the earth CT. The setting range is from 1 to 9999. Displays the rated secondary current of the earth CT. The setting value is either 1 or 5.
The following displays and settings are only shown and applicable with the P127 relay.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Line VT primary 0.10 kV
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 15/92 Displays the rated primary voltage of the line VT. The rated voltage input range is given by relay Cortec code. The setting range is from 0.1to1000kV, in steps of 0.01kV. For the 220-480V model the setting range is from 220 to 480V, in steps of 1V. Displays the rated secondary voltage of the line VT. The rated voltage input range is given by relay Cortec code. The setting range is from 57 to 130V, in steps of 0.1V This window is not available for the 220-480V model.
Line VT sec 100.0 V
The following displays are only shown if the connection mode 2Vpp+Vr or 2Vpn+Vr is selected. E/Gnd VT primary 0.10 kV Displays the rated primary voltage of the earth VT. The rated voltage input range is given by relay Cortec code. The setting range is from 0.1 to 1000kV, in steps of 0.01kV. For the 220-480V model the setting range is from 220 to 480V, in steps of 1V. Displays the rated secondary voltage of the earth VT. The rated voltage input range is given by relay Cortec code. The setting range is from 57 to 130V, in steps of 0.1V. This window is not available for the 220-480V model.
E/Gnd VT sec 100.0 V
WARNING:
WITH THE P127 RELAY, NOT ALL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE READ IN THE DIRECT MODE. THESE MEASUREMENTS MUST BE READ IN THE INDIRECT MODE.
These measurement values are called derived measurements. They depend on the selected electrical voltage connection mode. 4.2.3 Submenus to Configure LEDs 5 to 8 To gain access to the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display press press until the submenu Led is reached. To reach the LED configuration submenu press to reach Led 7 and again to reach Led 8. for Led 5. Press . Then
to reach Led 6, again
The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the LEDs (5 to 8) for each MiCOM relay model. Directional overcurrent protection. TEXT I> tI> tIA> tIB> tIC> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> P125 P126 P127 X X X X X X X X X Information Instantaneous 1st threshold phase overcurrent Time delayed 1st threshold phase overcurrent Time delayed first threshold trip on phase A Time delayed first threshold trip on phase B Time delayed first threshold trip on phase C Instantaneous 2nd threshold phase overcurrent Time delayed 2nd threshold phase overcurrent Instantaneous 3rd threshold phase overcurrent Time delayed 3rd threshold phase overcurrent
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 16/92 Three phase overcurrent protection TEXT I> tI> tIA> tIB> tIC> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> P125 P126 X X X X X X X X X P127 Information
Instantaneous 1st threshold overcurrent Time delayed 1st threshold overcurrent Time delayed first threshold trip on phase A Time delayed first threshold trip on phase B Time delayed first threshold trip on phase C Instantaneous 2nd threshold overcurrent Time delayed 2nd threshold overcurrent Instantaneous 3rd threshold overcurrent Time delayed 3rd overcurrent threshold
Directional earth fault protection TEXT Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> P125 X X X X X X P126 X X X X X X P127 X X X X X X Information Instantaneous 1st threshold earth overcurrent Time delayed 1st threshold earth overcurrent Instantaneous 2nd threshold earth overcurrent Time delayed 2nd threshold earth overcurrent Instantaneous 3rd threshold earth overcurrent Time delayed 3rd threshold earth overcurrent
Wattmetric Pe/IeCOS protection TEXT Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> P125 X X X X P126 X X X X P127 X X X X
st
Information 1 alarm threshold earth fault overpower/IeCos (wattmetric) 1st trip threshold earth fault overpower/IeCos (wattmetric) 2nd alarm threshold earth fault overpower/IeCos (wattmetric) 2nd trip threshold earth fault overpower/IeCos (wattmetric)
Negative phase sequence overcurrent protection TEXT I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Thermal protection TEXT Therm Trip P125 P126 X P127 X Information Thermal trip overload threshold P125 P126 X X X X X X P127 X X X X X X
st
Information 1 alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent 1st trip threshold negative sequence overcurrent 2nd alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent 2nd trip threshold negative sequence overcurrent 3rd alarm threshold negative sequence overcurrent 3rd trip threshold negative sequence overcurrent
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Three phase undercurrent protection TEXT I< tI< Overvoltage protection TEXT U> tU> U>> tU>> Undervoltage protection TEXT U< tU< U<< tU<< Residual overvoltage protection TEXT Ue>>>> tUe>>>> P125 X X P126 X X P127 X X P125 P126 P127 X X X X
st
P125
P126 X X
P127 X X
Information Alarm threshold undercurrent Trip threshold undercurrent
P125
P126
P127 X X X X
st
Information 1 alarm threshold overvoltage 1st trip threshold overvoltage 2nd alarm threshold overvoltage 2nd trip threshold overvoltage
Information 1 alarm threshold undervoltage 1st trip threshold undervoltage 2nd alarm threshold undervoltage 2nd trip threshold undervoltage
Information Alarm threshold residual overvoltage Trip threshold residual overvoltage
Broken conductor protection TEXT Brkn. Cond CB Fail TEXT CB Fail Logic inputs TEXT Input1 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 Input6 Input7 P125 X X X X P126 X X X X X X X P127 X X X X X X X Information Copy of the status of logic input no 1 Copy of the status of logic input no 2 Copy of the status of logic input no 3 Copy of the status of logic input no 4 Copy of the status of logic input no 5 Copy of the status of logic input no 6 Copy of the status of logic input no 7 P125 P126 X P127 X Information Circuit breaker failure trip P125 P126 X P127 X Information Broken conductor detection trip
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 18/92 Autoreclose function TEXT Recloser Run Recl. Blocked Auxiliary timers TEXT tAux1 tAux2 P125 X X P126 X X P127 X X Information P125 P126 X X P127 X X Information
Signal that Autoreclose cycle is working Signal for Autoreclose cycle end
Copy of the status of logic input delayed by tAux 1 Copy of the status of logic input delayed by tAux 2
t SOTF FUNCTION TEXT t SOTF P125 P126 X P127 X Information Switch on to fault timer expired
Directional Power protection TEXT P> tP> P>> tP>> Voltage Supervision function TEXT VTS Frequency protection TEXT F1 tF1 F2 tF2 F3 tF3 F4 tF4 F5 tF5 F6 tF6 F Out NOTES: P125 P126 P127 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
st
P125
P126
P127 X X X X
st
Information 1 alarm threshold directional power 1st trip threshold directional power 2nd alarm threshold directional power 2nd trip threshold directional power
P125
P126
P127 X
Information Voltage supervision function is active
Information 1 alarm threshold frequency 1st trip threshold frequency 2nd alarm threshold frequency 2nd trip threshold frequency 3rd alarm threshold frequency 3rd trip threshold frequency 4th alarm threshold frequency 4th trip threshold frequency 5th alarm threshold frequency 5th trip threshold frequency 6th alarm threshold frequency 6th trip threshold frequency Signal that frequency is out of range
Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LEDs. One or more parameters (OR logic) can light each LED.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.2.4 Example: Setting LED 5 for P126: CONFIGURATION
Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the LED submenu, press the submenu is reached.
and
until
Led
Heading Led submenu. To gain access to Led 5 submenu, press . To set the led assignment press and to scroll available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ie> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when Ie> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tIe> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tIe> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ie>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when Ie>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tIe>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tIe>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ie>>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when Ie>>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tIe>>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tIe>>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Pe> or IeCos> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when Pe> or IeCos> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tPe> or IeCos> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tPe> or IeCos> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Pe>> or IeCos>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when Pe>> or IeCos>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tPe>> or IeCos>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tPe>> or IeCos>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when I> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tI> delay time has elapsed.
Led 5 Ie>
Led 5 tIe>
No
Led 5 Ie>>
No
Led 5 tIe>>
No
Led 5 Ie>>>
No
Led 5 tIe>>>
No
Led 5 Pe/IeCos>
No
Led 5 tPe/IeCos>
No
Led 5 Pe/IeCos>>
No
Led 5 tPe/IeCos>>
No
Led 5 I>
No
Led 5 tI>
No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 20/92 Led 5 I>>
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when I>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tI>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I>>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when I>>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI>>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tI>>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when I< threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when I< threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tI2> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tI2> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Brkn. Cond is detected. Setting choice No: No operation when Brkn. Cond is detected. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Thermal Trip occurs. Setting choice No: No operation when Thermal Trip occurs. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Ue>>>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice No: No operation when Ue>>>> threshold is exceeded. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when tUe>>>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when tUe>>>> delay time has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when CB failure occurs. Setting choice No: No operation when CB failure occurs. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 1. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 1. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 2. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 2. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 3. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 3.
No
Led 5 tI>>
No
Led 5 I>>>
No
Led 5 tI>>>
No
Led 5 I<
No
Led 5 tI2>
No
Led 5 Brkn. Cond
No
Led 5 Therm Trip Led 5 Ue>>>>
No
No
Led 5 tUe>>>>
No
Led 5 CB Fail Led 5 Input 1
No No
Led 5 Input 2
No
Led 5 Input 3
No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Led 5 Input 4
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 21/92 Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 4. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 4. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 5. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 5. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 6. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 6. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up with signal present at logic input 7. Setting choice No: No operation with signal present at logic input 7. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Recloser Run cycle is active. Setting choice No: No operation when Recloser Run cycle is active. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when Recl. Blocked function is active. Setting choice No: No operation when Recl. Blocked function is active. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when time Aux1 has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when time Aux1 has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when time Aux2 has elapsed. Setting choice No: No operation when time Aux2 has elapsed. Setting choice Yes: LED 5 lights up when time tSOTF has expired. Setting choice No: No operation when time tSOTF has expired.
No
Led 5 Input 5
No
Led 5 Input 6
No
Led 5 Input 7
No
Led 5 Recloser Run
No
Led 5 Recl. Blocked
No
Led 5 tAux1
No
Led 5 tAux2
No
Led 5 tSOTF
No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 22/92 4.2.5 Submenu Logic Inputs Choice: Active High/Low (P125) CONFIGURATION Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Inputs submenu, press the submenu is reached.
and
until
Inputs Inputs :4321
Heading Inputs submenu. To gain access to the submenu content, press
Press to modify and use to assign active high or low functionality to each logic input. Press to confirm choice. Note: = active high = active low To modify press and using keys to select the AC or DC power supply for the digital input. Press to confirm the setting. The power supply for any input is the same one as much as the power supply for the relay. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input. Press to confirm the setting. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input. Press to confirm the setting. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input. Press to confirm the setting. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input Press to confirm the setting.
Voltage Input DC
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX1 LEVEL
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX2 LEVEL
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX3 LEVEL
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX4 LEVEL
4.2.6
Submenu Logic Inputs Choice: Active High/Low (P126 & P127) CONFIGURATION Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Inputs submenu, press submenu is reached. Heading INPUT submenu. To gain access to the submenu content, press :7654321 , until the
Inputs Inputs
Press to modify and use to assign active high or low functionality to each logic input. Press to confirm choice. Note: = active high = active low To modify press and using keys to select the AC or DC power supply for the digital input. Press to confirm the setting. The power supply for any input is the same one as much as the power supply for the relay. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input. Press to confirm the setting.
Voltage Input DC
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX1 LEVEL
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Start/Stop By Input tAUX2 LEVEL
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 23/92 To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input. Press to confirm the setting. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input. Press to confirm the setting. To modify press and using keys to select if the control of the timer is on the change of the LEVEL of the relevant input or on the EDGE of the relevant input Press to confirm the setting.
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX3 LEVEL
Start/Stop By Input
tAUX4 LEVEL
It is possible to configure the operation of the digital input, either on falling edge/low level, or on rising edge/high level. Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge or high level) depends of the application of the digital inputs. Example: a digital input configured "blocking logic" will operate on level, on the other hand a digital input configured "Cold load pick up" will operate on edge. ONLY a digital input configured "change of setting group" can operate either on edge or on level. Function allocated to the Digital Input Unlatch of the output relays Position of the CB, 52a or 52b Blocking logic 1 & 2 Logic Selectivity 1 & 2 Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux3 & Aux4 CB Fault Reset of the thermal state Cold load Pick Up Start of disturbance record Trip circuit supervision Change of setting group CB Fail timer start Block 79 Maintenace Mode Man. close Local Synchro Operation of the Digital Input On level On level On level On level On level / On Edge On level On edge On edge On edge On level On edge, or on level On edge On level On level On edge On level On edge
The user has to set in the CONFIGURATION Menu the auxiliary voltage (AC or DC) for the operation of the digital inputs. This setting is necessary due to the time filtering different in DC and AC.
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 24/92 4.2.7 Configuration Output Relays sub-menu CONFIGURATION
Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Press to access the Relays Maintenance menu then until the desired submenu is reached. Heading of the CONFIGURATION RELAYS MAINTENANCE submenu. Press to access the submenu content.
Output Relays
Fail Safe R.
87654321 0000000
This menu allows the user to invert each of the output relay contacts for the de-energised state. 1 = relay activated when driving signal is not active 0 = relay not activated when driving signal is not active
Maintenance Mode Yes
Choose if you want to activate the MAINTENANCE MODE of the relay. If the user selects Yes, output relays are disconnected from the protection and automation functions. If the MAINTENANCE MODE is activated (set to Yes), this menu allows the user to activate each one of the output relay 1 = relay activated 0 = relay not activated
Relays CMD 8765W4321 000000001
4.2.8
Submenu Selecting Active Protection Group (P125, P126 & P127) CONFIGURATION Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Group Select menu, press until the submenu is reached. Heading Group Select submenu. To gain access to the submenu content press . and
Group Select Change Group By Input LEVEL Setting Group 1
To select the way to active the setting group 1or 2 press and to choose on the LEVEL or on the EDGE. Press to confirm your choice. To select active setting protection group 1 or 2 press and or . Press to confirm choice.
The following table shows the possible combinations by using on Level or on Edge. Setting configuration Active setting group Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 X X X X Input active Input active High Low X X X X Change group on Level X X X X X X X X X L to H L to H H to L H to L Change group on Fall Edge Input status Input non Input powered powered X X X
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 CONFIGURATION
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 25/92 Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Alarm submenu, press submenu is reached. Heading Alarm submenu. To gain access to the submenu content, press To enable/ disable the auto acknowledge of the instantaneous alarms. To modify press and using keys Press confirm the setting.
until the
Alarms Inst. Self-reset Yes
to
Reset Led on Fault
Yes
Displays the reset mode of the alarms concerning the instantaneous:reset led on a new fault Yes or No. To modify press and using keys Press to confirm the setting. Setting choice Yes: activation of auxiliary timer 1 output will not raise an alarm provided it does not lead to a trip order Setting choice No: activation of auxiliary timer 1 output will raise an alarm. Press to modify and use to select your choice. Press to validate the setting.
INH Alarm Taux1 No
INH Alarm Taux2 No
Setting choice Yes: activation of auxiliary timer 2 output will not raise an alarm provided it does not lead to a trip order Setting choice No: activation of auxiliary timer 2 output will raise an alarm. Press to modify and use to select your choice. Press to validate the setting.
INH Alarm Taux3 No
INH Alarm Taux4 No
CONFIGURATION
Heading of CONFIGURATION menu. To gain access to the Inputs submenu, press submenu is reached. Heading type date submenu. To gain access to the submenu content, press Press to modify and use date or IEC format date. Press operation is seen from remote)
until the
Date Date Format PRIVATE
to assign free format to confirm choice. (This
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 26/92 4.3 Menu MEASUREMENTS
By going to the MEASUREMENTS menu various system measurement values can be shown on the LCD. The displayed voltage measures depend on which wiring scheme is choose. The direct measure is the signal wires to the terminal. The derived measure is the calculated. The RMS value is provided for the direct measures. The fundamental value is provided for the derived (calculated) measures. 4.4 Voltage Connections For the P127, it is important to select the VTs configuration in the Configuration/General Options/ VT Connection submenu in according to the relay wiring for a corrected functionality of the voltage protections, of the three phase and earth fault directional protections. In the above mentioned menu you will find that for the P127 there are three connection schemes for the VTs. 4.4.1 Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection): In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua, Ub, and Uc and calculates internally the zero sequence voltage Ue = (1/3)[Ua+Ub+Uc]. This internal value Ue will be used to be compared to the threshold of Ue (the Earth Overvoltage Protection threshold and to evaluate the angle with the earth current for the earth fault directional protection). However, the Ue is displayed in the measurement Menu as well as the earth fault current and the relevant angle between them as IN, INÛN. 4.4.2 2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection): In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua and Ub. The input voltage of phase C of the relay (terminals 73-74) which is connected to the summation of the three voltage phases is used to be compared to the Ue (The earth Overvoltage Protection function threshold). This voltage at C input is considered as Ur and it is displayed in the measurement menu as UN. Moreover for the phase Overvoltage and Undervoltage protection functions, the phase C voltage value Uc is internally reconstituted using the equation: Uc = Ua+Ub+Ur. This value will be compared to the U/V or O/V threshold in case of a fault in phase C. Uc is not displayed in the measurement menu. The reconstruction is valid if the Ur is measured from a transformer with 5 limbs; two used for the phase voltage Ua and Uc and the others used in Open delta configuration for the Ur. BE CAREFUL: IF THE Ur IS MEASURED FROM A SEPARATE TRANSFORMER THE ABOVE RECONSTRUCTION IS NOT VALID AND CAN NOT BE USED. 4.4.3 Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection): The relay directly measures Uab and Ubc, the phase to phase (A-C) voltage value Uca is internally reconstituted using the equation Uca=Uab+Ubc. The third input of voltage of the relay (terminals 73-74) can be connected to the output of a delta transformer or to a dedicated voltage transformer, the measured value can be used to compare to the earth overvoltage threshold. This voltage is displayed in the measurement menu as UN and it is designed as the earth voltage. The shown measurements are functions of system voltages taken at the relay inputs.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 The following table lists the shown voltage measurements Configuration 3Vpn Ua Ub Uc Uab Ubc Uac UN Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Displayed on HMI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Configuration 2Vpn+Vr Direct measurement Direct measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Direct measurement
Displayed on Configuration HMI 2Vpp + Vr Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N.A N.A N.A Direct measurement Direct measurement Derived measurement Direct measurement
Displayed on HMI ------------------------------------Yes Yes No Yes then
To gain access to the MEASUREMENTS menu from the default display, press until the header of menu is reached.
The following windows list the items available in the measurements menu for the P125, P126 & P127 relays. 4.4.4 Menu MEASUREMENTS for P125 MEASUREMENTS Frequency 50.00 Hz Heading of MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the submenu contents, press .
Displays the network frequency taken from analogue inputs having a reliable signal level. In case of no reliable analogue signal input level present the display shows XX.XX Hz. Displays the earth current (true RMS value) taking in account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the earth current I N (true RMS value) minus the earth current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonic). Displays the earth voltage taking in account the earth VT connection mode and ratio (General Options and Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the neutral power based on neutral current value, neutral voltage value and the relevant angle. Displays the active earth fault current value.
IN 3.15 A I N fn RST = [C] UN 100 V Pe 0.00 W IeCos 0.00 A IN ^ UN 0.0
0.00 A
Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage and earth fault current.relevant.
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 28/92 4.4.5 MEASUREMENTS Menu Points for P126 MEASUREMENTS
Heading of MEASUREMENTS menu. To gain access to the items of the menu, press and until the submenu is reached. To gain access to the submenu contents, press or . Displays the network frequency taken from analogue inputs having a reliable signal level. In case of non reliable analogue signal input level present the display shows XX.XX Hz. Displays the A phase current (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the B phase current (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the C phase current (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the earth current (true RMS value) taking in account the earth CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the positive sequence component.
Frequency 50.00 Hz
IA 600.00 A IB 600.00 A IC 600.00 A IN 3.15 A I1 600.00 A I2 0.00 A RATIO I2/I1 0% UN 3.15 V Pe 0.00 W IeCos 0.00 A IN ^ UN 0.0 IA ^ IB Angle 0.0 IA ^ IC Angle 0.0 I N fn RST=[C] 0.00 A
Displays the negative sequence component. Displays the ratio of I2/I1. This derived measurement is used by the Broken Conductor detection function. (Automat. Ctrl menu) Displays the earth voltage taking in account the earth VT connection mode and ratio (General Options and Transfo. Ratio submenu). Displays the neutral power based on neutral current value, neutral voltage and the relevant angle. Displays the active neutral current value. Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage and earth fault current.relevant. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IB. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IC. Displays the earth current I N (true RMS value) minus the earth current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonic). Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS current phase values. To clear the % values, press . Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorised values of the current. To clear these values, press .
THERMAL STATUS RST = [C] 0% MAX & AVERAGE RST = [C]
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Max Max Max Average Average Average IA Rms 600.00 A IB Rms 600.00 A IC Rms 600.00 A IA Rms 600.00 A IB Rms 600.00 A IC Rms 600.00 A
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 29/92 Displays the true RMS maximum current value for phase A. Displays the true RMS maximum current value for phase B. Displays the true RMS maximum current value for phase C. Displays the true RMS average current value for phase A. Displays the true RMS average current value for phase B. Displays the true RMS average current value for phase C. Allows the user to clear the maximum subperiod values of the 3 currents for each phase. Display the IA peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a subperiod. Display the IB peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a subperiod. Display the IC peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a subperiod. Allows the user to clear the rolling average values of the 3 currents. Display the IA average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in Record menu. Display the IB average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in Record menu. Display the IC average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in Record menu. Allows the user to clear the statistics stored for the autoreclose function. To clear these values, press Displays the total number of re-closings. 0 Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 1. 0 Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 2. 0 Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 3. 0 Displays the total number of re-closings for cycle 4. 0 Displays the total number of definitive trips issued by the autoreclose function. .
MAX SUBPERIOD RST = [C] MAX SUBPERIOD IA Rms 600.00 A MAX SUBPERIOD IB Rms 600.00 A MAX SUBPERIOD IC Rms 600.00 A ROLLING AVERAGE RST = [C] ROLLING AVERAGE IA Rms 600.00 A ROLLING AVERAGE IB Rms 600.00 A ROLLING AVERAGE IC Rms 600.00 A Reclose Stats RST = [C] Total recloses Cycle1 Recloses Cycle2 Recloses Cycle3 Recloses Cycle4 Recloses Total Trip & Lockout
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 30/92 4.4.6 Additional Measurements Menu Points for P127
Following is the display of voltages when a 3Vpn connection mode is chosen (three phases neutral). UA 57.00V UB 57.00V UC 57.00V UAB 100.00 V UBC 100.00 V UCA 100.00 V UN 0.00 V IN ^ UN Angle 0.0 IA ^ IB Angle 0.0 IA ^ IC Angle 0.0 IA ^ VA Angle 0.0 IA ^ VB Angle 0.0 IA ^ VC Angle 0.0 Max Max Max Average Average Average UA Rms 101.23 V UB Rms 101.28 V UC Rms 100.00 V UA Rms 100.00 V UB Rms 100.00 V UC Rms 100.00 V Displays the true RMS maximum voltage value for phase A. Displays the true RMS maximum voltage value for phase B. Displays the true RMS maximum voltage value for phase C. Displays the true RMS average voltage value for phase A. Displays the true RMS average voltage value for phase B. Displays the true RMS average voltage value for phase C. Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VC. Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VB. Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VA. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IC. Displays the calculated fondamental value of the line voltage UAB. (vector calculus) Displays the calculated fondamental value of the line voltage UBC. (vector calculus) Displays the calculated fondamental value of the line voltage UCA. (vector calculus) Displays the calculated neutral voltage value. UN=(UA+UB+UC)/3 (vector calculus) Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage and earth fault current. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IB. Displays the RMS voltage value of phase C. Displays the RMS voltage value of phase B. Displays the RMS voltage value of phase A.
Following is the display of voltages when a 2Vpn+Vr connection mode is chosen (two phases - neutral plus earth voltage). The visualisation depends on connection mode. UA 57.00 V UB 57.00V UC 57.00V UAB 100.00 V UBC 100.00 V UCA 100.00 V UN 0.00V IN ^ UN Angle 0.0 IA ^ IB Angle 0.0 IA ^ IC Angle 0.0 IA ^ VA Angle 0.0 IA ^ VB Angle 0.0 IN ^ UN Angle 0.0 Max Max Average Average UA Rms 127.23 V UB Rms 136.28 V UA Rms 98.25 V UB Rms 97.88 V Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage and IA fault current. Displays the true RMS maximum voltage value for phase A. Displays the true RMS maximum voltage value for phase B. Displays the true RMS average voltage value for phase A. Displays the true RMS average voltage value for phase B. Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VB. Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VA. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IC. Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage and earth fault current. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IB. Displays the Fondamental voltage value of phase C. (vector calculus) Displays the calculated fondamental value of the line voltage UAB. (vector calculus) Displays the calculated fondamental value of the line voltage UBC. (vector calculus) Displays the calculated fondamental value of the line voltage UCA. (vector calculus) Displays the neutral voltage value. Displays the RMS voltage value of phase B. Displays the RMS voltage value of phase A.
Following is the display of voltages when a 2Vpp+Vr connection mode is chosen (two phase - phase plus earth voltage). UAB 100.00 V UBC 100.00 V UCA 100.00 V UN 3.15 V IA ^ IB Angle 0.0 IA ^ IC Angle 0.0 IA ^ VAB Angle 0.0 IA ^ VBC Angle 0.0 IN ^ UN Angle 0.0 Max Max Average Average P 0.00 kW UAB Rms 127.23 V UBC Rms 127.28 V UAB Rms 127.25 V UBC Rms 97.88 V Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VAB. Displays the angle value between phase IA and voltage VBC. Displays the angle value between the Zero sequence voltage and earth fault current.relevant. Displays the true RMS maximum line voltage value. UAB Displays the true RMS maximum line voltage valueUBC. Displays the true RMS average line voltage value for UAB. Displays the true RMS average line voltage value for UB C. Displays the positive & negative active power; only negative sign is shown. The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MW. If the measured value is above 9999MW this display remains on the LCD. Displays the positive & negative reactive power; only the negative sign is shown. The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MVAr. If the measured value is above 9999MVAr this display remains on the LCD. Displays the total apparent power. The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MVA. If the measured value is above 9999MVA this display remains on the LCD. Displays the three phases power factor. 1.00 Energy RST=[C] Header for energy measurements. Allows the user to reset the measured energy value. To clear these values, press . Note: Password is requested to clear the display. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IC. Displays the angle value between phase IA and IB. Displays the neutral voltage value. Displays the fondamental line voltage value UCA. Displays the RMS line voltage value UBC. Displays the RMS line voltage value UAB.
Q -0.10 kVAR
S 0.00 kVA
Cos (Phi)
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3Ph WHours Fwd 4200 GWh 3Ph WHours Rev 4200 GWh 3Ph VArHours Fwd 4200 GVArh 3Ph VArHours Rev 4200 GVArh 3Ph VAHours 4200 GVAh NOTE:
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 33/92 Displays the three phase active energy forward. Displays the three phase active energy reverse. Displays the three phase reactive energy forward. Displays the three phase reactive energy reverse. Displays the three phase apparent energy.
The number "4200" shown on the LCD is the maximum value for energy measurements. If the measured energy value is higher than 4200 Gh then the display shows XXXX G.. h.
4.5
Menu COMMUNICATION The COMMUNICATION menu depends on the type of communications protocol: ModBus, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0 To gain access to the COMMUNICATION menu from the default display, press until the menu is reached. then
4.5.1
Menu ModBus COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION Heading COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to submenu, press . To modify setting press and to scroll available selections. Press to confirm choice. Use ModBus RTU communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. To activate the parameter communication, press and use to select Yes. Press to enable choice. Displays the baud rate of ModBus transmission. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bd. Displays the parity in the ModBus data frame. Select parity: Even, Odd or None Displays the number of data bits in the ModBus data frame. Select 7 or 8 bit data frame. Displays the number of stop bits in the ModBus data frame. Select stop bit: 0 or 1 Displays the network address of the MiCOM relay in the ModBus network. Select an address from 1 to 255.
Communication? Yes
Baud Rate 9600 bd Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Relay Address 1 WARNING:
A MODBUS NETWORK CAN ONLY COMPRISE 32 RELAY ADDRESSES ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN.
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 34/92 4.5.2 Menu IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
Heading COMMUNICATION menu. To gain access to submenu, press . To modify setting press and to scroll available selections. Press to confirm choice. Use VDEW communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. To activate the parameter communication, press and use to select Yes. Press to enable choice. Displays the baud rate of VDEW transmission. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bd. Displays of the network address of the MiCOM relay in the VDEW network. Select an address from 1 to 255.
Communication? Yes
Baud Rate 9600 bd Relay Address 1 4.5.3 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION
Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Press access the menu, then 3 times. Press to access the submenus.
to
Communication ? Yes
Activates DNP3.0 communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. Press to activate communication, and use to select Yes. Press to validate your choice. Choose the baud rate of DNP3.0 transmission. Select from : 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds using . Press to validate your choice. Choose the parity in the DNP3.0 frame. Select Even, Odd or None using . Press to validate your choice. Choose the number of stop bits in the DNP3.0 frame. Select 0 or 1 using . Press to validate your choice. Choose the network address of the relay in the DNP3.0 network. Select from 1 to 255 using . Press to validate your choice.
Baud Rate 9600 bd Parity None Stop Bits 1 Relay Address 29
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6 Menu PROTECTION
There are two protection menus they are designated as PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menu and are available for the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays. By opening the PROTECTION menu the user can program the parameters of various protection functions and settings (thresholds, time delay, logic) associated with each of the phase or earth protection functions. The following table shows the protection functions available with each relay. When Setting Group is set to 1 in the submenu Group Select the function PROTECTION G1 is activated in the relays. When Setting Group is set to 2 in the submenu Group Select the function PROTECTION G2 is activated in the relays. The main protection functions are listed in the table: PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Directional/non directional phase overcurrent Directional/non directional earth fault Three phase overcurrent Wattmetric protection Pe/IeCos Undercurrent Negative phase sequence overcurrent Thermal overload Undervoltage Overvoltage Residual overvoltage Autoreclose (4 shots) Under/over frequency protection Directional Power protection The various submenus are shown below. ANSI CODE 67/50/51 67N/50N/51N 50/51 32N 37 46 49 27 59 59N 79 81U/O 32 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X P125 P126 P127 X X
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 36/92 4.6.1
Submenu [67/50/51] Directional Three Phase Overcurrent (P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection G1 menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and until the submenu
[67] Phase OC
Heading of [67/50/51] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the first alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects DIR the directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1to 25 In, in steps of 0.01 In.
I> ?
I> 10.00 In By pushing I> ? DIR
the next window will show the Delay type menu Selection of the first alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR If the user selects DIR, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1to 25 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the torque angle. Torque angle setting range is from 0 to 359, in steps of 1. Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting range is from 10 to 170, in steps of 1.
I> 10.00 In I> Torque I> Trip Zone By pushing 4.6.1.1
90 10
the next window will show the Delay type menu
Threshold Menu I> DMT Delay Type DMT Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
t I> 150.00 s
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.1.2 Threshold Menu I> RI Delay Type RI
Displays delay time type threshold. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects RI the following menu is displayed: Selection of K value for the RI curve. Setting range is from 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.005. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
K 1.000 tReset 0.00 s I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.1.3 Yes
the next window will display the threshold menu I>>
Threshold Menu I> IEC-XX Delay Type IEC-STI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEC curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve: The setting range is from 0.025 o 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
TMS 1.000 tReset 0.10 s I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.1.4 Yes
the next window will display the threshold menu I>>.
Threshold Menu I> Rectifier Curve Delay Type RECT Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects RECT curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve: The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5 in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
TMS 1.000 tReset 0.10 s I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing Yes
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 38/92 4.6.1.5 Threshold Menu I> ANSI/IEEE Delay Type IEEE-EI
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEEE/ANSI curve, the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001
TMS 1.000 4.6.1.6
Reset Threshold Menu I> DMT/IDMT IEEE/ANSI Reset Delay Type DMT Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects DMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays the reset time setting value. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
tReset 0.00 s By pushing
the next window will display the threshold menu I>>. Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time) If the user selects IDMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays the RTMS value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. The setting range is from 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of 0,001 Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
Reset Delay Type IDMT
RTMS 0.025 I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.1.7
Yes
Threshold Menu I>> For the IDMT delay time choice all the parameters are indentical to first threshold I> excluding the interlock choice. I>> ? Yes Selection of the second alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects DIR, the directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I>>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I>> 10.00 In Delay Type DMT
t I>> 150.00 s By pushing
the next window will display the threshold menu I>>>.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 I>> ? DIR
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 39/92 Selection of the second alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects DIR, the following window is shown: If the user selects Yes, the non-directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I>>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the torque angle. Torque angle setting range is from 0 to 359, in steps of 1. Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting range is from 10 to 170, in steps of 1. Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms.
I>> 10.00 In I>> Torque I>> Trip Zone Delay Type DMT
90 10
t I>> 150.00 s By pushing 4.6.1.8
the next window will display the threshold menu I>>>.
Threshold Menu I>>> I>>> ? Yes Selection of the third threshold function for phase OC (I>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, PEAK, DIR. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown and I>>> threshold operates on Fast Fourier transformation base. If the user selects DIR, the directional windows are shown and I>>> thethreshold operates on Fast Fourier transformation base.. If the user selects PEAK the operation mode of the third threshold. I>>> is on current sample base,If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu [67] Phase OC. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I>>> 10.00 In t I>>> 150.00 s By pushing I>>> ? DIR
the next window will display the [67] Phase OC, the header of the menu. Selection of the third alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects DIR, the following window is shown: If the user selects Yes, the non-directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu [67] Phase OC. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the torque angle. Torque angle setting range is from 0 to 359, in steps of 1.
I>>> 10.00 In I>>> Torque
90
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 40/92 I>>> Trip Zone t I>>> 150.00 s By pushing 4.6.2
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting range is from 10 to 170, in steps of 1. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
10
the next window will display the [67] Phase OC, the header of the menu.
Submenu [67N/50N/51N] Directional Earth Overcurrent PROTECTION Heading of Protection menu. To gain access to menu for P125 relay, press . To gain access to menu (Protection G1 & G2) for P126 and P127 relays press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of [67N/50N/51N] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the first alarm threshold function for earth fault current (Ie>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects DIR the directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu Ie>>. Displays setting values for the alarm threshold. Three earth fault current ranges are available: from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B from 0.1 to 25 Ien, in steps of 0.01Ien. Cortec code A
[67N] E/GND
Ie> ?
Ie> 1.000 Ien
By pushing Ie> ?
the next window will display the Delay Type Selection of the first alarm threshold function for earth fault current (Ie>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR If the user selects DIR the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu Ie>>. Displays setting values for the alarm threshold. Three earth fault current ranges are available: from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C from 0.010 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B from 0.1 to 25 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A Displays setting values for the alarm threshold Ue>. Input voltage range 57130V: The threshold setting range is from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V. Input voltage range 220480V: The threshold setting range is from 4 to 960V, in steps of 0.5V. Displays setting value for the torque angle. Torque angle setting range is from 0 to 359, in steps of 1. Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting range is from 10 to 170, in steps of 1.
DIR
Ie> 1.000 Ien
Ue> 5.0 V
Ie> Torque Ie> Trip Zone By pushing
0 10
the next window will display the Delay Type
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.2.1 Threshold Menu Ie> DMT Delay Type DMT
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10 ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10 ms.
t Ie> 150.00 s tReset 0.10 s By pushing 4.6.2.2
the next window will display the Ie>>?
Threshold Menu Ie> RI Delay Type RI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time), RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects RI the following menu is displayed. Selection of K value for the RI curve. The setting range is from 0.100 to 10 in steps of 0.005. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
K 1.000 tReset 0.10 s Ie> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.2.3 Yes
Threshold Menu Ie> IEC-XX Delay Type IEC-STI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEC curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10 ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
TMS 1.000 tReset 0.10 s Ie> >> >>> Interlock By pushing Yes
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 42/92 4.6.2.4 Threshold Menu Ie> Redtifier curve Delay Type RECT
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX, RECT inverse time delay curve. If the user selects RECT curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10 ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
TMS 1.000 tReset 0.10 s Ie> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.2.5 Yes
Threshold Menu Ie> ANSI/IEEE Delay Type IEEE-EI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve. If the user selects IEEE/ANSI curve, the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001.
TMS 1.000 4.6.2.6
Reset Threshold Menu Ie> DMT/IDMT IEEE/ANSI Reset Delay Type DMT Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects DMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
the next window will display the Ie>>? Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects IDMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays the RTMS value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. The setting range is from 0.025 to 3.200, in steps of 0,001. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
RTMS 0.025 Ie> >> >>> Interlock By pushing
Yes
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.2.7 Threshold Menu Ie>>
For the IDMT delay time choice all the parameters follow the first threshold Ie> excluding the interlock choice. Ie>> ? Yes Selection of the second alarm threshold function for earth fault current (Ie>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects DIR, the directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu Ie>>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Three earth fault current ranges are available: From 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Ie>> 1.000 Ien
t Ie>> 150.00 s tReset 0.10 s By pressing Ie>> ? DIR
the next window will display the Ie>>>? Selection of the second threshold function for earth fault current (Ie>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects DIR, the following window is shown: If the user selects Yes, the non-directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu Ie>>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is: from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Input voltage range 57130V: The threshold setting range is from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V. Input voltage range 220480V: The threshold setting range is from 4 to 960V, in steps of 0.5V. Displays setting value for the torque angle. Torque angle setting range is from 0 to 359 , in steps of 1. Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting range is from 10 to 170, in steps of 1. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Ie>> 1.000 Ien
Ue>> 5.0 V
Ie>> Torque Ie>> Trip Zone t Ie>>
90
10
150.00 s tReset 0.10 s By pressing
the next window will display the Ie>>>?
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 44/92 4.6.2.8 Threshold Menu Ie>>> Ie>>> ? Yes
Selection of the third threshold function for earth fault current (Ie>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, PEAK, DIR. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown and I>>> thethreshold operates on Fast Fourier transformation base. If the user selects DIR, the directional windows are shown and I>>> thethreshold operates on Fast Fourier transformation base.. If the user selects PEAK the operation mode of the third threshold. I>>> is on current sample base,If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu [67N] E/GND. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Three earth fault current ranges are available: from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Ie>>> 1.000 Ien
t Ie>>> 0.04 s tReset 0.10 s By pressing Ie>>> ? DIR
the next window will display [67N] E/GND Selection of the third threshold function for earth fault current (Ie>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects DIR, the following window is shown: If the user selects Yes, the non-directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the submenu [67N] E/GND. Displays setting values for the alarm threshold. Three earth fault current ranges are available: from 0.002 to 1 Ien, in steps of 0.001 Ien. Cortec code C from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005 Ien. Cortec code B from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01 Ien. Cortec code A Displays setting values for the alarm threshold Ue>>>. Input voltage range 57130V: The threshold setting range is from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1V. Input voltage range 220480V: The threshold setting range is from 4 to 960V, in steps of 0.5V. Displays setting value for the torque angle. Torque angle setting range is from 0 to 359 , in steps of 1. Displays angle value for the Trip Zone. This defines the operating region to either side of the torque angle. Setting range is from 10 to 170, in steps of 1. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Ie>>> 1.000 Ien
Ue>>> 5.0 V
Ie>>> Torque Ie>>> Trip Zone t Ie>>>
90
10
150.00 s tReset 0.10 s By pressing
the next window will display [67N] E/GND
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.3 Submenu [50/51] Three Phase Overcurrent (P126) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection G1 menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and
until the submenu
[50/51] PHASE OC
Heading of [50/51] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Selection of the first alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 25 In, in steps of 0.01 In.
I> ? Yes
I> 10.00 In By pressing 4.6.3.1
the next window will display the Delay type
Threshold Menu I> DMT Delay Type DMT Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
t I> 150.00 s By pressing 4.6.3.2
the next window will display the I>>?
Threshold Menu I> RI Delay Type RI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects RI the following menu is displayed: Selection of K value for the RI curve. The setting range is from 0.100 to 10 in steps of 0.005. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
K 1.000 tReset 0.10 s I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing Yes
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 46/92 4.6.3.3 Threshold Menu I> IEC-XX Delay Type IEC-STI
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEC curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
TMS 1.000 tReset 0.10 s By pushing 4.6.3.4
Threshold Menu I> RECT Delay Type RECT Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, RECT, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve. If the user selects IEC curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes.
TMS 1.000 tReset 0.10 s I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.3.5 Yes
Threshold Menu I> ANSI/IEEE Delay Type IEEE-EI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEEE/ANSI curve, the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the IEEE/ANSI curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001.
TMS 1.000 By pushing 4.6.3.6
Reset Threshold Menu I> DMT/IDMT IEEE/ANSI Reset Delay Type DMT Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects DMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Reset Delay Type IDMT
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 47/92 Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects IDMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays the RTMS value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes.
RTMS 0.025 I> >> >>> Interlock By pushing 4.6.3.7
Yes
Threshold Menu I>> For the IDMT delay time choice all the parameters follow the first threshold I> excluding the interlock choice. I>> ? Yes Selection of the second alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>>). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I>>>. Displays setting value of the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value of the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I>> 10.00 In t I>> 150.00 s By pushing 4.6.3.8
the next window will display the I>>>?
Threshold Menu I>>> I>>> ? Yes Selection of the third alarm threshold function for phase OC (I>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes, DIR. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects DIR, the directional choice window is shown. If the user selects No, the next window will show the submenu [50/51] Phase OC. Displays setting value of the alarm threshold (I>>>). The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value of the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I>>> 10.00 In t I>>> 150.00 s By pushing
the next window will display the [50/51] PHASE OC
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 48/92 4.6.4 Submenu [32] Phase Power PROTECTION
Heading of Protection menu. To gain access to menu (Protection G1 & G2) press until the submenu is reached.
and
[32] Phase Power
Heading of [32] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Selection of the first alarm threshold function for P>. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu P>> No. Displays setting values for the alarm threshold P>.
P> ?
P> 10000 xkW
Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 1 to 10000 x kW, in steps of 1 kW. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 4 to 40000 x kW, in steps of 1 k W. tP> 0.00 s P>> ? No P>> 10000 xkW Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 1 to 10000 x kW, in steps of 1 kW. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 4 to 40000 x kW, in steps of 1 k W. tP>> 0.00 s 4.6.5 Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms. Selection of the fsecond alarm threshold function for P>. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: Displays setting values for the alarm threshold P>>.
Submenu [32N] Earth Wattmetric Protection PROTECTION Heading of Protection menu. To gain access to menu for P125 relay, press . To gain access to menu (Protection G1 & G2) for P126 and P127 relays press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of [32N] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice.. Pe Selection of the function mode. If the user selects Pe the following menu is displayed: If the user selects IeCos the next window will change to IeCos>. Each Pe and IeCos threshold has its own setting (time delay, threshold value etc). Selection of the first alarm threshold function for Pe>. These instructions are also valid for IeCos>. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu Pe>> (IeCos>>).
[32N] Earth Wattmetric
[32N] Mode :
Pe> ? Yes
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Pe> 20 x 1 W
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 49/92 Displays setting values for the alarm threshold Pe>. High sensitivity current: 0.001 to 1 In Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 0.2 to 20 x Ien W, in steps of 0.02 x Ien W. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 1 to 80 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W. The setting range for IeCos> is from 0.002 to 1Ien, in steps of 0.001. Medium sensitivity current: 0.01 to 8 In Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 1 to 160 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 4 to 640 x Ien W, in steps of 0.5 x Ien W. The setting range for IeCos> is from 0.01 to 8 Ien, in steps of 0.005. Low sensitivity current: 0.1 to 40 In For range 57-130V from 10 to 800 x Ien W, in steps of 1 x Ien W. For range 220-480V from 40 to 3200 x Ien W, in steps of 5 x Ien W. The setting range for IeCos> is from 0.1 to 40 Ien, in steps of 0.01. Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects DMT the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Delay Type DMT
t Pe> 150.00 s tReset 0.10 s By pushing 4.6.5.1
the next window will display the Pe>>?
Threshold Menu Pe/IeCos> RI Delay Type RI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects RI the following menu is displayed: Selection of K value for the RI curve. The setting range is from 0.100 to 10, in steps of 0.005. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
K 1.000 tReset 0.04 s By pushing
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 50/92 4.6.5.2 Threshold Menu Pe/IeCos> IEC-XX Delay Type IEC-STI
Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEC curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Threshold Menu Pe/IeCos> RECT Delay Type RECT Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, RECT, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEC curve the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
Threshold Menu Pe/IeCos> ANSI/IEEE Delay Type IEEE-EI Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT (definite time) RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve, IEC-XX, CO2, CO8, IEEE-XX inverse time delay curve and RECT curve. If the user selects IEEE/ANSI curve, the following menu is displayed: Displays TMS value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001.
TMS 1.000 4.6.5.5
Reset Threshold Menu Pe/IeCos> DMT/IDMT IEEE/ANSI Reset Delay Type DMT Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects DMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms.
tReset 1.00 s
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 By pushing the next window will display the Pe>>?
Displays the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). If the user selects IDMT delay type, the following menu is displayed: Displays the RTMS value associated with the IDMT reset time choice. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001.
RTMS 1.000 By pushing Pe>> ? Yes
the next window will display the Pe>>? Selection of the second alarm threshold function for Pe>>. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following menu is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the submenu [32N] Earth Wattmetric. Displays setting values for the alarm threshold Pe>>. High sensitivity current: 0.001 to 1 In Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 0.2 to 20 x Ien W, in steps of 0.02 x Ien W. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 1 to 80 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W. The setting range for IeCos>> is from 0.002 to 1In, in steps of 0.001. Medium sensitivity current: 0.01 to 8 In Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 1 to 160 x Ien W, in steps of 0.1 x Ien W. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 4 to 640 x Ien W, in steps of 0.5 x Ien W. The setting range for IeCos>> is from 0.01 to 8 In, in steps of 0.005. Low sensitivity current: 0,1 to 40 In Input voltage range 57-130V: The setting range is from 10 to 800 x Ien W, in steps of1x Ien W. Input voltage range 220-480V: The setting range is from 40 to 3200 x Ien W, in steps of 5 x Ien W. The setting range for IeCos>> is from 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays the setting angle for Pe/IeCos. This item is only activated if at least one of the Pe/IeCos thresholds is enabled. The setting range is from 0 to 359, in steps of 1. This angle is the RCA angle for the directional earth fault power.
Pe>> 20 x 1 W
t Pe>> 1.00 s tReset 1.00 s Pe> Pe>> ANGLE 90
By pushing
the next window will display the [32N] Earth Wattmetric
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 52/92 4.6.6
Submenu [46] Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (P126 & P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection G1 menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and until the submenu
[46] Neg Seq OC
Heading of [46] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the first alarm threshold function for Negative Phase Sequence OC (I2>). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I2>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1to 25 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays threshold delay time type. Setting choices are: DMT for definite delay time, IDMT for Inverse time curve, RI for the electromechanical inverse time curve. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I2> ?
I2> 1.00 In Delay Type DMT t I2> 150.00 s By pushing 4.6.6.1
the next window will display the I2>>?
Threshold Menu I2> RI Delay Type RI K 1.000 tReset 0.04 s By pushing Selection of K value for the RI curve. The setting range is from 0.100 to 10, in steps of 0.005. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays the I2> RI electromechanical inverse curve.
4.6.6.2
Threshold Menu I2> IDMT - IEC or IEEE/ANSI curves Delay Type IEC XX TMS 1.00 tReset 0.00 s By pushing Displays the TMS value associated to IEC family of curves. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10 ms. Displays the type of IEC XX curves for I2> delay time.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.6.3 Threshold Menu I2> RECT curve Delay Type RECT TMS 1.00 tReset 0.00 s By pushing 4.6.6.4
Displays the type of RECT curve for I2> delay time. Displays the TMS value associated to IEC family of curves. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10 ms.
Threshold Menu I2> ANSI/IEEE Delay Type ANSI/IEEE TMS 1.00 Displays the type of ANSI/IEEE curves for I2> delay time. Displays the TMS factor associated to ANSI/IEEE family of curves. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001.
4.6.6.5
Reset Threshold Menu I2> DMT/IDMT IEEE/ANSI Reset Delay Type DMT tReset 0.00 s By pushing Displays the reset delay time type for ANSI/IEEE definite delay time curves. Displays setting value for the reset time. The setting range is from 0 to 100 s, in steps of 10 ms.
the next window will display the I2>>? Displays the selected reset delay type for ANSI/IEEE inverse delay time curves. Displays the RTMS factor associated to IDMT delay type reset. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.5, in steps of 0,001.
Reset Delay Type IDMT RTMS 1.000 By pushing 4.6.6.6
Threshold Menu I2>> I2>> ? Yes Selection of the second alarm threshold function for Negative Phase Sequence OC (I2>>). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu I2>>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I2>> = 5.00 In t I2>> 150.00 s By pushing
the next window will display the I2>>>?
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 54/92 4.6.6.7 Threshold Menu I2>>> I2>>> ? Yes
Selection of the third alarm threshold function for Negative Phase Sequence OC (I2>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes. If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the submenu [46] Neg Seq OC. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.5 to 40 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms
I2>>> 10.00 In t I2>>> 150.00 s By pushing 4.6.7
the next window will display the [46] Neg Seq OC
Submenu [49] Thermal Replica Overload (P126 & P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection G1 menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and until the submenu
[49] Therm OL
Heading of [49] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects No, no new window will be shown. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 3.2 In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays the Te thermal constant associated with the thermal formula. The Te setting range is from 1 to 200 min, in steps of 1min. Displays the K factor associated with the thermal overload function. The K setting range is from 1 to 1.50, in steps of 0.01. Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold. The Trip setting range is from 50 to 200%, in steps of 0.01. Selection of the thermal overload alarm function. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, no new window will be shown. Displays the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold. The Alarm setting range is from 50 to 200%, in steps of 0.01.
Therm OL ?
I > 0.50 In Te 10 mn K 1.00 Trip 100%
Alarm ? Yes
Alarm 80%
By pushing
the next window will display the [49] Therm OL
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.8 Submenu [37] Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection G1 menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and
until the submenu
[37] Under Current
Heading of [37] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the first alarm threshold function for phase undercurrent (I<). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the submenu [37] Under Current. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. The threshold setting range is from 0.1to 1In, in steps of 0.01 In. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 150 s, in steps of 10ms.
I< ?
I< 0.10 In t I< 150.00 s By pushing 4.6.9
the next window will display the [37] Under Current
Submenu [59] Over-voltage Protection (P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and until the submenu
[59] Phase Over Voltage
Heading of [59] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. AND Selection of the first alarm threshold function for phase overvoltage (U>). Setting choice: No, AND, OR. If the user selects AND or OR, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next windows will show the threshold menu U>>. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Input voltage range 57130V: from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1 V. Input voltage range 220480V: from 10 to 960V, in steps of 0.5 V. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Selection of the second alarm threshold function for phase overvoltage (U>>). Setting choice: No, AND, OR If the user selects AND or OR, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu [59] Phase Over Voltage. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Input voltage range 57130V: from 2 to 260V, in steps of 0.1 V. Input voltage range 220480V: from 10 to 960V, in steps of 0.5 V.
U> ?
U> 260.0 V
t U> 600.00 s U>> ? OR
U>> 260.0 V
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 56/92 t U>> 600.00 s By pushing 4.6.10
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms
the next window will display the [59] Phase Over Voltage
Submenu [27] Under-voltage Protection (P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection G1 menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and until the submenu
[27] Phase Under Voltage
Heading of [27] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the first alarm threshold function for phase undervoltage (U<). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, the next window will show the threshold menu U<<. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Input voltage range 57130V: from 2 to130V, in steps of 0.1 V. Input voltage range 220 480V: from 10 to 480V, in steps of 0.5 V. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Selection of the second alarm threshold function for phase undervoltage (U<<). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu [27] Phase Under Voltage. Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Input voltage range 57130V: from 2 to 260V, in steps of 0.1 V. Input voltage range 220480V: from 10 to 960V, in steps of 0.5 V. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600s, in steps of 10ms
U< ?
U< 2.0 V
t U< 150.00 s U<< ? Yes
U<< 2.0 V
t U<< 600.00 s By pushing 4.6.11
the next window will display the [27] Phase Under Voltage
Submenu [59N] Earth Over-voltage Protection PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection menu. To gain access to menu for P125 relay, press . To gain access to menu (Protection G1 & G2) for P126 and P127 relays press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of [59N] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of the alarm threshold function for residual overvoltage (Ue>>>>). Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes, the following window is shown: If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu [59N] Residual Over Voltage.
[59N] Residual Over Voltage
Ue>>>> ?
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Ue>>>> 5.0 V
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 57/92 Displays setting value for the alarm threshold. Input voltage range 57130V: from 1 to 260V, in steps of 0.1 V. Input voltage range 220480V: from 10 to 960V, in steps of 0.5 V. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms.
t Ue>>>> 600.00 s By pushing 4.6.12
the next window will display the [59N] Residual Over Voltage
Submenu [79] AUTORECLOSE (P126 & P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of PROTECTION menu. To gain access to the Autoreclose menu, press the submenu is reached. , until
[79] Autoreclose
Heading of [79] AUTORECLOSE submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Yes Selection of autoreclose function. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following menu is shown: If the user selects No, no new window will be shown.
Autoreclose ?
4.6.12.1 Selection Menu [79] EXTERNAL CB FAILURE Ext CB Fail ? Yes Selection of external CB failure alarm function. A binary status signal from the CB sent to the logic input CB FLT can be assigned to Autoreclose. Setting choice: No, Yes If the user selects Yes the following window is shown: If the user selects No, next window will show the submenu Ext Block ?. Displays the external CB failure trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms.
Ext CB Fail Time 1.00 s
4.6.12.2 Selection Menu [79] EXTERNAL BLOCKING Ext Block ? Yes Selection of external blocking function. A binary signal sent to a logic input (Block_79) can be used to block the autoreclose function. Setting choice: No, Yes
4.6.12.3 [79] Dead and Reclaim Time Dead Time tD1 Displays setting value of the first cycle dead time (tD1) for the autoreclose function. The setting range is from 0.01 to 300 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value of the second cycle dead time (tD2) for the autoreclose function. The setting range is from 0.01 to 300 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value of the third cycle dead time (tD3) for the autoreclose function. The setting range is from 0.01 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value of the forth cycle dead time (tD4) for the autoreclose function. The setting range is from 0.01 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms. Displays setting value of the reclaim time (tR) for the autoreclose function. The setting range is from 0.01 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms.
0.30 s
Dead Time tD2 180.00 s Dead Time tD3 180.00 s Dead Time tD4 180.00 s Reclaim Time tR 180.00 s
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 58/92 Inhib Time tI
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Displays setting value of the inhibit time (tI) for the autoreclose function (following a manual CB closure). Setting range from 0.01 s to 600 s, in steps of 10 ms.
5.00 s
4.6.12.4 [79] Phase and Earth Re-closing Cycles Phase Cycles 4 E/Gnd Cycles 4 By pushing Displays setting of autoreclose cycles externally started by a phase protection trip signal. Setting choice is from 0 to 4 cycles. Displays setting of autoreclose cycles externally started by an earth protection trip signal. Setting choice is from 0 to 4 cycles.
the next window will display the [79] cycles allocation
4.6.12.5 [79] Cycles allocation CYCLES tI> CYCLES tI>> CYCLES tI>>> CYCLES tIe> CYCLES tIe>> CYCLES tIe>>> CYCLES tPe/Iecos> CYCLES tPe/Iecos>> CYCLES tAux1 CYCLES tAux2 By pushing 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 4321 1101 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tI>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI>>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tIe>>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tIe>>> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tPe/Iecos> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tPe/Iecos> pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tPe/Iecos>> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tPe/Iecos>>pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tAux1 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tAux1 pick-up 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on tAux2 pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tAux2 pick-up
the next window will display the [79] Autoreclose.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.6.13 Submenu [81] Frequency (P127) PROTECTION G1 Heading of Protection menu. To gain access to menu, press is reached. and
until the submenu
[81] Frequency
Heading of [81] submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Selection of the first alarm threshold function for over/underfrequency (F1). Setting choice: No, 81<, 81> If the user selects 81< or 81> the following window is shown: Displays setting value for the first alarm threshold. Threshold setting from 45.1 to 64.9 Hz, in steps of 0.01 Hz. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Selection of the second alarm threshold function for over/underfrequency (F2). Setting choice: No, 81<, 81> If the user selects 81< or 81> the following window is shown: Displays setting value for the second alarm threshold. Threshold setting from 45.1 to 64.9 Hz, in steps of 0.01 Hz. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Selection of the third alarm threshold function for over/underfrequency (F3). Setting choice: No, 81<, 81> If the user selects 81< or 81> the following window is shown: Displays setting value for the third alarm threshold. Threshold setting from 45.1 to 64.9 Hz, in steps of 0.01 Hz. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Selection of the fourth alarm threshold function for over/underfrequency (F4). Setting choice: No, 81<, 81> If the user selects 81< or 81> the following window is shown: Displays setting value for the fourth alarm threshold. Threshold setting from 45.1 to 64.9 Hz, in steps of 0.01 Hz. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms Selection of the fifth alarm threshold function for over/underfrequency (F5). Setting choice: No, 81<, 81> If the user selects 81< or 81> the following window is shown: Displays setting value for the fifth alarm threshold. Threshold setting from 45.1 to 64.9 Hz, in steps of 0.01 Hz. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms
F1 ?
F1 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz) 50 Hz tF1 0.00 s F2 ? No
F2 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz) 50 Hz tF2 0.00 s F3 ? No
F3 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz) 50 Hz tF3 0.00 s F4 ? No
F4 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz) 50 Hz tF4 0.00 s F5 ? No
F5 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz) 50 Hz tF5 0.00 s
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 60/92 F6 ? No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Selection of the sixth alarm threshold function for over/underfrequency (F6). Setting choice: No, 81<, 81> If the user selects 81< or 81> the following window is shown: Displays setting value for the sixth alarm threshold. Threshold setting from 45.1 to 64.9 Hz, in steps of 0.01 Hz. Displays setting value for the trip threshold. The setting range is from 0 to 600 s, in steps of 10ms
F6 (Fn +/- 4.9Hz) 50 Hz tF6 0.00 s 4.7 Menu AUTOMAT. CTRL
The AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu makes it possible to programme the various automation functions included in the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays. The various submenus are: Trip Commands Latch Functions Blocking Logic (P125) Blocking Logic 1 & 2 (P126 & P127) Blocking Logic Inrush (P127) Logic Select. 1 & 2 (P126 & P127) Outputs Relays Inputs Broken Conductor (P126 & P127) Cold load Pick Up (P126 & P127) CB Fail (P126 & P127) CB Supervision (P126 & P127) VT Supervision (P127) SOTF Switch on to fault and trip on reclose Boolean Logic Equation (P126 & P127) and until
To gain access to the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu from the default display press AUTOMAT.CTRL is reached. 4.7.1 Submenu Trip Commands
This submenu makes it possible to assign some or all the selected thresholds to the trip logic output (RL1). 4.7.1.1 Submenu Trip Commands for P125 AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Trip Commands menu, press until the submenu is reached. and
Trip Commands
Heading of Trip Commands submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Assigning the first trip threshold for earth overcurrent to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No
Trip tIe>
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Trip tIe>> No Trip tIe>>> No Trip tPe/IeCos> No Trip tPe/IeCos>> No Trip tUe>>>> No Trip tAux 1 No Trip tAux 2 No Trip tAux 3 No Trip tAux 4 No 4.7.1.2
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 61/92 Assigning the second trip threshold for earth overcurrent to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third trip threshold for earth overcurrent to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first earth wattmetric trip threshold to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second earth wattmetric trip threshold to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the trip threshold for residual overvoltage to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux1 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux2 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux3 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux4 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No
Trip Commands Menu Points for P126 & P127 Trip tI> No Trip tI>> No Trip tI>>> No Trip tIe> No Trip tIe>> No Trip tIe>>> No Trip tPe/IeCos> No Trip tPe/IeCos>> No Assigning the first three-phase OC trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second three-phase OC trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third three-phase OC trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first earth fault overcurrent trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second earth fault overcurrent trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third earth fault overcurrent trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first earth wattmetric trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second earth wattmetric trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 62/92 Trip tI2> No Trip tI2>> No Trip tI2>>> No Trip Thermal No Trip tUe>>>> No Trip Brkn. Cond No Trip tAux 1 No Trip tAux 2 No Trip tAux 3 No Trip tAux 4 No Trip Ctrl Trip No Trip EQUATION A ? No Trip EQUATION B ? No Trip EQUATION C ? No Trip EQUATION D ? No Trip EQUATION E ? No Trip EQUATION F ? No SOTF No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Assigning the first negative sequence overcurrent trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second negative sequence overcurrent trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third negative sequence overcurrent trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the thermal overload trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the residual overvoltage trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the broken conductor detection signal to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux1 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux2 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux3 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the delayed auxiliary input Aux4 to trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the SOTF functionality to the trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the control by remote to the trip output (RL1). Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation A result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation B result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation C result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation D result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation E result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation F result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Trip EQUATION G ? No Trip EQUATION H ? No 4.7.1.3
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 63/92 Assigning the Boolean logic equation G result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the Boolean logic equation H result to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No
Additional Trip Commands Menu Points for P127 Trip tU> No Trip tU>> No Trip tU< No Trip tU<< No Trip tP> No Trip tP>> No Trip tF1 No Trip tF2 No Trip tF3 No Trip tF4 No Trip tF5 No Trip tF6 No Assigning the first overvoltage trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second overvoltage trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first undervoltage trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second undervoltage trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first directional power trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second directional power trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first frequency trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second frequency trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third frequency trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the fourth frequency trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the fifth frequency trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the sixth frequency trip threshold to output relay RL1. Setting choice: Yes, No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 64/92 4.7.2 Submenu Latch Relays
With this submenu the user can program trip functions so that the resulting output signal will remain latched after the cause for exceeding the threshold has disappeared. 4.7.2.1 Submenu Latch Relays for P125 With the following menu the user can set each output relay as latched or not latched. A 0 assigned to an output relay means that the relay is not latched. The output relay will be active when the relevant command will be active; the relay will not be active when the relevant command will reset. A 1 setting assigned to an output relay means that the relay is latched. The output relay will be active when the relevant command will be active; the relay will remain active, if the relevant command will reset. The active latched output relays can be reset by a logic input assigned to this function. Further, the active latched output relays can be reset from the front panel by pushing . This action is available if the window status Output Relays in OP. PARAMETERS submenu is displayed. The alarm string Latched Relays appears on LCD and the yellow LED is lighted. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Latch Relays menu, press until the submenu is reached. Heading of submenu. To modify setting press . and
Latch Relays Latch :87654321 01001000 NOTE:
To select output relay press . To confirm choice for setting press . Then press or to select 0 or 1. Press to confirm setting choice.
In the above window the output relays set to Latch function are number 4 and 7 (RL4 & RL7).
The window for the P125 relay is shown below: Latch :654321 011000
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.7.3 Submenu Blocking Logic
The MiCOM P125 relay has the submenu Blocking Logic available for setting. MiCOM P126 & P127 relays have the submenu Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 available for setting. By opening the Blocking Logic submenu the user can assign each delayed threshold to the "Blk Log" input (refer to Inputs menu). It is possible to enable or disable the blocking of most protection functions even if a logic input has been assigned to that function. Blocking of a protection function can be prevented if No is selected in the relevant window (see below). Blocking of a protection function can be enabled if Yes is selected in the relevant window. 4.7.3.1 Submenu Blocking Logic for P125 AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Blocking Logic submenu, press and until the submenu Blocking Logic is reached. Heading of Blocking Logic submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the first trip threshold for earth overcurrent from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the second trip threshold for earth overcurrent from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the third trip threshold for earth overcurrent from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the first earth wattmetric trip threshold from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the second earth wattmetric trip threshold from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of the trip threshold for residual overvoltage from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of auxiliary input Aux1. Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of auxiliary input Aux2. Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of auxiliary input Aux 3. Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic of time delay of auxiliary input Aux 4. Setting choice: Yes, No
Blocking Logic
Block tIe>
Block tIe>> No
Block tIe>>> No
Block tPe/IeCos>
No
Block tPe/IeCos>>
No
Block tUe>>>> No
Block tAux1 No Block tAux2 No Block tAux3 No Block tAux4 No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 66/92 4.7.3.2 Additional Blocking Logic Menu Points for P126 & P127 Block1 tI> No
Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the first trip threshold for phase OC from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold for phase OC from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the third trip threshold for phase OC from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the trip threshold for phase undercurrent from locking on the level (logic state = 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the first trip threshold for Negative Sequence overcurrent from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold for Negative Sequence overcurrent from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the third trip threshold for Negative Sequence overcurrent from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the trip threshold for thermal overload from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the Broken Conductor trip signal from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk log". Setting choice: Yes, No
Block1 tI>> No
Block1 tI>>> No
Block1 tI< No
Block1 tI2> No
Block1 tI2>> No
Block1 tI2>>> No
Block1 tThermal No
Block1 tBrk. Cond No
4.7.3.3
Additional Blocking Logic Menu Points for P127 Block1 tU> No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the first trip threshold for overvoltage from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold for overvoltage from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the first trip threshold for undervoltage from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold undervoltage from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No
Block1 tU>> No
Block1 tU< No
Block1 tU<< No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Block1 tP> No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 67/92 Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the first trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the second trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the third trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the fourth trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the fifth trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Blocking Logic 1 of the sixth trip threshold directional power from locking on the level (logic state 1) of logic input "Blk Log". Setting choice: Yes, No
Block1 tP>> No
Block1 tF1 No
Block1 tF2 No
Block1 tF3 No
Block1 tF4 No
Block1 tF5 No
Block1 tF6 No
4.7.4
Inrush Blocking Logic submenu (P127 only) Through the Inrush Blocking Logic submenu, the user can set a 2nd harmonic blocking threshold and block each delayed overcurrent threshold by setting. It is possible to enable or disable the blocking of most protection functions even if a logic input has been assigned to that function. Blocking of a protection function can be prevented if No is selected in the relevant window (see below). Blocking of a protection function can be enabled if Yes is selected in the relevant window. AUTOMAT. CTRL Blocking Inrush Blocking Inrush Yes Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press access the menu then 6 times. Heading of the Inrush Blocking logic submenu. Press to access the different submenus. Setting choice Yes: The crossing of the Harmonic H2 ratio threshold on any phase activates the Inrush Blocking Logic function instantaneously. Setting choice No: The crossing of the Harmonic H2 ratio threshold doesnt activate the Inrush Blocking logic function. Inr. Harmonic 2 Ratio = 20% Set the value for the 2nd harmonic threshold ratio calculated as a percentage of the fundamental component. Press to modify this value. The threshold setting range is from 10 to 35%, in steps of 0.1%. Press to validate your choice. to
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 68/92 T Inrush reset = 0 ms
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Set the value for the Inrush tReset time. This provides a reset delay of the Inrush Blocking signal (logic state=1) once the 2nd harmonic level falls below the set threshold. The setting range is from 0.0s to 2 s. Use to change setting and press to validate your choice. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the first overcurrent threshold (I>) Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the second overcurrent threshold (I>>) Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the third overcurrent threshold (I>>>). Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the first earth fault overcurrent threshold (Ie>). Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the second earth fault overcurrent threshold (Ie>>). Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the third earth fault overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>). Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the first negative sequence overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>). Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables. Enables/disables Inrush Blocking for the second negative sequence overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>). Setting choice: Yes = Enables, No = Disables.
Blocking Inrush I> No Blocking Inrush I>> No Blocking Inrush I>>> No Blocking Inrush Ie> No Blocking Inrush Ie>> No Blocking Inrush Ie>>> No Blocking Inrush I2> No Blocking Inrush I2>> No 4.7.5 Submenu Logic Select
With the submenu Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2 the user can assign each trip threshold to the "Log Sel" input (refer to Inputs menu). To access the submenu Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2, press and until the submenu is reached. The submenu Logic Select. 1 / Logic Select. 2 is only available in the software of the P126 & P127 relays. The thresholds I>>, I>>> are from the protection function [67/50/51] and Ie>>, Ie>>> from the protection function [67N/50N/51N]. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Logic Select menu, press and until the submenu Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2 is reached. Heading of Logic Select submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Sel1 tI>>> No Sel1 tIe>> No Enables/disables Logic Select 1 of the second trip threshold for phase overcurrent (tI>>). Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Logic Select 1 of the third trip threshold for phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Setting choice: Yes, No Enables/disables Logic Select 1 of the second trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>). Setting: Yes or No.
Logic Select. 1
Sel1 tI>>
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Sel1 tIe>>> No t Sel1 150.00 s 4.7.6 Submenu Outputs Relays
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 69/92 Enables/disables Logic Select 1 of the third trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>>). Setting choice: Yes, No Displays time delay t Sel1 for Logic Select 1 . The setting range for t Sel1 is from 0 s to 150 s, in steps of 10 ms.
This submenu makes it possible to assign various alarm and trip thresholds (instantaneous and/or time delay) to a logic output. Excepted from this option are the Watchdog (RL0) and the Tripping (RL1) outputs (refer to Trip Commands submenu). The total number of programmable logic outputs for the three relay models is listed in the table: Model Output relays 4.7.6.1 Submenu Outputs Relays for P125 AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Output Relays submenu, press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of Output Relays submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 Assigning output signal Trip (RL1) to other output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first alarm threshold for earth fault overcurrent (Ie>) to other output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>) to other output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first trip threshold for directional earth fault overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second alrm threshold for earth fault overcurrent (Ie>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for directional earth fault overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third alarm threshold for earth fault overcurrent (Ie>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. P125 6 P126 8 P127 8
Output Relays
Trip
Ie>
tIe>
Ie_R>
Ie>>
:65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010
tIe>>
Ie_R>>
Ie>>>
:65432 00010 :65432 00010
tIe>>>
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 70/92 Ie_R>>> :65432 00010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Assigning third trip threshold for directional earth fault overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first earth wattmetric alarm threshold (Pe/IeCos>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first earth wattmetric trip threshold (tPe/IeCos>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second earth wattmetric alarm threshold (Pe/IeCos>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second earth wattmetric trip threshold (tPe/IeCos>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the alarm threshold for residual overvoltage (Ue>>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning trip threshold for residual overvoltage (tUe>>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 3 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 4 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the active setting group to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assign opto input 1 status directly to output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3) Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
Pe/ IeCos> tPe/ IeCos> Pe/ IeCos>> tPe/ IeCos>> Ue>>>>
:65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010 :65432 00010
tUe>>>>
tAUX1
t AUX2
tAUX3
t AUX4
Active Group Input1
:65432 00010 :65432 00010
Input2
:65432 00010
Assign opto input 2 status directly to output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3) Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment
Input3
:65432 00010
Assign opto input 3 status directly to output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3) Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
Input4
:65432 00010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.7.6.2 Submenu Outputs Relays for P126 and P127 AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Output Relays submenu, press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of Output Relays submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Assigning output signal Trip (RL1) to other output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first alarm threshold for phase OC (I>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first trip threshold for phase OC (tI>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first trip threshold for directional phase OC from the inverse trip zone (I_R>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second alarm threshold for phase OC (I>>) to other output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for phase OC (tI>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for directional phase OC from the inverse trip zone (I_R>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third alarm threshold for phase OC (I>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third trip threshold for phase OC (tI>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third trip threshold for directional phase OC from the inverse trip zone (I_R>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Linking first delayed threshold for phase A (tIA>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Linking first delayed threshold for phase B (tIB>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Linking first delayed threshold for phase C (tCI>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning of the first alarm threshold for earth fault overcurrent (Ie>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
Output Relays
Trip
:8765432 0000010 :8765432 0100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 0000010
I>
tI>
I_R>
I>>
:8765432 0100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 0000010
tI>>
I_R>>
I>>>
:8765432 0100010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010
tI>>>
I_R>>>
tIA>
:8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 0000010
tIB>
tIC>
Ie>
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 72/92 tIe> :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Assigning first trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>) to other output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first trip threshold for directional earth fault overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second alarm threshold for earth fault overcurrent (Ie>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for directional earth fault overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third alarm threshold for earth fault overcurrent (Ie>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 8 (RL3 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning third trip threshold for directional earth fault overcurrent from the inverse trip zone (Ie_R>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first earth wattmetric alarm threshold (Pe/IeCos>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first earth wattmetric trip threshold (tPe/IeCos>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second earth wattmetric alarm threshold (Pe/IeCos>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigning to the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second earth wattmetric trip threshold (tPe/IeCos>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first alarm threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning of the first trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
Ie_R>
Ie>>
:8765432 1100010
tIe>>
:8765432 1100010
Ie_R>>
:8765432 0000010
Ie>>>
:8765432 1100010
tIe>>>
:8765432 1000010
Ie_R>>>
:8765432 1100010
Pe/ IeCos>
:8765432 1100010
tPe/ IeCos> Pe/ IeCos>>
:8765432 0000010 :8765432 1100010
tPe/ IeCos>>
:8765432 1100010
I2>
:8765432 0100010
tI2>
:8765432 0100010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 I2>> :8765432 0100010
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 73/92 Assigning second alarm threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning of the third alarm threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning of the third trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (tI2>>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning thermal alarm to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning thermal trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning threshold for undercurrent (I<) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning trip threshold for undercurrent (tI<) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning alarm threshold for residual overvoltage to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning trip threshold for residual overvoltage to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning Broken Conductor alarm signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning circuit breaker alarm function signal (CB Open NB, Amps(n), CB Open Time and CB Close Time) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning circuit breaker trip supervision failure function signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning circuit breaker failure function timer signal (tBF) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 5 (RL3 & RL5). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning circuit breaker closing order signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 1 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
tI2>>
:8765432 0100010
I2>>>
:8765432 0100010
tI2>>>
:8765432 0100010
Therm Alarm Therm Trip I<
:8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010
tI<
Ue>>>>
tUe>>>>:
Brkn Cond CB Alarm
52 Fail
:8765432 1100010
CB Fail CB Close tAux1
:8765432 0001010 :8765432 0100010 :8765432 1100010
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 74/92 tAaux2 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 2 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 3 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning delayed auxiliary input Aux 4 to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the "autoreclose in progress" information to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the autoreclose final trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3, 7 & 8 (RL3, RL7 & RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the SOTF functionality to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). When the tSOTF is expired the assigned relay works. Setting choice 1 assigns the output relay, 0 none assignment. Assigning the Control Trip command to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice 1 assigns the output relay; 0 none assignment. Assigning the Control Close command to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the active setting group to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assign opto input 1 status directly to output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3) Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
tAUX3
t AUX4
79 Run
:8765432 1100010 :8765432 1100010 :8765432 0000010
79 Trip
SOTF
CONTROL :8765432 TRIP 0000010
CONTROL :8765432 CLOSE 0000010 Active Group Input1 :8765432 0000010 :65432 00010
Input2
:65432 00010
Input3
:65432 00010
Input4
:65432 00010
Input5
:65432 00010
Input6
:65432 00010
Input7
:65432 00010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 t EQU.A :8765432 1000000 :8765432 1000000 8765432 1000000 8765432 1000000 :8765432 1000000 :8765432 1000000 8765432 1000000 8765432 1000000
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 75/92 Assigning the logic equation A result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation B result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation C result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation D result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation E result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation F result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation G result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the logic equation H result trip signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 8 (RL8). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
t EQU.B
t EQU.C:
t EQU.D:
t EQU.E:
t EQU.F:
t EQU.G:
t EQU.H:
4.7.6.2.1 Additional Output Relay Menu Points for P127 U> :8765432 0100010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0100010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0100010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0100010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 Assigning first alarm threshold for overvoltage (U>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first trip threshold for overvoltage (tU>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second alarm threshold for overvoltage (U>>) to output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for overvoltage (tU>>) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning first alarm threshold for undervoltage (U<) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning of the first trip threshold for undervoltage (tU<) to the output relays; i.e. output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second alarm threshold for undervoltage (U<<) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning second trip threshold for undervoltage (tU<<) to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the first directional power alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment.
tU>
U>>
tU>>
U<
tU<
U<<
tU<
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 76/92 tP> :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010 :8765432 0000010
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Assigning the first directional power trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the second directional power alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the second directional power trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the first frequency alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the first frequency trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the second frequency alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the second frequency trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the third frequency alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the third frequency trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the fourth frequency alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the fourth frequency trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the fifth frequency alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the fifth frequency trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the sixth frequency alarm threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the sixth frequency trip threshold to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the frequency out of range signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Assigning the VTS signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment
P>>
tP>>
F1
tF1
F2
tF2
F3
tF3
F4
tF4
F5
tF5
F6
tF6
F.OUT
VTS
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.7.7 Submenu Inputs Each relay model has a fixed number of opto-isolated logic inputs. Logic inputs: Model Logic Input P125 4 P126 7 P127 7
With the submenu Inputs it is possible to assign a label or an automation function to each logic input (see the following table): Label designation None Unlatch Blk Log 1 Blk Log 2 52 a 52 b Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 CB FLT Reset Change set Log Sel 2 Log Sel 1 Cold L PU Strt Dist Block_79 Trip Circ Start t BF Maint. M Man. Close Local Label description No link/assignment Unlocks latched output relays Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 Position of the circuit breaker (open) Position of the circuit breaker (close) Assigning external information to input Aux1 Assigning external information to input Aux2 Assigning external information to input Aux3 Assigning external information to input Aux4 External failure information from the CB Reset of the thermal state Change of setting group (default setting group 1) Logic selectivity 2 Logic selectivity 1 Cold load pick up assignment Starting of the disturbance recording function Blocking of the autoreclose function [79] Trip circuit supervision input Start CB fail timer from external input Maintenance Mode ON/OFF change Manual control close CB Local mode condition (if active, any remote operation involving the output relays is forbidden) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X P125 X X X P126 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X P127 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Synchronisation Assign a Time synchronisation input
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 78/92 4.7.8 Setting auxiliary timers at the end of submenu Inputs AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Inputs menu, press submenu is reached.
and
until the
Inputs
Heading of Inputs submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. 52a Assigning label 52a to logic input 1. To modify see above windows. Assigning label 52b to logic input 2. To modify see above windows. Assigning label Aux1 to logic input 3. To modify see above windows. Assigning label Log Sel 1 to logic input 5. To modify see above windows. Assigning label Block_79 to logic input 6. To modify see above windows. Assigning label Cold L PU to logic input 7. To modify see above windows. Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input Aux1. The setting range for tAux1 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in steps of 10 ms. Displays setting value of timer assigned to input Aux2. The setting range for tAux2 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in steps of 10 ms. Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input Aux 3. The setting range for tAux3 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in steps of 10 ms. Displays setting value of timer assigned to input Aux4. The setting range for tAux4 is from 0 ms to 200 s, in steps of 10 ms.
Input 1 Input 2 52b Input 3 Aux1 Input 5 Log Sel 1 Input 6 Block_79 Input 7 Cold L PU Aux1 Time tAux1 200.00 s Aux2 Time tAux2 200.00 s Aux 3 Time tAux 3 200.00 s Aux4 Time tAux4 200.00 s
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.7.9 Submenu Broken Conductor (P126 & P127) AUTOMAT. CTRL
Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Broken Conductor detector menu, press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of Broken Conductor detector submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Selection of the Broken Conductor function. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the Broken Conductor function is inactive. Displays delay timer setting (tBC) for the Broken Conductor function. The setting range for tBC is from 0 to 14400s, in steps of 1s. Displays value, in percent, for the Broken Conductor threshold. This threshold is the ratio between negative and positive phase sequence current. Setting range is from 20 to 100% by, in steps of 1%.
Broken Conductor
Brkn. Cond ? No
Brkn.Cond Time tBC 14400 s
Ratio I2/I1 20 %
4.7.10
Submenu Cold Load PU (P126 & P127) The Cold Load PU submenu allows enabling of the cold load pick-up function and the associated settings. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the Cold Load Pick Up submenu, press and until the submenu is reached. Heading of Cold Load PU submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Selection of the cold load pick-up function. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the cold load pick-up function is inactive. Assigning the first trip threshold for phase OC (tI>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second trip threshold for phase OC (tI>>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third trip threshold for phase OC (tI>>>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the first trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third trip threshold for earth fault overcurrent (tIe>>>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No
Cold Load PU
Cold Load PU ?
Cold Load PU tI>? Cold Load PU tI>>? Cold Load PU tI>>>? Cold Load PU tIe>? Cold Load PU tIe>>? Cold Load PU tIe>>>?
No
No
No
No
No
No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 80/92 Cold Load PU tI2>? Cold Load PU tI2>>? Cold Load PU tI2>>>? Cold Load PU tTherm>?
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Assigning the first trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the second trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the third trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent (I2>>>) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the trip threshold for thermal overload (tTherm>?) to cold load pick up function. Setting choice: Yes, No Displays scaling value, in percent, for the cold load pick up assigned to the selected thresholds. Setting range is from 100% to 500%, in steps of 1%. Displays delay timer setting (tCL) for the Cold Load Pick-up function. Setting range is from 0.1 to 3600 s, in steps of 100ms.
No
No
No
No
Cold Load PU Level 200 % Cold Load PU tCL 3600.0 s 4.7.11
Submenu 51V (Overcurrent controlled by voltage transformer control (P127)) 51V Heading of 51V submenu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press 5 to confirm choice. Enable or disable the control of the start of the I>> by U< and V2 > stages value. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the V2> threshold value for the inverse voltage 47 for the I>> control. Select from 3V to 200V by step of 0.1V. Enable or disable the control of the start of the I>>> by U<< and V2 >> stages value. Setting choice: Yes, No Assigning the V2>> threshold value for the inverse voltage 47 for the I>>> control. Select from 3V to 200V by step of 0.1V.
(U< OR V2>) & I>>? No V2>? 130V (U<< OR V2>>) & I>>>? No V2>>? 130V 4.7.12 Submenu VT Supervision VTS? No VTS Alarm? No VTS Blocks 51V? No VTS Blocks Protections? No
Enable or disable the VTS supervision function. Setting choice: Yes, No The VTS function can issue an alarm signal. Setting choice: Yes, No The VTS function can block the 51V function. Setting choice: Yes, No The VTS function can block the voltage dependent protection functions. Setting choice: Yes, No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.7.13 Submenu Circuit Breaker Fail (P126 & P127)
With the CB Fail submenu circuit breaker failure can be detected and associated parameters can be set. This protection feature is only available for P126 & P127 relays. CB Fail Heading of CB Fail sub menu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Selection of the circuit breaker failure function. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the CB Fail function is inactive. Selection of the under current threshold associated to the CB failure detection function. Select from 0.02 In to 1 In by step of 0.01 In. Displays time delay setting (tBF) for the CB Fail function. Setting range is from 0 to 10 s, in steps of 10 ms. Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal I> in case of circuit breaker failure detection. Select Yes or No. Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal Ie> in case of circuit breaker failure detection. Select Yes or No.
CB Fail ?
I< BF 0.02 In CB Fail Time tBF Block I>? Yes Block Ie>? Yes 4.7.14
0.00 s
Submenu Circuit Breaker Supervision (P126 & P127) With the CB Supervision submenu circuit breakers can be supervised and monitored, and associated parameters can be set. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the CB supervision-menu, press until the submenu is reached. and
CB Supervision
Heading of CB supervision sub menu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Selection of the trip circuit supervision function. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the TC supervision function is inactive. Displays the delay timer setting (tSUP) for TC supervision. The setting range for tSUP is from 0.1 to 10 s, in steps of 10 ms. Selection of the time monitoring function of CB open operations. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed: If No is selected the next window is CB Close S'vision. Displays monitoring time for CB open operations. Setting range from 0.05 to 1.0 s, in steps of 10 ms. Selection of the time monitoring function of CB close operations. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed: If No is selected the next window is CB Open Alarm.
TC Supervision ?
t trip circuit tSUP
0.10 s
CB Open S'vision No
CB Open Time 0.05 s CB Close S'vision No
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 82/92 CB Close Time 0.05 s CB Open Alarm ? No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Displays monitoring time for CB close operations. Setting range from 0.050 to 1.0 s, in steps of 10 ms. Selection of the monitor function for maximum count of CB operations. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed: If No is selected, the next window is Amps(n). Displays alarm threshold for CB open count. Setting range is from 0 to 50000, in steps of 1. Selection of the monitoring function that continuously sums the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following window is displayed: If No is selected, the next window is tOpen Pulse. Displays alarm threshold for the summation of the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB. Setting range is from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A), in steps of 1 E6. (E6 = 106) Displays the exponent for the summation (I A or I A). Setting choice for n: 1or 2
CB Open NB 0 Amps(n) ? No
Amps(n) 0 E6
n 1
The below two settings are also available in the P125 for the Local/remote functionality tOpen Pulse 1.00 s tClose Pulse 1.00 s Displays and sets the tripping pulse time. Setting range is from 0.1 to 5 s, in steps of 10 ms. Displays and sets the closing pulse time. This time is also associated to the during of the closing pulse time of the autoreclose function after dead time in case of lacking of the 52a signal the closing control stays for the setting value. Setting range is from 0.1 to 5 s, in steps of 10 ms.
4.7.15
Submenu SOTF (Switch on to fault) (P126 & P127) AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To gain access to the SOTF-menu, press submenu is reached. and until the
SOTF
Heading of SOTF sub menu. To navigate within submenu points, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. No Selection of the Sotf function. Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the Sotf sub menu is inactive. Displays the delay timer setting (tSotf) for Sotf function. The setting range for tSotf is from 0 to 500 ms, in steps of 10 ms. Selection if the Sotf function is triggered from I>>. Setting choice: Yes, No Selection if the Sotf function is triggered from I>>>. Setting choice: Yes, No
Sotf?
t Sotf 0.10 s I>>? No I>>>? No
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.7.16 Submenu Logic Equations (P126 & P127 only)
With the Logic Equations submenu, it is possible to form up to 8 complex Boolean functions using NOT, AND and OR operators (in order of priority). Up to 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation: TEXT I> I>> I>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> t Aux 1 t Aux 2 t Aux 3 t Aux 4 I2> I2>> tI2> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Thermal Alarm Therm Trip I< tI< tBC U> tU> U>> tU>> Information Instantaneous first phase threshold Instantaneous second phase threshold Instantaneous third phase threshold Time delayed first phase threshold Time delayed second phase threshold Time delayed third phase threshold Instantaneous first earth threshold Instantaneous second earth threshold Instantaneous third earth threshold Time delayed first earth threshold Time delayed second earth threshold Time delayed third earth threshold First earth wattmetric alarm threshold Time delayed first earth wattmetric trip threshold Second earth wattmetric alarm threshold Time delayed second earth wattmetric trip threshold Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 3 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 4 Instantaneous first phase negative sequence threshold Instantaneous second phase negative sequence threshold Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st threshold) Time delayed negative phase sequence (2nd threshold) Third alarm threshold for negative sequence overcurrent Time delayed third trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent Thermal alarm output signal Trip on Thermal overload Instantaneous undercurrent threshold Time delayed undercurrent Time delayed broken conductor Instantaneous first overvoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed first overvoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous second overvoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed second overvoltage threshold (P127)
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 84/92 TEXT U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> 79 Trip P> tP> P>> tP>> F1 tF1 F2 tF2 F3 tF3 F4 tF4 F5 tF5 F6 tF6 VTS Information
Instantaneous first undervoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed first undervoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous second undervoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed second undervoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous threshold for residual overvoltage Time delayed trip threshold for residual overvoltage Autoreclose final trip Instaneous first directional power trip threshold (P127) Time delayed first directional power trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous second directional power trip threshold (P127) Time delayed second directional power trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous first frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed first frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous second frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed second frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous third frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed third frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous fourth frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed fourth frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous fifth frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed fifth frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous sixth frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed sixth frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous VTS output signal (P127)
Example settings for Equation A AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Press to access the Logic Equations menu, and the desired submenu is reached. until
Logic Equations
Heading of Logic Equations submenu. To access equation submenus, press . Scroll using the key to access relevant Equation submenu. Heading of Equation A submenu To navigate within submenu points, press . To access the relevant operand submenu, scroll using the key. To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Displays and sets equation A operate time delay. Setting range is from 0.00 to 600 s, in steps of 10 ms Displays and sets equation A reset time delay. Setting range is from 0.00 to 600 s, in steps of 10 ms
Equation A
Equa. A Toperate 0.00s Equa. A Treset 0.00s
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Equation A.00 = Setting choice: = , Not. Null
Setting Choice: Null, I>, tI>, I>>, tI>>, I>>>, tI>>>, Ie>, tIe etc. Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT.
Equation A.01 OR Equation A.02 OR Equation A.03 OR Equation A.04 OR Equation A.05 OR Equation A.06 OR Equation A.07 OR Equation A.08 OR Equation A.09 OR Equation A.10 OR Equation A.11 OR Equation A.12 OR Equation A.13 OR Equation A.14 OR Equation A.15 OR
Null
Setting Choice: I>, tI>, I>>, tI>>, I>>>, tI>>>, Ie>, tIe etc. Setting choice: OR, OR NOT, AND, AND NOT
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Null
Setting Choice: I>, tI>, I>>, tI>>, I>>>, tI>>>, Ie>, tIe etc.
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 86/92 4.8 Menu RECORDS
With the RECORDS menu stored data, events, disturbances and monitoring signals from various submenus can be displayed and read: 4.8.1 CB Monitoring Fault record Istantaneous record Disturbance record Time peak value Rolling Demand
Submenu CB Monitoring (P126 & P127) With the CB Monitoring submenu it is possible to read and clear counter values associated with the circuit breaker. RECORD CB Monitoring CB Opening Time 0.05 s CB Closing Time 0.05 s CB Operations RST = [C] Amps (n) RST = [C] 0 Heading the RECORD menu. Heading the CB Monitoring submenu. To gain access to the submenu points, press Displays the circuit breaker opening time. Displays the circuit breaker closing time. Displays the number of opening commands executed by the circuit breaker. To clear these values, press . Displays the summation of the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB. Stored current values for all 3 phases are cleared together. To clear these values, press . 2 E04 Amps (n) IB 2 E04 Amps (n) IC 2 E04 Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or square Amps) for phase A interrupted by the circuit breaker. Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or square Amps) for phase B interrupted by the circuit breaker. Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or square Amps) for phase C interrupted by the circuit breaker.
Amps (n) IA
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.8.1.1 Submenu Fault Record
The Fault Record submenu makes it possible to read up to 25 stored fault records, that occurred when programmed thresholds were exceeded. The fault records are generated by the operation of trip relay RL1. NOTE: All measurement magnitude values refer to the transformer primary side. Heading of RECORD menu. Heading of Fault Record submenu To gain access to the submenu points, press
RECORD Fault Record Record Number 5
Selection one of the 25 Fault Record to be displayed (selection = 5). To modify this fault record number, press then using the required number is entered. Press to confirm choice. Displays the time when the fault was recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss. In this example the fault was recorded at 1:05:23 pm. Displays the date when the fault was recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault was recorded on November 12th 2001. Displays the active setting group (1 or 2).
Fault Time 13:05:23 Fault Date 12/11/01
Active Set Group 1 Faulted Phase PHASE A Threshold -----
Displays the phase, where a fault occurred, for the chosen fault record. (NONE, PHASE A, B, C, EARTH) Displays the origin of the fault that generated the trip order. Common for P126 & P127 are: tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, tPe/IeCos>, tPe/IeCos>>, Trip tUe>>>>, tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tI<, tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>>, Thermal , Brkn. Cond, tAux 1, tAux 2, tAux 3, tAux 4, EQU A, EQU B, EQU C, EQU D Only valid for P127: tU>, tU>>, tU<, tU<< Displays the magnitude value of the fault: Voltage, current, earth power. The value is based on the amplitude at 50 or 60 Hz. Displays the magnitude value of the phase A current at the time of the fault. Displays the magnitude value of the phase B current at the time of the fault. Displays the magnitude value of the phase C current at the time of the fault. Displays the magnitude value of the earth current at the time of the fault. Only P127 Displays the magnitude value of the phase A to phase B voltage at the time of the fault. Only P127 Displays the magnitude value of the phase B to phase C voltage at the time of the fault.
Magnitude 1200 A IA Magnitude 1200 A IB Magnitude 1200 A IC Magnitude 1280 A IN Magnitude 103 A VAB Magnitude 10 KV VBC Magnitude 10 KV
P12y/EN FT/A63 Page 88/92 VCA Magnitude 10 KV VN Magnitude 100 V IA^VBC Angle ----
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Only P127 Displays the magnitude value of the phase C to phase A voltage at the time of the fault. Displays the magnitude value of the residual voltage at the time of the fault. Only P127 Displays the angle between phase A current and phase B to phase C voltage at the time of the fault. The indication is ---- if the angle cannot be measured. Only P127 Displays the angle between phase B current and phase C to phase A voltage at the time of the fault. The indication is ---- if the angle cannot be measured. Only P127 Displays the angle between phase C current and phase A to phase B voltage at the time of the fault. The indication is ---- if the angle cannot be measured. Displays the angle between earth current and voltage at the time of the fault. The indication is ---- if the angle cannot be measured.
IB^VCA Angle ----
IC^VAB Angle ----
IN^VN Angle ---- 4.8.1.2 INSTANTANEOUS sub-menu
The instantaneous sub-menu makes possible to read the various parameters for each of the last five starting information. NOTE: All measurement magnitude values refer to the transformer primary side. Heading of RECORD menu. Heading of the Instantaneous sub-menu.To gain access to the sub-menu points, press . Selection of the Istantaneous Record number 5 to be displayed (selection: 1 to 5). To modify this fault record number, press then using the required number is entered. Press to confirm choice. Displays the time when the istantaneous record was recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss. In this example the fault was recorded at 1:05:23 pm. Displays the date when the instantaneous record was recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault was recorded on November 12th 2001. Display the origin of the start information. ----Lenght 70 ms Trip No Display if a trip has succeeded to the start information.. Display the length of the start information.
RECORD Instantaneous Number 5
Hour 13:05:23 Date 12/11/01
Origin
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.8.2 Submenu Disturb Record
The Disturb Record submenu makes it possible to open and read up to 4 disturbance records of 3 seconds each. Each disturbance record consists of analogue and digital data. RECORD Disturb Record Pre-Time 0.2 s Post-Time 0.2 s WARNING: Heading of RECORD menu. Heading of Disturb Record submenu. To gain access to the submenu points, press
Selection of the disturbance record pre-time. Select from 100 ms to 3s in steps of 100 ms by using . Press to confirm choice. Selection of the disturbance record post-time. Select from 100 ms to 3s in steps of 100 ms by using . Press to confirm choice.
THE TOTAL DISTURBANCE RECORDING TIME IS 3 SECONDS (PRE TIME + POST TIME). Selection of start criteria for the disturbance recording function. Select between ON INST. (start on instantaneous thresholds) and ON TRIP (start on trip conditions) by pressing or . Press to confirm choice.
Disturb rec Trig ON INST.
4.8.2.1
Submenu Time Peak Value (P126 & P127) The Time Peak Value submenu makes it possible to set parameters associated to this function. (Peak and average values displayed in the Measurements menu). RECORD Time Peak Value Time Window 5 mn Heading of RECORD menu. Heading of Time Peak Value submenu. To gain access to the submenu points, press
Selection of the time window during which peak and average values are stored. To select the time window between 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn press and then or . Press to confirm choice.
4.8.2.2
ROLLING DEMAND sub-menu (P126 & P127) The Rolling Demand sub-menu makes possible to set the rolling sub-period and the number of the sub-period for the calculation of the 3 phase Rolling Average and peak demand values, available in the Measurement menu. RECORD Rolling Demand Heading of RECORDS Rolling Demand Heading of the Rolling Demand sub-menu. To gain access to the sub-menu points, press
Sub Period 1 mn
Selection of the width of the sub-period during the rolling average values are calculated. Select from 1 mn to 60 mn in steps of 1 mn using or and validate your choice using . Selection of number of sub-period for the calculation of the average of these average values.. Select from 1 to 24 in steps of 1 using or and validate your choice using .
Num of Sub Per 1
5.
WIRING
The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have the same terminal layout for common elements. The wiring diagram for each model is provided in Appendix 1 of the Technical Guide.
5.1
Auxiliary Power Supply The auxiliary power supply for the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays can be either direct current with a voltage range of 24-60 VDC, 48-250 VDC, 130-250 VDC, or alternative current with a voltage of 48-250 VAC/ 50-60 Hz. The voltage range (Ua) is specified on the adhesive paper label under the top hinged cover on the front of the relay. The auxiliary power supply must only be connected to terminals 33 and 34.
5.2
Current Measurement Inputs The MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays have up to eight current inputs (2 times 4 earth and phase current inputs). The nominal current value of the measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp (refer to wiring diagram). For the same relay, the user can mix the 1 and 5 Amp inputs between phases and earth. NOTE: All phase inputs must have the same rating (1 or 5 Amps).
5.3
Digital Inputs The number of logic inputs depends on the relay model. The relays have programmable opto-isolated logic inputs, which may be assigned to any available label or function. Digital inputs for each relay model: Model Digital Inputs P125 4 P126 7 P127 7
The voltage range of the inputs is identical to the DC auxiliary supply range of the MiCOM relay (e.g. Ua = 48-250 VDC, logic input voltage range = 48-250 VDC). On the same MiCOM P12x relay, the user can mix different voltage levels for the logic inputs (e.g. Ua = 48-250 VDC, logic input 1= 48 VDC, logic inputs 2 to 5 = 110 VDC). If the user set the supply of the logic input in AC way, they are active from 24 to 240Vac. The automation operations that can be assigned to these logic inputs can be selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL. menu. 5.4 Output Relays The number of logic outputs depends on the relay model. The relays have configurable logic outputs, which may be assigned to any available function. The normally closed (NC) contact of the Watchdog (RL0) is not configurable. The other contacts are configurable to functions available in the relay. A basic output matrix is included in the relay. Some logic outputs have changeover contacts. Logic outputs for each relay model: Model Logic outputs P125 6 P126 8 P127 8
The first logic output (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay failure (Watchdog, WD) and is not part of this table.
User Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 5.5 5.5.1 Communication RS485 Rear Communication Port All MiCOM relays have a RS485 rear communication port.
The terminals 29-30-31-32 are dedicated to the RS485 communication port. See wiring diagrams in chapter P12y/EN CO of the Technical Guide. 5.5.2 RS232 Front Communication Port MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays provide the user with a RS232 communication port on the front panel. This link is dedicated to MiCOM setting software. The cable between the relays and the PC is a standard RS 232 shielded cable. The relay requires a RS232 cable with a 9-pin male connector. The wiring of the RS232 cable must be as follows:
RS232 PC PORT 9 pin male connector MiCOM P125/6/7 end 9 pin female connector
P0073ENa
FRONT PANEL PORT COMMUNICATION RS232 CABLE WIRING A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay.
BLANK PAGE
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN TD/A63
TECHNICAL DATA AND CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 1/40
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.6
RATINGS
Power Supply Frequency Current Inputs Voltage Inputs Logic Inputs Supply Output Relay Characteristic
5
5 5 5 6 6 6 7
2. 3. 4. 5.
INSULATION WITHSTAND ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT ENVIRONMENT GENERAL INFORMATION AND DEVIATION OF THE PROTECTION ELEMENTS DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS PROTECTION SETTING RANGES
[67/50/51] Directional/Non-Directional Phase Overcurrent (P127) Synchronous Polarisation Protection Setting Ranges (P127) [50/51] Phase Overcurrent Protection (P126) Protection Setting Ranges (P126) [67N/50N/51N] Dir./Non-Dir. Earth fault protection (P125, P126 & P127) Protection Setting Ranges Earth Wattmetric Protection Functionality Mode Protection Setting Ranges Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127) Protection Setting Ranges Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127) Protection Setting Ranges Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127) Protection Setting Ranges Undervoltage Protection (P127) Protection Setting Ranges (P127)
8 9 10
11 13 14 15
15 15 15 16 16 17 17 19 20 20 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 23
6. 7. 8.
8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.2 8.2.1 8.3 8.3.1 8.4 8.5 8.5.1 8.6 8.6.1 8.7 8.7.1 8.8 8.8.1 8.9 8.9.1
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 2/40 8.10 8.10.1 8.11 8.11.1 8.12 8.12.1 8.13 8.13.1 8.14 8.14.1 Overvoltage Protection (P127) Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Under/over frequency Function (P127) Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Over power Function (P127) Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Residual Overvoltage Protection Protection Setting Ranges Multishot Autoreclose Function (P126 & P127) Multishot Autoreclose Settings
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 27 28
9.
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.6 9.6.1 9.7 9.7.1 9.8 9.8.1 9.9 9.9.1 9.10 9.10.1 9.10.2 9.10.3 9.10.4
AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Cold Load Pickup (P126 & P127) Inrush blocking (P127) 51V function (P127) Auxiliary Timers (P126 & P127) Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127) Broken Conductor Detection Setting Ranges Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127) CB Fail Setting Ranges Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127) Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P126 & P127) Setting Ranges SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P126 & P127) Setting Ranges Logic Equation (P126 & P127) Timer Setting Ranges Available logical gates Available signals An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below
29
29 29 29 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 32 32 33 35
10.
10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.4.1
RECORDING FUNCTIONS (P126 & P127)

Event Records Fault Records Instantaneous recorder Disturbance Records Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges
36
36 36 36 36 36
11. 12.
12.1 12.1.1 12.1.2 12.2
COMMUNICATION CURVES
General Inverse Time Curves: Reset Timer Thermal Overload Curves
37 38
38 38 39 40
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
RATINGS
Power Supply Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx Operating range Residual ripple Stored energy time Burden P125 Burden P126 Burden P127 24-60Vdc 48 -250Vdc/ 48-250 Vac DC 20% of Vx AC 20%, +10% of Vx Up to 12% 50 ms for interruption of Vx Stand by: Max: Stand by: Max: Stand by: Max: <3W DC or <8VA AC <5W DC or <12VA AC <3W DC or <8VA AC <6W DC or <14VA AC <3W DC or <8VA AC <6W DC or <14VA AC
1.2
Frequency Frequency protection functions Nominal frequency From 45 to 65Hz 50/60Hz
1.3
Current Inputs Phase current inputs Earth current inputs Operating range Burden Phase Current Burden Earth Current Thermal withstand 1 and 5A by connection 1 and 5A by connection Selection by ordering code (Cortec) < 0.025VA < 0.3VA < 0.08VA < 0.42VA (1A) (5A) (1A) (5A)
1s @ 100 x rated current 2s @ 40 x rated current continuous @ 4 x rated current
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 6/40 1.4 Voltage Inputs Voltage input range Un 57 to 130V
220 to 480V 0 to 960V 438 k: 0.1102W/220V 0.525W/480V 2.1W/960V
Operating range (measuring range) 0 to 260V Burden Resistive 44 k: 0.074W/57V 0.38W/130V 1.54W/260V Thermal Withstand: Continuous 260V ph-ph 10 seconds 300V ph-ph 1.5 Logic Inputs Logic input type Logic input burden Logic input recognition time 1.5.1 Supply
Relay auxiliary power supply Ordering Code A F T Nominal voltage range Vx 24 - 60 Vdc 48 250 Vdc 48 240 Vac 48 250 Vdc 48 240 Vac Special EA (**) 48 250 Vdc 48 240 Vac 48 250 Vdc 48 240 Vac 48 250 Vdc 48 240 Vac Operating Nominal voltage range Voltage range 19,2 76 Vdc Minimal polarisation voltage 19,2 Vdc 19,2 Vac
960V ph-ph 1300V ph-ph
Independent optically insulated < 10 mAmps per input < 5ms
Logic Inputs Maximum Holding polarisation current current after 2 ms 35 mA 2.3 mA Maximum continuous withstand 300 Vdc 264 Vac
24 250 Vdc 38.4 300 Vdc 24 240 Vac 38.4 264 Vac 38.4 300 Vdc 24 250 Vdc 38.4 264 Vac 24 240 Vac
19,2 Vdc 19,2 Vac 105 Vdc 77 Vdc 154 Vdc
35 mA
2.3 mA
300 Vdc 264 Vac 145 Vdc 132 Vdc 262 Vdc
H V W
38.4 300 Vdc 38.4 264 Vac 38.4 300 Vdc 38.4 264 Vac 38.4 300 Vdc 38.4 264 Vac
129 Vdc 110 Vdc 220 Vdc
3.0 mA @ 129 Vdc 7.3 mA @ 110 Vdc 3.4 mA @ 220 Vdc
(**) Logic input recognition time for EA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at 50 Hz)
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 1.6 Output Relay Characteristic Contact rating Contact relay Make current Carry capacity Rated Voltage Breaking characteristic Breaking capacity AC 1500 VA resistive 1500 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5) 220 Vac, 5A (cos = 0.6) 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms) 250 Vdc, 50W resistive or 25W inductive (L/R=40ms) <7ms Dry contact Ag Ni Max. 30A and carrry for 3s 5A continuous 250Vac
Breaking capacity DC
Operation time Durability Loaded contact Unloaded contact
10000 operation minimum 100000 operation minimum
2.
INSULATION WITHSTAND
Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5: 2000 IEEE C39.90:1989 2 kVrms 1 minute to earth and between independent circuits. 1.5kV rms AC for 1 minute, (reaffirmed 1994) across normally open contacts 5 kVp Between all terminals & all terminals and case earth > 1000 M at 500 Vdc
Impulse voltage Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5: 2000 IEC 60255-5: 2000
3.
ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
High frequency disturbance Fast transient IEC 60255-22-1:1998 IEC 60255-22-4:2002 2.5 kV common mode, class 3 1 kV differential mode, class 3 Class A 2 kV 5kHz terminal block comms 4 kV 2.5kHz all circuits excluding comms. 2 kV 5kHz all circuits excluding power supply 4 kV 5kHz power supply 8 kV contact discharge, class 4 15kV air discharge, class 4 4kV common mode, level 4 2kV differential mode, level 4 0.15-0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66 dBV (average) 0.5-30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60 dBV (average) 30-230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance 230-1GHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance Level 3, 10V rms @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz Level 3, 10V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am Level 4, 30V/m 800MHz to 960MHz and 1.4GHz to 2GHz @ 1kHz 80% am 35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am 35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 100% pulse modulated front face only Level 5, 100A/m applied continuously, 1000A/m for 3s Level 5, 1000A/m Level 5, 100A/m at 100kHz and 1MHz 4kV fast transient and 2.5kV damped oscillatory applied common and transverse mode
EN 61000-4-4:1995 Level 4 Electrostatic discharge Surge Immunity Conducted emissions EN 61000-4-2:1995 & IEC60255-22-2:1996 EN 61000-4-5:1995 & IEC 60255-22-5:2002 EN55022:1998 & IEC 60255-25:2000
Radiated emissions
EN55022:1998 & IEC 60255-25:2000
Conducted immunity Radiated Immunity Radiated Immunity from digital telephones
EN 61000-4-6:1996 & IEC 60255-22-6:2001 EN 61000-4-3:2002 & IEC 60255-22-3:2000 EN 61000-4-3:2002
ANSI/ IEEE C37.90.2:2004 Magnetic field immunity EN 61000-4-8:1994 EN 61000-4-9:1993 EN 61000-4-10:1993 ANSI Surge withstand capability IEEE/ ANSI C37.90.1:2002
4.
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60255-6 Storage -25 C to +70 C Operation -25 C to + 55 C 25C to 70 (*)
(*) The upper limit is permissible for a single 6 hour duration within any 24 hour period.
Humidity Enclosure protection Sinusoidal Vibrations Shocks Bump Seismic Creepage Distances and Clearances
IEC 60068-2-78:2001 IEC 60-529: 2001 IEC 60255-21-1:1998 IEC 60255-21-2:1998 IEC 60255-21-2:1998 IEC 60255-21-3:1998 IEC 60255-27: 2005
56 days at 93% RH and 40 C Dust IP50 (whole case), Front IP 52, Back IP 10 Response and endurance, class 2 Response and withstand, class 1 & 2 Response and withstand, class 1 Class 2 Pollution degree 2, Overvoltage category III, Impulse test voltage 5 kV
5.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND DEVIATION OF THE PROTECTION ELEMENTS

Glossary I Is I2s Ies : : : : Phase current I>, I>>, I>>> & I< I2>, I2>> & I2>>> Ie>, Ie>> & Ie>>> IeCos> & IeCos>> Earth fault (wattmetric) Pe> & Pe>> U>, U>>, U< & U<< Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>> & Ue>>>> Definite time Inverse definite minimum time
Range 0.1 to 40 In Deviation 2% Trigger DT: Is 2% IDMT: 1.1Is 2% Reset 0.95 Is 2% 1.05 Is 2% Time deviation 2% +3050ms 5% +3050ms
IesCos : Pe Pes Us Urs DT IDMT

Element Phase overcurrent elements I> & I>> & I>>> Relay characteristic angle RCA (RCA-Torque angle) Trip zone Earth fault overcurrent elements Ie> & Ie>> & Ie>>> Wattmetric earth fault elements
: : : : : :
0 to 359
10 to 170 0.002 to 1Ien 0.01 to 8 Ien 0.1 to 40 Ien 57 to 130V 0.2 to 20W 1 to 160W 10 to 800W 220 to 480V 1 to 80W 4 to 640W 40 to 3200W 0.002 to 1Ien 0.01 to 8 Ien 0.1 to 40 Ien 0.1 to 40 In
3 2% DT: Ies 2% IDMT: 1.1Ies 2% DT: Pes accuracy IDMT: 1.1Pes accuracy DT: Pes accuracy IDMT: 1.1Pes accuracy DT: IesCos accuracy IDMT: 1.1 IesCos accuracy DT: I2s 2% IDMT: 1.1I2s 2% 0.95 Ies 2% 1.05 Ies 2% 0.95 Pes accuracy 1.05 Pes accuracy 0.95 Pes accuracy 1.05 Pes accuracy 0.95 IesCos accuracy 1.05 IesCos accuracy 0.95 I2s 2% 1.05 I2s 2% 2% +3050ms 5% +3050ms 2% +3050ms 5% +3050ms 2% +3050ms 5% +3050ms 2% +3050ms 5% +3050ms 2% +3050ms 5% +3050ms
4% error on cos
Wattmetric earth fault elements Pe> & Pe>> Active earth fault overcurrent elements IeCos> & IeCos>> Negative sequence phase overcurrent elements I2>, I2>> & I2>>> Phase undercurrent element I<
4% error on cos
2% error on cos
2%
0.1 to 1 In
2% 3% 3% 2%
DT: I< 2% DT: I2/I1 3% IDMT: I> 3% DT: Us 2%
1.05 I< 2%
2% +3050ms
Broken conductor [I2/I1]. 20 to 100% Thermal overload I>, Alarm, Trip Overvoltage U> & U>> 0.10 to 3.2 In 57 to 130V 2 to 260V
0.95 I2/I1 3% 2% +3050ms 0.97 I>3% 0.95 Us 2% 5% +3050ms (ref. IEC 60255-8) 2% +2040ms

Element Overvoltage U> & U>> Undervoltage U< & U<< Undervoltage U< & U<< Residual overvoltage (Direct input) Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>>, Ue>>>> Residual overvoltage (Direct input) Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>>, Ue>>>> Derived residual overvoltage Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>>, Ue>>>> Derived residual overvoltage Ue>, Ue>>, Ue>>>, Ue>>>> Overfrequency Fx> Underfrequency Fx< Overpower P>&P>> Range 220 to 480V 10 to 960V 57 to 130V 2 to 130V 220 to 480V 10 to 480V 57 to 130V 1 to 260V 1 to 260V 220 to 480V 4 to 960V 5 to 960V 57 to 130V 1 to 260V 1 to 260V 220 to 480V 4 to 960V 5 to 960V 45,1 to 54,9Hz 2% 55,1 to 64,9Hz 45,1 to 54,9Hz 2% 55,1 to 64,9Hz 1 to 10000*k W 5% 4 to 40000*k W DT: Fx 2% DT: Fx 2% 0.95 Fx 2% 1.05 Fx 2% 2% or 1V DT: Urs 2% 0.95 Urs 2% 2% or 0.2V DT: Urs 2% 0.95 Urs 2% 2% DT: Urs 2% 0.95 Urs 2% Deviation 2% 2% 2% 2% Trigger DT: Us 2% DT: Us 2% DT: Us 2% DT: Urs 2%

Reset 0.95 Us 2% 1.05 Us 2% 1.05 Us 2% 0.95 Urs 2% Time deviation 2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms
2% +2040ms
2% +2040ms
2% +2040ms
2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms
DT: P> & P>> 2% 0.95 P> 2%
6.
DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS

Autoreclose timers tDs, tR, tI CB fail & CB monitoring timers Auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4 Cold load pickup Inrush blocking SOTF/TOR Programmable AND, OR & NOT logic 2% +1030ms 2% +1030ms 2% +1030ms 2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms 2% +2040ms 2% +1030ms
7.
DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS
Measurement Phase current Earth current Range 0.1 to 40 In 0.002 to 1Ien 0.01 to 8 Ien 0.1 to 40 Ien Voltage 57 to 260V 220 to 960V Power Alpha P (active power) Q (reactive power) Deviation Typical 0.5% at In Typical 0.5% at Ien Typical 0.5% at Ien Typical 0.5% at Ien Typical 0.5% at Un Typical 0.5% at Un Typical 1 at Pn Typical 5% at Pn Typical 5% at Pn
Active Power and Active Energy Cos 0.866 0.5 Deviation < 1.5% < 3%
Reactive Power and Reactive Energy Sin 0.866 0.5 Deviation < 3% < 1.5%
8.
8.1
PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

[67/50/51] Directional/Non-Directional Phase Overcurrent (P127) Phase current Phase or phase to phase voltage Minimum voltage operation Minimum voltage operation Fundamental only Fundamental only 0.6V (Un: 57 to 130V) 3.0V (Un: 220 to 480V)
8.1.1
Synchronous Polarisation Minimum phase voltage fixed threshold enabling synchronous polarising: 0.6V Synchronous polarising permanence time phase voltage thresholds: 5 s NOTE: When I> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2In.
8.1.2
Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Setting Range [67] Phase OC I> ? I> Delay type tI> I> TMS I> Reset Delay Type I> RTMS I> tReset I> I>> I>>> Interlock I> Torque angle I> Trip zone I>> ? I>> Delay type tI>> I>> TMS I>> Reset Delay Type I>> RTMS I>> tReset I>> Torque angle I>> Trip zone I>>> ? Min No or Yes or DIR 0.1 In 25 In 0.01 In Max Step
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 0 10 No or Yes or DIR 0.1 In 40 In 0.01 In 359 170 1 1 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.001
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s 0 10 3,2 100 s 359 170 0.025 0.01 s 1 1 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.001
No or Yes or DIR or Peak
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Setting Range
[67] Phase OC I>>> tI>>> I>>> Torque angle I>>> Trip zone 8.2 0.1 In 0s 0 10
Min 40 In 150 s 359 170
Max
Step 0.01 In 0.01 s 1 1
[50/51] Phase Overcurrent Protection (P126) Phase current NOTE: Fundamental only When I> and I>> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2In.
8.2.1
Protection Setting Ranges (P126) Setting Range [51] Phase OC I> ? I> Delay type tI> I> TMS I> Reset Delay Type I> RTMS I> tReset I> I>> I>>> Interlock I>> ? I>> Delay type tI>> I>> TMS I>> Reset Delay Type I>> RTMS I>> tReset I>>> ? I>>> tI>>> Min No or Yes 0.1 In 25 In 0.01 In Max Step
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes No or Yes 0.5 In 40 In 0.01 In 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.001
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes or Peak 0.5 In 0s 40 In 150 s 0.01 In 0.01 s 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.001
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 8.3
[67N/50N/51N] Dir./Non-Dir. Earth fault protection (P125, P126 & P127) Earth fault current Earth fault current ranges Residual voltage Residual voltage range Minimum residual voltage operation Minimum residual voltage operation NOTE: Fundamental only See following table Fundamental only See following table 0.7V 3.0V (Uen: 57 to 130V) (Uen: 220 to 480V)
When Ie> or Ie>> are associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be the maximum of the range divided by 20.
8.3.1
Protection Setting Ranges Setting Range [67N] Earth OC High sensitivity current set Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Med. sensitivity current set Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Low sensitivity current set Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie> ? Delay type tIe> Ie> TMS Ie> Reset Delay Type Ie> RTMS Ie> tReset Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Interlock Ie> Torque angle Ie> Trip zone Min Cortec code P12-C-X---X 0.002 Ien 0.002 Ien 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien 0.001 Ien 0.001 Ien Max Step
Cortec code P12-B-X---X 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien 1 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.005 Ien
Cortec code P12-A-X---X 0.1 Ien 0.5 Ien 0.5 Ien No or Yes or DIR DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 0 10 359 170 1 1 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.025 25 Ien 40 Ien 40 Ien 0.1 Ien 0.1 Ien 0.1 Ien
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V Ue> 1V 260 V 0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V Ue> 4V 960 V 0.5 V
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Setting Range
[67N] Earth OC Ie>> ? Delay type tIe>> Ie>> TMS Ie>> Reset Delay Type Ie>> RTMS Ie>> tReset tIe>> Ie>> Torque angle Ie>> Trip zone Ie>> tReset
Min No or Yes or DIR
Max
Step
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s 0s 0 10 0.00 s 3.2 100 s 150 359 170 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01 s 1 1 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.025
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V Ue>> 1V 260 V 0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V Ue>> Ie>>> ? tIe>>> Ie>>> Torque angle Ie>>> Trip zone Ie>>> tReset 4V 960 V 0.5 V
No or Yes or DIR or Peak 0s 0 10 0.00 s 150 s 359 170 100 s 0.01 s 1 1 0.01 s
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V Ue>>> 1V 260 V 0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 57 to 130V Ue>> 1V 260 V 0.1 V
Input residual voltage with range from 220 to 480V Ue>> Ie>>> ? tIe>>> Ie>>> Torque angle Ie>>> Trip zone Ie>>> tReset 4V No or Yes or DIR 0s 0 10 0.00 s 150 s 359 170 100 s 0.01 s 1 1 0.01 s 960 V 0.5 V
ATTENTION: THE Ue THRESHOLD SETTINGS DEPEND ON THE ADOPTED

CONNECTION OPTION. IN CONFIGURATION/GENERAL OPTIONS MENU OF THE P127 RELAY THE Ve INPUT CAN BE SET DIRECTLY FROM A VT (I.E. FROM A DELTA VT) OR CAN BE DERIVED FROM THE MEASUREMENT OF THE THREE PHASE TO NEUTRAL VOLTAGES (3VPN). IN THIS CASE THE Ue IS CALCULATED AS: 1 Ue = x(UA + UB + UC) 3 THE SETTING OF THE Ue THRESHOLDS MUST TAKE THE ABOVE FORMULA IN ACCOUNT. 8.4 Earth Wattmetric Protection Earth fault current Residual voltage Minimum Operating Voltage Range from Range from 57 220 to to 130V 480V 0.7 V 3.0 V Fundamental only Fundamental only
Minimum Operating Current with Ien=1A and Ien=5A Range from Range from Range from NOTE: 0.002 0.01 0.1 to to to 1 Ien 8 Ien 40 Ien 1 mA 5 mA 50 mA
When Pe> or Iecos> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be the maximum of the range divided by 20.
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 20/40 8.5 Functionality Mode This protection element can operate in Pe or IeCos mode. 8.5.1 Protection Setting Ranges Setting range [32N] Earth Wattmetric Mode High sensitivity: 57130V Input voltage Pe> (*) Pe>> (*) 220480V Input voltage Pe> (*) Pe>> (*) Med. Sensitivity: 57130V Input voltage Pe> (*) Pe>> (*) 220480V Input voltage Pe> (*) Pe>> (*) Low sensitivity: 57130V Input voltage Pe> (*) Pe>> (*) 220480V Input voltage Pe> (*) Pe>> (*) Pe> ? Delay Type tPe> Pe> TMS Pe> Reset Delay Type Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> ? tPe>> Pe>> tReset Min Pe or IeCos Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien Cortec code: P12-CAX---X 0.2 x k W 0.2 x k W 20 x k W 20 x k W Max
Step
0.02 x k W 0.02 x k W
Cortec code: P12-CBX---X 1xkW 1xkW 80 x k W 80 x k W 0.1 x k W 0.1 x k W
Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien Cortec code: P12-BAX---X 1xkW 1xkW 160 x k W 160 x k W 0.1 x k W 0.1 x k W
Cortec code: P12-BBX---X 4xkW 4xkW 640 x k W 640 x k W 0.5 x k W 0.5 x k W
Current input from 0.1 to 40 Ien Cortec code: P12-AAX---X 10 x k W 10 x k W 800 x k W 800 x k W 1xkW 1xkW
Cortec code: P12-ABX---X 40 x k W 40 x k W No or Yes DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI,RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 0s 0.00 s 150 s 100 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.025 3200 x k W 3200 x k W 5xkW 5xkW
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Setting range [32N] Earth Wattmetric High sensitivity IeCos IeCos> IeCos>> Med. sensitivity IeCos IeCos> IeCos>> Low sensitivity IeCos IeCos> IeCos>> IeCos> ? Delay Type tIeCos> IeCos> TMS IeCos> Reset Delay Type IeCos> RTMS IeCos> tReset IeCos>> ? tIeCos>> IeCos> tReset Pe/IeCos Torque angle (*) ATTENTION: Min Cortec code P12-C-X---X 0.002 Ien 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 1 Ien Max
Step
0.001 Ien 0.001 Ien
Cortec code P12-B-X---X 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien 8 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.005 Ien
Cortec code P12-A-X---X 0.1 Ien 0.5 Ien Yes or No DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.00 s Yes or No 0s 0.00 s 0 150 s 100 s 359 0.01 s 0.01 s 1 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150 s 1.5 0.01 s 0.025 25 Ien 40 Ien 0.01 Ien 0.01 Ien
THE Pe THRESHOLDS ARE DISPLAYED IN THE FORMAT: ##.## x Ien W THE THRESHOLD VALUE IS IN WATT [W] SECONDARY. THE Pe> THRESHOLD SETTING VALUE IS 20 W AND IS TO BE SET FROM THE FRONT PANEL KEYPAD: IF Ien = 1A, THE INTERNAL RELAY SETTING VALUE WILL BE EQUAL TO 1 x 20 = 20W. IF Ien = 5A, THE INTERNAL RELAY SETTING VALUE WILL BE EQUAL TO 5 x 20 = 100W.
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 22/40 8.6 Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127) 8.6.1 Undercurrent Phase current: Fundamental only
Protection Setting Ranges Setting ranges [37] Under Current I< ? I< tI< Min Yes or No 0.1 In 0s 1 In 150 s 0.01 In 0.01 s Max Step
8.7
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127) Phase current: NOTE: Fundamental only When I2> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2In.
8.7.1
Protection Setting Ranges Setting ranges [46] Neg.Seq. OC I2> ? I2> Delay Type tI2> I2> TMS I2> Reset Delay Type I2> RTMS I2> tReset I2>> ? I2>> tI2>> I2>>> ? I2>>> tI2>>> Min No or Yes 0.1 In 25 In 0.01 In Max Step
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 DT or IDMT 0.025 0.04 s No or Yes 0.5 In 0s No or Yes 0.5 In 0s 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01s 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01s 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 150s 1.5 0.01s 0.025
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 8.8 Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127) 8.8.1 Phase Current: RMS
Protection Setting Ranges [49] Therm. OL Therm. OL ? I Te k Trip Alarm ? Alarm Setting ranges No or Yes 0.1 In 1 mn 1 50% No or Yes 50% 200% 1% 3.2 In 200 mn 1,5 200% 0.01 1mn 0.01 1%
8.9
Undervoltage Protection (P127) Phase or phase to phase voltage Thresholds selection mode Fundamental only AND or OR (*)
8.9.1
Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Setting ranges [27] Phase Undervoltage 57130V Input voltage U< ? U< tU< U<< ? U<< tU<< 220480V Input voltage. U< ? U< tU< U<< ? U<< tU<< Min Max Step
Cortec code: P127-AX---X No or AND or OR 2V 0s No or AND or OR 2V 0s 130 V 600 s 0.1 V 0.01 s 130 V 600 s 0.1 V 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-BX---X No or AND or OR 10 V 0s No or AND or OR 10 V 0s 480 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s 480 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 24/40 8.10 Overvoltage Protection (P127) 8.10.1 Phase or phase to phase voltage Thresholds selection mode Fundamental only AND or OR (*)
Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Setting ranges [59] Phase Overvoltage 57130V Input voltage U> ? U> tU> U>> ? U>> tU>> 220480V Input voltage. U> ? U> tU> U>> ? U>> tU>> (*) OR AND Min Max Step
Cortec code: P127-AX---X No or AND or OR 2V 0s No or AND or OR 2V 0s 260 V 600 s 0.1 V 0.01 s 260 V 260 s 0.1 V 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-BX---X No or AND or OR 10 V 0s No or AND or OR 10 V 0s 960 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s 960 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
trip caused by one or two or three phase values exceeding the threshold. trip caused by three phase values exceeding the threshold.
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 8.11 Under/over frequency Function (P127) 8.11.1 Phase or phase to phase voltage Fundamental only
Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Setting ranges OP PARAMETERS Frequency [81] Frequency F1? F1 tF1 F2? F2 tF2 F3? F3 tF3 F4? F4 tF4 F5? F5 tF5 F6? F6 tF6 Min 50 Hz Min 81> or 81< or No 45,1 Hz 0s 81> or 81< or No 45,1 Hz 0s 81> or 81< or No 45,1 Hz 0s 81> or 81< or No 45,1 Hz 0s 81> or 81< or No 45,1 Hz 0s 81> or 81< or No 45,1 Hz 0s 64,9 Hz 600 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 64,9 Hz 600 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 64,9 Hz 600 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 64,9 Hz 600 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 64,9 Hz 600 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s 64,9 Hz 600 s 0.01 Hz 0.01 s Max 60 Hz Max Step N.A Step
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 26/40 8.12 Over power Function (P127) 8.12.1 Phase or phase to phase voltage Fundamental only
Protection Setting Ranges (P127) Setting ranges [32] Phase Power 57130V Input voltage P>? P> tP> P>>? P>> tP>> 220480V Input voltage P>? P> tP> P>>? P>> tP>> (*) Min Max Step
Cortec code: P127AA or P127BA or P127CA Yes or No 1 W*k (*) 0s Yes or No 1 W*k (*) 0s 10000 W*k (*) 150 s 1 W*k (*) 0.01 s 10000 W*k (*) 150 s 1 W*k (*) 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127AB or P127BA or P127CA Yes or No 4 W*k (*) 0s Yes or No 4 W*k (*) 0s 40000 W*k (*) 150 s 1 W*k (*) 0.01 s 40000 W*k (*) 150 s 1 W*k (*) 0.01 s
k = 1 if TC secondary ration = 1A k = 5 if TC secondary ration = 5A
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 8.13 Residual Overvoltage Protection 8.13.1 Residual voltage: Fundamental only
Protection Setting Ranges Setting range [59] Residual Overvoltage 57130V Input voltage. Ue>>>> ? Ue>>>> tUe>>>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>>>> ? Ue>>>> tUe>>>> ATTENTION: Min Max Step
Cortec code: P127-AX---X No or Yes 1V 0s 260 V 600 s 0.1 V 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-BX---X No or Yes 5V 0s 960 V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
THE Ue THRESHOLD SETTINGS DEPEND ON THE ADOPTED CONNECTION OPTION. IN CONFIGURATION/GENERAL OPTIONS MENU OF THE P127 RELAY THE Ve INPUT CAN BE SET DIRECTLY FROM A VT (I.E. FROM A DELTA VT) OR CAN BE DERIVED FROM THE MEASUREMENT OF THE THREE PHASE TO NEUTRAL VOLTAGES (3VPN). IN THIS CASE THE Ue IS CALCULATED AS:
Ue = 1 x(UA + UB + UC) 3
THE SETTING OF THE Ue THRESHOLDS MUST TAKE THE ABOVE FORMULA IN ACCOUNT. 8.14 Multishot Autoreclose Function (P126 & P127) Main shots: 4 independent shots. External logic inputs: 6 inputs (CB opened signal, CB closed signal, manual opening command, manual closing command, blocking order, cycle activation). Internal programmable trigger from phase and earth fault on all re-closing cycles. External trigger from logic input. Inhibit time on manual closing. Programmable dead times and reclaim time setting. Maximum CB closing control equal to 5s (+t_Pulse setting).
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 28/40 8.14.1 Multishot Autoreclose Settings Setting range [79] Autoreclose Autoreclose ? Ext. CB Fail ? Ext. CB Fail time Aux1 ((I>) ? Aux2 (Ie>) ? Ext Block ? Dead time tD1 tD2 tD3 tD4 Reclaim time tR Inhib time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tPe/Iecos> tPe/Iecos>> tAux1 tAux2 0.02 s 0 0 4321 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 600 s 4 4 Settings 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0 or 1 or 2 0.02 s 600 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 300 s 300 s 600 s 600 s Min Yes or No Yes or No 0.01 s Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No 600 s Max
Step
0.01 s
0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s 1 1
0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip 1 = trip on pick up of the protection element, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on pick up of the protection element also if this has been set in the CRTL/Trip commands/Trip menu 8.14.1.1 Further timing Fixed time out for lacking of CB opening signal on trip protection: Time out for lacking of CB closing signal on close control after dead time: tClose Pulse(*): from 0.1 to 5.00 s in stepds of 0.01 s (*) Setting available in CB monitoring menu. 2.00 s at 50 Hz 1.67 s at 60 Hz
9.
9.1
AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Cold Load Pickup (P126 & P127) Setting range Cold Load PU Cold Load PU ? Level tCL Min Yes or No 100% 0.1 s 500% 3600 s 1% 0.1 s Max Step
9.2
Inrush blocking (P127) Inrush Block Setting range Min Inrush Block Inrush H2 ration Inrush tReset Block I> Block I>> Block I>>> Block Ie> Block Ie>> Block I2> Block I2>> Yes or No 10 % 0 ms No No No No No No No 35 % 2s Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0,1 % 0,1 s Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Max Step
9.3
51V function (P127) The 51V function means the control of the overcurrent elements by the monitoring of the phase voltage; !The settings involved are listed below. The VTS function can also block the 51V. Settings 51V Voltage range 57-130V (U<OR V2>) & I>> V2> (U<<OR V2>>) & I>>> V2> Voltage range 220-480V (U<OR V2>) & I>> V2> (U<<OR V2>>) & I>>> V2> VTS Blocks 51V VTS Alarm Min Yes 3V Yes 3V Min Yes 20V Yes 20V Yes Yes Max No 200V No 200V Max No 720V No 720V No No Step Yes/No 0.1V Yes/No 0.1V Step Yes/No 0.5V Yes/No 0.5V Yes/No Yes/No
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 30/40 9.4 Auxiliary Timers (P126 & P127) Auxiliary timers: 4 assigned to the logic inputs Aux1, Aux2,Aux3, Aux4 Setting range Auxiliary timers tAux1 tAux2 tAux3 tAux4 9.5 Min 0 0 0 0 Max 200 s 200 s 200 s 200 s
Step 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s
Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127) Principle used: Functionality available for: I2/I1 (IA or IB or IC) > 10% In
9.5.1
Broken Conductor Detection Setting Ranges Setting range Broken Conductor Brkn.Cond ? Ratio I2/I1 Brkn.Cond Time tBC Min Yes or No 20% 0s 100% 14400 s 1% 1s Max Step
9.6 9.6.1
Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127) CB Fail Setting Ranges Setting range CB Fail CB Fail ? I< BF CB Fail Time tBF Block I> Block Ie> Min Yes or No 0.02 In 0s No No 1In 10 s Yes Yes 0.01 In 0.01 s Yes or No Yes or No Max Step
9.7 9.7.1
Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127) Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges Setting range TC Supervision TC Supervision ? t trip circuit tSUP Min Yes or No 0.1 s 10 s 0.1 s Max Step
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 9.8 9.8.1 Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P126 & P127) Setting Ranges CB Supervision Setting range Min CB Open Svision? CB Open time CB Close Svision? CB Close time CB Open Alarm ? CB Open NB Amps(n) ? Amps(n) n tOpen Pulse(*) tClose Pulse(*) Yes or No 0.05 s Yes or No 0.05 s Yes or No 0 Yes or No 0 E6 A 1 0.10 s 0.10 s 4000 E6 A 2 5s 5s 50000 1s 1s Max
Step
0.01 s
0.01 s
1E6 A 1 0.01 s 0.01 s
(*) Note: The tOpen/Close Pulse is available in the P125 for the Local /Remote functionality 9.9 9.9.1 SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P126 & P127) Setting Ranges SOTF Setting range Min SOTF? t SOTF I>> I>>> 9.10 Logic Equation (P126 & P127) The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow customization of the product based on customer application. Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used (from A to H). Every result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs. Up to 16 operands can be used (from 00 to 15). Within operands, there are two parts: (1/2) : logical gates (NOT, OR, AND, NOT AND, NOT OR) (2/2) : signals (I>, tI>>, Input1 etc) Yes or No 0 ms Yes or No Yes or No 500 ms 10ms Max Step
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 32/40 9.10.1 Timer Setting Ranges Setting range logic equat T delay EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset EQU. E Toperat EQU. E Treset EQU. F Toperat EQU. F Treset EQU. G Toperat EQU. G Treset EQU. H Toperat EQU. H Treset 9.10.2 Available logical gates Logical gates NOT Availability (1/2) A00 B00 C00 D00 E00 F00 G00 H00 OR (by default) AND AND NOT OR NOT A01 to A15 B01 to B15 C01 to C15 D01 to D15 E01 to E15 F01 to F15 G01 to G15 H01 to H15 Min 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s Max 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s
Step 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 9.10.3 Available signals
With the Logic Equations submenu, 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation: TEXT I> I>> I>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> t Aux 1 t Aux 2 t Aux 3 t Aux 4 I2> I2>> tI2> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Thermal Alarm Therm Trip I< tI< tBC U> tU> U>> tU>> U< Signals (2/2) Instantaneous first phase threshold Instantaneous second phase threshold Instantaneous third phase threshold Time delayed first phase threshold Time delayed second phase threshold Time delayed third phase threshold Instantaneous first earth threshold Instantaneous second earth threshold Instantaneous third earth threshold Time delayed first earth threshold Time delayed second earth threshold Time delayed third earth threshold First earth wattmetric alarm threshold Time delayed first earth wattmetric trip threshold Second earth wattmetric alarm threshold Time delayed second earth wattmetric trip threshold Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 3 Copy of the status of the Logic Input delayed by t Aux 4 Instantaneous first phase negative sequence threshold Instantaneous second phase negative sequence threshold Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st threshold) Time delayed negative phase sequence (2nd threshold) Third alarm threshold for negative sequence overcurrent Time delayed third trip threshold for negative sequence overcurrent Thermal alarm output signal Trip on Thermal overload Instantaneous undercurrent threshold Time delayed undercurrent Time delayed broken conductor Instantaneous first overvoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed first overvoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous second overvoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed second overvoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous first undervoltage threshold (P127)
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 34/40 TEXT tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> 79 Trip P> tP> P>> tP>> F1 tF1 F2 tF2 F3 tF3 F4 tF4 F5 tF5 F6 tF6 VTS Signals (2/2)
Time delayed first undervoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous second undervoltage threshold (P127) Time delayed second undervoltage threshold (P127) Instantaneous threshold for residual overvoltage Time delayed trip threshold for residual overvoltage Autoreclose final trip Instaneous first directional power trip threshold (P127) Time delayed first directional power trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous second directional power trip threshold (P127) Time delayed second directional power trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous first frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed first frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous second frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed second frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous third frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed third frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous fourth frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed fourth frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous fifth frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed fifth frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous sixth frequency trip threshold (P127) Time delayed sixth frequency trip threshold (P127) Instantaneous VTS output signal (P127)
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 9.10.4 An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below
I< tAUX 1(input1) &

5 sec
1 tAUX 2(input2)
10 sec
Output
P0717ENa
AUTOMAT. CTRL Logic Equations Equation A T OPERATE = T RESET = Equation A.00 =
5.00s 10.00s I<
Equation A.01 AND NOT tAux1 Equation A.02 OR tAux2 Equation A.03 OR Equation A.04 OR Equation A.05 OR Equation A.06 OR Equation A.07 OR Null Null Null Null Null
Equation A.08..A.14 OR Null Equation A.15 OR Null
10.
10.1
RECORDING FUNCTIONS (P126 & P127)

Event Records Capacity Time-tag Triggers 250 events 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input change of state Setting changes Self test events
10.2
Fault Records Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 25 faults 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Fault date Protection thresholds Setting Group AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault measurements
10.3
Instantaneous recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 5 starting informations (instantaneous) 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold date, hour origin (any protection alarm) length (duration of the instantaneous trip yes or no
10.4 10.4.1
Disturbance Records Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges Disturbance Records Triggers Data P126 P127
Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic input, remote command AC input channels digital input and output states frequency value Default value P126 P127 2.5 0.5 ON TRIP Setting range Min 0.1 0.1 Max 3 3 Step 0.1 0.1
Pre-Time Post-Time Disturb rec Trig Trigger
2.5 0.5 ON TRIP
ON TRIP or ON INST.
Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input Remote command
11.
Type Port
COMMUNICATION
Relay position Physical Link Screened twister pair Screened twister pair Connectors Screws or snap-on SubD 9 pin female connector Data Rate 300 to 38400 baud (programmable) 300 to 38400 baud (programmable) Protocol ModBus RTU, , IEC60870-5-103, DNP3 ModBus RTU
RS485 Rear port
RS232 Front port
12.
12.1
CURVES
General Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is (general threshold), the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of 0.05Is).
12.1.1
Inverse Time Curves: The first stage thresholds for phase (earth) overcurrent can be selected with an inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula. In all, there are eleven IDMT characteristics available. The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is:
K t = T + L (I I S ) 1
Where: t K I Is L T Operation time Factor (see table) Value of measured current Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) Factor (see table) ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC and RECT curves) Time multiplier setting from 0.025 to 1.5 Standard AREVA IEC IEC IEC AREVA C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE RECT K factor 0.05 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.02394 0.0515 5.95 19.61 28.2 45900 factor 0.04 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 0.02 2 2 2 5.6 L factor 0 0 0 0 0 0.01694 0.114 0.18 0.491 0.1217 0
Type of curve Short time inverse Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Short time inverse Moderately Inverse Long time inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Rectifier protection
The RI curve has the following definition:

t= K 1 0 .339 0.236 I Is
( )
K setting is from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05. The equation is valid for 1.1 I/Is 20.
Technical Data MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 12.1.2 Reset Timer
The first stage thresholds for phase and earth overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrent and wattmetric/IeCos are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset". It may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse definite minimum time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays that have inherent reset time delays. The second and third stage thresholds for the wattmetric/IeCos protection and earth fault overcurrent protection only have a definite time reset. A possible situation where the reset timer may be used is to reduce fault clearance times where intermittent faults occur. An example may occur in a cable with plastic insulation. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts the cable insulation, which then reseals after clearance, thereby eliminating the cause for the fault. This process repeats itself to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is set to minimum the P125, P126 and P127 relays will be repeatedly reset and will not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the reset timer hold function the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is:
K t = T 1 (I I S )
Where: t K I Is T Reset time Factor (see table)
Value of the measured current Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) Factor (see table) Reset time multiplier (RTMS) setting between 0.025 and 1.5. Standard C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K factor 2.261 4.850 5.950 21.600 29.100 factor 2 2 2 2 2
Type of curve Short time inverse Moderately inverse Long time inverse Very inverse Extremely Inverse
P12y/EN TD/A63 Page 40/40 12.2 Thermal Overload Curves The thermal time characteristic is given by:
e
t
(I (kxIFLC ) ) (I Ip )
= Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment = Largest phase current = Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip') = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC = Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
Where: t
I IFLC k IP
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold". Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in Technical Data. The mathematical formula applicable to MiCOM Relays is the following
K - t Trip = Te In K trip
Where: t Trip Te K Ieq I> k
= Time to trip (in seconds) = Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds) = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k I> with: = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier = Factor associated to the thermal state formula
alarm = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then =0.3 trip = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then trip = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus. The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
Ieq +1 = kxI >
t t 1 e Te + e Te
being calculated every 100ms.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN AP/A63
APPLICATION GUIDE
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 1/86
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
INTRODUCTION
Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines MiCOM Directional Relays
5
5 6
2.
2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.7 2.8 2.8.1
CURRENT PROTECTIONS & AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS

[67/50/51] Directional/non Directional Three Phase Overcurrent Protection (P127) [67] Directional Overcurrent protection Description Synchronous Polarisation I>I>>I>>> Interlock Setting Guidelines Directional three phase overcurrent applications [50/51] Three phase Overcurrent protection (P126 P127) Instantaneous Function [50/51] I>I>>I>>> Interlock Three phase overcurrent protection applications Directional Earth Fault Protection (P125, P126 & P127) General Setting Guidelines An application of 67N in an Insulated Systems Wattmetric (Pe) Characteristic Application Considerations Iecos protection Where use Iecos and where use Pe. Application of a MiCOM P125 relay as a Single Element Power Relay Overview Relay Connection Relay Characteristic Angle Setting Replacing an MWTU11/TWL1111 Reverse Power / Forward Power Relay. Application of the Power Function Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127) Time Constant Characteristic Mathematical Formula Applicable to MiCOM Relays: Setting Guidelines Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127) Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127) I2 Thresholds Setting Guidelines
8
8 8 8 12 12 13 14 16 16 16 17 19 20 21 23 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 32 32
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.5 3.5.1 3.6 3.6.1
VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
Setting for the Voltage Connections Voltage Measurement displayed Consideration on the measurement menu (59N) Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection (P125, P126 & P127) Setting Guidelines (27) Undervoltage Protection (P127) Setting Guidelines (59) Overvoltage Protection (P127) Setting Guidelines
34
34 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4
OTHER PROTECTION FUCNTION INTEGRATED IN P127

Under/Over frequency (81 U/O) Description HMI description 3 phases directional Overpower (32) Description Power Measurement displayed Overview HMI description
38
38 38 38 39 39 39 41 42
5.
5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11
DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P126 & P127)
Available Settings Functionality Activation ARC setting and functionality Re-closer Lockout Inputs setting Output realys for the ARC (Output relays submenu) Leds for the ARC (Led submenu) ARC Measurements Autoreclose Setting Guidelines Number Of Shots Dead Timer Setting Fuse application
43
45 46 46 46 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 54
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.12.1 6.13 6.13.1 6.13.2 6.14 6.14.1 6.14.2 6.15 6.15.1 6.15.2 6.16 6.16.1 6.16.2 6.16.3 6.17
AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Trip Commands Latch relays Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127) Setting Guidelines Example Setting Inrush Blocking (P127 only) Cold Load Pick-up (P126 & P127) Air Conditioning / Resistive Heating Loads Motor Feeders Earth Fault Protection Applied to Transformers 51V and VTS features Auxiliary Timers (P125, P126 & P127) Selective Scheme Logic (P126 & P127)
56
56 56 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 59 60 61
Blocking logic function (Blocked directional/non directional overcurrent protection) 62 Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (P126 & P127) Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features (P126 & P127) Setting Guidelines Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127) Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Mechanism Breaker Fail Settings Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127) MiCOM P126 & P127 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism External Resistor R1 Calculation Switch onto Fault Protection & Trip on Reclose (SOTF/TOR) (P126 & P127) General SOTF/TOR description Local/Remote conditioning (P125, P126 & P127) General Local/remote conditioning by logical input Settings Logic equations (P126 & P127) 63 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 69 70 70 70 72 72 72 72 74
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4
RECORDS (P125, P126 & P127)

Event Records Fault Records Instantaneous Recorder Disturbance Records
76
76 76 76 76
8.
8.1 8.2
ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P126 & P127)

Rolling demand Peak value demand
77
77 78
9.
9.1.1 9.1.2
SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P125, P126 & P127)

Setting group change by digital input Priority
79
79 79
10.
10.1
MEASUREMENTS
Power and Energy Measurements (P127)
80
80
11.
11.1 11.2
LOGIC INPUTS AND LOGIC OUTPUTS

Logic Inputs Logic Outputs
82
82 82
12. 13.
13.1 13.2 13.3
MAINTENANCE MODE CT REQUIREMENTS

Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection
83 84
84 84 84
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines The secure and reliable transmission and distribution of power within a network is heavily dependent upon the integrity of underground cables and overhead lines, which link the various sections of the network together. Therefore the associated protection system must also provide both secure and reliable operation. The most common fault conditions, on underground cables and overhead lines, are short circuit faults. These faults may occur between the phase conductors but will most often involve one or more phase conductor becoming short-circuited to earth. Faults caused by short circuits require the fastest faulted conductor clearance times but at the same time allowing for suitable co-ordination with other downstream protection devices. Fault sensitivity is an issue common to all voltage levels. For transmission systems, towerfooting resistance can be high. Also, high resistance faults might be prevalent where lines pass over sandy or rocky terrain. Fast, discriminative faulted conductor clearance is required for these fault conditions. The effect of fault resistance is more pronounced on lower voltage systems, resulting in potentially lower fault currents, which in turn increases the difficulty in the detection of high resistance faults. In addition, many distribution systems use earthing arrangements designed to limit the passage of earth fault current. Earthed methods as such as using resistance, Petersen coil or insulated systems make the detection of earth faults arduous. Special protection equipment is often used to overcome these problems. Nowadays, the supply continuity in the energy distribution is of paramount importance. On overhead lines most of faults are transient or semi-permanent in nature. In order to increase system availability multi-shot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements. For permanent faults it is essential that only the faulted section of the network is isolated. High-speed, discriminative fault clearance is therefore a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network. Power transformers are installed at all system voltage levels and have their own specific requirements with regard to protection. In order to limit the damage incurred by a transformer under fault conditions, fast clearance of the windings with phase to phase and phase to earth faults is a primary requirement. Damage to electrical plant equipment such as transformers, cables and lines may also be incurred by excessive loading conditions, which leads directly to overheating of the equipment and subsequent degradation of their insulation. To protect against such fault conditions, protective devices require thermal characteristics too. Uncleared faults, arising either from the failure of the associated protection system or of the switchgear itself, must also be considered. The protection devices concerned should be fitted with logic to deal with breaker failure and relays located upstream must be able to provide adequate back-up protection for such fault conditions. Other situations may arise on overhead lines, such as broken phase conductors. Traditionally, a series fault has been difficult to detect. With today's digital technology, it is now possible to design elements, which are responsive to such unbalanced system, conditions and to subsequently issue alarm and trip signals. On large networks, time co-ordination of the overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can often lead to problematic grading situations or, as is often the case, excessive fault clearance times. Such problems can be overcome by relays operating in blocked overcurrent schemes.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 6/86 1.2 MiCOM Directional Relays
MiCOM relays are a range of products from AREVA T&D Protection & Control using the latest digital technology the range includes devices designed for application to a wide range of power system plant equipment such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead lines and cables. Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order to achieve a high degree of conformity between products. One such product in the range is the directional overcurrent and directional earth fault relay. Using a wide variety of protection and automatic control functions, the MiCOM directional overcurrent relays can provide protection for many applications, including overhead lines and underground cables at transmission and distribution voltages levels. The relay also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features are accessible to the user. There are 3 available separate models: P125, P126, and P127. Since they cover a wide range of applications, they optimise installation costs. The protection and additional features of each model are summarised in the listed table below. ANSI CODES 50/51P/N 50/51 50/51N 67P 67N 51V 37 46 27/59 59N 32 32N 81U/O 49 86 79 50BF 46BC FEATURES 1 phase or earth overcurrent 3 phase overcurrent Earth overcurrent 3 phase directional overcurrent Earth fault directional overcurrent Voltage controlled overcurrent 3 phase undercurrent Negative phase sequence overcurrent Phase under/over voltage (AND 1 OR mode) Residual over voltage Directional power Wattmetric Earth Fault Under/over frequency Thermal overload Output relay latching Autoreclose Circuit breaker failure detection Broken conductor detection I2/I1 Blocking Logic Test of output relays (Maintenance) CB control Local/remote Circuit Breaker Maintenance and Trip Circuit Supervision Cold load pick up Selective relay scheme logic o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o P125 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o P126 P127
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 ANSI CODES FEATURES Inruch blocking Switch on to fault (SOFT) Phase rotation VT supervision (VTS) P125
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 7/86 P126 P127 o o o o o
The directional relays have been designed to provide more functionality in terms of protections, measuring, automatic operation and order control in any medium voltage electric network. The specific nature of these directional relays makes it possible to apply them to various applications, such as: medium voltage subscriber, cable line, overhead line etc. The earth and phase protection functions include instantaneous information and time delay information. They can operate in networks with neutral earthed by impedance, by resonant system as such as Petersen coil, in insulated system and in system with neutral earthed. The protection functions can be used in conjunction with blocking so as to optimise the performance of the protection schemes, thus reducing operating times. The delay time for the first and second stage for directional/non directional phase and earth fault protections can be chosen to be in definite or inverse delay time (IEC, ANSI/IEEE, CO, RI and RECT). Instead for the wattmetric / IeCos and inverse sequence overcurrent protection, the delay time can be chosen in definite or inverse delay time (IEC, ANSI/IEEE, CO, RI and RECT) for the first threshold only. This wide choice of characteristics of triggering times makes it possible to easily adapt these directional relays to an existing protection scheme, irrespective of other relays already installed on the network.
2.
2.1
CURRENT PROTECTIONS & AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS

[67/50/51] Directional/non Directional Three Phase Overcurrent Protection (P127) The directional/non directional overcurrent protection has three thresholds. Each threshold can operate in directional or non-directional mode; if the setting is [Yes] it operates like a typical three-phase overcurrent protection. With the setting [DIR] the relay operates like a three-phase directional overcurrent protection (only for the P127 relay), when the setting is [NO] it can not operate. The third threshold can be set to operate on the peak of the measured phase current. It compares the biggest peak value of the measured current against the setting. The peak detection is applied where a CT saturation condition occurs and the measure is not more trustworthy.
2.2 2.2.1
[67] Directional Overcurrent protection Description If a fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add directionality to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct co-ordination. Typical systems that require such protection are parallel feeders (both plain and transformer) and ring main systems, each of which are relatively common in distribution networks. In order to give directionality to an overcurrent relay, it is necessary to provide it with a suitable reference, or polarising signal. The reference generally used is the system voltage, as its angle remains relatively constant under fault conditions. The phase fault elements of the directional relay are internally polarised by the quadrature phase-phase voltages, as listed in the table below: Protected Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase
UAB
Operating Current IA IB IC
Polarising Voltage VBC VCA VAB
IA
UBC
IC
IB
UCA
P0354ENa
Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector will generally lag its nominal phase voltage by an angle dependent on the system X/R ratio. It is important that the relay operates with maximum sensitivity for currents lying in this region.

RCA
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 9/86 This is achieved by means of the relay characteristic angle (RCA) setting (also referred to as torque angle). RCA defines the angle by which the current applied to the relay must be displaced from the voltage applied to the relay to obtain maximum relay sensitivity. A programmable tripping zone with reference to relay characteristic angle (RCA) or torque angle is available.
Iph
Uph-ph
Forward tripping zone
Backward tripping zone Tripping zone is settable from: 10 to 170 in step of 1 with reference to RCA (Torque angle) RCA (Torque angle) is settable from 0 to 359 in step of 1
P0079ENa
U [V]
Non measurable angle zone
1.5
The calculation of the angle between phase voltage and phase current depends on the values for voltage and current. The close figure shows the calculation zone.
0.5
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
I [In]
P0080ENa
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 10/86 Each directional threshold consists of: Current threshold RCA angle /Torque angle and Trip boundary zone
The system voltage provides the polarisation signal, the minimum voltage operating value is 0.6V secondary for the voltage input range 57-130V and 3V for the voltage input range 220480V. The first and second thresholds can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves where their parameters are shown in the Technical Data of this Technical Guide. The third threshold can be set as definite delay time only, but can be set to work on the peak of the current measured in non-directional way. The protection elements trip when the following conditions occur: The phase current exceeds the set overcurrent threshold. The current vector lies within the trip boundary zone.
The following diagrams show the functionality for each threshold
LOGIC OF THE FIRST THRESHOLD I> FOR THE 67 PROTECTION
Rev Inst. I> .
IA & (IA^VBC) > IB & (IB^VCA) > IC & (IC^VAB) > DT/IDMT DT/IDMT
Fwd. Inst. I> Fwd. IA> on relay 2...8 Fwd. IB> on relay 2...8 Fwd. IC> on relay 2...8
DT/IDMT
Lock the timer
Blocking Logic
Fwd. Trip I>
Fwd: forward Rev: reverse
P0355ENb
LOGIC OF THE SECOND THRESHOLD I>> FOR THE 67 PROTECTION
Rev Inst. I>> .
IA & (IA^VBC) >> IB & (IB^VCA) >> IC & (IC^VAB) >>
Fwd. Inst. I>>
Lock the timer
DT/IDMT
Fwd. Trip I>>
Blocking Logic
P0356ENb
LOGIC OF THE THIRD THRESHOLD I>>> FOR THE 67 PROTECTION
Rev Inst. I>>> .
IA & (IA^VBC) >>> IB & (IB^VCA) >>> IC & (IC^VAB) >>>
Fwd. Inst. I>>>
Lock the timer
DT
Fwd. Trip I>>>
Blocking Logic
P0357ENa
The following figures show the windows where the first phase trip forward and instantaneous reverse trip can be assigned to an output relay. The same one is for the 2nd and 3rd stages. tI> 8765432 0000100 Assigning the first phase delayed forward directional overcurrent threshold (tI>) to output 4 (RL4). Setting choice: 1 is assigning an output relay; 0 no assignment. Assigning the first phase instantaneous reverse directional overcurrent (I_R>) to output 3 & 7 (RL3 & RL7). Setting choice: 1 is assigning an output relay; 0 no assignment.
I_R>
8765432 0100010
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 12/86 2.2.2 Synchronous Polarisation
The directional overcurrent elements are polarised by the line voltage (phase to phase) in quadrature to the considered phase current. The absolute phase angle of line voltages is measured every cycle and the last value is stored in the relay memory. When with close-up three phase faults the polarisation voltage is collapsed, the synchronous polarisation is switched on. The polarisation discrimination voltage value is 0.6V (fixed value) for relays with a system voltage of 57 to 130V and 3V (fixed value) for relays with a system voltage of 220 to 480V. Over this value the directional relay uses standard polarisation (the measured voltage), under this value the synchronous polarisation (stored vector) is used. The synchronous polarisation is maintained up to the restoration of an input voltage value. If the input voltage loss continues longer than 5s the directional overcurrent protection is blocked. 2.2.3 I>I>>I>>> Interlock The choice of this functionality is available when the IDMT delay trip time is chosen on the first threshold. The following figures show the window where the functionality can be or not to be assigned I> >> >>> Interlock Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes
Yes
The 2nd and 3rd threshold pickup can suspend 1st threshold output control to save selectivity Below it is shown the trend of the delay trip time of the first threshold in the both cases Yes or No.
t t
t_I>
t_I>> t_I>>> I> I>> I I> I>> I>>> I
I> >> >>>Interlock NO
I> >> >>>Interlock YES
I>
I>
I>>
I>>
I>>>
I>>>
t
P0358ENa
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.2.4 Setting Guidelines
The applied current settings for directional overcurrent relays depend on the specific application. In a parallel feeder arrangement, load current is always flowing in the nonoperating direction. Consequently the relay current setting may be less than the full load rating of the circuit, typically 50% of In. Note that the minimum setting that may be applied has to take into account the thermal rating of the relay. Some electro-mechanical directional overcurrent relays have continuous withstand ratings of only twice the applied current setting. Therefore 50% of rating was the minimum setting that had to be applied. With the latest generation relays the continuous current rating is 4 x rated current. If required it is now possible to apply much more sensitive settings. In a ring main arrangement, it is possible for load current to flow in either direction through the point where the relay is located. Consequently the current setting must be above the maximum load current, as in a standard non-directional application. The required relay characteristic angle (RCA) settings for directional relays will depend on the exact application in which they are used. For instance for plain feeders where the zero sequence source is behind the relay, a RCA of 30 should be set. The following picture shows the above examples.
90 connection, RCA 30 (lead) Plain feeder, zero sequence source behind the relay
UA
UA IA IA VBC UB
TRIP ZONE +/-90

IA fault
RCA angle: 30 VBC
UC
Normal:
UAÎA=30
UB
UC
Fault:
UAÎA=60- 80
P0359ENb
On the P127 relay, it is possible to set the relay characteristic angle (RCA) or torque angle, as it is also called, in the range of 0 to +359 in steps of 1. The trip boundary zone associated to the RCA is settable in the range from 10 to 170 in steps of 1. Further information about the setting range for the directional overcurrent protection are available in the Technical Data document.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 14/86 2.2.5 2.2.5.1 Directional three phase overcurrent applications Parallel Feeders
R1 P126 OC/EF
R2 P126 OC/EF
R3 P127 DOC/DEF OC/EF 11K F
R4 P127 DOC/DEF OC/EF
R5 P126 OC/EF
P0081ENa
TYPICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM USING PARALLEL TRANSFORMERS The above figure shows a typical distribution system using parallel power transformers. In such an application, a fault at F could result in the tripping of both relays R3 and R4, and the subsequent loss of supply to the 11kV busbar. Consequently with this system configuration, it is necessary to apply directional relays at these locations set to 'look into' their respective upstream transformers. These relays should co-ordinate with the relays R1 and R2, so that discriminative relay operation during such fault conditions is ensured. In such an application, relays R3 and R4 may commonly require non-directional overcurrent protection elements to provide protection to the 11kV busbar, in addition to providing a backup function to the overcurrent relays on the outgoing feeders (R5). Note that the above requirements outlined for parallel transformer arrangements are equally applicable for plain feeders, which are operating in parallel.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.2.5.2 Ring Main Arrangement
A particularly common arrangement within distribution networks is the ring main circuit. The primary reason for its use is to maintain supplies to consumers in the event of fault conditions occurring on the interconnecting feeders. A typical ring main with associated overcurrent protection is shown in the following figure.
2,1s
51
2,1s Load 0,1s B
67
F 1,7s 0,1s Load
51
67
Load 1,7s
67
67
0,5s
67
E 1,3s
Load
Load 1,3s Load 0,9s
67
0,5s C
67
67
67
67
0,9s
P0082ENa
TYPICAL RING MAIN WITH ASSOCIATED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION As with the previously described parallel feeder arrangement, it can be seen here that current may flow in either direction through the various relay locations. Therefore, directional overcurrent relays are again required in order to provide a discriminative protection system. The normal grading procedure for overcurrent relays protecting a ring main circuit is to open the ring at the supply point and to grade the relays first clockwise and then counterclockwise. The arrows shown at the various relay locations in above figure depict the direction for forward operation of the respective relays, i.e. in the same way as for parallel feeders, the directional relays are set to 'look into' the feeder that they are protecting. The above figure shows typical relay time settings (if definite delay time co-ordination was set), from which it can be seen that faults on the interconnections between stations are cleared without any discrimination by the relays at each end of the feeder. Again, any of the three overcurrent stages may be configured to be directional and coordinated as per the previously outlined grading procedure, noting that IDMT characteristics are selectable on the first and second stage. Note that the above requirements outlined for the parallel transformer arrangements are equally applicable for plain feeders, which are operating in parallel.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 16/86 2.3
[50/51] Three phase Overcurrent protection (P126 P127) The three phase overcurrent protection has three independent thresholds. The first and second threshold can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves where their parameters are shown in the Technical Data of this Application Guide. The third threshold can be set to operate on the peak of the measured phase current. It compares the biggest peak value of the measured current against the setting. The peak detection is applied where a CT saturation condition occurs and the measure is not more trustworthy. The logical current over-threshold functionality is defined below.
2.3.1
Instantaneous Function [50/51] As soon as a phase threshold is running, the instantaneous output associated with this threshold is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected a phase fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started.
2.3.2
I>I>>I>>> Interlock The choice of this functionality is available when the IDMT delay trip time is selected. The following figures show the window where this functionality can be or not to be actived. I> >> >>> Interlock Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT. Setting choice: No, Yes The 2nd and 3rd threshold pickup can suspend 1st threshold output control to save selectivity Below it is shown the trend of the delay trip time of the first threshold in the both cases Yes or No.
t t
Yes
t_I>
t_I>> t_I>>> I> I>> I I> I>> I>>> I
I> >> >>>Interlock NO
I> >> >>>Interlock YES
I>
I>
I>>
I>>
I>>>
I>>>
t
P0358ENa
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.3.3 Three phase overcurrent protection applications
Being P127 a three phase directional/non directional relay an overcurrent protection involves the P127 used as non directional relay and the P126. Some applications can be considered, but for indicative applications it is better to involve the blocking logic and selective functions, so an overcurrent application will be shown in the part of this TG regarding the blocking logic and selective function. The following diagrams show the functionality for each thresholds
LOGIC OF THE FIRST THRESHOLD I> FOR THE 50/51 PROTECTION
IA > IB > IC > DT/IDMT DT/IDMT
Inst. I> Fwd. IA> on relay 2...8 Fwd. IB> on relay 2...8 Fwd. IC> on relay 2...8
DT/IDMT
Lock the timer
Blocking Logic
Fwd. Trip I>
P0360ENb
LOGIC OF THE SECOND THRESHOLD I>> FOR THE 50/51 PROTECTION
IA >> IB >> IC >>
Inst. I>>
Lock the timer
DT/IDMT
Trip I>>
Blocking Logic
P0361ENb
LOGIC OF THE THIRD THRESHOLD I>>> FOR THE 50/51 PROTECTION
IA >>> IB >>> IC >>>
Inst. I>>>
Lock the timer
DT
Trip I>>>
Blocking Logic
P0362ENa
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.4 Directional Earth Fault Protection (P125, P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P125, P126, P127 relays have a directional/non directional earth fault protection. It provides three directional/non directional earth overcurrent thresholds and two wattmetric and active earth fault current thresholds. The first and second threshold can be set as definite or inverse delay time using the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO2-8, RI and RECT curves as shown in the Technical Data of the relays; for the wattmetric protection ( Pe / IeCos ) only the first threshold can be set as definite or inverse delay time, always using IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves. The directional earth fault overcurrent protection element compares the earth fault current, residual voltage with the set thresholds Ie>, Ue>, Ie>>, Ue>>, Ie>>>, Ue>>> and the relevant angle between the Ie and Ue for each threshold. Once all the following listed requirements are met the tripping command is set: thresholds for Ie and Ue are exceeded (earth fault OC protection element) Ie current vector is in the tripping area (IeÛe) Ie [mA] + Ue [V] > 18 (Ien=1A) or Ie [mA] + 5 x Ue [V] > 90 (Ien=5A) the tripping timer expires
The protection's tripping area is defined by a tripping zone settable form 10 to 170 in steps of 1 for each tripping threshold and a settable angle from 0 to 359 in steps of 1 named torque/RCA angle (IeÛe), which can be separately set for each tripping threshold and The same threshold can be set as non-directional with definite or inverse delay time. The third current threshold can be set as directional or non-directional but with only definite delay time setting. The same applies to the Pe or IeCos second threshold. The third threshold can work on the measured peak by an opportune choice in the dedicated submenu. (See the FT part of the TG) The peak detection is applied where a CT saturation condition occurs and the measure is not more trustworthy. The reset delay time for each threshold provides protection against intermittent faults.
RCA
Ue Ie
The close figure shows the forward and reverse tripping zone for the directional earth fault protection.
Forward tripping zone
Backward tripping zone

Tripping zone is settable from: 10 to 170 in step of 1 with reference to RCA (Torque angle) RCA (Torque angle) is settable from 0 to 359 in step of 1
P0083ENa
The protection element also provides a non-sensitive area to avoid instability due to small asymmetries and unbalances that can generally be present in the network system. This condition is represented by the characteristic reproduced below, where the hatched area is the tripping zone. The tripping zone is limited by the equation Ie +(k x Ue) < (k x 18). (18 is a value derived experimentally where stability is guaranteed).
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 20/86 The K factor is 1, if Ien=1A, 5 if Ien=5A.

Ie [mA]
30 25 20 15 10 5
Ue> Ue>> Ue>>> Tripping Zone Ie + Ue= 18
Ie [mA]
100 90 80
Ue> Ue>> Ue>> > Tripping Zone Ie + 5 x Ue= 90
60
Ie> Ie>> Ie>>>

5 10 15 20 25 30
40 20
Ie> Ie>> Ie>> >

5 10 15 20 25 30
Ue [V]
P0068ENa
Ue [V]
P0067ENa
Ien=1A
Ien=5A
The directional earth fault element needs a suitable voltage supply to provide the necessary polarisation. (See the Technical data for further information) The polarising signal must be representative of the earth fault condition. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, and this quantity is used to polarise directional earth fault elements. The P127 relay can derive this voltage internally from the 3 phase voltage inputs when the VT connection option 3Vpn is set. It can also be measured directly by a VT transformer when the VT connection option 2Vpp+Vr (two phase to phase) or 2Vpn+Vr (two phase to neutral) is set. The P125 and P126 measures this voltage directly from a broken delta or single VT. 2.4.1 General Setting Guidelines When setting the relay characteristic/torque angle for the three phase directional overcurrent element, a positive angle setting was specified. This was due to the fact that we consider as polarising voltage, the phase voltage value in quadrature of the current under fault conditions. With directional earth fault protection, the residual current under fault conditions lies at an angle lagging the polarising residual earth fault voltage. The following listed angle settings are recommended to fix the right direction of the earth fault for the various earthed systems. Resistance earthed systems Insulated systems Petersen Coil system Transmission Systems (solidly earthed) 180 270 200 90-120
The setting ranges for directional/non-directional earth fault and wattmetric protection (Pe/IeCos) can be found in the FT and TD chapters of the technical guide.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.4.2 An application of 67N in an Insulated Systems
The advantage with an insulated power system is that during a single phase to earth fault condition, no high earth fault current will flow. Consequently, it is possible to maintain power flow on the system even with an earth fault condition present. However, this advantage is offset by the fact that the resultant steady state and transient over-voltages on the healthy phases can be very high. In general insulated systems will only be used in low or medium voltage networks where it does not prove too costly to provide the necessary insulation against such over-voltages. Higher system voltages would normally be solidly earthed or earthed via a low impedance. Operational advantages may be obtained by the use of insulated systems. However, it is still essential that detection of the earth fault condition is achieved. This is not possible if standard current operated earth fault protection equipment is used. One possibility for earth fault detection is by applying a residual over-voltage protection device. This functionality is provided by the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays. However, fully discriminative earth fault protection on this type of system can only be achieved by earth fault protection element. This protection element is included in directional relays MiCOM P125, P126 & P127. It is essential that a core balance CT is used for high sensitive earth fault detection. This eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved.
A B C
Ia1 Ib1
IR1
-jXc1 IH1 Ia2 Ib2
IR2
-jXc2 Ia3 Ib3 IH1+IH2+IH3 IH2
IR3
-jXc3 IH3 IH1+ IH2
IR3=-(Ia1+Ib1+Ia2+Ib2)+Ia3+Ib3-(Ia3+Ib3) IR3=-(IH1+IH2)+IH3-IH3 P0363ENa
From above figure and the vector diagram below it can be seen that the relays on the healthy feeders see the unbalance in the charging currents on their own feeder. The relay on the faulted feeder, however, sees the charging current from the rest of the system [IH1 and IH2 in this case], with its own feeders charging current [IH3] being cancelled out.
UA
UC UAf
UB Vr=3Ve
IH1+IH2 Ia1+Ia2
270
O'
Ib1+Ib2 TRIP ZONE
IR3=-(IH1+IH2)+IH3-IH3 A setting of Torque(RCA) angle of 270 shifts the center of the characteristic to here
P0364ENa
UBf
Referring to the vector diagram, it can be seen that the C phase to earth fault causes the phase voltages on the healthy phases to rise by a factor of
3.
The A phase charging current (Ia), is then shown to be leading the resultant A phase voltage by 90. Likewise, the IB phase charging current leads the resultant voltage Vb by 90. The unbalance current detected by a core balance current transformer on the healthy feeders can be seen as the vector addition of Ia1 and Ib1 (Ia2 and Ib2), giving a residual current which lies at exactly 90 anticipating the polarising voltage (Vr=3Ve). The vector diagram indicates that the residual currents on the healthy and faulted feeders, IH1& IH2 and IR3 respectively, are in opposite direction to each other (180). A directional element could therefore be used to provide discriminative earth fault protection. If the polarising voltage of this element, equal to 3Ve, is shifted through +270, the residual current seen by the relay on the faulted feeder will lie within the operate region (Trip Zone) of the directional characteristic. As previously stated, the required RCA setting for the sensitive earth fault protection when applied to insulated systems, is 270.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.4.3 Wattmetric (Pe) Characteristic
The P125, P126 and P127 relays include the zero sequence power measurement function. They also offer the possibility to choose between a Wattmetric (Pe) protection and IeCos (active component of the earth fault current) protection functionality mode. The following figure shows the characteristic tripping zone for the wattmetric protection.
Pe/IeCos
Tripping zone
Pe> Pe>> IeCos> IeCos>>
Q/IeSin
P0365ENa
In the following formula the power thresholds in the relay menu are called Pe> & Pe>>. The Pe> and Pe>> settings are calculated as: Vres x Ires x Cos (f fc) = 9 x Ve x Ie x Cos (f fc) Where: f fc Vres Ires Ve Ie = angle between the polarising voltage (Vres) and the residual current = relay characteristic angle (RCA/torque angle) = residual voltage = residual current = zero sequence voltage = zero sequence current
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 24/86 2.4.3.1 Setting Guidelines for Pe Thresholds The Pe thresholds are displayed in the format: ##.## x Ien W
In this formula the ##.## setting value is multiplied by the setting value of the Ien. The threshold value is expressed in Watt secondary. Example: The Pe> threshold is to be set from the relay front panel and the setting value is 20W. Ien = 1A, the internal relay setting value will be equal to 20 x 1 = 20W. To set the thresholds for the Pe (Wattmetric/IeCos) protection the relay will display the following menu windows. Pe> 20 x Ien W Displays the threshold setting value. The Pe> setting range is: High sensitivity current measuring: 0.001 to 1 In For input range 57-130V from 0.2 to 20 x Ien W in steps of 0.02 x Ien W For input range 220-480V from 1 to 80 x Ien W in steps of 0.1 The IeCos> setting range is from 0.002 to 1 Ien in steps of 0.001 Medium sensitivity current measuring: 0.01 to 8 In For input range 57-130V from 1 to 160 x Ien W in steps of 0.1 For input range 220-480V from 4 to 640 x Ien W in steps of 0.5 The IeCos> setting range is from 0.01 to 8 In in steps of 0.005 Low sensitivity current measuring: 0.1 to 40 In For input range 57-130V from 10 to 800 x Ien W in steps of 1 For input range 220-480V from 40 to 3200 x Ien W in steps of 5 The IeCos> setting range is from 0.1 to 25 Ien in steps of 0.01
The same procedure is to be applied for setting the second Pe>> threshold. For the settings of the trip delay time see the FT chapter of the TG)
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.4.4 Application Considerations
The protection Pe> and Pe>> require relay current and voltage connections to be actived. The measurement of the Pe depends on the voltage wiring of the relay. In case of 3Vpn wiring the Ve will be equal to Ve= 1/3(Va+VB+VC) in the other insertions way the applied voltage to the relay is directly used to calculate the Pe. Referring to the relevant application diagram for the P125, P126 and P127 relays, it should be installed such that its direction for forward operation is 'looking into' the protected feeder i.e. away from the busbar, with the appropriate RCA . Resistance earthed systems Insulated systems Petersen Coil system Transmission Systems (solidly earthed) 180 270 200 90-120
As illustrated in the relay application diagram, it is usual for the earth fault element to be driven from a core balance current transformer. This eliminates the possibility of spill current that may arise from slight mismatches between residually connected line CTs. It also enables a much lower CT ratio to be applied, thereby allowing the required protection sensitivity to be more easily achieved. 2.4.5 Iecos protection The Iecos protection follows the same concepts of the Pe protection. The difference is that the thresholds take in account the active component of the earth fault current. The setting of the RCA follows the above listed table. 2.4.6 Where use Iecos and where use Pe. The wattmetric protection Pe/Iecos is almost used in the Petersen Coil systems. In a Petersen Coil scheme during a fault we have a resistive current and an inductive current. The resistive current is constant because the residual voltage is always present; the inductive current is the summation of the capacitive contribution of the healthy line and the reactive contribution of the fault line. In this situation is difficult to discriminate the line and detect the fault current value because the capacitive and reactive are of opposite sign. Since the residual voltage is present to the parallel between the coil and resistance a wattmetric protection is used to be sure to open the fault line. The unique resistive present component depends on the fault line. The discriminative for the using of Pe or Iecos protection is the fault current value and the relative fault operating boundary. In some applications, the residual current on the healthy feeder can lie just inside the operating boundary following a fault condition. The residual current for the faulted feeder lies close to the operating boundary. In this case, a correct discrimination is achieved by means of an Iecos characteristic, as the faulted feeder will have a large active component of residual current, whilst the healthy feeder will have a small value. For insulated earth applications, it is common to use the Iesin characteristic that can be obtained by the setting of the characteristic angle to 90 or 270.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 26/86 2.5 2.5.1
Application of a MiCOM P125 relay as a Single Element Power Relay Overview The MiCOM P125 relay is a single phase relay designed for stand alone directional earth fault protection. This relay incorporates both an IeCos and a Zero Sequence Power element. These elements can be configured to provide a single phase power measurement or alternatively a sensitive directional overcurrent characteristic similar to that of the MWTU11/TWL1111 Reverse Power relay. Using a MiCOM P125 relay as a stand alone power relay provides a wide setting range, the setting range available is dependent on the CT range ordered. The table below outlines the settings available for each of the voltage and CT input ranges. Analogue Input CT Range P125AA P125AB P125BA P125BB P125CA P125CB 0.002 1 0.01 8 0.1 40 VT Range 57 130 220 - 480 57 130 220 - 480 57 130 220 - 480 Setting Range (p.u.) Pe 10 800W 40 3200W 1 60W 4 640W 0.2 20W 1 80W 0.002 1 0.01 8 Ie Cos 0.1 40
Flexible connection arrangements allow for phase to phase or phase to ground connection of the polarising voltage, a wide range of angle settings allows the relay to operate for Watts or Vars, Import or export. The VT inputs for the MiCOM P125 relay are rated 57 to 130 Vac or 220 480 Vac (Selected at time of order) these ranges make the relay suitable for connection to a VT secondary or direct connection to a 415V systems. 2.5.2 Relay Connection The relay setting angle which is discussed in further detail below allows the user to customise the VT connection to suit the primary plant, available VT secondaries and the protection philosophy of the customer. The VT connection can be made phase to phase or phase to ground using the connection table below For simplicity the connection has been made so as a reverse power setting will require an angle of 180 degrees. Polarising Voltage Leading Subscript (Eg Va-n) Va-n Vb-n Vc-n Va-b Vb-c Vc-a 40 39 Terminals Laging Subscript (Eg Va-n)
One of the possible line CT connection is shown below, The CT input can be connected to any available phase CT, (A, B or C). 2.5.3 Relay Characteristic Angle Setting Below is a table of some of the possible settings to achieve various protection functions for different CT and VT connections, the settings below are with reference to the connections outlined above. Function Active Power Import Voltage Va-n Vb-n Vc-n Va-b Vb-c Vc-a Reactive Power Import* Va-n Vb-n Vc-n Va-b Vb-c Vc-a Active Power Export Va-n Vb-n Vc-n Va-b Vb-c Vc-a Current Ia Ib Ic Ic Ia Ib Ia Ib Ic Ic Ia Ib Ia Ib Ic Ic Ia Ib 90 0 180 90 270 180 Angle Setting
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 28/86 Reactive Power Export* Va-n Vb-n Vc-n Va-b Vb-c Vc-a *Refers to lagging Vars import and export
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Ia Ib Ic Ic Ia Ib 0 270
Pe/IeCos
Tripping zone
Pe> Pe>> IeCos> IeCos>>
Q/IeSin
P0365ENa
2.5.4
Replacing an MWTU11/TWL1111 Reverse Power / Forward Power Relay. The MWTU11/TWL1111 was not strictly a power measuring relay. The relay operated using an Icos characteristic. Provided enough voltage was present to polarise the measuring element, a 1% setting on a 1A relay would pickup at 10mA independent of the voltage magnitude applied. By selecting the 0.01 to 8Ien, model number MiCOM P125B, A setting range of 1 to 100% of the nominal current in 0.1% steps is available.
2.5.5
Application of the Power Function The standard configuration of the MiCOM P125 when set to use the wattmetric earth fault protection can measure the zero sequence power, the connection for this can be found in the sales publication and service manual. By adopting the connection above the relay can measure the phase current and phase to phase, or phase to ground voltage, the operate quantity when using these connections is a single phase power. As power protection is generally required to operate for balanced three phase conditions basing the protection on a single phase measured quantity is of no consequence. When using the Power Function of the relay (Pe) care must be taken when selecting the relay range. If the MiCOM P125CA relay is considered and is connected phase to ground with 1A CT secondaries. A 0.2W setting would be equivalent to 0.2/63.5 Watts, 0.3% of the nominal load.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.6 Thermal Overload Protection (P126 & P127)
Thermal overload protection can be applied to prevent damages to the electrical plant equipment when operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. A prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. MiCOM P126 & P127 relays incorporate a current based thermal replica, using load current to reproduce the heating and cooling of the equipment to be protected. The element thermal overload protection can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heating within any plant equipment, such as cables or transformers, is of resistive type (IR x t). Thus, the quantity of heat generated is directly proportional to current squared (I). The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is based on current squared, integrated over time. The MiCOM P126 & P127 relays automatically use the highest phase current as input information for the thermal model. Protection equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a certain period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling. In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant (Te) of the plant equipment to be protected is therefore required. The following sections will show that different plant equipment possesses different thermal characteristics, due to the nature of their construction. 2.6.1 Time Constant Characteristic This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks. The thermal time characteristic is given by:
t
e
Where: t I IFLC k IP = = = = = =
(I
(k I FLC )2
(I
I2 p
Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment Largest phase current Full load current rating (relay setting Thermal Trip) 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from hot or cold. Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in Technical Data.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 30/86 2.6.2 Mathematical Formula Applicable to MiCOM Relays: The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by:
Ix 2 t Trip = Te In Ix 2 trip
With: t Trip Te Ix Ieq I > k trip = = = = = = = =
Time to trip (in seconds) Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds) Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k I > Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier Factor associated to the thermal state formula Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then = 0.3 Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then trip = 1
The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus. The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
+1
I eq = k I >
t t 1 e Te + e Te
being calculated every 100ms. 2.6.3 Setting Guidelines The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip (trip) = Permissible continuous loading of the plant equipment / CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following tables. The relay setting, Time Constant, is in minutes. Paper insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables, placed above ground or in conduits. The table shows in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and conductor cross-sectional areas: CSA mm2 25 - 50 70 - 120 150 185 240 300 6 -11 kV 10 15 25 25 40 40 22 kV 15 25 40 40 40 60 33 kV 40 40 40 60 60 60 66 kV 60 60 60 60 90
Time constant (minutes)
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Other plant equipment: Time constant (minutes) Dry-type transformers 40 60 - 90 Air-core reactors Capacitor banks Overhead lines Busbars 40 10 10 60 Limits
Rating < 400 kVA Rating 400 - 800 kVA
Cross section 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm Al
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be Thermal Trip = 70% of thermal capacity. 2.7 Undercurrent Protection (P126 & P127) The undercurrent function [37] makes it possible to detect a loss of load (for example the draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt). It uses definite delay time undercurrent protection. The user can set the following parameters: undercurrent threshold I< time delayed undercurrent threshold tI<
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 32/86 2.8
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P126 & P127) When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the sensitivity of the element. Most protection techniques also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such techniques. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties. Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate. In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide timedelayed back-up protection for any un-cleared asymmetrical fault. Where fuses protect motors on rotating machines, a blown fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the motor due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current at double frequency. A negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide efficient back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays. It may also be required to simply set an alarm at the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent elements have a current pick up settings I2>, I2>>, I2>>>, and are time delayed in operation by the adjustable timers tI2>, tI2>>, tI2>>>. 2.8.1 I2 Thresholds Setting Guidelines This protection element includes three thresholds. The first threshold can be set as DT or IDMT trip delay time. The curves are the same as for the [50/51], [50N/51N] protection. The current pick-up threshold (settable in the menu PROTECTION G1/[46] Neg. Seg. OC) must be set higher than the normal negative phase sequence current due to the normal load unbalance that is always present on the system. This can be set at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and apply a setting at least 20% above. Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific un-cleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting has to be based on an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection element, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote fault condition. The correct setting of the time delay is vital for this protection element. It should be also seen that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Therefore, it would be associated with a long delay time.
It must be ensured that the time delay is set longer than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system, which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as: Phase overcurrent protection elements Earth fault protection elements Broken conductor protection elements Negative phase sequence influenced thermal protection elements
3.
3.1
VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
Setting for the Voltage Connections For the P127, it is important to select the VTs configuration in the Configuration/ General Options/ VT Connection submenu in according to the relay wiring for a corrected functionality of the voltage protections. In the above mentioned is menu you will find that for the P127 relay there are three configurations of VTs. 1. 3Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection):
In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua, Ub, and Uc and calculates internally the zero sequence voltage Ue = (1/3)[Ua+Ub+Uc]. This internal value Ue will be used to be compared to the threshold of Ue (the Earth Overvoltage Protection threshold and to evaluate the angle with the earth current for the earth fault directional protection). However, none UN is displayed in the measurement Menu. 2. 2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection):
In this configuration, the relay directly measures Ua and Ub. The input voltage of phase C of the relay (terminals 73-74) which is connected to the summation of the three voltage phases is used to be compared to the Ue (The earth Overvoltage Protection function threshold). This voltage at C input is considered as Ur and it is displayed in the measurement menu as UN. Moreover for the phase Overvoltage and Undervoltage protection functions, the phase C voltage value Uc is internally reconstituted using the equation: Uc = Ua+Ub+Ur. This value will be compared to the U/V or O/V threshold in case of a fault in phase C. Uc is not displayed in the measurement menu. The reconstruction is valid if the Ur is measured from a transformer with 5 limb; two used for the phase voltage Ua and Uc and the others used in Open delta configuration for the Ur.
BE CAREFUL: IF THE Ur IS MEASURED FROM A SEPARATE TRANSFORMER THE ABOVE RECONSTRUCTION IS NOT VALID AND CAN NOT BE USED. 3. 2Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection):
The relay directly measures Uab and Ubc, the phase to phase (A-C) voltage value Uca is internally reconstituted using the equation Uca=Uab+Ubc. The third input of voltage of the relay (terminals 73-74) can be connected to the output of a delta transformer or to a dedicated voltage transformer, the measured value can be used to compare to the earth overvoltage threshold. This voltage is displayed in the measurement menu as UN and it is designed as the earth voltage.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.2 Voltage Measurement displayed
Here is a summary table of the measured parameters in according to the configuration scheme: Configuration 3Vpn Ua Ub Uc Uab Ubc Uac UN 3.3 Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Displayed on HMI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Configuration 2Vpn+Vr Direct measurement Direct measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Direct measurement Displayed on HMI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Configuration 2Vpp + Vr N.A N.A N.A Direct measurement Direct measurement Derived measurement Direct measurement Displayed on HMI N.A N.A N.A Yes Yes Yes Yes
Consideration on the measurement menu Why UN for the earth voltage measurement? The neutral, earth or residual or zero sequence voltage are considered a single voltage and because it is not possible to modify the label in the display we have used the following terminology: Ue for the thresholds. UN for the measurement menu. UN in the fault recorder.
UN for the measurement and fault record menu is to intend residual, zero sequence voltage earth voltage etc. 3.4 (59N) Zero Sequence Overvoltage Protection (P125, P126 & P127) On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to earth voltages is nominally zero, as this results from the vector addition of three balanced vectors set at 120 to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system this balance is upset and a residual voltage is produced. This can be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltage transformer having a broken delta secondary connection. Hence, a residual voltage-measuring relay can be used to offer earth fault protection on such a system. Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth, which is commonly referred to as neutral voltage displacement.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 36/86 3.4.1 Setting Guidelines
The voltage setting applied to the protection elements is dependent upon the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during an earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed. It must also be ensured that the relay is set above any standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. The protection element has one programmable element with delay time tUe>>>>. The setting range and the functionality limits for the residual over-voltage are described in the TD chapter, the setting menu is described in the User Guide chapter. 3.5 (27) Undervoltage Protection (P127) Under-voltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below: Increased system loading Generally, some corrective action would be taken by voltage regulating equipment such as AVRs or On Load Tap Changers, in order to bring the system voltage back to its nominal value. If this voltage regulating equipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system voltage, then tripping by means of an under-voltage relay will be required following a suitable time delay. Faults occurring on the power system result in a reduction in voltage of the phases involved in a fault. The proportion by which the voltage decreases is directly dependent upon the type of fault, method of system earthing and its location with respect to the relay installation point. Consequently, co-ordination with other voltage and current-based protection devices is essential in order to achieve sufficient discrimination. Complete loss of bus-bar voltage This may occur due to fault conditions present on the incomer or busbar itself, resulting in total isolation of the incoming power supply. For this condition, it may be a requirement for each of the feeders to be isolated, so that when supply voltage is restored, the load is not connected. Hence, the automatic tripping of a CB on a feeder upon detection of complete loss of voltage on the busbar may be required. This may be achieved by a three-phase undervoltage protection element. 3.5.1 Setting Guidelines In the majority of applications, undervoltage protection is not required to operate during system earth fault conditions. If this is the case, the protection element should be selected in the menu to operate from a phase-to-phase voltage measurement, as this quantity is less affected by the decrease of a single-phase voltage due to an earth fault. The voltage threshold setting for the undervoltage protection element should be set at some value below the voltage decreases which may be expected under normal system operating conditions. This threshold is dependent upon the system in question but typical healthy system voltage decreases may be in the order of -10% of nominal value. The undervoltage protection element has two programmable thresholds with delay timers: tU<, tU<< After a trip command the thresholds will be reset when all phase voltages have risen above 105% of setting values. The undervoltage protection element, which can be set as OR or AND logic, operates by comparing each UAB, UBC and UCA voltage input with the U<, U<< thresholds. The relay continuously monitors the phase-to-phase voltages. NOTE: If the relay is connected in the mode 3 Vpn to control the phase to neutral voltages, the thresholds must be multiplied by
3.
When OR operating logic is set and one or more voltage values fall below the threshold value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime condition. When AND operating logic is set and all of the voltage values have fallen below the threshold value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime condition. The protection element under-voltage has two programmable thresholds with definite delay time tU< and tU<<. Information as to the thresholds setting range can be found in the FT and TD parts of the technical guide. 3.6 (59) Overvoltage Protection (P127) As previously discussed, under-voltage conditions are relatively common, as they are related to fault conditions etc. However, over-voltage conditions are also a possibility and are generally related to loss of load conditions as described below. Under load shedding conditions, the supply voltage will increase in magnitude. This situation would normally be rectified by voltage regulating equipment such as AVRs or on-load tap changers. However, failure of this equipment to bring the system voltage back within prescribed limits, leaving the system with an over-voltage condition which must be cleared in order to preserve the life of the system insulation. Hence, over-voltage protection, which is suitably time delayed to allow for normal regulator action, may be applied. During earth fault conditions on a power system there may be an increase in the healthy phase voltages. Ideally, the system should be designed to withstand such over-voltages for a defined period of time. Normally, there will be a relay with a primary protection element employed to detect the earth fault condition and to issue a trip command if the fault is non-cleared after a nominal time. However, in this instance it would be possible to use a relay with an over-voltage protection element as back-up protection. Sufficient would be a single stage of protection, having a definite delay time. 3.6.1 Setting Guidelines The relay with this type of protection element must be co-ordinated with any other overvoltage relay at other locations on the system. This should be carried out in a similar manner to that used for grading current operated protection devices. The protection element over-voltage has two programmable thresholds and two delay timers, tU>, tU>>. After a trip command the thresholds will be reset when all phase voltages have fallen below 95% of setting values. The overvoltage protection element, which can be set as OR or AND logic, operates by comparing each UAB, UBC and UCA voltage input with the U>, U>> thresholds. NOTE: If the relay is connected in the mode 3Vpn to control the phase to neutral voltages, the thresholds must be multiplied by
3.
When OR operating logic is set and one or more voltage has risen above the threshold value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime condition. When AND operating logic is set and all of the voltage values have risen above the threshold value, the tripping command is sent after the tripping timer has reached the set overtime condition. Information as to the thresholds setting range can be found in the FT and TD parts of the technical guide.
4.
4.1 4.1.1
OTHER PROTECTION FONCTION INTEGRATED IN P127

Under/Over frequency (81 U/O) Description Time delayed under and over frequency protection available on P127 provides the fundamental form of frequency protection. Six thresholds are available: Each one can be configured to detect an under or over frequency within the range [fn 4,9Hz, fn + 4,9Hz], where fn is the nominal frequency selected (50Hz or 60Hz). A definite timer is assigned to each threshold. When the frequency measured is crossing one of the 6 pre-defined thresholds, the relays generates a start signal and after a user settable time delay, a trip signal.
4.1.2
HMI description [81] FREQUENCY [81] F1= 81> [81] F1= 52.0 Hz [81] tF1= 60 ms [81] F2= NO [81] F2= 50.0 Hz [81] tF2= 0 ms [81] F3= NO [81] F3= 50.0 Hz [81] tF3= 0 ms [81] F4= NO [81] F4= 50.0 Hz [81] tF4= 0 ms [81] F5= NO [81] F5= 50.0 Hz [81] tF5= 0 ms
Heading of the FREQUENCY sub-menu
Description: configuration of the 1st stage Range: NO / 81> / 81< Description: setting of the 1 st stage Range: from "fn 4,9Hz" to "fn + 4,9Hz" Description: time delay setting Range: from 0 to 600s, step = 0.01s Description: configuration of the 2nd stage Range: NO / 81> / 81< Description: setting of the 2nd stage Range: from "fn 4,9Hz" to "fn + 4,9Hz" Description: time delay setting Range: from 0 to 600s, step = 0.01s Description: configuration of the 3rd stage Range: NO / 81> / 81< Description: setting of the 3rd stage Range: from "fn 4,9Hz" to "fn + 4,9Hz" Description: time delay setting Range: from 0 to 600s, step = 0.01s Description: configuration of the 4th stage Range: NO / 81> / 81< Description: setting of the 4th stage Range: from "fn 4,9Hz" to "fn + 4,9Hz" Description: time delay setting Range: from 0 to 600s, step = 0.01s Description: configuration of the 5th stage Range: NO / 81> / 81< Description: setting of the 5th stage Range: from "fn 4,9Hz" to "fn + 4,9Hz" Description: time delay setting Range: from 0 to 600s, step = 0.01s
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 [81] F6= NO [81] F6= 50.0 Hz [81] tF6= 0 ms 4.2 4.2.1

Description: configuration of the 6th stage Range: NO / 81> / 81< Description: setting of the 6th stage Range: from "fn 4,9Hz" to "fn + 4,9Hz" Description: time delay setting Range: from 0 to 600s, step = 0.01s
3 phases directional Overpower (32) Description MiCOM P127 provides the three-phase directional power protection which monitors the active and reactive power limits and detects power drop and reversal of direction. A definite timer is assigned to each threshold. When the active and reactive power measurements are inside the trip zone, the relays generates a start signal and after a user settable time delay, a trip signal.
P0718ENa
4.2.2 Power Measurement displayed For the P127, it is important to select the VTs configuration in the Configuration/ General Options/ VT Connection submenu in according to the relay wiring for a corrected functionality of the power protections (See 3.1) 3Vpn (Three phase-neutral connection) 2Vpn + Vr (Two phase-neutral plus an Open Delta connection) 2Vpp + Vr (Two phase-phase plus an Open Delta connection)
Here is a summary table of the measured parameters in according to the configuration scheme: Configuration 3Vpn P (kW) Q (KVAr) S (KVA) Cos(Phi) [] 3Ph WHours Fwd 3Ph WHours Rev 3Ph VArHours Fwd 3Ph VArHours Rev 3Ph VAHours Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Direct measurement Displayed on HMI Yes Yes Yes Yes Configuration 2Vpn+Vr Displayed on HMI Configuration 2Vpp + Vr Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Derived measurement Displayed on HMI Yes Yes Yes Yes
Derived Yes measurement Derived Yes measurement Derived Yes measurement Derived Yes measurement Derived measurement Yes Derived measurement Yes Derived measurement Yes Derived measurement Yes Derived Yes measurement
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4.2.2.1 Active power (P) The calculation of the active power is: For a 3 Vpn or a 2Vpn+Vr connection:
P = Ua * Ia * cos(Ua Ia) + Ub * Ib * cos(Ub Ib) + Uc * Ic * cos(Uc Ic) Sn = 3.In Un For a 2Upp+Vr connection:
P = Uab * Ia * cos(Uab Ia) Ubc * Ic * cos(Ubc Ic)
Sn = 3.In Un
P" = P 3.KI KU Un InTA UnTV P 3.KI KU Un
P ' = InTA UnTV P" =
where: P the active power expressed in ADC points
where In and Un are respectively the nominal current and voltage to the secondary side P P the active power to the secondary side expressed in Pn the active power to the primary side expressed in Watt
Since these are measurements used only for protection purposes, they arent displayed on HMI.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.2.2.2 Reactive power (Q) The calculation of the reactive power is: For a 3 Vpn or a 2Vpn+Vr connection:
Q = Ua * Ia * sin(Ua Ia) + Ub * Ib * sin(Ub Ib) + Uc * Ic * sin(Uc Ic)
For a 2Upp+Vr connection:

Q = Uab * Ia * sin(Uab Ia) Ubc * Ic * sin(Ubc Ic) Q" = Q 3.KI KU Un InTA UnTV Q 3.KI KU Uan
Q ' = InTA UnTV Q" =
where: Q is the reactive power expressed in ADC points
where In and Un are respectively the nominal earth current and voltage to the secondary side Q Q is the reactive earth power to the secondary side expressed in VAR is the reactive earth power to the primary side expressed in VAR
Since these are measurements used only for protection purposes, they arent displayed on HMI. 4.2.2.3 Phase shifts of the power The calculation of the phase shift of the power phi is:
Q phi = arctan( ) P
4.2.3
Overview Using a MiCOM P127 relay as a stand alone power relay provides a wide setting range, the setting range available is dependent on the VT range ordered. The table below outlines the settings available for each of the VT input ranges. Analogue Input CT Range (A) P127AA P127AB P127BA P127BB P127CA P127CB 0.002 1 0.01 8 0.1 40 VT Range (V) 57 130 220 - 480 57 130 220 - 480 57 130 220 - 480 P 1 10000W*k 4 40000W*k 1 10000W*k 4 40000W*k 1 10000W*k 4 40000W*k k 1 or 5 A 1 or 5 A 1 or 5 A 1 or 5 A 1 or 5 A 1 or 5 A
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 42/86 4.2.4 HMI description
Heading of the POWER POWER sub-menu
[32] PHASE POWER P>? YES P> 5000 xK W tP> 60,00 ms P>>? YES P>> 7000 xK W tP>> 30,00 s Remarks: Q> = 1,2*Sn
Description: configuration of the 1 st threshold Range: YES/NO Description: setting of the 1 st threshold Range: from 1 to 10000 xK W, step = 1 xK W Description: time delay of the 1 st threshold Range: from 0 to 150s, step = 0.01s Description: configuration of the 2nd threshold Range: YES/NO Description: setting of the 2nd threshold Range: from 1 to 10000 xK W, step = 1 xK W Description: setting of the 2nd threshold Range: from 0 to 150s, step = 0.01s
= 2
5.
DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P126 & P127)
An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80 - 90% are transient in nature. A transient fault, such as an insulator flashover, is a self-clearing non-damage fault. This type of fault can be cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers to isolate the fault, and does not recur when the line is re-energised. Lightning is the most common cause of transient faults, other possible causes being clashing conductors and wind blown debris. The remaining 10 - 20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing fault) or permanent. A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a non-permanent fault. Here the cause of the fault would not be removed by the immediate tripping of the circuit, but could be burnt away during a time-delayed trip. Permanent faults could be broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or machine faults that must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored. In the majority of fault incidents, if the faulty line is immediately tripped out, and time is allowed for the fault arc to de-ionise, re-closure of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energised. Autoreclose approaches are employed to automatically reclose a switching device at a set time after it has been opened due to operation of protection where transient and non-permanent faults are prevalent. On HV and MV distribution networks, the autoreclose function is applied mainly to radial feeders where system stability problems do not generally arise. The main advantages to be derived from using autoreclose can be summarised as follows: Minimises interruptions in supply to the consumer. Reduces operating costs - less man-hours in repairing fault damage and the possibility of running substations unattended. With autoreclose instantaneous protection can be used which means shorter fault durations which gives rise to less fault damage and fewer permanent faults.
As 80% of overhead line faults are transient, elimination of loss of supply from such faults, by the introduction of the autoreclose function gives obvious benefits. Furthermore, autoreclose may allow a particular substation to operate unattended. In the case of unattended substations, the number of visits by personnel to re-close a circuit breaker manually after a fault can be substantially reduced, which is an important consideration for substations in remote areas. The autoreclose function gives an important benefit on circuits using time-graded protection, in that it allows the use of instantaneous protection to give a high-speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage to the line, which might otherwise cause a transient fault to develop into a permanent fault. Using short time delay protection also prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults.
The next figure shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles (maximum numbers of allowed cycles) to the final trip: tD1, tD2, tD3, tD4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4 timers tR = Reclaim time O = CB open C = CB closed
Current
O C
final trip
I threshold
td1 tr td2 tr td3 tr td4 tr
In
Fault
Time
P0031ENa
TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES It should be noted that when short time delay protection is used with autoreclose, the scheme is normally arranged to block the instantaneous protection after the first trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after re-closing, the time-graded protection will give discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section. However, for certain applications, where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more than one instantaneous trip before the instantaneous protection is blocked. Some schemes allow a number of re-closings and time graded trips after the first instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-permanent faults. Such an approach may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where the fault current is low. When considering feeders which consist partly of overhead lines and partly of underground cables, any decision to apply the autoreclose function would be influenced by all data known on the frequency of transient faults. When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of autoreclose are small, particularly since re-closing on to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage. For the autoreclose function relay settings, see FT (User Guide, tree autoreclose menu) and the TD (Technical Data). The Autoreclose function provided by the P126 & P127 relays presents the typical functionality of an autoreclose function plus auxiliary functionality. The setting for the ARC and all the functionality are listed below too.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 5.1 Available Settings The setting parameters are listed in the table below. MENU TEXT PROTECTION G1 Autoreclose? Ext CB Fail? Ext CB Fail Time Ext Block? tD1 tD2 tD3 tD4 Reclaim Time tR Inhibit Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> Cycles tIe> Cycles tIe>> Cycles tIe>>> Cycles tPe/Iecos>, Cycles tPe/Iecos>> Cycles tAux1 Cycles tAux2 SETTING RANGE MIN NO NO 000.01 ms NO 000.01 sec 000.01 sec 000.01 sec 000.01 sec 000.02 sec 000.02 sec 0 0 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 MAX YES YES 600, 00 sec YES 300, 00 sec 300, 00 sec 600, 00 sec 600, 00 sec 600, 00 sec 600, 00 sec 4 4 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 0.01 sec 1 1 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0.01 sec YES/NO STEP SIZE
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 46/86 5.2 5.2.1 Functionality Activation
Firstly if you want to utilise the ARC (Autoreclose) you have to set the parameters in correct way. If you do not execute correctly the setting, on the LCD of the relay an Alarm Message appears indicating:Conflict Recloser. 5.2.2 ARC setting and functionality The sequence below is the sequence of setting using the keys on the front panel. 1. Enable the Autoreclose Set the Autoreclose to Yes . Immediately could appear the message:Conflict Recloser. Do not worry, you are hardly beginning to set your ARC and some settings must be worked out. Ext CB Fail It is possible to consider the possibility to detect a CB fail during the autoreclosing cycles. This signal is provided by the CB equipment (for instance low SF6) and it has to be assigned to a digital input by the Automatic Control inputs submenu. If you decide to use this feature sets Yes, than you also have to set the Ext.CB Fail time. The CB will be declared fault and the autoreclose will move in the locked status when the Ext. CB Fail time will be elapsed and the Ext CB Fail will stand active. The Ext. CB Fail timer will start when the tD will be expired. If during this time the signal Ext CB Fail will disappear the ARC will continue with its programmed cycles. If your setting is No, the Ext. CB Fail function wont be actived Ext. Block The Ext. Block means that it is possible to lock the autoreclose by an external command. If you set this item to Yes to make it active you have to assign to a digital input the function Block 79 by the inputs submenu in Automatic control function. With the Ext. Block actived (the relevant digital input supplied) the autoreclose will move to the locked status after a protection trip involved in the sequences matrix of the ARC. Dead Time (tD1, tD2, tD3, tD4) and 50ms time window An autoreclose cycle can be initiated by the trip of a protection element (phase, earth or external input) with the CB closed (52a input signal energised). The dead time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) starts when the digital input connected to the 52a, auxiliary contact of the CB, is de-energised and the involved protection threshold reset. It means that CB has tripped. If on trip protection the CB opening signal (52a) is lacking, after a fixed time out of 2.00 s at 50 Hz or 1.67 s at 60 Hz, the ARC resets to the initial status. If on trip protection the 52a signal changes status but the protection threshold trip stands the tD timer will start when the protection trip threshold will disappear. In the above case NONE TIME OUT IS FORECASTED. The 52a signal has to assigned to a digital input by by the inputs submenu in Automatic control function. The 52a signal is in accordance with the CB status Auxiliary Contact status 52A Open Closed 52B Closed Open CB Status ------------------Circuit Breaker open Circuit Breaker closed
2.
3.
4.
Within the tD a further time window is active.This time window starts together to the td.It expires after 50ms. If within this time window a threshold involved in the trip of the CB and in the ARC cycle is intermittent the ARC will be lock.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 5.
Reclaim Time tR When the tD timer is expired, a close command is launched to the CB by an output relay, the reclaim time (tR) will begin to count when the 52a input will be energized. It will mean that the CB is closed. When the close command is launched the tClose Pulse timer begins to count too. This timer takes a look to the change of the 52a status from low to high, if the timer expired before changing of the 52a, a time out condition has occurred and the ARC function will move to the locked status. Otherwise the timer will be reset and the ARC will continue with the setting cycles. The setting for the t Close Pulse timer is available in the Automatic Control CB Supervision submenu. If during the tR the 52a will change status from high to low (CB from close to open status), the ARC will move to the lock status. If none phase or earth current threshold, earth power threshold or external digital input will trip within the reclaim time, at the expiring of tR, the autoreclose function resets to the initial status ready to re-start for a new cycles sequence. Inhibit Time tI The Inhibit time starts when an intentional closing action is executed on the CB. Any trip opening the CB within the tI timer will move the ARC in the lock status. The setting value of the Inhibit Time (tI) can be used to prevent autoreclose being initiated when the CB is manually closed onto a fault. Phase and earth fault cycles number The maximum available auto-recloser cycles in the ARC in the P126 and P127 are 4. The user can set 4 cycles for the earth faults and 4 cycles for the phase faults or other. The auto-recloser algorithm will execute a maximum of 4 cycles. What does it mean? It means, for instance, we have set 4 auto-recloser cycles for earth fault and 4 autorecloser cycles for phase fault. During a fault situation we have already executed 2 autoreclose cycles for a phase fault, if the next fault will be an earth fault the ARC will be able to execute the remaining ones. The number of set cycles, earth and/or phase, must be in accordance with the set of the ARC configuration matrix setting. The setting to 0 of the phase cycles and/or the earth cycles means that any trip of phase or earth are considered final trip. The autoreclose will move in the lock status. ARC configuration matrix From the 6A software version it has been implemented the possibility to assign to any phase current threshold, to any earth fault current/power threshold and to the tAux1 and tAux2 the cycle where to have a recloser action or a definitive trip or a trip without the relevant activation of the relay 1. The listed table below shows the involved thresholds and the relevant setting way.
6.
7.
8.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 48/86 Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> Cycles tIe> Cycles tIe>> Cycles tIe>>> Cycles tPe/Iecos>, Cycles tPe/Iecos>> Cycles tAux1 (phase) Cycles tAux2 (earth) 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222 4321 2222
0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2
The settings 0, 1 and 2 means: 0 = Means that any trip of the threshold is considered final trip. The autoreclose will move in the lock status. 1 = Trip on threshold pick up, followed by the programmed reclosing activity 2 = None trip on threshold pick up, and this one whatever in AUTOMAT.CRTL/Trip Command submenu is set to ON. With this setting after that the tR is expired a Recloser Successful message is displayed on the LCD. The autoreclose is ready for a new cycles sequence. It can occur that instead of 0, 1 or 2 reading the setting on the LCD we find the symbol . It means that the download setting regarding the configuration matrix by a remote program (S1 or other) was wrong. In the above case none message is provided but the autoreclose does not operate for the setting threshold error, if tI (inhibit time) is greater of the trip delay of the involved threshold the ARC will move to the lock status. The ARC executes the normal cycles for the other corrected settings. NOTE: Pay attention to the ARC setting both in local and remote.
The set of the cycles number, phase or earth and the setting of the configuration matrix are related each other strictly. Below a setting example to define the ARC cycles number. The rule to define the available cycles number is listed below. It is valid both for the phase and earth thresholds using the thresholds Ie>, Ie>>, Ie>>>, Pe/Iecos>, Pe/Iecos>>, tAux2. 1. 2. To have at least an ARC cycle the right item must be equal to 1. The presence of one has to be counted starting from right.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 A Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> Cycles tAux1 (phase) Counting of the ones Setting of the ARC number cycles 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0010 4321 1110 1110 0 B 4321 0011 4321 0200 4321 0002 4321 0100 0111 3 C 4321 0011 4321 1200 4321 2010 4321 0000 1011 2 D 4321 0010 4321 1000 4321 0021 4321 0020 1011 2
Two examples of setting are listed below. Example 1 We suppose to set the ARC as following. tI=0.5s, tD1= tD2= tD3= tD4= 1s; tR=2s Phase cycles number equal to 2. CYCLES tI> 4321 0211
The tI> = ON in Automat. CTRL/Trip Command menu With the above setting we will have two autoreclose cycles. The third will be executed without any trip command and when the tR will be elapsed a Recloser Successful message will be provided on the LCD. An end of third cycle (setting item = 2) the ARC will move to the initial status. If the tI> is present a new ARC cycles will begin again. Example 2 We suppose to set the ARC as following. tI=0.5s, tD1= tD2= tD3= tD4= 1s;tR=2s. Phase cycles number equal to 4. CYCLES tI> 4321 0211
CYCLES tI>>
4321 1111
The tI> and tI>> = ON in Automat. CTRL / Trip Command menu If there is only a trip of the tI> the functionality of the ARC will be the same as above(example 1), if during the third cycle of the tI> a trip of the tI>> will occur, the autoreclose will operate in accordance with the setting of the tI>>.(example 2)
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 50/86 5.2.3 Re-closer Lockout
If protection operates during the reclaim time, following the final re-close attempt, the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition is removed. The ARC is locked for a trip during the tD + tR time by: Any opening command launched to the CB Residual Over-voltage trip (59N) Negative sequence overcurrent trip (46) Thermal overload trip (49) Maximum setting number of autoreclose cycles achieved Setting for any protection = 0 Trip of CB fail (52BF) TCS (Trip circuit supervision) Diagnostic of the CB Close/Open CB operating time over the threshold set
If the auxiliary supply is lost during an autoreclose cycle, the autoreclose function is totally reset. The lockout ARC condition can be removed by: 5.2.4 CB manual closing command The acknowledge of the message displayed on the LCD by pressing the front panel of the relay By acquisition of the alarms by local (S1) or by remote key on
Inputs setting For the configuration the only involved digital input is the CB status 52a. This setting is necessary for the ARC functionality. The lacking of this setting generates the alarm Conflict Recloser. This signal follows the rule: Auxiliary Contact status 52A Open (Low) Closed (High) CB Status ------------------Circuit Breaker open Circuit Breaker closed
5.2.5
Output realys for the ARC (Output relays submenu) The ARC function provides the following information 79 Run and 79 Trip. The ARC provides the command for the closing of the CB (CB Close). The CB close setting must be assigned to an output relay controlling the closing of the CB. This setting is necessary for the ARC functionality. The lacking of this setting generates the alarm Conflict Recloser. No other functionality, excluding CTRL Close assignment, can be associated to this relay, otherwise a Conflict Recloser alarm is provided. The 79 Run provides the information that the timer tD or the timer tR is in progress, when the tR expires to the last cycle programmed or a 79 locked occurs, the 79 Run information is reset. The 79 Trip provides the information that the ARC has been moved in the lock status.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 5.2.6 Leds for the ARC (Led submenu)
The ARC function provides a signal light information by the leds from 5 to 8 on the front panel of the relay the following information: Recloser Run equivalent to 79 Run and Recloser Blocked equivalent to 79 Trip. 5.2.7 ARC Measurements In the measurement menu are available the counters relevant to the number of operations key on the front panel of the relay execute All counters can be reset to 0 by pressing the or by local (S1) or remote command. The available counters are 5.2.8 Reclosers number, Number of Reclosers on the Cycle1 Number of Reclosers on the Cycle2 Number of Reclosers on the Cycle3 Number of Reclosers on the Cycle4 Number of Total 79 Trip and Lockout
Autoreclose Setting Guidelines Below there are listed the fundamental settings to enable the ARC to operate. Again. it is important to consider the congruence between the number of programmed cycles and the configuration matrix. A non-valid configuration provides a recloser configuration alarm (Conflict Recloser). SETTING CONDITION FOR THE ARC FUNCTIONALITY
Autoreclose Phase Cycles or/and E/GND Cycles Congruence between the number of forecasted cycles and the settings of the trip matrix Trip Command One of the digital inputs from 1 to 7. The relevant input must be configured as Active High One of the relays from 2 to 8
On At least 1 1234 0111 At least a trip Overcurrent and/or earth fault overcurrent command. trip thresholds One of them is enough 52a This input must be in accordance with the CB position: HIGH with CB close, LOW with CB opened. This relay must be only assigned to this function. If the cycle = 0 none ARC available Max number available cycle equal to <= 3
CB Close
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 52/86 5.2.9 Number Of Shots
There are no clear-cut rules for defining the number of shots for a particular application. Generally medium voltage systems utilize only two or three shot autoreclose schemes. However, in certain countries, for specific applications, four shot approaches are not uncommon. Four shots have the advantage that the final dead time can be set sufficiently long to allow any thunderstorms to pass before re-closing for the final time. This approach will prevent unnecessary lockout for consecutive transient faults. Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, will result from short time protection. Since 80% of faults are transient, the subsequent trips will be time delayed, all with increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults. In order to determine the required number of shots the following factors must be taken into account: An important consideration is the ability of the circuit breaker to perform several trip-close operations in quick succession and the effect of these operations on the maintenance period. If statistical information on a particular system shows a moderate percentage of nonpermanent faults, which could be burned out, two or more shots are justified. In addition to this, if fused tees are used and the fault level is low, the fusing time may not discriminate with the main IDMT relay and it would then be useful to have several shots. This would warm up the fuse to such an extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection operated. 5.2.10 Dead Timer Setting The following factors can influence the choice of dead timer setting. Due to the great diversity of load, which may exist on a system it may prove very difficult to arrive at an optimum dead time. However, it is possible to address each type of load individually and thereby arrive at a typical dead time. The most common types of load are addressed below. Synchronous motors are only capable of tolerating extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of synchronism. In practice it is desirable to disconnect the motor from the supply in the event of a fault. The dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2 - 0.3 seconds has been suggested to allow this device to operate. Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of 0.5 seconds and then re-accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3 - 10 seconds are normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to permit the resetting of manual controls and safety devices. Loss of supply to lighting circuits, such as street lighting may be important for safety reasons as intervals of 10 seconds or more may be dangerous for traffic. The main considerations of supply interruptions for domestic customers are those of inconvenience. An important measurement criterion for many power utilities is the number of minutes lost per year to customers, which will be reduced on feeders using autoreclose and will also be affected by the dead time settings used. For high-speed autoreclose the minimum dead time of the power system will depend on the minimum time delays imposed by the circuit breaker during a tripping and re-closing operation. Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it will have an inherent contact separation time. The operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the range of 50 - 100 ms, but could be longer with older designs. After tripping, time must be allowed for the mechanism to reset before applying a closing pulse. This resetting time will vary depending on the circuit breaker, but is typically 0.1 seconds. Once the circuit breaker has reset, it can begin to close. The time interval between the energizing of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is termed the closing time. Owing to the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3 s. A spring-operated breaker, on the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds.
Where high-speed re-closing is required, which is true for the majority of medium voltage applications, the circuit breaker mechanism itself dictates the minimum dead time. However, the fault de-ionizing time may also have to be considered. High-speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high-speed autoreclose the system disturbance time should be minimized by using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers <100 ms. Fast fault clearances can reduce the required fault arc de-ionizing time. For stability between two sources a dead time of <300 ms may typically be required. When only considering the CB the minimum system dead time is given by the mechanism reset time plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism will not be suitable for highspeed autoreclose as the closing time is generally too long. For high-speed autoreclose the fault de-ionizing time may be the most important factor when considering the dead time. This is the time required for ionized air to disperse around the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This can be approximated from the following formula: De-ionizing time = 10.5 + For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz) For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz) It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time discrimination will be maintained after re-closing on to a fault. For high-speed autoreclose instantaneous reset of protection is required. Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follows: 1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds 2nd dead time = 30 seconds 3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds 4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds 5.2.10.1 Reclaim Timer Setting A number of factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer, such as: Supply continuity - long reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient faults. Fault incidence and past experience - short reclaim times may be required where there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults. Spring charging time - for high-speed autoreclose the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging time to ensure there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker to perform a trip-close-trip cycle. For delayed autoreclose there is no need to set the reclaim time longer than the spring charging time as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the check window time has elapsed the relay will lockout. Switchgear maintenance - excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of >5 s may be needed to allow the CB time to recover after a trip and close operation before it can perform another trip-close-trip cycle. This time will depend on the duty (rating) of the CB. The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time-delayed protection initiating autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so would result in premature resetting of the autoreclose scheme and re-enabling of instantaneous protection.
Vsys 1 [s] (Vsys = System voltage in kV) 34.5 frequency
If this condition arose, a permanent fault would effectively look like a number of transient faults, resulting in continuous autoreclose operations unless additional measures were taken to overcome this, such as excessive fault frequency lockout protection. A sensitive earth fault protection is usually applied to detect high resistance earth faults. Usually, a long trip delay time is set, typically 10 - 15 s. This longer time may be taken into consideration, if autoreclose is started by an earth fault protection, and when deciding on a reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by a SEF protection start signal. Sensitive earth faults, for example, a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or a wood fence, is rarely transient and presents great danger to persons and animals. It is therefore common practice to block autoreclose by operation of sensitive earth fault protection and lockout the circuit breaker. Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at least as long as the spring winding time for high-speed autoreclose to ensure that the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle. A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3 - 10 seconds; this prevents unnecessary lockout during thunderstorms. However, reclaim times up to 60 - 180 seconds maybe used.
5.2.11
Fuse application An application of the ARC is the coordination with a fuse. This application is typical in rural areas where derived lines are protected by a fuse.
We suppose to have the following settings for the protection and the ARC narrow to the configuration matrix. All the others have to be compliance with the rules above. 67 protection I> ON I> 8 In tI> 5 sec. I>> ON I>> 10 In tI>> 0 sec AUTORECLOSE (only the matrix) ARC cycles AR init tI> ARC cycles AR init tI>> ARC cycles AR init tI>>> ARC cycles AR init tAux1 Number of phase cycles 4321 0110 4321 0021 4321 0000 4321 0000 1
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 The sequence is the following. 1. Fault on the line protected by the fuse.
2.
Istantaneous trip of the I>> and opening of the CB.
3. 4. 5.
tD1 in progress. tD1 is expired. Closing of the CB and start of the tR. Due to the setting of the ARC the I>> will start but wont generate a trip. During the delay trip time of the I> the fault will be cleared for the breaking of the fuse or for the auto-extintion of the fault. Breaker of the fuse
Auto-extinction of the fault
The above one is an example to show a basic using of the 2 setting in the ARC function.
6.
6.1
AUTOMATIC CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Trip Commands This menu is used to assign the trip of the protection and the automatic control function to the relay 1. See the P12y/EN FT (User Guide). The relay 1 is usually used for the trip of the CB and the logic output is used to start all the functionality relevant to the CB control.
6.2
Latch relays Sometimes it occurs to memorise trips or alarms. By this menu it is possible the latching of the relay from 1 to 8 the relevant relays to the 79 function must not be assigned latched.
6.3
Broken Conductor Detection (P126 & P127) The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages, which initiate flashover. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults induce an appreciable current increase and are easily detectable in most applications. Another type of unbalanced system condition is the series or open circuit fault. This fault can arise from broken conductors, mal-operation of single-phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not induce an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not easily detectable by standard overcurrent protection elements available with common relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and an important level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect a series fault condition as described. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence protection element therefore would not operate at low load levels. The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays incorporate a protection element, which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). This protection element will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved.
6.3.1
Setting Guidelines In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of I2/I1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedance in each sequence network), the ratio I2/I1 will be 50%. The setting for the broken conductor protection element is described in Technical Data and the menu is described in User Guide.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 6.3.2 Example Setting
The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning: full load = 500A I2 = 50A therefore the quiescent ratio for I2/I1 is given by: I2/I1 = 50/500 = 0.1 To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical: Therefore set RATIO I2/I1 = 20% Set tBC = 60 s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections. 6.4 Inrush Blocking (P127 only) Either I>>/Ie>> or I>>>/Ie>>> elements can be used as high-set instantaneous elements. The design is such that they do not respond to the DC transient component of the fault current. The principle of operation allows the current settings to be set down to 35% of the prospective peak inrush current that will be taken by a transformer when it is energised. As a first approximation, the peak inrush is given by the reciprocal of the per unit series reactance of the transformer. As an alternative, inrush blocking can be applied. This is discussed in the next section. In applications where the sensitivity of overcurrent thresholds need to be set below the prospective peak inrush current, the inrush block function can be used to block the overcurrent, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent stages. During transformer inrush conditions, the second harmonic component of the inrush current may be as high as 70%. In practice, the second harmonic level may not be the same for all phases during inrush and therefore the relay will provide an Inrush Blocking signal for any phase above the set threshold. In general, a setting of 15% to 20% for the Inrush H2 ratio can be applied in most cases taking care that setting it too high, inrush blocking may not operate for low levels of second harmonic current which may result in the O/C element tripping during transformer energization. Similarly applying a too low a setting, inrush blocking may prevent tripping during some internal transformer faults with significant second harmonic current. AUTOMAT. CTRL INRUSH BLOCKING Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Heading of SOTF sub menu. To navigate within submenu sections, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Selection of the Inrush blocking function. Yes Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following sub menu is displayed: If No is selected, the Sotf sub menu is inactive. Inr. Harmonic 2 ration 20,0 % Displays the setting of H2 ration in the signal. The setting range for Inr. Harmonic 2 is from 10 to 35% in steps of 0,1%. Displays the setting of the delay timer for Inrush function. 0,00 s The setting range t Inrush reset is from 0 to 2s in steps of 0,1s.
Inrush Block. ?
t Inrush reset
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 58/86 Inrush Block. On I> YES/NO I>> YES/NO I>>> YES/NO Ie> YES/NO Ie>> YES/NO Ie>>> YES/NO I2> YES/NO I2>> YES/NO I2>>> YES/NO 6.5
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Displays the protection threshold blocked by inrush function
Cold Load Pick-up (P126 & P127) The Cold Load Pick-up feature enables the selected settings of the MiCOM P126 and P127 relays to be changed to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts. This condition may occur by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents. When a feeder is energised, the current levels that flow for a period of time following energising may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable during this period. The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) logic included in the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays raises the settings of selected stages for a set duration. This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile by automatically increasing them after energising. The CLP logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting. Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) setting is described in the Technical Data (TD), the CLP menu in the User Guide (FT). The timer tCL in the CLP menu controls the time for which the relevant protections elements in CLP menu (%) are altered following an external input signal (e.g. circuit breaker closure. When the set tCL time has elapsed, all of the relevant settings revert back to their original values or become unblocked. tCL is initiated via a dedicated logic input signal (refer to AUTOMAT. CTRL/INPUTS menu), generated by connecting an auxiliary contact from the circuit breaker (52a or 52b) or starting device to the logic relevant inputs of the relay. The following sections describe applications where the CLP logic may be useful and the settings that need to be applied.
6.5.1
Air Conditioning / Resistive Heating Loads Where a feeder is used to supply air conditioning or resistive heating loads there may be a conflict between the "steady state" overcurrent settings and those required following energizing. This is due to the temporary increase in load current that may arise during starting. With the Cold Load Pick-up function enabled, the affected thresholds are selected to be adjusted for the required time to allow the start condition to subside. A percentage value is selected as the amount by which the selected threshold is increased or decreased. The time for which the adjusted thresholds are valid is defined by the tCL setting. After this time, the settings return to normal. It may not be necessary to alter the protection settings following a short supply interruption. In this case the CLP function is not activated.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 6.5.2 Motor Feeders
In general, a dedicated motor protection device, such as the MiCOM P220, P225 or P241 relays should protect feeders supplying motor loads. However, if no specific protection has been applied (possibly due to economic reasons) then the CLP function in the MiCOM P126 or P127 relay may be used to modify the overcurrent settings accordingly during starting. Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the motor starting current, it may be sufficient to simply block operation of instantaneous elements or, if the start duration is long, the time delayed protection settings may also need to be raised. Hence, a combination of both blocking and raising of settings of the relevant overcurrent stages may be adopted. The CLP overcurrent settings in this case must be chosen with regard to the motor starting characteristic. As previously described, the CLP logic includes the option of raising the settings of the first stage of the earth fault protection. This may be useful where instantaneous earth fault protection is required to be applied to the motor. During conditions of motor starting, it is likely that incorrect operation of the earth fault element would occur due to asymmetric CT saturation. This is a result of the high level of starting current causing saturation of one or more of the line CTs feeding the overcurrent and/or earth fault protection. The resultant transient imbalance in the secondary line current quantities is thus detected by the residually connected earth fault element. For this reason, it is normal to either apply a nominal time delay to the element, or to utilise a series stabilising resistor. The CLP logic may be used to allow reduced operating times or current settings to be applied to the earth fault element under normal running conditions. These settings could then be raised prior to motor starting, via the logic. 6.5.3 Earth Fault Protection Applied to Transformers Where an earth fault relay is residually connected on the primary side of a delta-star transformer, no time delay is required for co-ordination purposes, due to the presence of the delta winding. However, a nominal time delay or stabilising resistor is recommended, to ensure transient stability during transformer energising. The CLP logic may be used in a similar manner to that previously described for the motor application. It should be noted that this method should not provide stability in the event of asymmetric CT saturation that occurs as a result of an unbalanced fault condition. If problems of this nature are encountered, the best solution would still be the using of a stabilising resistor. 6.6 51V and VTS features Overcurrent relays are co-ordinated throughout a system such that cascade operation is achieved. This means that the failure of a downstream circuit breaker to trip for a fault condition, whether due to the failure of a protective device, or of the breaker itself, should result in time graded tripping of the next upstream circuit breaker. However, where long feeders are protected by overcurrent relays, the detection of remote phase to phase faults may prove difficult. This is due to the fact that the current pick up of phase overcurrent elements must be set above the maximum load current, thereby limiting the elements minimum sensitivity. If the current seen by a local relay for a remote fault condition is below it's overcurrent setting, a voltage controlled overcurrent (51V) element may be used to increase the relay sensitivity to such faults. In this case, a reduction in system voltage will occur; this may then be used to reduce the pick up level of the overcurrent protection. The 51V function can be selectively enabled on the second and third stages of the main overcurrent element,. When 51V is enabled, the overcurrent setting is modified by the multiplier k when the voltage falls below a threshold as shown in the following table: The main feature for this version is the V2>+V< logic controlled overcurrent protection with VTS. The logic functionality is below.

(U<ORV2>)&I>> ? NO 1 V< V2> YES
1 &
Blocks I>> threshold
(U<<ORV2>>)&I>>> ? NO 1 V<< V2>> VTS Blocks 51V YES VTS 0 NO YES
1 &
Blocks I>>> threshold
VTS
VTS Alarm ? YES NO
VTS Alarm
P0688ENa
VTS condition is: VTS = (V2>0.3Vn AND I2<0.5In) OR (V1<0.1Vn AND I>0.1In) 6.7 Auxiliary Timers (P125, P126 & P127) Four auxiliary timers tAux1, tAux2, tAux3 and tAux4 are available associated to Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 and Aux4 logic inputs (refer to AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS menu). When these inputs are energised, the associated timers start and, after the set time, the output relays close (refer to AUTOMAT. CRTL/OUTPUTS menu). The time delays are independently settable. The tAux1 and tAux2 timers always provide an alarm when their set time is expired; the tAux3 and tAux4 provide an alarm only when they are assigned to the trip relay in the Automatic Ctrl Trip Command menu.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 6.8 Selective Scheme Logic (P126 & P127)
The following figure describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes using the start contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays. In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to increase the time delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving a non-cascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement.
P0024ENa
TYPICAL SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC The SOL function temporarily increases the time delay settings of the second and third stages of phase overcurrent. This logic is initiated by energising the appropriate logic input (Log Sel1 or Log Sel2) as selected in AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS menu. To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second and third stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum time settings are identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes. The tSel1 and tSel2 timers are independently settable. See the TD (Technical Data) for the setting values and FT (User Guide) for the selective scheme logic menu.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 62/86 6.9
Blocking logic function (Blocked directional/non directional overcurrent protection) The directional non directional overcurrent and overcurrent protection are applicable for radial feeder circuits where there is small or no back feed. This application shows that the upstream IDMT relay being blocked by the start output from a downstream relay that has detected the presence of a fault current, which is above its threshold settings. Thus both the upstream and downstream relays can then have the same current and the blocking feature will automatically provide time settings and grading. If the CB failure protection function is active, the blocking order on the upstream relay will be removed if the downstream circuit breaker fails to trip. Thus for a fault downstream from relay C, the start output from relay C will block operation of relay B, the start output of relay B will block operation of relay A. All the 3 relays could have the same time and current threshold settings and the grading would be obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of the pilots being short circuited. However, in practice it is recommended that the upstream relay should be set greater (plus 10%) than the downstream relay setting. This ensures that the downstream relay successfully blocks the upstream relay when required to do so.
P0024ENa
BLOCKING LOGIC The allocations of the "Blocking Logic1 and 2 functions are available in the menu AUTOMAT. CTRL/Blocking Logic1 / Blocking Logic2; this logic is initiated by energizing the appropriate logic input (Blk Log1 or Blk Log2) selecting in the AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS menu. This functionality involves all the current and voltage protections available in the relays.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 6.10 Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays incorporate a circuit breaker state monitoring function, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker contacts. This indication is available either on the relay front panel or via the communications network. The circuit breaker state monitoring function is selectable in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs and CONFIGURATION/Led menu. Further, the MiCOM P126 and P127 relays are able to inform the operator that the CB has not opened following a remote trip command. 6.11 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring (P126 & P127) Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism operate correctly, and also that the breaking capability has not been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can lead to excessive maintenance. The relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be determined. These CB condition monitoring features are discussed in the following section. 6.12 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features (P126 & P127) For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The RECORDS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown are counter values only. These cells can only be read: MENU TEXT CB Monitoring CB Opening Time CB Closing Time CB Operations Amps(n) I1 Amps(n) I2 Amps(n) I3 Displays the CB opening time Displays the CB closing time Displays the number of opening commands executed by the CB Displays the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the CB phase A Displays the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the CB phase B Displays the summation of the Amps (or square Amps) interrupted by the CB phase C
The above counters in the CB condition monitoring function may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul. The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the logic inputs or via the communications to accept a trigger from an external device. The options available for the CB condition monitoring function include the set-up of the broken conductor protection element and those features, which can be set to raise an alarm, or to lockout the CB. All the settings are available in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 64/86 6.12.1 Setting Guidelines
6.12.1.1 Setting the In Thresholds Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCB), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost for the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The In counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made. For OCBs, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t. This is where I is the fault current broken, and t is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the breaking time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting n = 2. For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications n may be set to 1. An alarm in this instance for example may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing. It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturers instructions. 6.12.1.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due. Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose function on reaching an operations threshold. This prevents further re-closing when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the maintenance instructions supplied by the switchgear manufacturer. Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB) can only perform a specific number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. 6.12.1.3 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, an alarm is provided and is settable in the range of 100 ms to 5 s. This time is set in relation to the specified breaking time of the circuit breaker. 6.13 Circuit Breaker Failure (P126 & P127) Following the inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent damage or further damage to the power system. For transmission and sub-transmission systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection [50BF], which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker failure protection (CBF) will operate. CBF operation can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is isolated correctly. CBF can also operate to reset all start output contacts, by external logic, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 6.13.1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Mechanism
The CB failure protection included in both MiCOM P126 & P127 relays is performed as follows. The tBF timer is initiated when a trip order is issued through the logic output RL1 or by an assigned digital input (start tBFl). The trip order can be emitted from a protection element or auxiliary function associated to the logic output RL1, the logic digital input can be energised from an external device. In case of command from external device the start of the tBF is active by the change of status of the relevant digital input (edge), when the tBF is expired a CBF signal is issued. The tBF is reset when the relevant I< BF is verified for each phase. ((Ia< && Ib< && Ic<)==TRUE). In case of a trip by a RL1 the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays monitor the current signal of each phase and they compare each phase current signal with the undercurrent I< BF threshold settable its menu. If the undercurrent I<BF is FALSE ((Ia< && Ib< && Ic<)==FALSE) when the tBF timer is expired a CBF signal is issued, if it is TRUE (((Ia< && Ib< && Ic<)==TRUE) the tBF timer is reset. A TRUE condition of the I<BF resets the tBF always. In the CB fail menu it is also possible to choose if to lock the instantaneous I> and Ie> thresholds when a CBF signal is emitted. This one allows more flexibility in the fault localisation and isolation.
CB Fail Enabled
Any Trip 1 External CBF Initiate CBF Ia< CBF Ib< CBF Ic< S R tBF Q
CB Fail Alarm
P0428ENa
6.13.2
Breaker Fail Settings A typical timer setting used with a 2 cycle circuit breaker is around 150 ms. The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker CBF.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 66/86 6.14 Trip Circuit Supervision (P126 & P127)
The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contacts and so on. This complexity, coupled with the importance of the trip circuit, has directed attention to its supervision. The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in series with a resistance placed in parallel with a trip output relay contacts of the protection device. 6.14.1 MiCOM P126 & P127 Trip Circuit Supervision Mechanism The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P126 and P127 relays is described below: WARNING: SINCE HARDWARE 5 (NAMED ALSO PHASE II), THE VALUES USED IN THE CALCULATION OF THE EXTERNAL RESISTOR NEEDED FOR THE TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION HAVE CHANGED.
A logic input is programmed to the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision/TC Supervision function. The logic input is associated to the label Trip Circ within the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. Then, this logic input is wired in the trip circuit according to one of the typical application diagrams shown in the following example. The method of connecting the logic input to provide TC supervision, is shown later. When the function TC Supervision is set "Yes" within CB Supervision sub-menu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity whatever the CB status CB opened or CB closed. The function TC Supervision is enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is not energised. The function TC Supervision is not enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is energised. A 52 Fail (trip circuit failure) signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal during a time longer than the settable timer tSUP. See Chapter P12y/EN FT (User Guide) and Chapter P12y/EN TD (Technical Data) for the settings. As this function is disabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is energised, this function is suitable for use with the enabled relay latching logic.
Logic input Trip Circuit
tSUP
&
Tripping Output 1(RL1) energized
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM Three examples of application are given below. NOTE:
52 Fail signal
P0367ENa
It is considered that the CB is fitted with its own safety device.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Example 1
In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays monitor the trip coil whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed ).
+ Vdc 52a
Trip order
MiCOM P126/P127
Optoinput
- Vdc
P0096ENa
TRIP COIL MONITORING Example 2 In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available; the MiCOM P126 and P127 relays monitor the complete trip circuit when the CB is closed and a part of the trip circuit when the CB is open. In this case it is necessary to insert a resistor R1 in series with 52b, if either the output (RL1) trip is latched or it stays involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed.
+ Vdc
Trip order
MiCOM P126/P127
Optoinput
52a
52b
Trip Coil
Resistor R1
- Vdc
P0097ENa
TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 68/86 Example 3
In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P126 & P127 relays monitor the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed). In this case it is necessary to insert a R1, if either the output (RL1) trip is latched, or it stays involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed.
+ Vdc
Trip order
Optoinput
MiCOM P126/P127
52a Resistor R1 Trip Coil
52b
- Vdc
TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING WHATEVER THE POSITION OF THE CB
P0098ENa
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 6.14.2 External Resistor R1 Calculation
The calculation of the R1 resistor value will take into account that a minimum current is flowing through the logic input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua). 1 - Case of example no 2: The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R1 <
Where: Ua = Umin = Imin =
0,8 U a U min [Ohm] I min
Auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label under the top hinged cover. See table below). Internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate. Minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate. Relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua)
24-60 VDC (ordering code P12xx00Axxxxx) R1 < (0,8 x Ua 19,2)/0.035
48-250 VDC/AC (ordering code P12xx00Fxxxxx) R1 < (0,8 x Ua 19,2)/0.035
The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:
PR1 > 2
2 - Case of example no 3:
(1,2 U a ) 2 [W]
R1
The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:
R1 <
Where: Ua = Umin = Imin = Rcoil =
0,8 U a U min R Coil [Ohm ] I min

under
Auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label the top hinged cover. See table below). Internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate. Minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate. Trip coil resistance value. Relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua)
24-60 VDC (ordering code P12xx00Axxxxx) R1 < (0,8 x Ua 19,2)/0.035 - Rcoil
48-250 VDC/AC (ordering code P12xx00Fxxxxx) R1 < (0,8 x Ua 19,2)/0.035 - Rcoil
The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:
PR1 > 2
Remarks:
(1,2 U a ) 2 [W] (R1 + R Coil )
The presence of auxiliary relays, such an anti-pumping system for instance, in the trip circuit must be taken into account for the R1 resistance values specification. It is assumed the maximum variations of the auxiliary voltage value are 20%.
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 70/86 6.15 6.15.1
Switch onto Fault Protection & Trip on Reclose (SOTF/TOR) (P126 & P127) General Under particular conditions, it can happen,that when the feeder is supplied by the closing of the CB a fast trip command may be required if a fault is present. (Closing on to fault) Some faults may be caused by conditions not removed from the feeder after a reclosing cycle or a manual trip, or due to earthed clamps left on after maintenance works. In these cases, it may be desirable to clear the fault condition in fast time, rather than waiting for the trip time delay DMT or IDMT associated with the involved protection. In case of manually closing of the CB it can happen to switch on to an existing fault. This is a particularly critical situation, because the overcurrent protection would not clear the fault until the set operate delay had elapsed. This is another typical case of closing on to fault. Hence it is desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible. The P126 and P127 relays provide the SOTF/TOR functionality. The SOTF acronym means switch on to fault. The TOR acronym means trip on recloser. The available setting to enable/disable/set the SOTF/TOR function is written in a submenu of the AUTOMATIC CTRL menu. The setting regarding the I>> and I>>> is provided to initiate the Sotf function.
6.15.2
SOTF/TOR description When the SOTF/TOR function is enable, it can be initiated by a local manual CB control close command detected by the digital input labelled Man.Close, or by a TC (closing command by remote via network: Modbus, IEC 60870) or by an automatic reclosing cycle. When CB has been closed on some faults caused by lightning or something else, the fault detection needs a time period. This is the reason why a 500ms fixed time window after initiatialization of the SOTF/TOR function is included. When this fixed timer is elapsed and the I>> or I>>> is detected, the settable timer t Sotf starts. The existence of this settable timer is justified because in some applications selectivity for fault occurring in stage two or three is requested. Another justification of the SOTF/TOR tripping time delay is for cases where serious transient happen and the three poles of the CB do not close at the same time and for those cases where the CB may not be closed instantaneously. Furthermore, the t SOFT can also be considered a trip delay time that substitutes the trip timer of the started threshold such to accelerate the tripping. If a trip due to switch on to fault occurs during the reclaim time of the ARC, the trip will be definitive and the ARC will move in the blocked status. If the I>> and I>>> reset during the settable timer t Sotf the SOTF/TOR function resets.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 The SOTF/TOR functionality diagram is shown below.
SOTF/TOR
tI > tI >> tI >>>
>
Enable SOTF/TOR of AR close MAN close TC close Enable SOTF/TOR of AR close MAN close TC close
{ I>> I>>
&
Pulse
>
Trip
>
T 500 ms
>
{ I>>> I>>>
&
Pulse
Settable delay time from 0 to 500ms in steps of 0.001 ms
>
T 500 ms
P0572ENc
The trip by SOTF is settable in the AUTOMATIC CTRL/TRIP COMMAND submenu and in the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays submenu. Below are the involved settings. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. To access the SOTF-menu, press and submenu is reached. until the
SOTF
Heading of SOTF sub menu. To navigate within submenu sections, press . To modify setting, press . Use to scroll and set available selections. Press to confirm choice. Selection of the Sotf function. No Setting choice: Yes, No If Yes is selected, the following sub menu is displayed: If No is selected, the Sotf sub menu is inactive.
Sotf?
t Sotf 0.10 s
Displays the setting of the delay timer (tSotf) for SOTF function. The setting range for t Sotf is from 0 to 500 ms, in steps of 10 ms. The justification to use the SOTF/TOR tripping time delay is useful for some cases of serious transient or three poles closed not at the same time, in which cases the CB may not be closed instantaneously.
I>>? No I>>>? No
Selection if the Sotf function is triggered from I>>. Setting choice: Yes, No Selection if the Sotf function is triggered from I>>>. Setting choice: Yes, No
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 72/86 AUTOMATIC CTRL / TRIP COMMAND SUBMENU Trip SOTF No
Assigning the SOTF functionality to the trip output. When the t SOTF is elapsed the trip command is launched Setting choice: Yes, No
AUTOMATIC CTRL / OUTPUT RELAYS SUBMENU SOTF :8765432 0000010 Assigning the SOTF functionality to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). The assigned relay trips when the t SOTF has expired. Setting choice 1 assigns the output relay, 0 is for no assignment.
AUTOMATIC CTRL / INPUTS Input 17 Man. Close Assigning the Manual control close (Signal from external close command by push button) to the selected digital input labelled Man. Close.
6.16 6.16.1
Local/Remote conditioning (P125, P126 & P127) General The choice to work in local or remote mode for the P126 and P127 is set by the status of a digital input labeled LOCAL MODE. If this input is powered and set as active high the local mode is activated otherwise the remote mode is activated. In local mode trips protection and the Auto-recloser command to the CB are always sent, any command done remotely is inhibited.
6.16.2
Local/remote conditioning by logical input When the assigned logic input is polarized, all the writing commanded through communication (setting parameters, control command ..) will be forbidden to avoid any interference and accident during the local mode operation. The synchronization time by network stays active because it doesnt affect the output relays and neither the operation of the circuit breaker. If the logic input is not polarized, all writing commands done remotely will be authorized. This feature has been implemented in existing and available communication protocols of relays P125, P126 & P127.
6.16.3
Settings In the AUTOMATIC CTRL/TRIP COMMAND submenu TC (opening command done in remote via network:) item uses the CTRL TRIP to open the CB. In the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays the CTRL TRIP and CTRL CLOSE items can be used to open and close the CB from remote control order. The CB CLOSE relay can be used for the close command. In order to keep the normal functionality, the customer will have to assign both information TRIP by protection and Ctrl Trip on (RL1), and to assign both information CLOSE CTRL and CB CLOSE on the same auxiliary relay.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Below are the involved settings for the Local/Remote functionality AUTOMATIC CTRL / TRIP COMMAND SUBMENU Ctrl Trip Yes
Assignes the control by remote to the trip output. Setting choice: Yes, No
AUTOMATIC CTRL / OUTPUT RELAYS SUBMENU CONTROL :8765432 TRIP 0000001 Assigns the Control Trip command to the output relays; i.e. to output 2 (RL2). Setting choice 1 assigns the output relay; 0 none assignment. CONTROL :8765432 CLOSE 0000010 Assigns the Control Close command to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. CB Close :8765432 0000010 Assigns circuit breaker closing order signal to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3). Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment. AUTOMATIC CTRL / INPUTS Input 17 Local Assigns the Local mode condition to choose digital input from 1 to 7. If the choose input is active, any remote operation involving the output relays is forbidden.
An application of the subject mentioned above is presented below. In the following schematic, the customer will have to assign the TRIP and CTRL TRIP to the TRIP RELAY, the CB CLOSE and the CTRL CLOSE to the auxiliary relay number two, in accordance with setting above. If the Local input is energised any remote command will be ignored if the Local input is deenergised all the remote control will be considered.
DC V+ P125/P126/P127 Local trip RL 1 Control trip RL 2 Control close RL 2 AR close RL 1 Protection trip
Local Remote
Switch
Local close
Input labeled Local
DC V-
P0689ENa
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 74/86 6.17 Logic equations (P126 & P127)
The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow customization of the product based on customer application. Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used. Each equation offers the possibility to use AND, OR, AND NOT, OR NOT & NOT logical gates. Up to 16 parameters can be used for each equation. Every result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs. Every equation has a rising temporisation from 0 s to 600 s with a step of 0.01 s. Every equation has a falling temporisation from 0 s to 600 s with a step of 0.01 s. Every equation temporised result is assignable to trip, trip latching, outputs and LEDs. An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below:
I< tAUX 1(input1) &

5 sec
1 tAUX 2(input2)
10 sec
Output
P0717ENa
AUTOMAT. CTRL Logic Equations Equation A Equation A.00 =
I<
Equation A.01 AND NOT tAux1 Equation A.02 OR tAux2 Equation A.03 OR Equation A.04 OR Equation A.05 OR Equation A.06 OR Equation A.07 OR Null Null Null Null Null
Equation A.08..A.14 OR Null Equation A.15 OR Null
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 T OPERATE = T RESET =
5.00s 10.00s
7.
7.1
RECORDS (P125, P126 & P127)

Event Records The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in a non-volatile (battery back-up) memory. This enables the system operator to analyse the sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault. The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a resolution of 1ms. The event records are available for viewing either on the front panel, or via the front panel EIA RS232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA RS485 port.
7.2
Fault Records Each time any of the programmed thresholds are crossed a fault record is created and stored in a memory. The fault record tags up to 25 faults and stores them in a non-volatile (battery back-up) memory. This enables the system operator to identify and analyse network failures. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault. Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the RECORD/Fault Record menu, which is selectable from up to 25 stored records. These records consist of fault flags, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault record is generated. The fault records are available for viewing either on the display, or via the front panel EIA RS232 port or remotely, via the rear EIA RS485 port.
7.3
Instantaneous Recorder Each time any of programmed threshold is crossed an instantaneous record is created and displayed in the RECORDS/Instantaneous menu. The last five starting information with the duration of the information are available. The number of the fault, hour, date, origin (voltage, current and wattmetric protection thresholds), length (duration of the instantaneous), trip (a trip is appeared, yes or no) are displayed in the RECORDS/Fault Record menu.
7.4
Disturbance Records The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for disturbance record storage. The number of disturbance records that may be stored is 5 disturbance records of 3 seconds length each. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory space is exhausted, at which time the oldest disturbance record(s) is (are) overwritten to make space for the newest disturbance record(s). The recorder stores actual samples, which are taken at a rate of 32 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of analogue data channels and digital data channels. Note that the relevant VTs and CTs ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities. The total recording time is set by a combination of the pre and post fault recording times. The total disturbance recording time is 3.0 s (pre-trigger plus post-trigger). For the settings of the parameters see FT (User Guide) and TD (Technical Data) chapters of this TG.
8.
ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P126 & P127)

The MiCOM P126 and P127 relays are able to store the 3 phases rolling average and maximum subperiod values. The description and principle of calculation are given bellow.
8.1
Rolling demand The principle of the calculation of the rolling demand value for IA, IB and IC currents is following: Calculation of the average of the RMS values on a "Rolling Sub Period" period.
The setting of the width of the period "Rolling Sub Period" is in the "RECORDS/Rolling Demand/Sub Period" menu. Setting range: from 1 to 60 minutes. Storage of these values in a sliding window Calculation of the average of these average values (sliding window values) on the number of "Num. of Sub Periods" periods
The setting of the number of Sub Period "Num of Sub Periods" in the "RECORDS/Rolling Demand/Num of Sub Per" menu. Setting range: from 1 to 24. Display of the first result in the MEASUREMENTS menu only after the storage of "Num of Sub Periods" periods. The 3 phases Rolling average value are displayed: Rolling Average IA RMS Rolling Average IB RMS Rolling Average IC RMS
The calculation is reset by either "hand Reset" (by key _ ) without use of password, or a remote command. NOTE: In case of loss of power supply the rolling demand are not stored.
A modification of the settings (either "Rolling Sub Period" or "Num of Sub Periods" parameter) reset the calculation. Example: Sub Period = 5 mn Num of Sub Period = 2
At the end of the Sub Period 2: Rolling average value = (average value 1 + average value 2)/2 At the end of the Sub Period 3: New Rolling average value = (average value 2 + average value 3)/2
P12y/EN AP/A63 Page 78/86 8.2 Peak value demand
The principle of the calculation of the Peak value demand for IA, IB and IC currents is following: Every "Rolling Sub Period", a new average value is compared with the previous value calculated at the previous "Rolling Sub Period". If this new value is greater than the previous value already stored, then this new value is stored instead of the previous one. In the opposite if this new value is lower than the previous value already stored, then the previous value is kept stored. In this way, a average peak vale will be refreshed each Sub Period; There is no dedicated setting for this calculation. The setting of the Sub Period in the RECORDS menu is used. The 3 phase Peak value demand are displayed in the MEASUREMENTS menu: MAX SUBPERIOD IA RMS MAX SUBPERIOD IB RMS MAX SUBPERIOD IC RMS
The calculation is reset by either "hand Reset" (by key _ ) without use of password, or a remote command. NOTE: In case of loss of power supply the Peak average values are stored.
A modification of the setting "Rolling Sub Period" parameter reset the calculation.
9.
SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P125, P126 & P127)

The MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays have two protection related setting groups named PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2. Only one of two setting groups is active. Changes between the two groups are executed via the front interface (CONFIGURATION/GROUP SELECT/SETTING GROUP 1 or 2), a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT CTRL/INPUT X/CHANGE SET) where X is the chosen logic input, or through the communication port (refer to Mapping Data Base for more detailed information). To avoid any undesirable tripping, the setting group change is only executed when none protection function is running excepted than for thermal overload function If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function, it is stored and executed after the last timer has elapsed. The active group is displayed in the OP PARAMETER menu. The active group can also be assigned to an output relay: with a normally open contact. a contact open will indicate Group 1 a contact closed will indicate Group 2
9.1.1
Setting group change by digital input It is possible to configure the change of the setting group by a digital input, either on falling edge/ low level or on rising edge/ high level. The choice can be done in the CONFIGURATION/Inputs menu. Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge or high level) depending of the application is selectable in the CONFIGURATION/Group Select/Change Group/Input menu. If the digital input assigned to the change of setting group operates on level (low or high), it is not possible to change of setting group via either remote communication or front panel. Switching between the groups can be done via: the relay front panel interface (CONFIGURATION/GROUP SELECT/ SETTING GROUP 1 or 2), a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT. CTRL/INPUT X/CHANGE SET) where X is the chosen logic input, through the communications port.
9.1.2
Priority The front panel is priority level maximum due the fact when the user takes the hand on front panel and enters a password , it is not possible to change of setting group via remote communication as long as the password is active (5mn). Below are listed the priorities in the different ways to switch between setting groups. ORIGIN OF THE ORDER FRONT PANEL LOGIC INPUT REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS PRIORITY LEVEL MAXIMUM MEDIUM MINIMUM
10.
MEASUREMENTS
The measurement functions on MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are described in chapter User Guide of this Technical Guide. Particular attention is to be given to the power and energy measurement.
10.1
Power and Energy Measurements (P127) The MiCOM P127 relay provides the measurements function for active and reactive power and for active and reactive energy. The value for power is calculated in accordance with the following listed table. VTs connection 3Vpn Active Reactive power calculation method Sum of each power phase P= PA+PB+PC Q= QA+QB+QC Sum of each power phase P= PA+PB+PC Q= QA+QB+QC Aron insertion
2Vpn+Vr 2Vpp+Vr
The value for energy is calculated by multiplying the calculated power value by time. The calculated energy value is stored in a non-volatile memory (EPROM) every second, so that in case of temporary power supply fault, the previous values calculated can be recalled. The MiCOM P127 relay provides, on the display, the measurements of the power and of the energy. Both refer to primary values and rely on the CT and VT ratio. The maximum active and reactive power value displayed is 9999MW and 9999MVAr. The maximum active and reactive energy value displayed is 4200GWh and 4200GVArh. The sign of the active and reactive power/energy values is taken according to the diagram below. They are in accordance with the wiring diagrams in the chapter P12y/EN CO in this Technical Guide.
+ cos phi +P -Q V I cos phi +P +Q
-cos phi -P -Q
-cos phi -P +Q
P0100ENa
Following is the MiCOM P127 relay measurement menu for the power and energy. P 0.00 kW Displays the active power; only negative sign is shown. The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MW. If the measured value is above 9999MW this display remains on the LCD. Displays the reactive power; only negative sign is shown. The maximum measured value displayed is 9999MVAr. If the measured value is above 9999MVAr this display remains on the LCD. Displays the three phases power factor. 1.00 Energy CLR=[C] 3Ph Whours Fwd 4200 GWh 3Ph Whours Rev 4200 GWh 3Ph VArHours Fwd 4200 GVArh 3Ph VArHours Rev 4200 GVArh Header for energy measurements Allows the user to reset the measured energy value. To Note: The password is requested to clear the display. Displays the three phase active energy forward. Displays the three phase active energy reverse. Displays the three phase reactive energy forward. Displays the three phase reactive energy reverse.
Q -0.10 kVAR
Cos (Phi)
11.
11.1
LOGIC INPUTS AND LOGIC OUTPUTS

Logic Inputs In the logic input submenu can be set the digital inputs as active high or active low, can be chosen the supply type DC or AC and it is possible to set the start/stop of the relevant auxiliary timers assigned to the inputs by front or edge. By the ordering code it is possible to select the relay with the digital inputs with EA approval regulation. See the technical data for further information. The setting menu for this functionality is in the CONFIGURATION menu. For more details see FT (User Guide). In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relays real time clock so that events from different relays can be placed in chronological order. This can be done using the communication interface connected to the substation control system or via an opto-input. Any of the available opto-inputs on the P12x relay can be selected for synchronization. Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The recommended pulse duration is 20ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An example of the time synchronization function is shown. Time of Sync. Pulse 19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999 19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999 NOTE: Corrected Time 19:47:00.000 19:48:00.000
The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss
A single digital input can be used for several internal functions or assigned directly to any output contact 11.2 Logic Outputs A dedicated output relay is assigned to each logic output. It is possible to set the relays as self reset or latching. The two first output contacts (RL1 & RL2) can be used as failsafe relays to provide a fail safe alarm in case of power supply loss or major hardware failure. Other available relays can be inverted to reverse NO relays operating condition (output relays closing when logical state of the signal changes from 1 to 0). FAIL SAFE RE.
87654321 00100010
This settings means: RL1: Normally Open (NO) RL2: Fail Safe relay RL3, 4, 5, 7 & 8: NO RL6: Inverted (NO but output relays closed when logical state of the signal is going down)
The setting menu for the functionality of the logic outputs is available in the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. It is possible to assign a specific function to each output relay except RL1. For more details see the chapter User Guide.
12.
MAINTENANCE MODE
This menu allows the user to verify the operation of the protection functions without sending any external order (Tripping or signalling). The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input, control command (rear or front port), or by front display. The end of maintenance mode is done by logic input, by control command or on the front display time out ( 5minutes) and by turning off the power supply. Maintenance Mode YES When activating this menu (YES), the Alarm led will start flashing and an alarm message will appear MAINTENANCE MODE. In this case, all output contacts are blocked, no operation will take place on these contacts even if a protection threshold associated to one of these output contacts is exceeded. (If protection threshold is exceeded, all the associated leds will become ON, even the TRIP LED, if the threshold is associated to the RL1). RELAYS CMD
8765W4321 000000000
This window allows the user to verify the external wiring to the relay output contacts, to do this, it is sufficient to assign a 1 to any of the output contacts, this will close the contact and the wiring continuity could be verified.
13.
CT REQUIREMENTS
The CT requirements for the MiCOM P12y relays are given below. The current transformer requirements are based on a maximum prospective fault current of 50 times the relay rated current (In) and the relay having an instantaneous setting of 25 times rated current (In). The current transformer requirements are designed to provide operation of all protection elements. Where the criteria for a specific application are in excess of those detailed above, or the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value quoted, the CT requirements may need to be increased according to the formulae in the following sections. Nominal Rating Nominal Output 1A 5A 2.5VA 7.5VA Accuracy Class 10P 10P Accuracy Limit Factor 20 20 Limiting lead resistance 1.3 ohms 0.11 ohms
13.1
Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection Time-delayed Phase overcurrent elements: VK Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)
Time-delayed Earth Fault overcurrent elements: VK 13.2 Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements: VK Isp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp)
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements: VK 13.3 Isn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection Time delay SEF protection: VK Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
SEF Protection - as fed from a core-balance CT: Core balance current transformers of metering class accuracy are required and should have a limiting secondary voltage satisfying the formulae given below: Time Delayed element:
VK
VK
Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)

Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn)
Instantaneous element:
Note that, in addition, it should be ensured that the phase error of the applied core balance current transformer is less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less than 150 minutes at 1% of rated current.
Application Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Abbreviations used in the previous formulae are explained below: Where: VK Ifn Ifp Icn Icp Isn Isp RCT RL Rrp Rrn = = = = = = = = = = =
Required CT knee-point voltage (volts), Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps), Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps), Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps), Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps), Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps), Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps), Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms), Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms), Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms).
BLANK PAGE
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127
P12y/EN CT/A63
MODBUS DATABASE IEC 60870-5-103 DNP 3.0 DATABASE

MiCOM P125 - P126 - P127 VERSION V11.A
P12y/EN CT/A63
MODBUS DATABASE
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 1/74
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document Glossary
3
3 3
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.1.1 2.4.1.2 2.4.1.3 2.4.1.4 2.4.1.5 2.4.1.6 2.4.1.7 2.4.1.8 2.4.1.9
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS connection technical characteristics MODBUS connection parameters Exchanges messages synchronisation Message validity check Address MODBUS functions available in the protection device Description of the MODBUS protocol Frame size received by the protection device (slave) Format of frames sent from the relay Messages validity check Database organisation Description of the application mapping Settings Page 0H Page 1H Page 2H Page 3H Page 4H Page 5H Page 6H Page 7H
4
4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 12 18 23 24 24 31 33 33 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 45
2.4.1.10 Page 8H 2.4.1.11 Reserved pages 2.4.1.12 Disturbance records 2.4.1.13 Events records 2.4.1.14 Fault records 2.4.1.15 Mapping access characteristics 2.4.1.16 Pages 9H to 21H 2.4.1.16.1 Meaning of each channel value 2.4.1.17 Page 22H 2.4.1.18 Page 35H 2.4.1.19 Page 36H
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 2/74 2.4.1.20 Page 37H 2.4.1.21 Pages 38H to 3CH 2.4.1.22 Page 3DH 2.4.1.23 Page 3EH 2.4.1.24 Page 5AH 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.3.1 2.4.3.2 2.4.3.3 2.4.3.4 2.4.3.5 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.6.1 2.4.6.2 Mapping format description Disturbance record additional information MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record Request to know the number of disturbance records Service requests Disturbance record upload request Index frame upload request Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Request to retrieve a dedicated event Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 45 48 50 51 51 52 71 71 71 71 71 71 72 72 72 73 73
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocols of MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relay (named P12y in this document). The available communication protocols on the relay are listed below: MODBUS IEC 60870-5-103 K-BUS/Courier (not available) DNP3
1.2
Glossary Ie Ue Pe IeCosPhi MWh+ MWhMVARh+ MVARhMVAh pf PF Dec Hex : earth fault current measured : residual voltage measured directly by the input terminals on rear panel : earth fault power (Calculated) : active component of the earth fault current : positive active energy : negative active energy : positive re-active energy : negative re-active energy : apparent energy : soft weight of a word of 16 bits : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits : decimal representation value : hexadecimal representation value
COURIER are not available yet (in grey colour)
2.
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MiCOM P12Y relay can communicate by a RS 485 link. The terminals are placed on the rear panel (terminals 31 and 32). See the GS document for further information on the wiring. The applied ModBus protocol is compliance with the MODBUS RTU.
2.1 2.1.1
MODBUS connection technical characteristics MODBUS connection parameters The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are listed below: Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz), MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode
Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay: Baud rate (dec) 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog: Mode 1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop: total 10 bits 1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop: total 11 bits 2.1.2 Exchanges messages synchronisation Any character received after a silence on the line of more than or equal to a transmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start. 2.1.3 Message validity check The validation of a frame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC). The generator polynomial is: 1 + x + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h 2.1.4 Address In order to integrate a protection device into a control and monitoring system, the address must be set from the local control panel. The address may be selected from the range of 1 to 255. The address 0 is reserved for broadcast messages.
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.2 MODBUS functions available in the protection device
Protection device data may be read or modified by using function codes. Following are the available function codes. Function codes to read from or write into parameter cells in the protection device are described in the listed following table. Function Nr. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 15 16 Fast X X X X Data Read X X X X X X Data Write Data Format & Type N bits N bits N words N words 1 bit 1 word 8 bits Diagnostics counter Event counter N bits N words
2.3
Description of the MODBUS protocol MODBUS is a master-slave protocol where every exchange involves a master devices request for data and a slave devices response with data.
2.3.1
Frame size received by the protection device (slave) Frame transmitted by the master (query): Slave number 1 byte 0 FFh Slave address: The slave address is in the range from 1 to 255. A transmitted frame with a slave address equal to 0 is a globally addressed to all installed equipment (broadcast frame) Function code: The function code returned by the slave in the exception response frame is the code in which the most significant bit (bit 7) is forced to 1. Error code: Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the protection device manages two: Code 01: Function code unauthorised or unknown. Code 03: A value from the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code). Control of data being read. Control of data being written. Control of data address. Length of request for data message. Function code 1 byte 1 10h Information n bytes CRC16 2 bytes
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 6/74 CRC16: The slave calculates the CRC16 value. NOTE: 2.3.2
The protection device does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master.
Format of frames sent from the relay Frame sent (response): Slave number 1 byte 1 FFh Slave address: The slave address is in the range from 1 to 255. Function code: Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16). Data: Contains reply data to master query. CRC16: CRC16 value calculated by the slave. Function code 1 byte 1 10h Data n bytes CRC16 2 bytes
2.3.3
Messages validity check When MiCOM P12y relay (slave) receives a master query, it validates the frame: If the CRC is incorrect, the frame is discarded as invalid. The slave does not reply to the request for data. The master must retransmit its request for data. With the exception of a broadcast message, this is the only case where the slave does not reply to a request for data from the master. If the CRC is correct but the slave can not process the request for data, it sends an exception response to the master.
Warning frame sent (response) Slave number 1 byte 1 to FFh Slave number: The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code: The function code returned by the relay in the warning frame is the code in which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1. Warning code: On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the relay manages two of them: code 01: function code unauthorised or unknown. code 03: a value in the data field is unauthorised (incorrect data). Control of pages being read Control of pages being written Function code 1 byte 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh Warning code 1 byte CRC16 2 bytes pf ... PF
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CRC16: Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave. 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.1.1 Database organisation Description of the application mapping Settings Parameters are organized in pages. MiCOM P12y application mapping has 7 pages of parameters. The characteristics are the following: Page 0h 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h Data type Product information, remote signalling, measurements General remote parameters Setting group 1 remote parameters Setting group 2 remote parameters Remote controls Boolean equations General remote parameters (part 2) P12y relay status Data and time Control of addresses in pages Length of request messages
Read permission Through communication X X X X X X Fast X
Write permission
X X X X X X
They are completely listed below.
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 8/74 2.4.1.2

Address (hex) 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A-001F 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 Alarms 1 Protection 49 Protection 37 Accessory functions Protection 67n Protection 67 Remote signals Product Information Relay description characters 1 and 2 Relay description characters 3 and 4 Relay description characters 5 and 6 Unit reference characters 1 and 2 Unit reference characters 3 and 4 Software version Front & rear port available communication protocols Internal ratio phase current Internal ratio earth current Internal ratio rated voltage Internal ratio voltage Info General Start (only if IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) LED status Configuration status of the digital inputs, part 2 Password status HW alarm status Digital inputs status Status of the digital inputs configuration, part 1 Trip relay: output status Output relays operation command Information of the threshold status I> Information of the threshold status I>> Information of the threshold status I>>> Information of the threshold status Ie> Information of the threshold status Ie>> Information of the threshold status Ie>>> Reserved
1
Page 0H
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 0 7
Value 5 32 - 127 32 -127 32 -127 32 - 127 32 - 127 100 xxx 0-3 1 1 1 1 1 1 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 F21 F41 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 0 - 256 1 F62 F20A 0 -1 F24 F45 F12 F20 0-1 F22 F13 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 P1 20 AL ST 110
Information of the thermal protection status Information of the undercurrent threshold status I< Information of the status of the accessory functions 2/2 Information of the status of the accessory functions 1/2 Reserved
1
F37 F17 F38A F38
Non acknowledged alarms , part 1
F36
Informations of instantaneous and temporised memorised I>, I>>, I>>> and I< have different address Modbus from release V3/V4/V5 to V6. This old address Modbus V5 aren't used (001Bh to 001Fh and 0024h) and all are integrated in the new one address 002Bh (see format description F36C).

Address (hex) 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E 002F 00300031 00320033 00340035 00360037 00380039 003A003B 003C 003D 003E 003F0040 00410042 00430044 00450046 00470048 0049004A 004B004C 004D 004E 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 (reference) 0055 0056 Angle between IAÎB Angle between IAÎC Angle between IAÎe 0057 Angle between IeÎe 0 (reference) 0058 0059 Inverse current module I2 Direct current module I1 0-359 0-359 0-359 Remote measurements Relays Disturbance Trip relay status Circuit Breaker Alarms 2 to 5 Numbers of available disturbance records Information on the starting origin of the trip relay CB Supervision status Non acknowledged alarms, part 2, Non acknowledged alarms, part 3, Non acknowledged alarms, part 4, Non acknowledged alarms, part 5, Reserved Output relays, latch configuration and status Reserved Phase A RMS current Phase B RMS current Phase C RMS current Earth RMS current Inverse current I2 (fundamental) Direct current I1 (fundamental) Ratio I2 / I1 Thermal status (protected) Frequency Phase A RMS max current Phase B RMS max current Phase C RMS max current Phase A RMS average current Phase B RMS average current Phase C RMS average current Ie harmonic Reserved Module V1 Module V2 Module IA Module IB Module IC Module Ie Angle between IAÎA 0 0 - 999 0 - 999 45006500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0-5 0 - 41 Group Description

Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 7
Value 5 F31 F61 F43 F36A F36B F36C F36D
F27
10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA % % 10mHz 10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA 10mA
F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F1 F1 F1 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 Deg Deg Deg Deg Deg F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

Address (hex) 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E 005F 0060 00610062 00630064 00650066 00670068 0069006A 006B006C 006D006E 006F 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 00780079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E 007F 00800081 00820083 00840085 00860087 0088 Boolean equations Voltage measurement Protection 46 Protection 59n Protection 59 Protection 32n Protection 27 Energy measures Recloser 79 Nr. of total cycles Nr. of cycles 1 Nr. of cycles 2 Nr. of cycles 3 Nr. of cycles 4 Nr. of definitive trips Nr. of tripping orders Positive active energy Negative active energy Positive reactive energy Negative reactive energy Rolling demand max RMS IA value Rolling demand max RMS IB value Rolling demand max RMS IC value Reserved Information of the threshold status U< Information of the threshold status U<< Information of the threshold status Pe/ IeCos> Information of the threshold status Pe/ IeCos>> Reserved Angle between IeÛe Information of the threshold status U> Information of the threshold status U>> Reserved Information of the threshold status Ue>>>> Reserved Information of the threshold status I2> Information of the threshold status I2>> Information of the threshold status I2>>> Boolean equation status Phase A RMS voltage Phase B RMS voltage Phase C RMS voltage Earth RMS voltage Module UAB 0-359 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-999 0-999 from 1 to 9 4.200 x 10 from 1 to 9 4.200 x 10 from 1 to 9 4.200 x 10 from 1 to 9 4.200 x 10 Group Description

Value 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 kWh kWh kVARh kVARh 10mA 10mA 10mA F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F18A F18A F18A F18A F18 F18 F18
F17 F17 F16 F16
Deg
F1 F17 F17
F16
F17 F17 F17 F48 1 1 1 1 10mV 10mV 10mV 10mV F18A F18A F18A F18A F1

Address (hex) 0089 008A 008B 008C 008D 008E 008F 00900091 00920093 00940095 00960097 00980099 009A009B 009C009D 009E009F 00A000A1 00A2 00A300A4 00A500A6 00A700A8 00A900AA 00AB-00AC 00AD-00AE 00AF 00B0 00B1 00B2 00B3 00B4 00B5 00B6 00B7 00B8 00B9 00BA 00BB 00BC to 00FF Energy measures Measurement Power measures Power measures Module UBC Module UCA Module Ue Angle between IAÛAB Angle between IAÛBC Angle between IAÛCA Angle between IAÛe Max phase A RMS voltage Max phase B RMS voltage Max phase C RMS voltage Average phase A RMS voltage Average phase B RMS voltage Average phase C RMS voltage Module Pe 3-Phase Active Power (P) 3-Phase Re-active Power (Q) 3-Phase CosPHI Rolling demand average RMS IA value Rolling demand average RMS IB value Rolling demand average RMS IC value Module IeCos 3-Phase Apparent power (S) Apparent energy 3Ph V A Hours Module VA Module VB Module VC Angle between IA^VA Angle between IA^VB Angle between IA^VC Information of the threshold status f1 Information of the threshold status f2 Information of the threshold status f3 Information of the threshold status f4 Information of the threshold status f5 Information of the threshold status f6 F out Reserved 0-359 0-359 0-359 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 -999.9 10 6 to 999.9 10 from 1 to 9 4.200 x 10
6

Group
Description
Value 5 F1 F1 F1 0-359 0-359 0-359 0-359 1 1 1 1 1 1 Deg Deg Deg Deg 10mV 10mV 10mV 10mV 10mV 10mV F1 F1 F1 F1 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18 F18A -999.9 10 6 to 999.9 10 -999.9 10 6 to 999.9 10 -100 to 100
6 6
1 1 1 1 1 1
10Watt 10VAR 0.01 10mA 10mA 10mA
F18 F18 F2 F18A F18A F18A F18A
1 1
10VA
F18 F18A F1 F1 F1
kVAh
Deg Deg Deg
F1 F1 F1 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F69

Address (hex) 0100 Remote setting Address of front/rear port: MODBUS IEC 60870-5-103 0101 0102 0103 0104 01050108 0109 010A 010B 010C 010D 010E 010F 0110 0111 01120113 01140115 01160117 0118 0119 011A 011B 011C 011D 011E 011F 0120 0121 0122 0123 Ratios VT 01240125 Primary phase VT 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 0126 Secondary phase VT 57 - 130V operating range 10 100000 220 480 570 -1300 Ratios CT Digital input CB monitoring measurements Language Password, ASCII digits 1 and 2 Password, ASCII digits 3 and 4 Rated frequency Reserved Default display User reference, ASCII digits 1 and 2 User reference, ASCII digits 3 and 4 Number of the default records to be displayed Inputs mode configuration (edge or level), part 2, Maintenance Mode Digital inputs signal type: ACDC CB operations number CB operating time Switched square Amps phase A summation Switched square Amps phase B summation Switched square Amps phase C summation Circuit breaker closing time Digital input 1, part 2 Digital input 2, part 2 Digital input 3, part 2 Digital input 4, part 2 Digital input 5, part 2 Digital input 6, part 2 Digital input 7, part 2 Primary phase CT Secondary phase CT Primary earth CT Secondary earth CT 1 - 9999 1 or 5 1 - 9999 1 or 5 0-1 0-1 0-3 32 - 127 32 - 127 1- 25 1 - 255 1 - 255 0 - 13 32 - 127 32 - 127 50 - 60
Page 1H
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 7
Value 5 1 F1 1
F63 1 1 10 Hz F10 F10 F1 AA AA 50
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10ms A A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A A 1 A A
n
F26 F10 F10 F31A F54A F24 F51 F1 F1 F18 F18 F18 F1 F15A F15A F15A F15A F15A F15A F15A F1 F1 F1 F1
1 AL ST 25 0 1
10ms
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
10V V 100mV
F18A F18A F1
100 V 220 V 100 V

Address (hex) 220 - 480V operating range 0127 0128 0129 Scheme VTs connection Primary earth VT VTs connection mode: 3Vpn, 2Vpp+Vr, 2Vpn+Vr 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 012A Secondary earth VT 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 012B 012C 012D 012E Communicatio n Maintenance mode relays command Obsolete Number Instantaneous record to be displayed Communication speed (Baud): IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3 012F 0130 0131 0132 Date format Communication speed (Baud) Parity Address of rear port: DNP3 0133 0134 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 013A 013B 013C 013D 013E 013F 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 0146 0147 0148 Digital input Digital inputs configuration Configuration group LED Stop bits COM available info Parameters configuration group Led 5, part 1 Led 6, part 1 Led 7, part 1 Led 8, part 1 Led 5, part 2 Led 6, part 2 Led 7, part 2 Led 8, part 2 Led 5, part 3 Led 6, part 3 Led 7, part 3 Led 8, part 3 Inputs mode configuration (edge or level) Inputs sense configuration (High or Low) Digital input 6, part 1 Digital input 7, part 1 Digital input 1, part 1 Digital input 2, part 1 Digital input 3, part 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1- 59999 0-1 0-3 1-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0-1 0-5 0-1 0-7 0-2 1 1 1 1 1- 5 1 1 2200 0, 2, 4 10 -100000 220 480 570 -1300 2200 1 1 1 1 1 Group Description

Value 5 100mV F1 F7 10V V 100mV 100mV F18A F18A F1 F1 F13 220 V 0 100 V 220 V 100 V 220 V
F31B F53
1 4 F52 F4 F5 F1 0 6 0 1
F29 F30 F55 F19 F19 F19 F19 F19A F19A F19A F19A F19B F19B F19B F19B F54 F47 F15 F15 F15 F15 F15
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0

Address (hex) 0149 014A 014B 014C 014D 014E 014F 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 015A 015B 015C 015D 015E 015F 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 016A 016B Recloser 79 Protection 67n Protection 67 Protection 67n Protection 67 Output Relays Circuit breaker Protection 37 Alarm Protection 49 Output relays Digital input 4, part 1 Digital input 5, part 1 Output relays: Broken conductor Output relays: Breaker failure Output relays: tI< Self reset start protection alarms enable / disable Output relays: Thermal overload alarm( alarm) Output relays: Thermal overload tripping ( trip) Output relays: Switch on to fault, circuit breaker tripping & SOTF/TOR Output relays: tAUX 1 Output relays: tAUX 2 Output relays: circuit breakers alarms Output relays: Trip circuit supervision Fail safe and inversion relays Conf. Block relay on I> start Conf. Block relay on Ie> start Output relays: tIA> Output relays: tIB> Output relays: tIC> RL1-RL8: configuration and latch Output relays: Trip output relay RL1 on RLx Output relays: tI> Output relays: tI>> Output relays: tI>>> Output relays: tIe> Output relays: tIe>> Output relays: tIe>>> Output relays: I> Output relays: I>> Output relays: I>>> Output relays: Ie> Output relays: Ie>> Output relays: Ie>>> Output relays: recloser running Output relays: definitive tripping & Conf. recloser locked 016C 016D 016E 016F Tripping Breaker Failure Blocking Logic Conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 1 Current Threshold Blocking logic 1, part 1 Blocking logic 2, part 1 2 -100 0-1 0-1 Group Description

Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7
Value 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F15 F15 F14 F14 F14 F24 F14 F14 F14A F14 F14 F14 F14 F56 F24 F24 F14 F14 F14 F27 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14D 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1/100 In
F6 F1 F8 F8
1 2 0 0

Address (hex) 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 017A 017B 017C 017D 017E 017F 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189 018A 018B 018C 018D 018E 018F 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 0195 0196 0197 Tripping Blocking logic CB monitoring Disturbance Selectivity Breaker failure Cold Load PU Broken Conductor Brkn. Cond. operating mode Brkn. Cond. trip delay time Brkn. Cond. limit Operating mode Configuration desensitising limits Percentage of desensitisation Desensitising timer Breaker Failure operating mode Breaker failure delay time Digital selectivity 1 Digital selectivity 2 tSel1 tSel2 Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time Config. Disturbance start CB open operating mode CB open time thereshold Operations number CB opening operations number threshold. CB switched Amps sum CB switched Amps sum threshold Amps or square Amps Closing time threshold Auxiliary timer 1 Auxiliary timer 2 Max & average (current + voltage) time window selection CB open pulse duration CB close pulse duration CB close operating mode CB supervision operating mode Trip circuit time Blocking logic 1, part 2 Blocking logic 2, part 2 Conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 2 Auxiliary timer 3 Auxiliary timer 4 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 1 and 2 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 3 and 4 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 5 and 6 0 - 20000 0 - 20000 32 - 127 32 - 127 32 - 127 1-2 5 - 100 0 - 20000 0 - 20000 5 10 15 30 - 60 10 - 500 10 - 500 0-1 0-1 10 - 1000 1 5 1 1 0 - 15000 0 - 15000 1 -. 30 1 -. 30 0-1 0-1 5 - 100 0-1 0 - 50000 0-1 100 - 500 1 - 36000 0-1 0 - 1000 0-1 0 - 14400 20 - 100 0-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 Group Description

Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 1 5 0 0 5 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7
Value 5 F24 s F1 F1 F24 F33 % 10ms F1 F1 F24 10ms F1 F40 F40 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms F1 F1 F1 F1 F32 F24 10ms F1 F24 F1 F24 10 6 n A
E
0 1 100 0 0 50 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 5 0 0 0
F1 F1
10ms 10ms 10ms mn 10ms 10ms
F1 F1 F1 F42 F1 F1 F24 F24 F1 F8A F8A F6A
VTA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10ms 10ms
F1 F1 F10 F10 F10

Address (hex) 0198 0199 019A 019B 019C 019D 019E 019F 01A0 01A1 01A2 01A3 01A4 01A5 01A6 01A7 01A8 01A9 01AA 01AB 01AC 01AD 01AE 01AF 01B0 01B1 01B2 01B3 01B4 01B5 01B6 01B7-01DE 01DF 01E0 01E1 01E2 01E3 01E4 01E5 01E6 01E7 Boolean Equations Protection 46 Protection 27 Protection 67 Protection 59N Protection 59 Protection 32n Protection 67n Description for Courier: ASCII digits 7 and 8 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 9 and 10 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 11 and 12 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 13 and 14 Description for Courier: ASCII digits 15 and 16 Output relays: Ie> reverse Output relays: Ie>> reverse Output relays: Ie>>> reverse Output relays: Pe/Iecos> Output relays: tPe/Iecos> Output relays: Pe/Iecos>> Output relays: tPe/Iecos>> Output relays: U> Output relays: tU> Output relays: U>> Output relays: tU>> Output relays: Ue>>>> Output relays: tUe>>>> Output relays: I> reverse Output relays: I>> reverse Output relays: I>>> reverse Output relays: U< Output relays: tU< Output relays: U<< Output relays: tU<< Output relays: I2> Output relays: tI2> Output relays: I2>> Output relays: tI2>> Output relays: I2>>> Output relays: tI2>>> Obsolete Tripping equation A time Reset equation A time Output relays: tEqu. A Tripping equation B time Time reset equation B time Output relays: tEqu. B Tripping equation C time Reset equation C time Output relays: tEqu. C 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 32 - 127 32 - 127 32 - 127 32 - 127 32 - 127 Group Description

Value 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
10ms 10ms
F1 F1 F14
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1
10ms 10ms
F1 F1 F14
1 1
10ms 10ms
F1 F1 F14

Address (hex) 01E8 01E9 01EA 01EB 01EC 01ED 01EE 01EF 01F0 01F1 01F2 01F3 01F4 01F5 01F6 01F7 01F8 01F9 01FA 01FB 51V function V2> value Tripping equation D time Reset equation D time Output relays: tEqu. D Output relays: tAUX 3 & tAUX 4 Output relays: Control Trip & Control Close Output relays: I< Output relays: Group 2 active Led 5, part 3 Led 6, part 3 Led 7, part 3 Led 8, part 3 Obsolete Obsolete Self-reset LEDs on fault Temporal opening for Rolling Subperiod Number of Subperiods considered Switch onto Fault (SOTF) SOTF time 51V configuration 57 130V operating range 220 480V operating range 01FC V2>> value 57 130V operating range 220 480V operating range 01FD 01FE 01FF U< blocking frequency protection VTS function VTS configuration VTS conv. directional to non-dir. 57 130V operating range 220 480V operating range 0-1 1 - 60 1 24 0 32771 0 500 03 30 -2000 200 -7200 30 -2000 200 -7200 07 0-3Fh 50 -1300 200 - 4800 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 1 1 Group Description

Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 0 0 0 0 7
Value 5 10ms 10ms F1 F1 F14 F14B F14C F14 F14 F19C F19C F19C F19C 0 0 0 0 0 0
F24 mn F1 F1 F58 ms F1 F59 100mV 100mV 100mV 100mV F1 F1 F1 F1 F60 F65 100mV 100mV F1 F1
1 1 1 1 100 0 1300 4800 1300 4800 0 0 50 200

Address (hex) 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 020A 020B 020C 020D Protection 50/51/67 I> operating mode I> value Trip time type I> DMT Trip time I> TMS: I> trip time multiplier K: I>trip time multiplier for RI type curve Reset time type: DMT / IDMT DMT reset time I> RTMS: I> reset time multiplier Torque (RCA) angle IÛ> Trip angle IÛ> Interlock I> I>> operating mode I>> value 50 - 4000 10 - 4000 020E 020F 0210 0211 0212 Trip time I>> Torque (RCA) angle IÛ>> Trip angle IÛ>> I>>> operating mode I>>> value 50 - 4000 10 - 4000 0213 0214 0215 0216 0217 Protection 50n/51n/67n Ie> value Trip time I>>> Torque (RCA) angle IÛ>>> Trip angle IÛ>>> Ie> operating mode 0.002 - 1 Ien operating range 0.01 - 1 Ien operating range 0.1 - 25 Ien operating range 0218 0219 021A 021B 021C 021D 021E 021F Ue> value Trip time type Ie> DMT Trip time Ie> TMS: Ie> trip time multiplier K: Ie> trip time multiplier for RI type curve Ie> reset time type DMT or IDMT DMT Reset time Ie> RTMS: Ie> reset time multiplier 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 0 - 15000 25 - 1500 100 -10000 0-1 0 - 10000 25 - 3200 10 - 2600 40 - 7200 0 - 15000 0 - 359 10 - 170 0-1-2 2 - 1000 10 -1000 10- 2500 0 - 15000 0 - 359 10 - 170 0-1-2-3 0 - 15000 25 - 1500 100 -10000 0-1 4 - 10000 25 - 3200 0 - 359 10 -170 0-1 01-2 0-1-2 10 - 2500
Page 2H
Group Description Values range Sep Unit Format Def. P12y 6 7 4 25 0 10 0 0 4000 1 1 1 1 1 1/100 In 10ms Deg. Deg. F1 F1 F1 F24A F1 0 0 80 0 4000 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1/1000 Ien 1/1000 Ien 1/100 Ien 10ms Deg. Deg. F1 F1 F1 F24A F1 F1 F1 F3 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 5 10ms 0.001 1/10 V 1/10 V 10ms 0.001 0.001 F1 F1 F1 F34 F1 F1 F1 F1 4 0 1000 4000 0 0 10 0 1000 1000 2500 0 0 25 100
Value 5 1 1 1/100 In F24A F1 F3 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 10ms 0.001 Deg. Deg 10ms 0.001 0.001 F1 F1 F1 F34 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 1 1 1/100 In F24A F1 0 2500 0 0 25 100

Address (hex) 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 Ie>> value Torque (RCA) angle IeÛe> Trip angle IeÛe> Interlock Ie> Ie>> operating mode 0.002-1 Ien operating range 0.01 - 8 Ien operating range 0.1 - 40 Ien operating range 0225 0226 Ue>> value Trip time Ie>> 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 0227 0228 0229 022A Ie>>> value Torque (RCA) angle IeÛe>> Trip angle IeÛe>> Ie>>> operating mode 0.002-1 Ien operating range 0.01 - 8 Ien operating range 0.1 - 40 Ien operating range 022B 022C Ue>>> value Trip time Ie>>> 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 022D 022E 022F 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 023A 023B 023C 023D 023E 023F Protection 46 Protection 37 Protection 49 Torque (RCA) angle (IeÛe)>>> Trip angle (IeÛe)>>> alarm operating mode alarm value I> (nominal current thermal) K Thermal overload time constant trip operating mode trip value I< operating mode I< value Trip time I< I2> operating mode I2> value Trip time type I2> DMT trip time I2> TMS: I2> trip time multiplier K: I2> trip time multiplier for RI type curve I2 reset time type: DMT or IDMT 0 -15000 25 - 1500 100-10000 0-1 1 1 5 1 0 - 359 10 - 170 0-1 0-1-2 2 - 1000 10 - 8000 40 - 4000 0 - 15000 10 - 2600 40 - 9600 0 - 359 10 -170 0-1-2-3 2 - 1000 10 - 8000 40 - 4000 0 -15000 10 - 2600 40 - 9600 0 - 359 10 - 170 0-1 50 - 200 10 - 320 100 - 150 1 - 200 0-1 50 - 200 0-1 10 - 100 0 - 15000 0-1 10 -2500 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Group Description

Values range Sep Unit Format Def. P12y 6 7
Value 5 Deg. Deg. F1 F1 F24 F24A 1/1000 Ien 1/1000 Ien 1/100 Ien 10ms 100mV 100mV Deg. Deg. F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24A 1/1000 Ien 1/1000 Ien 1/100 Ien 10ms 100mV 100mV Deg. Deg. F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 % 1/100 1/100 In mn F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 % F1 F24 1/100 In 10ms F1 F1 F24 1/100 In F1 F3 10ms 0.001 1/1000 F1 F1 F1 F34 0 10 0 0 1000 8000 4000 0 1000 4000 0 10 0 1000 1000 4000 0 1000 4000 0 80 0 90 10 105 1 0 100 0 2 0 0 2500 0 0 25 100 0

Address (hex) 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 0245 0246 0247 0248 0249 Protection 27 U< value DMT reset time I2> RTMS: I2> reset time multiplier I2>> operating mode I2>> value Trip time I2>> I2>>> operating mode I2>>> value Trip time I2>>> U< operating mode 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range 024A 024B 024C U<< value Trip time U< U<< operating mode 57 - 130V operating range 220 -. 480V 024D 024E 024F 0250 0251 Pe> value Protection 32n Trip time U<< operating range Pe> trip angle 32n operating mode: Pe or IeCos Pe> operating mode 0.002-1 Ien / 57-130V operating range 0.002-1 Ien / 220 - 480V operating range 0.01 - 8 Ien / 57 - 130V operating range 0.01 - 8 Ien / 220-480V operating range 0.1 - 40 Ien / 57 - 130V operating range 0.1 - 40 Ien / 220-480V operating range 0252 0253 0254 0255 0256 0257 0258 0259 025A Pe>> value Trip time type Pe> Trip time Pe> TMS: Pe> trip time multiplier K: Pe> trip time multiplier for RI type curve Reset time type Pe>: DMT or IDMT DMT reset time Pe> RTMS reset time Pe> Pe>> operating mode 0.002-1 Ien / 57-130V operating range 0.002-1 Ien / 220 - 480V operating range 100 - 8000 0 - 15000 25 - 1500 100 -10000 0-1 0 - 10000 25 - 3200 0 -1 20 - 2000 40 - 3200 10 - 800 400 - 64000 400 - 16000 100 - 8000 4 - 10000 25 -1500 0-1 50 -4000 0 - 15000 0-1 50 - 4000 0 - 15000 0-1-2 20 -1300 100 - 4800 0 - 60000 0-1 20 -1300 100 - 4800 0 - 60000 0 - 359 0-1 0-1 20 - 2000 Group Description

Value 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 2 10mW. Ien 10 10mW. Ien 10 10mW. Ien 10 10mW. Ien 1 W.Ien F1 F1 F1 1600 0 6400 0 800 F1 8000 100mV 100mV 10ms 100mV 100mV 10ms 1/100 In 10ms 1/100 In 10ms 10ms 0.001 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F24B F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24C F24 F1 4 100 0 4000 0 0 4000 0 0 50 100 0 0 50 100 0 0 0 0 2000
W.Ien
F1
3200
F3 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 2 10mW. Ien 10 10mW. Ien F1 10ms 1/1000 10ms 0.001 0.001 F1 F1 F1 F34 F1 F1 F24 F1
0 0 25 100 0 4 100 0 2000
8000

Address (hex) 0.01 - 8 Ien / 57 - 130V operating range 0.01 - 8 Ien / 220-480V operating range 0.1 - 40 Ien / 57 - 130V operating range 0.1 - 40 Ien / 220-480V operating range 025B 025C 025D IeCos> value Trip time Pe>> IeCos> operating mode 0.002 - 1 Ien operating range 0.01 - 1 Ien operating range 0.1 - 25 Ien operating range 025E 025F 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 0265 0266 IeCos>> value Trip time type IeCos> DMT Trip time IeCos> TMS: IeCos> trip time multiplier K: IeCos> trip time multiplier for RI type curve Reset time type IeCos>: DMT or IDMT DMT Reset time IeCos> RTMS reset time IeCos> IeCos>> mode 0.002 - 1 Ien operating range 0.01 - 1 Ien operating range 0.1 - 25 Ien operating range 0267 0268 0269 Protection 59 U> value Trip time IeCos>> U> operating mode 57 130V operating range 220 480V operating range 026A 026B 026C U>> value Trip time U> U>> operating mode 57 130V operating range 220 480V operating range 026D 026E 026F Protection 59n Ue>>>> value Trip time U>> Ue>>>> operating mode 57 130V operating range 220 480V operating range 0270 0271 0272 02730274 Recloser 79 Trip time Ue>>>> Recloser info CB position active Supervision window 0 -15000 25 - 1500 100 -10000 0-1 0 - 10000 25 - 3200 01 2 - 1000 10 - 8000 50 - 4000 0 - 15000 0-1-2 20 -2600 100 -9600 0 - 60000 0 1-2 20 - 2600 100 - 9600 0 - 60000 0-1 10 - 2600 50 - 9600 0 - 60000 0-1 0-1 1 -.60000 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 0 - 15000 0 1 2 - 1000 10- 8000 10 - 2500 1 1 1 5 1 40 - 3200 5 10 - 800 1 400 - 64000 10 400 - 16000 10 Group Description

Value 5 10mW. Ien 10mW. Ien W.Ien F1 F1 F1 1600 0 6400 0 800
W.Ien
F1
3200
10ms
F1 F24
0 0 1000 8000 2500 0 0 25 100 0 4 25 0 1000
1/1000 Ien 1/1000 Ien 1/100 Ien
F1 F1 F1 F3
10ms 0.001 0.001
F1 F1 F1 F34
10ms 0.001
F1 F1 F24
1/1000 Ien 1/1000 Ien 1/100 Ien 10ms 100mV 100mV 10ms
F1 F1 F1 F1 F24B F1 F1 F1 F24B
0 0 1000 4000 0 0 1000 4000 0 0 1000 4000 0 0 0 1
100mV 100mV 10ms
F1 F1 F1 F24
100mV 100mV 10ms
F1 F1 F1 F24 F24
10ms
F18A

Address (hex) 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 027A027B 027C027D 027E027F 02800281 0282 0283 0284 0285 0286 0287 Reset time 32N Reset time 67N External blocking input tAux1 cycle configuration tAux2 cycle configuration Dead time 1 Dead time 2 Dead time 3 Dead time 4 Reclaim time Inhibit time Recloser cycles for phase faults Recloser cycles for earth faults DMT Reset time Ie>> DMT Reset time Ie>>> DMT Reset time IeCos>> DMT Reset time Pe>> 0-1 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 1 - 30000 1 - 30000 1 - 60000 1 - 60000 2 - 60000 2 - 60000 0-4 0-4 0 - 10000 0 - 10000 0 - 10000 0 - 10000 Group Description

Value 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms F24 F57 F57 F1 F1 F18A F18A F18A F18A F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 0 1111 1111 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0 4 4 4 4
0288 0289 028A 028B 028C 028D 028E 028F 0290 0291 0292 0293 0294 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 029A 029B-029F 02A0 02A1
Protection 50/51/67
Trip time type I>> TMS: I>> trip time multiplier K: I>> trip time multiplier for RI type curve Reset time type: DMT / IDMT DMT reset time I>> RTMS: I>> reset time multiplier 25 - 1500 100 -10000 0-1 4 - 10000 25 - 3200 1 5 1 1 1 10ms 0.001 0.001 0.001
F3 F1 F1 F34 F1 F1 F3 25 - 1500 100 - 10000 0-1 25 - 3200 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 0 - 2222 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 F1 F1 F34 F1 F57 F57 F57 F57 F57 F57 F57 F57
0 25 100
4 25 0 25 100 25 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
Protection 50n/51n/67n
Trip time type Ie>> TMS: Ie>> trip time multiplier K: Ie>> trip time multiplier for type curve Reset time type: DMT / IDMT RTMS: Ie>> reset time multiplier
Recloser 79
I> cycle configuration I>> cycle configuration I>>> cycle configuration Ie> cycle configuration Ie>> cycle configuration Ie>>> cycle configuration Pe/IeCos> cycle configuration Pe/IeCos>> cycle configurat. Reserved
Active Power P> value
P> operating mode 57-130V operating range 220V-480V operating range
0-1 10-10000 40-40000 0-15000
1 1 5 1 W.In W.In 10ms
F24 F1 F1 F1
0 1000 0 4000 0 0
02A2
Trip time tP>

Address (hex) 02A3-02A7 02A8 02A9 P>> value Reserved P>> operating mode 57-130V operating range 220V-480V operating range 02AA 02AB-02AF 02B0 02B1 Frequency f1 value Trip time tP>> Reserved f1 operating mode 50 Hz nominal frequency 60 Hz nominal frequency 02B2 02B3 02B4 f2 value Trip time tf1 f2 operating mode 50 Hz nominal frequency 60 Hz nominal frequency 02B5 02B6 02B7 f3 value Trip time tf2 f3 operating mode 50 Hz nominal frequency 60 Hz nominal frequency 02B8 02B9 02BA f4 value Trip time tf3 f4 operating mode 50 Hz nominal frequency 0-2 4510-5490 5510-6490 0-60000 0-2 4510-5490 5510-6490 0-60000 0-2 4510-5490 5510-6490 0-60000 0-2 4510-5490 5510-6490 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0-1 10-10000 40-40000 0-15000 1 1 5 1 Group Description

Value 5
F24 W.In W.In 10mS F1 F1 F1
0 1000 0 4000 0 0
F68 10mHz 10mHz 10ms F1 F1 F1 F68 10mHz 10mHz 10ms F1 F1 F1 F68 10mHz 10mHz 10ms F1 F1 F1 F68 10mHz F1
0 5000 6000 4 0 5000 6000 4 0 5000 6000 4 0 5000 ou 6000
02BB 02BC 02BD f5 value
Trip time tf4 f5 operating mode 50 Hz nominal frequency 60 Hz nominal frequency
0-60000 0-2 4510-5490 5510-6490 0-60000 0-2 4510-5490 5510-6490 0-60000 0-1 0-1 20-1300 100-4800
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5
10ms
F1 F68
4 0 5000 6000 4 0 5000 6000 4 0 0 50 100
10mHz 10mHz 10ms
F1 F1 F1 F68
02BE 02BF 02C0 f6 value
Trip time tf5 f6 operating mode 50 Hz nominal frequency 60 Hz nominal frequency
10mHz 10mHz 10ms
F1 F1 F1 F24 F24
02C1 02C2 02C3 02C4 U< value of inhibition I< Protection 37
Trip time tf6 Inhibition of I< on 52A Inhibition of I< on U< 57 - 130V operating range 220 - 480V operating range Reserved
100mV 100mV
F1 F1
02C5-02FF
2.4.1.5
Page 3H The same as page 2H except addresses are 03XX instead of 02XX.
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 24/74 2.4.1.6 Page 4H Group Remote control Description Remote control word 1 Calibration mode Remote control word 2 (single output command) Remote control word 3 Page 5H Available on P126 and P127.
Address (hex) 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 050A 050B 050C 050D 050E 050F 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 0516 0517 0518 0519 051A 051B 051C 051D 051E Group Bool Equations Description Equation A.00 operator Equation A.00 operand Equation A.01 operator Equation A.01 operand Equation A.02 operator Equation A.02 operand Equation A.03 operator Equation A.03 operand Equation A.04 operator Equation A.04 operand Equation A.05 operator Equation A.05 operand Equation A.06 operator Equation A.06 operand Equation A.07 operator Equation A.07 operand Equation A.08 operator Equation A.08 operand Equation A.09 operator Equation A.09 operand Equation A.10 operator Equation A.10 operand Equation A.11 operator Equation A.11 operand Equation A.12 operator Equation A.12 operand Equation A.13 operator Equation A.13 operand Equation A.14 operator Equation A.14 operand Equation A.15 operator
Address (hex) 0400 0401 0402 0403 2.4.1.7
Values range 0 - 65535
Step 1
Unit Forma Def. t Value F9 0 0 F39 F50 0 0
0 - 511 0 - 53
1 1
Values range Step 0-1 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Unit
Format Def. Value F70 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Address (hex) 051F 0520 0521 0522 0523 0524 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 052A 052B 052C 052D 052E 052F 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 053A 053B 053C 053D 053E 053F 0540 0541 0542 0543 0544 0545 0546 0547 0548 Group Description Equation A.15 operand Equation B.00 operator Equation B.00 operand Equation B.01 operator Equation B.01 operand Equation B.02 operator Equation B.02 operand Equation B.03 operator Equation B.03 operand Equation B.04 operator Equation B.04 operand Equation B.05 operator Equation B.05 operand Equation B.06 operator Equation B.06 operand Equation B.07 operator Equation B.07 operand Equation B.08 operator Equation B.08 operand Equation B.09 operator Equation B.09 operand Equation B.10 operator Equation B.10 operand Equation B.11 operator Equation B.11 operand Equation B.12 operator Equation B.12 operand Equation B.13 operator Equation B.13 operand Equation B.14 operator Equation B.14 operand Equation B.15 operator Equation B.15 operand Equation C.00 operator Equation C.00 operand Equation C.01 operator Equation C.01 operand Equation C.02 operator Equation C.02 operand Equation C.03 operator Equation C.03 operand Equation C.04 operator

Values range Step 0 - 58 0-1 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-1 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit Format Def. Value F72 F70 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F70 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Address (hex) 0549 054A 054B 054C 054D 054E 054F 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 0555 0556 0557 0558 0559 055A 055B 055C 055D 055E 055F 0560 0561 0562 0563 0564 0565 0566 0567 0568 0569 056A 056B 056C 056D 056E 056F 0570 0571 0572 Group Description Equation C.04 operand Equation C.05 operator Equation C.05 operand Equation C.06 operator Equation C.06 operand Equation C.07 operator Equation C.07 operand Equation C.08 operator Equation C.08 operand Equation C.09 operator Equation C.09 operand Equation C.10 operator Equation C.10 operand Equation C.11 operator Equation C.11 operand Equation C.12 operator Equation C.12 operand Equation C.13 operator Equation C.13 operand Equation C.14 operator Equation C.14 operand Equation C.15 operator Equation C.15 operand Equation D.00 operator Equation D.00 operand Equation D.01 operator Equation D.01 operand Equation D.02 operator Equation D.02 operand Equation D.03 operator Equation D.03 operand Equation D.04 operator Equation D.04 operand Equation D.05 operator Equation D.05 operand Equation D.06 operator Equation D.06 operand Equation D.07 operator Equation D.07 operand Equation D.08 operator Equation D.08 operand Equation D.09 operator


Address (hex) 0573 0574 0575 0576 0577 0578 0579 057A 057B 057C 057D 057E 057F 0580 0581 0582 0583 0584 0585 0586 0587 0588 0589 058A 058B 058C 058D 058E 058F 0590 0591 0592 0593 0594 0595 0596 0597 0598 0599 059A 059B 059C Group Description Equation D.09 operand Equation D.10 operator Equation D.10 operand Equation D.11 operator Equation D.11 operand Equation D.12 operator Equation D.12 operand Equation D.13 operator Equation D.13 operand Equation D.14 operator Equation D.14 operand Equation D.15 operator Equation D.15 operand Equation E.00 operator Equation E.00 operand Equation E.01 operator Equation E.01 operand Equation E.02 operator Equation E.02 operand Equation E.03 operator Equation E.03 operand Equation E.04 operator Equation E.04 operand Equation E.05 operator Equation E.05 operand Equation E.06 operator Equation E.06 operand Equation E.07 operator Equation E.07 operand Equation E.08 operator Equation E.08 operand Equation E.09 operator Equation E.09 operand Equation E.10 operator Equation E.10 operand Equation E.11 operator Equation E.11 operand Equation E.12 operator Equation E.12 operand Equation E.13 operator Equation E.13 operand Equation E.14 operator


Address (hex) 059D 059E 059F 05A0 05A1 05A2 05A3 05A4 05A5 05A6 05A7 05A8 05A9 05AA 05AB 05AC 05AD 05AE 05AF 05B0 05B1 05B2 05B3 05B4 05B5 05B6 05B7 05B8 05B9 05BA 05BB 05BC 05BD 05BE 05BF 05C0 05C1 05C2 05C3 05C4 05C5 05C6 Group Description Equation E.14 operand Equation E.15 operator Equation E.15 operand Equation F.00 operator Equation F.00 operand Equation F.01 operator Equation F.01 operand Equation F.02 operator Equation F.02 operand Equation F.03 operator Equation F.03 operand Equation F.04 operator Equation F.04 operand Equation F.05 operator Equation F.05 operand Equation F.06 operator Equation F.06 operand Equation F.07 operator Equation F.07 operand Equation F.08 operator Equation F.08 operand Equation F.09 operator Equation F.09 operand Equation F.10 operator Equation F.10 operand Equation F.11 operator Equation F.11 operand Equation F.12 operator Equation F.12 operand Equation F.13 operator Equation F.13 operand Equation F.14 operator Equation F.14 operand Equation F.15 operator Equation F.15 operand Equation G.00 operator Equation G.00 operand Equation G.01 operator Equation G.01 operand Equation G.02 operator Equation G.02 operand Equation G.03 operator


Address (hex) 05C7 05C8 050C9 05CA 05CB 05CC 05CD 05CE 05CF 05D0 05D1 05D2 05D3 05D4 05D5 05D6 05D7 05D8 05D9 05DA 05DB 05DC 05DD 05DE 05DF 05E0 05E1 05E2 05E3 05E4 05E5 05E6 05E7 05E8 05E9 05EA 05EB 05EC 05ED 05EE 05EF 05F0 Group Description Equation G.03 operand Equation G.04 operator Equation G.04 operand Equation G.05 operator Equation G.05 operand Equation G.06 operator Equation G.06 operand Equation G.07 operator Equation G.07 operand Equation G.08 operator Equation G.08 operand Equation G.09 operator Equation G.09 operand Equation G.10 operator Equation G.10 operand Equation G.11 operator Equation G.11 operand Equation G.12 operator Equation G.12 operand Equation G.13 operator Equation G.13 operand Equation G.14 operator Equation G.14 operand Equation G.15 operator Equation G.15 operand Equation H.00 operator Equation H.00 operand Equation H.01 operator Equation H.01 operand Equation H.02 operator Equation H.02 operand Equation H.03 operator Equation H.03 operand Equation H.04 operator Equation H.04 operand Equation H.05 operator Equation H.05 operand Equation H.06 operator Equation H.06 operand Equation H.07 operator Equation H.07 operand Equation H.08 operator


Address (hex) 05F1 05F2 05F3 05F4 05F5 05F6 05F7 05F8 05F9 05FA 05FB 05FC 05FD 05FE 05FF Group Description Equation H.08 operand Equation H.09 operator Equation H.09 operand Equation H.10 operator Equation H.10 operand Equation H.11 operator Equation H.11 operand Equation H.12 operator Equation H.12 operand Equation H.13 operator Equation H.13 operand Equation H.14 operator Equation H.14 operand Equation H.15 operator Equation H.15 operand

Values range Step 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 0-3 0 - 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit Format Def. Value F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 F71 F72 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.4.1.8

Address (hex) 0600 0601 0602-060B 060C 060D 060E 060F 0610 0611 0612 0613 0614 0615 0616 0617 0618 0619 061A 061B 061C 061D 061E 061F 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 0625 0626 0627 0628 0629 to 062F 0630 0631 0632 0633 0634 0635 0636 0637 0638 to 063F Tripping Automation Output relays LED Configuration tAux alarm Phase rotation Reserved Led 5, part 4 Led 6, part 4 Led 7, part 4 Led 8, part 4 Output relays: P> Output relays: tP> Output relays: P>> Output relays: tP>> Output relays: f1 Output relays: tf1 Output relays: f2 Output relays: tf2 Output relays: f3 Output relays: tf3 Output relays: f4 Output relays: tf4 Output relays: f5 Output relays: tf5 Output relays: f6 Output relays: tf6 Output relays: F out Output relays: Input 1 Output relays: Input 2 Output relays: Input 3 Output relays: Input 4 Output relays: Input 5 Output relays: Input 6 Output relays: Input 7 Output relays: VTS Reserveds Inrush validation Inrush blocking selection Inrush harmonic 2 ratio tInrush_reset Blocking logic 1, part 3 Blocking logic 2, part 3 Conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 3 VTS delay time Reserved 0 10000 100-350 0 - 200 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0-1 1
Page 6H
Group Description Values range Step Unit Format Def. P12y 6 7
Value 5 F64 F66 0 0
F19D F19D F19D F19D F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F24 F8' 0.1% 10ms F1 F1 F8B F8B F6B 10ms F1
No 0 200 0 0 0 0 20

Address (hex) 0640 0641 0642 0643 0644 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 064A 064B 064C to 064F Boolean Equations Tripping equation E time Reset equation E time Output relays: tEqu. E Tripping equation F time Time reset equation F time Output relays: tEqu. F Tripping equation G time Reset equation G time Output relays: tEqu. G Tripping equation H time Reset equation H time Output relays: tEqu. H Reserved 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 0 - 60000 Group Description

Value 5 1 1 10ms 10ms F1 F1 F14 1 1 10ms 10ms F1 F1 F14 1 1 10ms 10ms F1 F1 F14 1 1 10ms 10ms F1 F1 F14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.4.1.9 Page 7H Description Relays status Values range
Address Group (hex) 0700 2.4.1.10 Page 8H
Step 1
Unit -
Format Def. Value F23 0
Time synchronisation: access only in writing or reading 4 words (function 16 or 3). The time synchronisation format is based on 8 bytes (4 words). If date Format (012Fh) is private date then format is: Timer Year Month Day Hour Minute Milliseconds 0803 0802 Address Nb (hex) bytes 0800 0801 2 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 2 Mask (hex) FFFF FF FF FF FF FFFF Values range 1994-2093 1 -12 1 - 31 0 - 23 0 - 59 0 - 59999 Unit Years Months Days Hours Minutes ms
Else format is IEC 60870-5-103: Timer Address Nb (hex) bytes 0800 Year 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 7F 94-99 (1994-1999) 0-93 (2000-2093) Month Day of the week Day of the month Season Hour Date validity Minute Milliseconds 2.4.1.11 Reserved pages Page 5. Page 6. 0803 0802 0801 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 1 (Lo) 1 (Hi) 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 1 (Lo) 2 0F E0 1F 80 1F 80 3F FFFF 1 - 12 1 7 (Monday Sunday) 1 - 31 0 - 1 (summer winter) 0 - 23 0 - 1 (valid invalid) 0 - 59 0 - 59999 Minutes ms Hours Months Days Days Years Mask (hex) Values range Unit
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 34/74 2.4.1.12 Disturbance records
Pages 38h to 3Ch: mapping pages used to send a service request to select the record number to be uploaded before uploading any disturbance record. The answer following this request contain the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Numbers of samples (pre and post time) Phase CT ratio Earth CT ratio Internal phase and earth current ratios Phase VT ratio Earth VT ratio Internal phase and earth voltage ratios Number of the last disturbance mapping page Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page
Pages 9h to 21h: contain the disturbance data (25 pages) A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words: 0900 to 09FAh: 0A00 to 0AFAh: 0B00 to 0BFAh: ...... 2100 to 21FAh: 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record. Page 22h: contains the index of the disturbance Page 38h to 3Ch: selection of the disturbance record and channel Page 3Dh: a dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored. 2.4.1.13 Events records To upload the events records two requests are allowed: Page 35h: request to upload an event record without acknowledges of this event. Used addresses: 3500h: ..... 354Ah: EVENT 75 Page 36h: request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record. Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of remote control word (address 400 h). If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic. In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event. In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest event. (set the bit 13 of control word addressed to 400 h) EVENT 1
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.4.1.14 Fault records Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record Used addresses: 3700h: 3701h: ..... 3718h: FAULT 25 FAULT 1 FAULT 2
Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record. Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of remote control word (address 400 h). If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic. In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event. In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault. (set the bit 14 of control word addressed to 400 h)
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 36/74 2.4.1.15 Mapping access characteristics
Description of accessible addresses in reading of words (function 03 and 04). PAGE 00: PAGE 01: PAGE 02: PAGE 03: PAGE 05: PAGE 06: PAGE 07: PAGE 08: 0000h -- 00BBh 0100h -- 01FFh 0200h -- 02C4h 0300h -- 03C4h 0500h -- 05FFh 0600h -- 064Fh 0700h -- 0700h 0800h -- 0803h
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 word (function 06). PAGE 01: PAGE 02: PAGE 03: PAGE 04: 0100h -- 01F9h 0200h -- 029Ah 0300h -- 039Ah 0400h -- 0403h
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n words (function 16). PAGE 01: PAGE 02: PAGE 03: PAGE 05: PAGE 06: PAGE 08: 0100h -- 01FFh 0200h -- 02C4h 0300h -- 03C4h 0500h -- 05FFh 0600h -- 064Fh 0800h -- 0803h
Definition of accessible addresses in reading of bits (function 01 and 02). THE BITS NUMBER MUST NOT BE HIGHER THAN 16. ADDRESSES ARE GIVEN IN BIT ADDRESSES. PAGE 00: 00B0h 0BBFh PAGE 01: 1000h 1FFFh
WARNING:
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 bit (function 05). THE BITS NUMBER MUST NOT BE HIGHER THAN 16. PAGE 04: 4000h -- 400Fh 4030h 403Fh
WARNING:
Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n bits (function 15). BITS NUMBER MUST NOT BE HIGHER THAN 16. PAGE 01: 1000h -- 1FFFh PAGE 04: 4000h -- 400Fh 4030h 403Fh
WARNING:
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.4.1.16 Pages 9H to 21H Disturbance record data (25 pages). Writing access in words (function 03) Each disturbance mapping page contains 250 words. Addresses (hex) 0900h to 09FAh 0A00h to 0AFAh 0B00h to 0BFAh 0C00h to 0CFAh 0D00h to 0DFAh 0E00h to 0DFAh 0F00h to 0FFAh 1000h to 10FAh 1100h to 11FAh 1200h to 12FAh 1300h to 13FAh 1400h to 14FAh 1500h to 15FAh 1600h to 16FAh 1700h to 17FAh 1800h to 18FAh 1900h to 19FAh 1A00h to 1AFAh 1B00h to 1BFAh 1C00h to 1CFAh 1D00h to 1DFAh 1E00h to 1EFAh 1F00h to 1FFAh 2000h to 20FAh 2100h to 21FAh NOTE: Contents 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words
The disturbance data pages contain the values of one channel from one given disturbance record.
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 38/74 2.4.1.16.1 Meaning of each channel value See pages 38H to 3CH IA, IB, IC, Ie channels.
The values are signed 16 bits words equivalent to the ADC value. Phase current values calculation formula Line phase current value (primary value) = value x phase primary CT ratio x 2 / 800 Earth current value calculation formula The formula depends on the nominal earth current: 0.1 to 40 Ien range Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio x 2 / 800 0.01 to 8 Ien range Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio x 2 / 3277 0.002 to 1 Ien range Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio x 2 / 32700 UA, UB, UC/Ue channels.
The values are signed 16 bits words equivalent to the ADC value. Phase voltage values calculation formula The formula depends on nominal phase voltage: 57 to 130 V range Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio) x 2 / 126 220 to 480 V range Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value x 2 / 34 Earth voltage value calculation formula The formula depends on nominal earth voltage: 57 to 130 V range Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value x (earth primary VT ratio / earth secondary VT ratio) x 2 / 126 220 to 480 V range Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value x 2 / 34 Frequency channel:
Time between two samples in microseconds
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Logic channels: Contents Trip relay (RL1) Output relay 2 (RL2) Output relay 3 (RL3) Output relay 4 (RL4) Watch-Dog relay (RL0) Output relay 5 (RL5) Output relay 6 (RL6) Output relay 7 (RL7) Output relay 8 (RL8) Logic input 1 (EL1) Logic input 2 (EL2) Logic input 3 (EL3) Logic input 4 (EL4) Logic input 5 (EL5) Logic input 6 (EL6) Logic input 7 (EL7)
Logic channel Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 2.4.1.17 Page 22H Disturbance record index frame
Reading access in word (function 03) Addresses (hex) 2200h Disturbance record index frame Word Nr. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Contents Disturbance record number Disturbance record finish date (second) Disturbance record finish date (second) Disturbance record finish date (millisecond) Disturbance record finish date (millisecond) Disturbance record starting condition: 1 2 3 4 7 tripping command (RL1) instantaneous remote command logic input Contents Disturbance data index frame
Frequency at the post-time beginning
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 40/74 2.4.1.18 Page 35H Event record data (9 words). Reading access in word (function 03) Addresses 3500h to 35F9h. Word Nr. 1 2 3 4 PRIVATE FORMAT: 5 & 6 PRIVATE FORMAT: 7 & 8 IEC FORMAT: 5 to 8 9 Contents
Event meaning (see table below) MODBUS address MODBUS associated value Reserved Event date (number of seconds since 01/01/1994) Event date (millisecond) Event date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Acknowledgement: 0 = event non acknowledged 1 = event acknowledged
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Word n. 1 event meaning and relative codes Code (Dec) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Event meaning Remote closing Remote tripping Disturbance recording start Trip output unlatch Settings change Remote thermal reset Maintenance Mode Control relay in maintenance mode U< U<< Pe/Iecos> Pe/Iecos>> I< I2> I2>> I2>>> Thermal overload alarm U> U>> Ue>>>> I> I>> I>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> U< trip U<< trip Pe/Iecos> trip Pe/Iecos>> trip I< trip I2> trip I2>> trip I2>>> trip trip U> trip
Type F9 F9 F9 F9 Address F9 F9 F39 F17 F17 F16 F16 F17 F17 F17 F17 F37 F17 F17 F16 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F17 F17 F16 F16 F17 F17 F17 F17 F37 F17
MODBUS address 013h 013h
013h
0402h 013h 70h 71h 72h 73h 21h 7Ch 7Dh 7Eh 020h 76h 77h 77h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 70h 71h 72h 73h 21h 7Ch 7Dh 7Eh 20h 76h
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 42/74 Code (Dec) 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 Event meaning U>> trip Ue>>>> trip Reserved Reserved Reserved I> trip I>> trip I>>> trip Ie> trip Ie>> trip Ie>>> trip Trip SOTF X1 trip: t AUX3 X1 trip: t AUX4 EQU LOG A trip EQU LOG B trip EQU LOG C trip EQU LOG D trip Broken conductor trip t AUX1 trip t AUX2 trip SF6 fault Working time Operation numbers Sum of switched square amps Trip circuit supervision Closing time Reclose successful Recloser final trip Recloser settings error Broken conductor Selective scheme logic 1 Selective scheme logic 2 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 Setting group change O/O F/O
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Type F17 F16 MODBUS address 77h 7Ah
F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F38 F13 F13 F48 F48 F48 F48 F38 F38 F38 F20 F43 F43 F43 F43 F43 F43 F43 F43 F38 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20 F20
14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 23h 13h 13h 7Fh 7Fh 7Fh 7Fh 23h 23h 23h 11h 28h 28h 28h 28h 28h 28h 28h 28h 23h 11h 11h 11h 11h 11h 11h 11h
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Code (Dec) 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 Event meaning All alarms acknowledgement by logic input Cold load pick up active Input logic state change X1 trip: trip X1 trip: t I> X1 trip: t I>> X1 trip: t I>>> X1 trip: t Ie> X1 trip: t Ie>> X1 trip: t Ie>>> X1 trip: t Pe/Iecos> X1 trip: t Pe/Iecos>> X1 trip: t U< X1 trip: t U<< X1 trip: t I< X1 trip: t U> X1 trip: t U>> X1 trip: t I2> X1 trip: t I2>> X1 trip: t I2>>> X1 trip: t Ue>>>> X1 trip: Broken Conductor X1 trip: EQU LOG A X1 trip: EQU LOG B X1 trip: EQU LOG C X1 trip: EQU LOG D X1 trip: t AUX1 X1 trip: t AUX2 Output relays command Front panel single alarm acknowledge All alarms front panel acknowledgement Single alarm remote acknowledgement All alarms remote acknowledgement Major material alarm Minor material alarm Operating Latched Relays status General Start protection (IEC 60870-5103 only)
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 43/74 Type F20 F20 F12 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F39 F45 F45 F27 F1 MODBUS address 11h 11h 10h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 402h Fh Fh 2Eh 0Bh
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 44/74 Code (Dec) 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 Event meaning Recloser in Service (IEC 60870-5-103 only) 52a by recloser (IEC 60870-5-103 only) Local parameter setting (password active) - (IEC 60870-5-103 only) Start timer Breaker failure from digital input t AUX3 trip t AUX4 trip Manual Close X1 trip: SOTF Local Mode
I>> Blocked I>>> Blocked VTS V2> V2>>
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Type F43 Cycle F20A F38 F38 F20A F38 F20A F38A F38A F38A F38A F38A F43 F43 F23 F38A F38A F38A F38A F38A F13 F13 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 F67 B7h B8h B7h B8h 13h 13h B9h BAh BBh BCh BDh BEh B9h BAh BBh BCh BDh MODBUS address 28h 0Dh 23h 23h 0Dh 23h 0Dh 24h 24h 24h 24h 24h 28h 28h
Recloser locked Recloser in progress Synchronization Inrush blocking P> P >> P > trip P >> trip X1 trip: t P > X1 trip: t P >> f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 tf1 tf2 tf3 tf4 tf5
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Code (Dec) 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 NOTE: Event meaning tf6 F out X1 trip: tf1 Trip X1 trip: tf2 Trip X1 trip: tf3 Trip X1 trip: tf4 Trip X1 trip: tf5 Trip X1 trip: tf6 Trip EQU LOG E trip EQU LOG F trip EQU LOG G trip EQU LOG H trip X1 trip: EQU LOG E X1 trip: EQU LOG F X1 trip: EQU LOG G X1 trip: EQU LOG H
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 45/74 Type F67 F69 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F48 F48 F48 F48 F13 F13 F13 F13 MODBUS address BEh BFh 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 13h 7Fh 7Fh 7Fh 7Fh 13h 13h 13h 13h
The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence () and on event disappearance (). On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 1 . On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 0 .
2.4.1.19 Page 36H Oldest event data. Reading access in word (function 03) Address (hex) 3600h 2.4.1.20 Page 37H Fault record value data Reading access in word (function 03) Address (hex) 3700h 3701h 3702h 3718h Fault value record n25 Contents Fault value record n1 Fault value record n2 Fault value record n3 Contents Oldest event data
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 46/74 Each record is made up of 24 words: Word Nr. 1 PRIVATE FORMAT: 2 & 3 PRIVATE FORMAT: 4 & 5 IEC FORMAT: 2 to 5 6 Contents Fault number
Fault date (number of seconds since 01/01/94) Fault date (milli-seconds) Fault date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Fault date (season) 0= winter 1= summer 2= undefined Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2) Fault origin 0= none 1= phase A 2= phase B 3= phase C 4= phases A-B 5= phases A-C 6= phases B-C 7= phases A-B-C 8= earth
7 8
9 10 & 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Fault recording starting origin (see format F61) Fault value Phase A current value (nominal value) Phase B current value (nominal value) Phase C current value (nominal value) Earth current value (nominal value) Phase A voltage value (nominal value) Phase B voltage value (nominal value) Phase C voltage value (nominal value) Earth voltage value (nominal value) Angle between phase A current and phase B-C voltage values Angle between phase B current and phase C-A voltage values Angle between phase C current and phase A-B voltage values Angle between earth current and earth voltage values Acknowledgement: 0 = fault not acknowledged 1 = fault acknowledged
Phase current values calculation formula Line phase current value (primary value) = value x phase primary CT ratio / 800
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Earth current values calculation formula The formula depends of nominal earth current:
0.1 to 40 Ien range Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / 800 0.01 to 8 Ien range Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / 3277 0.002 to 1 Ien range Line earth current value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / 32700 Phase voltage values calculation formula The formula depends of nominal phase voltage: 57 to 130 V range Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio) / 63 220 to 480 V range Line phase voltage value (primary value) = value / 17 Earth voltage values calculation formula The formula depends of nominal earth voltage: 57 to 130 V range Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value x (earth primary VT ratio / earth secondary VT ratio) / 63 220 to 480 V range Line earth voltage value (primary value) = value / 17 Phase power values calculation formula The formula depends of nominal phase voltage: 57 to 130 V range Line phase power value (primary value) = value x (phase primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (800 x 63) 220 to 480 V range Line phase power value (primary value) = value x phase primary CT ratio / (800 x 17) Earth power values calculation formula The formula depends of nominal earth current and voltage: 0.1 to 40 Ien range and 57 to 130 V range Line earth power value (primary value) = value x (earth primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (800 x 63) 0.1 to 40 Ien rangee and 220 to 480 V range Line earth power value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / (800 x 17) 0.01 to 8 Ien range and 57 to 130 V range Line earth power value (primary value) = value x (earth primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (3277 x 63) 0.01 to 8 Ien rangee and 220 to 480 V range Line earth power value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / (3277 x 17) 0.002 to 1 Ien range and 57 to 130 V range Line earth power value (primary value) = value x (earth primary CT ratio x (phase primary VT ratio / phase secondary VT ratio)) / (32700 x 63)
0.002 to 1 Ien rangee and 220 to 480 V range Line earth power value (primary value) = value x earth primary CT ratio / (32700 x 17) Frequency values calculation formula Frequency value = 1000000 / value 2.4.1.21 Pages 38H to 3CH Selection of the disturbance record and channel (19 words are uploaded for each address reading) Access in word reading (function 03) Address (hex) 3800h 3801h 3802h 3803h 3804h 3805h 3806h 3807h 3808h 3900h 3901h 3902h 3903h 3904h 3905h 3906h 3907h 3908h 3A00h 3A01h 3A02h 3A03h 3A04h 3A05h 3A06h 3A07h 3A08h 3B00h 3B01h 3B02h 3B03h Disturbance record number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 Channel IA IB IC Ie UA UB UC / Ue Frequency Logic inputs and outputs IA IB IC Ie UA UB UC / Ue Frequency Logic inputs and outputs IA IB IC Ie UA UB UC / Ue Frequency Logic inputs and outputs IA IB IC Ie
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Address (hex) 3B04h 3B05h 3B06h 3B07h 3B08h 3C00h 3C01h 3C02h 3C03h 3C04h 3C05h 3C06h 3C07h 3C08h Disturbance record number 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Channel UA UB UC / Ue Frequency
Logic inputs and outputs IA IB IC Ie UA UB UC / Ue Frequency Logic inputs and outputs
Word Nr. n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 n 9 n 10 n 11 n 12 n 13 n 14 n 15 n 16 n 17 n 18 n 19
Contents Number of samples included in the mapping Sample number in pre-time Sample number in post-time Phase primary CT ratio Phase secondary CT ratio Earth primary CT ratio Earth secondary CT ratio Phase internal CT ratio Earth internal CT ratio Phase primary VT ratio byte low Phase primary VT ratio byte high Phase secondary VT ratio Earth primary VT ratio byte low Earth primary VT ratio byte high Earth secondary VT ratio Internal VT ratio numerator: 100 Internal VT ratio denominator: 6300 or 1700 Last mapping page Last mapping page words number
Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. adress 3800h, 3801h or 3802h) * phase primary CT ratio * (1 / internal phase ratio) * 2
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 50/74 Calculation formula for earth current values
Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. adress 3803h) * earth primary CT ratio * (1 / internal earth ratio) * 2 Phase voltage values calculation formula Line phase voltage value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. address 3804h or 3805h or 3806h if Uc) * phase primary VT ratio / phase internal VT ratio * 2 Earth voltage values calculation formula Line earth voltage value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address 3806h if Ue) * earth primary VT ratio / earth internal VT ratio * 2 2.4.1.22 Page 3DH Number of disturbance records available Access in word reading (function 03) Address (hex) 3D00h Words description: Word Nr. 1 2 PRIVATE FORMAT: 3 & 4 PRIVATE FORMAT: 5 & 6 IEC FORMAT: 3 to 6 7 Contents Number of disturbance records available Oldest disturbance record number (n) Oldest disturbance record date (seconds) Oldest disturbance record date (milli-seconds) Oldest disturbance record date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+1) Previous disturbance record date (seconds) Previous disturbance record date (milli-seconds) Previous disturbance record date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+2) Previous disturbance record date (second) Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Previous disturbance record date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Contains Number of disturbance records available
8 9 PRIVATE FORMAT: 10 & 11 PRIVATE FORMAT: 12 & 13 IEC FORMAT: 10 to 13 14
15 16 PRIVATE FORMAT: 17 & 18 PRIVATE FORMAT: 19 & 20 IEC FORMAT: 17 to 20
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Word Nr. 21 Contents
Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+3) Previous disturbance record date (seconds) Previous disturbance record date (milli-seconds) Previous disturbance record date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Disturbance record previous number (n+4) Previous disturbance record date (second) Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Previous disturbance record date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge
36 2.4.1.23 Page 3EH Oldest fault record value data.
Access in word reading (function 03). Address (hex) 3E00h 2.4.1.24 Page 5AH Error counters. Access in word reading (function 03). Address (hex) 5A00h Contents Error counters Contents Oldest fault record
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 52/74 Words description: Word Nr. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2.4.2 Mapping format description Values are decimal except when differently specified. CODE F1 F2 F3 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: numerical data 1 to 65535 Signed integer: numerical data -32768 to 32767 Contents
Number of errors in page 1 Last error address of page 1 Number of errors in page 2 Last error address of page 2 Number of errors in page 3 Last error address of page 3 Number of errors in calibration page Last error address of calibration page Number of data checksum errors Number of calibration checksum errors
Unsigned integer: TRIP / RESET curves type (hex values) 0 : DMT 10: STI (CEI) 11: SI (CEI) 12: VI (CEI) 13: EI (CEI) 14: LTI (CEI) 115: STI (C02) 116: MI (ANSI) 117: LTI (CO8) 118: VI (ANSI) 119: EI (ANSI) 1A : RECT 20 : RI Unsigned integer: UART Baud rate 0: 300 1: 600 2: 1200 3: 2400 4: 4800 5: 9600 6: 19200 7: 38400 Unsigned integer: Modbus and DNP3 parity bit 0: none 1: even 2: odd
F4
F5
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F6 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 1 Bit 0: tI> Bit 1: tI>> Bit 2: tI>>> Bit 3: tIe> Bit 4: tIe>> Bit 5: tIe>>> Bit 6: tI< Bit 7: trip Bit 8: broken conductor trip Bit 9: AUX 1 trip Bit 10: AUX 2 trip Bit 11: tI2> Bit 12: tPe/Iecos> Bit 13: tPe/Iecos>> Bit 14: tUe>>>> Bit 15: Control trip Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 2 Bit 0: tU> Bit 1: tU>> Bit 2: tU< Bit 3: tU<< Bit 4: t Boolean equation A Bit 5: t Boolean equation B Bit 6: t Boolean equation C Bit 7: t Boolean equation D Bit 8: tI2>> Bit 9: tI2>>> Bit 10: tP > Bit 11: tP >> Bit 12: Reserved Bit 13: AUX 3 trip Bit 14: AUX 4 trip Bit 15: SOTF/TOR Unsigned integer: conf. tripping on relay RL1, part 3 Bit 0: t Boolean equation E Bit 1: t Boolean equation F Bit 2: t Boolean equation G Bit 3: t Boolean equation H Bit 4: tF1 Bit 5: tF2 Bit 6: tF3 Bit 7: tF4 Bit 8: tF5 Bit 9: tF6 Bits 10 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: U connection mode 0: 3Vpn 2: 2Vpp + Vr 4: 2Vpn + Vr
F6A
F6B
F7
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 54/74 CODE F8 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 1 Bit 0: tI>+ tI>REV Bit 1: tI>> + tI>>REV Bit 2: tI>>> + tI>>>REV Bit 3: tIe> + tIe>REV Bit 4: tIe>> + tIe>>REV Bit 5: tIe>>> + tIe>>>REV Bit 6: tI< Bit 7: trip Bit 8: broken conductor trip Bit 9: aux1 trip Bit 10: aux2 trip Bit 11: tI2> Bit 12: tPe/Iecos> Bit 13: tPe/Iecos>> Bit 14: tUe>>>> Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 2 Bit 0: tU> Bit 1: tU>> Bit 2: tU< Bit 3: tU<< Bit 4: aux3 trip Bit 5: aux4 trip Bits 6 - 7: Reserved Bit 8: tI2>> Bit 9: tI2>>> Bit 10: tP > Bit 11: tP >> Bits 12 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: blocking logic configuration, part 3 Bit 0: tF1 Bit 1: tF2 Bit 2: tF3 Bit 3: tF4 Bit 4: tF5 Bit 5: tF6 Bits 6 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: Inrush blocking configuration bit 0: I> bit 1: I>> bit 2: I>>> bit 3: IE> bit 4: IE>> bit 5: IE>>> bit 6: Reserved bit 7: Reserved bit 8: Reserved bit 9: Reserved bit 10: Reserved bit 11: I2> bit 12: I2>> bit 13: I2>>> bits 14 to 15: Reserved
F8A
F8B
F8
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F9 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: remote control 1 Bit 0: relays de-latching Bit 1: 1st alarm acknowledge Bit 2: all alarms acknowledge Bit 3: remote tripping (CONTROL trip) Bit 4: remote closing (CONTROL close) Bit 5: settings group change Bit 6: thermal state reset Bit 7: max & average values reset Bit 8: disturbance record remote start Bit 9: maintenance mode Bit 10: recloser counter reset Bit 11: recloser reset Bit 12: manual acknowledge mode Bit 13: oldest event acknowledge Bit 14: oldest fault acknowledge Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: 2 ASCII characters 32 -127 = ASCII character1 32 - 127 = ASCII character 2 Obsolete Unsigned integer: logic input status Bit 0: logic input number 1 Bit 1: logic input number 2 Bit 2: logic input number 3 Bit 3 logic input number 4 Bit 4 logic input number 5 Bit 5 logic input number 6 Bit 6 logic input number 7 Bits 7 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: logic outputs status Bit 0: logic output number RL1 (X1 tripping) Bit 1: logic output number RL2 Bit 2: logic output number RL3 Bit 3: logic output number RL4 Bit 4: logic output number RL0 (Watch-Dog) Bit 5: logic output number RL5 Bit 6: logic output number RL6 Bit 7: logic output number RL7 Bit 8: logic output number RL8 Bits 9 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration Bit 0: logic output number RL2 selection Bit 1: logic output number RL3 selection Bit 2: logic output number RL4 selection Bit 3: logic output number RL5 selection Bit 4: logic output number RL6 selection Bit 5: logic output number RL7 selection Bit 6: logic output number RL8 selection Bits 7 to 15: Reserved
F10
F11 F12
F13
F14
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 56/74 CODE F14A DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for CB & SOTF Bit 0: logic output number RL2 selection (Recloser) Bit 1: logic output number RL3 selection (Recloser) Bit 2: logic output number RL4 selection (Recloser) Bit 3: logic output number RL5 selection (Recloser) Bit 4: logic output number RL6 selection (Recloser) Bit 5: logic output number RL7 selection (Recloser) Bit 6: logic output number RL8 selection (Recloser) Bit 7: Reserved Bit 8: logic output number RL2 selection (SOTF) Bit 9: logic output number RL3 selection (SOTF) Bit 10: logic output number RL4 selection (SOTF) Bit 11: logic output number RL5 selection (SOTF) Bit 12: logic output number RL6 selection (SOTF) Bit 13: logic output number RL7 selection (SOTF) Bit 14: logic output number RL8 selection (SOTF) Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for tAux3 & tAux4 Bit 0: logic output number RL2 selection (tAux3) Bit 1: logic output number RL3 selection (tAux3) Bit 2: logic output number RL4 selection (tAux3) Bit 3: logic output number RL5 selection (tAux3) Bit 4: logic output number RL6 selection (tAux3) Bit 5: logic output number RL7 selection (tAux3) Bit 6: logic output number RL8 selection (tAux3) Bit 7: Reserved Bit 8: logic output number RL2 selection (tAux4) Bit 9: logic output number RL3 selection (tAux4) Bit 10: logic output number RL4 selection (tAux4) Bit 11: logic output number RL5 selection (tAux4) Bit 12: logic output number RL6 selection (tAux4) Bit 13: logic output number RL7 selection (tAux4) Bit 14: logic output number RL8 selection (tAux4) Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for Control Trip & Close Bit 0: logic output number RL2 selection (Control Trip) Bit 1: logic output number RL3 selection (Control Trip) Bit 2: logic output number RL4 selection (Control Trip) Bit 3: logic output number RL5 selection (Control Trip) Bit 4: logic output number RL6 selection (Control Trip) Bit 5: logic output number RL7 selection (Control Trip) Bit 6: logic output number RL8 selection (Control Trip) Bit 7: Reserved Bit 8: logic output number RL2 selection (Control Close) Bit 9: logic output number RL3 selection (Control Close) Bit 10: logic output number RL4 selection (Control Close) Bit 11: logic output number RL5 selection (Control Close) Bit 12: logic output number RL6 selection (Control Close) Bit 13: logic output number RL7 selection (Control Close) Bit 14: logic output number RL8 selection (Control Close) Bit 15: Reserved
F14B
F14C
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F14D DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: Rl2 - RL8 output configuration for recloser trip final & locked Bit 0: logic output number RL2 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 1: logic output number RL3 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 2: logic output number RL4 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 3: logic output number RL5 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 4: logic output number RL6 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 5: logic output number RL7 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 6: logic output number RL8 selection (recloser trip final) Bit 7: Reserved Bit 8: logic output number RL2 selection (recloser locked) Bit 9: logic output number RL3 selection (recloser locked) Bit 10: logic output number RL4 selection (recloser locked) Bit 11: logic output number RL5 selection (recloser locked) Bit 12: logic output number RL6 selection (recloser locked) Bit 13: logic output number RL7 selection (recloser locked) Bit 14: logic output number RL8 selection (recloser locked) Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: digital inputs configuration, part 1 Bit 0: auxuliary relays de-latching command Bit 1: O/O (52A) Bit 2: F/O (52B) Bit 3: CB Flt Bit 4: aux 1 Bit 5: aux 2 Bit 6: blocking logic 1 Bit 7: blocking logic 2 Bit 8: disturbance start Bit 9: cold load start Bit 10: digital selection 1 Bit 11: digital selection 2 Bit 12: settings group change (configuration must be equal to INPUT) Bit 13: recloser latched Bit 14: reset thermal status Bit 15: control tripping circuit Unsigned integer: digital inputs configuration, part 2 Bit 0: start Breaker Failure timer Bit 1: maintenance mode Bit 2: aux 3 Bit 3: aux 4 Bit 4: Reserved Bit 5: Manual close Bit 6: Local mode Bit 7: Synchronization. Bits 7 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: earth threshold (current, voltage & power) information status Bit 0: info limit exceeding Bits 1 to 3: Reserved Bit 4: Ie> Interlock activated Bit 5: info start Bit 6: info tripping Bit 7: info tripping reverse mode Bits 8 to 15: Reserved
F15
F15A
F16
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 58/74 CODE F17 DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: phase threshold (current, voltage & power) information status Bit 0: info limit exceeding Bit 1: phase A trip Bit 2: phase B trip Bit 3: phase C trip Bit 4: I> Interlock activated Bit 5: info start Bit 6: info tripping Bit 7: info tripping reverse mode Bits 8 to 15: Reserved Signed long integer: numeric data: -2E31 to (2E31 1) Unsigned long integer: numeric data: 0 to (2E32 -1) Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 1 Bit 0: I> Bit 1: tI> Bit 2: I>> Bit 3: tI>> Bit 4: I>>> Bit 5: tI>>> Bit 6: Ie> Bit 7: tIe> Bit 8: Ie>> Bit 9: tIe>> Bit 10: Ie>>> Bit 11: tIe>>> Bit 12: trip Bit 13: tI2> Bit 14: broken conductor trip Bit 15: breaker failure trip Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 2 Bit 0: digital input 1 Bit 1: digital input 2 Bit 2: digital input 3 Bit 3: digital input 4 Bit 4: digital input 5 Bit 5: recloser running Bit 6: recloser latched Bit 7: tAux1 Bit 8: tAux2 Bit 9: Pe/Iecos> Bit 10: tPe/Iecos> Bit 11: Pe/Iecos>> Bit 12: tPe/Iecos>> Bit 13: Ue>>>> Bit 14: tUe>>>> Bit 15: SOTF
F18 F18A F19
F19A
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F19B DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 3 Bit 0: U> Bit 1: tU> Bit 2: U>> Bit 3: tU>> Bit 4: U< Bit 5: tU< Bit 6: U<< Bit 7: tU<< Bit 8: tI2>> Bit 9: tI< Bit 10: tI> phase A Bit 11: tI> phase B Bit 12: tI> phase C Bit 13: digital input 6 Bit 14: digital input 7 Bit 15: tI2>>> Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 4 Bit 0: I2> Bit 1: I2>> Bit 2: I2>>> Bit 3: I< Bit 4: tAux3 Bit 5: tAux4 Bit 6: P > Bit 7: tP > Bit 8: P >> Bit 9: tP >> Bit 10: VTS Bits -15: Reserved Unsigned integer: leds configuration mask, part 5 Bit 0: f1 Bit 1: tf1 Bit 2: f2 Bit 3: tf2 Bit 4: f3 Bit 5: tf3 Bit 6: f4 Bit 7: tf4 Bit 8: f5 Bit 9: tf5 Bit 10: f6 Bit 11: tf6 Bit 12: out of frequency Bits 13-15: Reserved
F19C
F19D
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 60/74 CODE F20 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: logic inputs data status, part 1 Bit 0: logic selection 1 Bit 1: logic selection 2 Bit 2: relays de-latching Bit 3: CB position (52a) Bit 4: CB position (52b) Bit 5: external CB failure Bit 6: aux 1 Bit 7: aux 2 Bit 8: blocking logic 1 Bit 9: blocking logic 2 Bit 10: disturbance recording start Bit 11: cold load start Bit 12: settings group change Bit 13: recloser locked Bit 14: thermal status reset Bit 15: trip circuit supervision Unsigned integer: logic inputs data status, part 2 Bit 0: start Breaker Failure timer Bit 1: maintenance mode Bit 2: aux 3 Bit 3: aux 4 Bit 4: Reserved Bit 5: Manual close Bit 6: Local mode Bits 7 to 15: Reserved
F20A
F21
Unsigned integer: software version (Dec value) : 100 999 (XY) X digit = Version number 10 99 Y digit = Revision number 0 (A) 9 (J) Unsigned integer: internal logic data Bit 0: RL1 trip relay status Bits 1 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: machine status Bit 0: major material alarm Bit 1: minor material alarm Bit 2: presence of a non-acknowledged event Bit 3: synchronisation state bit 4: presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance recording Bit 5: presence of a non-acknowledged fault record Bits 6 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: generic info operating mode 0: out of service / not active 1: in service / active Unsigned integer: 50/51/67 and 50N/51N/67N operating mode 0: NO 1: YES 2: DIR 3: PEAK Unsigned integer: threshold operating mode 0: NO 1: AND 2: OR Unsigned integer: 32N protection operating mode 0: Pe type mode seuil 1: IeCos type mode seuil Unsigned integer: 2 ASCII characters
F22
F23
F24
F24A
F24B
F24C
F25
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F26 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: default display configuration 1: IA measurement display (True RMS) 2: IB measurement display (True RMS) 3: IC measurement display (True RMS) 4: IN measurement display (True RMS)
F27
Unsigned integer: RL1 - RL8 output relays latch configuration and status Bit 0: relay number 1 (RL1) Bit 1: relay number 2 (RL2) Bit 2: relay number 3 (RL3) Bit 3: relay number 4 (RL4) Bit 4: relay number 5 (RL5) Bit 5: relay number 6 (RL6) Bit 6: relay number 7 (RL7) Bit 7: relay number 8 (RL8) Bits 8 to15: Reserved Reserved Unsigned integer: Modbus and DNP3 stop bits number 0: one stop bit 1: two stop bits Unsigned integer: communication status + Private telegram option (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) Bit 0: communication available if = 1 Bit 1: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol private telegrams used if = 1, else IEC 60870-5-103 protocol telegrams in public range only. Unsigned integer: numbers of available disturbance records 0: no records available 1: one events record available 2: two events records available 3: three events records available 4: four events records available 5: five events records available Unsigned integer: numbers of default records to display 1: First record (the oldest) 25: Twenty fifth record (more recently) Unsigned integer: numbers of intantaneous records to display 1: First record (the oldest) 5: Fifth record (more recently) Unsigned integer: disturbance recording configuration 0: disturbance recording start condition on protection START 1: disturbance recording start condition on protection TRIPPING Unsigned integer: cold load start thresholds Bit 0: tI> Bit 1: tI>> Bit 2: tI>>> Bit 3: tIe> Bit 4: tIe>> Bit 5: tIe>>> Bit 6: trip Bit 7: tI2> Bit 8: tI2>> Bit 9: tI2>>> Bits 10 to 15: Reserved
F28 F29
F30
F31
F31A
F31B
F32
F33
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 62/74 CODE F34 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: threshold reset timer type 0: DMT 1: IDMT Unsigned integer: disturbance recording status 0: no disturbance recording uploaded 1: disturbance recording upload running
F35
F36
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 1 Bit 0: Ie> Bit 1: tIe> Bit 2: Ie>> Bit 3: tIe>> Bit 4: Ie>>> Bit 5: tIe>>> Bit 6: tIe>REV Bit 7: tIe>> REV Bit 8: tIe>>>REV Bit 9: thermal alarm ( alarm) Bit 10: thermal trip ( trip) Bit 11: broken conductor trip Bit 12: breaker failure trip Bit 13: Reserved Bit 14: AUX1 trip Bit 15: AUX2 trip Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 2 Bit 0: CB operating time overreach Bit 1: CB operation number overreach Bit 2: square Amps sum overreach Bit 3: trip circuit supervision Bit 4: CB closing time overreach Bit 5: t Boolean Equation A Bit 6: t Boolean Equation B Bit 7: t Boolean Equation C Bit 8: t Boolean Equation D Bit 9: Pe/Iecos> Bit 10: tPe/Iecos> Bit 11: Pe/Iecos>> Bit 12: tPe/Iecos>> Bit 13: I2> Bit 14: tI2> Bit 15: SOTF
F36A
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F36B DESCRIPTION
Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags part 3 Bit 0: U< Bit 1: tU< Bit 2: U<< Bit 3: tU<< Bit 4: U> Bit 5: tU> Bit 6: U>> Bit 7: tU>> Bit 8: Ue>>>> Bit 9: tUe>>>> Bit 10: recloser locked Bit 11: recloser successful Bit 12: I2>> Bit 13: tI2>> Bit 14: I2>>> Bit 15: tI2>>> Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 4 Bit 0: AUX3 trip Bit 1: AUX4 trip Bit 2: I> (old format before release V6: address 001Ah bit 5) Bit 3: tI> (old format before release V6: address 001Dh bit 6) Bit 4: I>> (old format before release V6: address 001Bh bit 5) Bit 5: tI>> (old format before release V6: address 001Eh bit 6) Bit 6: I>>> (old format before release V6: address 001Ch bit 5) Bit 7: tI>>> (old format before release V6: address 001Fh bit 6) Bit 8: I< (old format before release V6: address 0024h bit 5) Bit 9: tI< (old format before release V6: address 0024h bit 6) Bit 10: VTS Bit 11: P > Bit 12: tP > Bit 13: P >> Bit 14: tP >> Bits -15: Reserved Unsigned integer: non acknowledged memorised alarms flags, part 5 Bit 0: f1 Bit 1: tf1 Bit 2: f2 Bit 3: tf2 Bit 4: f3 Bit 5: tf3 Bit 6: f4 Bit 7: tf4 Bit 8: f5 Bit 9: tf5 Bit 10: f6 Bit 11: tf6 Bit 12: t Boolean Equation E Bit 13: t Boolean Equation F Bit 14: t Boolean Equation G Bit 15: t Boolean Equation H Unsigned integer: thermal overload information Bit 0: thermal overload alarm Bit 1: thermal overload trip Bits 2 to 15: Reserved
F36C 2
F36D
F37
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 64/74 CODE F38 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: accessory functions, part 1 Bit 0: SOTF running Bit 1: CB failure Bit 2: pole A opening Bit 3: pole B opening Bit 4: pole C opening Bit 5: broken conductor Bit 6: Aux 1 trip Bit 7: Aux 2 trip Bit 8: broken conductor time delay Bit 9: CB failure time delay Bit 10: cold load pick up time delay Bit 11: CB alarms or bits 0, 1, 4 of F43 Bit 12: Aux 3 trip Bit 13: Aux 4 trip Bit 14: Start SOTF Bit 15: Trip SOTF Unsigned integer: accessory functions, part 2 Bit 0: I>> Blocked Bit 1: I>>> Blocked Bit 2: VTS Bit 3: V2> Bit 4: V2>> Bit 5: P > Bit 6: tP > Bit 7: P >> Bit 8: tP >> Bit 9: Inrush blocking Bits 10 to 15: Reserved
F38A
F39
Unsigned integer: output relay remote word in maintenance mode Bit 0: RL1 (trip) Bit 1: RL2 Bit 2: RL3 Bit 3: RL0 (watch-dog) Bit 4: RL4 Bit 5: RL5 Bit 6: RL6 Bit 7: RL7 Bit 8: RL8 Bits 9 to15: Reserved Unsigned integer: selective scheme logic configuration Bit 0: tI>> Bit 1: tI>>> Bit 2: tIe>> Bit 3: tIe>>> Bits 4 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: remote communication configuration 0: front and rear MODBUS 1: front MODBUS rear IEC 60870-5-103 2: front MODBUS rear COURIER 3: front MODBUS rear DNP3 Unsigned integer: max & average current + voltage time window selection (dec values) 5: 5 min 10: 10 min 15: 15 min 30: 30 min 60: 60 min
F40
F41
F42
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F43 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer Bit 0: CB operating time overreach Bit 1: CB operation number overreach Bit 2: square Amps sum overreach Bit 3: trip circuit supervision Bit 4: CB closing time overreach Bit 5: recloser locked Bit 6: recloser successful Bit 7: recloser in progress Bit 8: closing command issued from recloser cycle Bit 9: recloser configuration error Bit 10: recloser in service (IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) Bits 11: recloser final trip Bits 12 to 15: Reserved Reserved Unsigned integer: HW alarm relay status Bit 0: Watch-Dog operating Bit 1: communication failure Bit 2: data failure Bit 3: analogue failure Bit 4: datation failure Bit 5: calibration failure Bit 6: record data failure Bit 7: Reserved Bit 8: Reserved Bit 9: factory alarm (default factory configuration reloaded) Bits 10 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: Ie harmonic content extraction Bit 0: calculation active Bits 1 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: digital inputs operating mode Bit x = 0 active when de-energized 1 active when energized; Bit 0: input 1 Bit 1: input 2 Bit 2: input 3 Bit 3: input 4 Bit 4: input 5 Bit 5: input 6 Bit 6: input 7 Unsigned integer: Boolean Equation Status Bit 0: Reserved Bit 1: t Boolean Equation A Bit 2: t Boolean Equation B Bit 3: t Boolean Equation C Bit 4: t Boolean Equation D Bit 5: Temporisation A, B,- or H active Bit 6: t Boolean Equation E Bit 7: t Boolean Equation F Bit 8: t Boolean Equation G Bit 9: t Boolean Equation H Bits 10 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: calibration status flag 0: calibration KO 1: calibration OK
F44 F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
Unsigned integer: remote control word number 3 Bit 0: flag sync. harmonic earth current Bit 1: Reserved Bit 2: energy reset Bit 3: Reserved Bit 4: rolling average values reset Bit 5: rolling max sub-period values reset Bits 6 to 13: Reserved Bit 14: Reset data records (event, disturbance, fault, instantaneous & statistic) Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: digital inputs signal type 0: DC 1: AC Unsigned integer: date and time format 0: internal format (see page 8H description) 1: IEC Unsigned integer: IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 communication speed (Baud) INTERNAL USE ONLY IEC 60870-5-103: 0: 9600 1: 19200 DNP3.0: 1: 600 0: 1200 1: 2400 2: 4800 3: 9600 4: 19200 5: 38400 Unsigned integer: Digital inputs configuration mode, part 1: Bit x = 0 level / 1 edge Bit 0: logic selection 1; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 1: logic selection 2; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 2: relays de-latching; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 3: CB position (52a) ; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 4: CB position (52b) ; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 5: external CB failure; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 6: tAux 1; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 7: tAux 2; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 8: blocking logic 1; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 9: blocking logic 2; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 10: disturbance recording start; operating only on edge; not configurable (1) Bit 11: cold load start; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 12: settings group change ; Attention: 0 Input / 1 Menu Bit 13: recloser locked; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 14: thermal status reset; operating only on edge; not configurable (1) Bit 15: trip circuit supervision; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Unsigned integer: Digital inputs configuration mode, part2: Bit x = 0 level / 1 edge Bit 0: start Breaker Failure timer; operating only on edge; not configurable (1) Bit 1: maintenance mode; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 2: tAux 3; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 3: tAux 4; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 4: Reserved Bit 5: Manual close; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 6: Local mode; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bit 7: Synchronisation; operating only on level; not configurable (0) Bits 8 to 15: Reserved
F51
F52
F53
F54
F54A
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F55 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: active group 1: settings group 1 2: settings group 2 Unsigned integer: Fail safe and inversion relays bit x = 0: relay normally de-energized. bit x = 1: relay normally energized. bit 0: Fail safe logic output number RL1 (tripping) bit 1: Fail safe logic output number RL2 bit 2: Inversion logic output number RL3 bit 3: Inversion logic output number RL4 bit 4: Inversion logic output number RL5 bit 5: Inversion logic output number RL6 bit 6: Inversion logic output number RL7 bit 7: Inversion logic output number RL8 bits 8 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: recloser cycles configuration Bit 0: Cycle 1 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure) Bit 1: Cycle 1 configuration (block the tripping on cycle) Bit 2, Bit 3: Reserved Bit 4: Cycle 2 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure) Bit 5: Cycle 2 configuration (block the tripping on cycle) Bit 6, Bit 7: Reserved Bit 8: Cycle 3 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure) Bit 9: Cycle 3 configuration (block the tripping on cycle) Bit 10, Bit 11: Reserved Bit 12: Cycle 4 configuration (trip and initialize the reclosure) Bit 13: Cycle 4 configuration (block the tripping on cycle) Bit 14, Bit 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: Switch onto fault configuration Bit 0: Start I>> Bit 1: Start I>>> Bits 2 to 14: Reserved Bit 15: SOTF on/off Unsigned integer: 51V configuration Bit 0: (U< OR V2>) & I>> ? yes/no Bit 1: (U<< OR V2>>) & I>>> ? yes/no Bits 3 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: VTS configuration Bit 0: VTS Alarm ? yes/no Bit 1: VTS Blocks 51V ? yes/no Bit 2: VTS Blocks protections which use VT ? yes/no Bits 3 to 15: Reserved
F56
F57
F58
F59
F60
Unsigned integer: Information on the starting origin of the RL1 trip relay 01 - Remote X1 trip 02 - trip (Thermal overload) 03 - I> trip 04 - I>> trip 05 - I>>> trip 06 - Ie> trip 07 - Ie>> trip 08 - Ie>>> trip 09 - I< trip 10 - Broken conductor trip 11 - U< trip 12 - U<< trip 13 - Pe/Iecos> trip 14 - Pe/Iecos>> trip 15 - I2> trip 16 - I2>> trip 17 - I2>>> trip 18 - U> trip 19 - U>> trip 20 - Ue>>>> trip 21 - Aux 1 trip 22 - Aux 2 trip 23 - AND Logic equate A trip 24 - AND Logic equate B trip 25 - AND Logic equate C trip 26 - AND Logic equate D trip 27 - Aux 3 trip 28 - Aux 4 trip 29 - SOTF 30 - P > 31 - P >> 32 - f1 33 - f2 34 f3 35 f4 36 f5 37 f6 38 - AND Logic equate E trip 39 - AND Logic equate F trip 40 - AND Logic equate G trip 41 - AND Logic equate H trip Unsigned integer: LED status (bit = 0 if LED inactive) Bit 0 Trip LED Bit 1 Alarm LED Bit 2 Warning LED Bit 3 Healthy LED (always active) Bit 4 LED 5 Bit 5 LED 6 Bit 6 LED 7 Bit 7 LED 8
F62
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 CODE F63 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: Language 00 French 01 English 02 - Spanish 03 - German 04 Italian 05 - Russian 06 - Polish 07 - Portuguese 08 - Dutch 09 - American 10 - Czech 11 - Hungarian 12 - Greek 13 - Chinese Other Language by default (product code) Unsigned integer: Alarms of auxiliary logic inputs timer Bit 0: Alarm tAux1 inhibited Bit 1: Alarm tAux2 inhibited Bit 2: Alarm tAux3 inhibited Bit 3: Alarm tAux4 inhibited Bits 4 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: VTS conv. directional to non-dir Bit 0: VTS I> non-Dir ? yes/no Bit 1: VTS I>> non-Dir ? yes/no Bit 2: VTS I>>> non-Dir ? yes/no Bit 3: VTS Ie> non-Dir ? yes/no Bit 4: VTS Ie>> non-Dir ? yes/no Bit 5: VTS Ie>>> non-Dir ? yes/no Bits 6 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: phase rotation Value 0: Normal , A_B_C Value 1: Reverse , A_C_B Unsigned integer: frequency protection Bit 0: information first crossing threshold Bit 1: information of starting (second crossing) Bit 2: information of tripping Bit 3 to 15: Reserved Unsigned integer: frequency operating mode 0: No 1: Protection under frequency 81< 2: Protection over frequency 81> Unsigned integer: frequency measurement status Bit 0: F out Bit 1: F out because of U min Unsigned integer: 1st Operator for Boolean equations 0: Nothing 1: NOT
F64
F65
F66
F67
F68
F69
F70
F71
Unsigned integer: Other than 1st Operator for Boolean equations 0: OR 1: OR NOT 2: AND 3: AND NOT
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 70/74 CODE F72 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: Operand for Boolean equations
0: NULL 1: I> 2: tI> 3: I>> 4: tI>> 5: I>>> 6: tI>>> 7: Ie> 8: tIe> 9: Ie>> 10: tIe>> 11: Ie>>> 12: tIe>>> 13: Pe/IeCos> 14: tPe/IeCos > 15: Pe/IeCos >> 16: tPe/IeCos >> 17: I2> 18: tI2> 19: I2>> 20: tI2>> 21: I2>>> 22: tI2>>> 23: Thermal alarm (Ith>) 24: Thermal tripping (Ith>>) 25: I< 26: tI< 27: U> 28: tU> 29: U>> 30: tU>> 31: U< 32: tU< 33: U<< 34: tU<< 35: Ue>>>> 36: tUe>>>> 37: Broken conductor 38: Tripping 79 39: tAux1 40: tAux2 41: tAux3 42: tAux4 43: P> 44: tP> 45: P>> 46: tP>> 47: F1 48: tF1 49: F2 50: tF2 51: F3 52: tF3 53: F4 54: tF4 55: F5 56: tF5 57: F6 58: tF6 59: VTS
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.4.3 2.4.3.1 Disturbance record additional information MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record
To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4.3.2 (optional): (compulsory): (compulsory): (compulsory): Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available Send a request with the record number and the channel number. Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It depends of the number of samples. Send a request to upload the index frame.
Request to know the number of disturbance records Slave number Xx Function code Word address 03h 3Dh 00 Word number 00 24h CRC xx xx
This request may generate an error message with the error code: EVT_NOK(OF): NOTE: 2.4.3.3 Service requests This request must be sent before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It allows knowing the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows also knowing the number of samples in the channel. Slave number xx Function code Word address 03h Refer to mapping Word number 00 13h CRC xx xx No record available If there are less than 5 records available, the answer will contain zero in non-used words.
This request may generate an error message with two different error codes: CODE_DEF_RAM(02): CODE_EVT_NOK(03): 2.4.3.4 failure no disturbance record available
Disturbance record upload request Slave number xx Function code Word address 03h Refer to mapping Word number 01 to 7Dh CRC xx xx
This request may geberate an error message with two different error codes: CODE_DEP_DATA(04): CODE_SERV_NOK(05): 2.4.3.5 Index frame upload request Slave number xx Function code Word address 03h 22h 00 Word number 00 07h CRC xx xx The required disturbance data number is greater than the memorised number. The service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been sent.
This request may generate an error message with an error code: CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been sent.
P12y/EN CT/A63 MODBUS DATABASE Page 72/74 2.4.4 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record: 5. 6.
Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledged event. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event. Function code Word address 03h 36h 00 Word number 00 09h CRC xx xx
Slave number xx
This event request may generate an error message with the error code: EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM. NOTE: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement: - Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval: Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged. - Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval: Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, another remote order shall be sent to the relay. Bit 13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. 2.4.5 Request to retrieve a dedicated event Slave number xx Function code Word address 03h Refer to mapping Word number 00 09h CRC xx xx
This event request may generate an error message with the error code: EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM. NOTE: 2.4.6 This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.
Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record: Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 2.4.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Slave number xx NOTE: Function code Word address 03h
3Eh 00
Word number
00 18h
CRC xx xx
On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: - Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval: Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged. - Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval: Bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, another remote order shall be sent to the relay. Bit 14 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.
2.4.6.2
Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record Slave number xx NOTE: Function code Word address 03h Refer to mapping Word number
00 18h
CRC xx xx
This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.
BLANK PAGE
P12y/EN CT/A63
IEC 60870-5-103
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 1/16
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.5 1.6 1.7
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

General information Spontaneous messages Time Tagged Message Status Indications System state Processed commands System commands General commands Relay reinitialisation Cyclic Messages Disturbance record extraction
3
3 3 3 3 9 12 12 12 13 13 15
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 2/16
BLANK PAGE
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 3/16
1.
1.1
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

General information Messages representation is expressed with the associated: INFORMATION NUMBER: ASDU TYPE: INF TYP
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION: COT FUNCTION NUMBER: FUN
1.2
Spontaneous messages These messages include a sub-assembly of the events, which are generated on the relay. The messages considered are concerning highest priority events. An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information; some can be generated also on falling edge. In the list below, events generated only on rising edge will be tagged with a *.
1.2.1
Time Tagged Message Two types of ASDU can be generated for events: ASDU 1: time-tagged message ASDU 2: time-tagged message with relative time
The following list of processed events is the list with the private messages option active, where FUNCTION NUMBERS (FUN) 160 and 161 are used for Public range, respectively for current and voltage protections data, and FUNCTION NUMBERS (FUN) 168 and 169 are used for Private range, respectively for current and voltage protections data. The corresponding event numbers with private messages option inactive are given just below. 1.2.2 Status Indications Status indications (monitor direction): P125 + P126 + P127 LEDS reset: Local parameter Setting active: Setting group number 1 active: Setting group number 2 active: Auxiliary input 1: Auxiliary input 2: Auxiliary input 3: Auxiliary input 4: Logical input 1: with private option inactive: Logical input 2: with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1>
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 4/16 Logical input 3: with private option inactive: Logical input 4: with private option inactive: Logical output 1: with private option inactive: Logical output 2: with private option inactive: Logical output 3: with private option inactive: Logical output 4: with private option inactive: Watch Dog: with private option inactive: Logical output 5: with private option inactive: Logical output 6: with private option inactive: Time synchronisation:
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <168>; TYP <226>; COT<1> *
P127 + P126 Autorecloser active: Logical input 5: with private option inactive: Logical input 6: with private option inactive: Logical input 7: with private option inactive: Logical output 7: with private option inactive: Logical output 8: with private option inactive: Supervision Indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 Trip Circuit Supervision: FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <166>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <166>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <167>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<1>
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 Start Indications (monitor direction) : P127 + P126 + P125 Start IN>: with private option inactive: Start IN>>: with private option inactive: Start IN>>>: with private option inactive: Start / pick-up N: Start UN>>>>: with private option inactive: Start PN>: with private option inactive: Start PN>>: with private option inactive: P127 + P126 Start I>: with private option inactive: Start I>>: with private option inactive: Start I>>>: with private option inactive: Start I<: with private option inactive: Start I2>: with private option inactive: Start I2>>: with private option inactive: Start I2>>>: with private option inactive: General Start / pick-up: Start Therm: with private option inactive:
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 5/16
FUN<168>;INF <12>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <13>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <78>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <80>; TYP <2>; COT<1>
FUN<168>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <11>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <66>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <57>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <74>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <76>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <108>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <15>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 6/16 P127 Only Start U<: with private option inactive: Start U<<: with private option inactive: Start U>: with private option inactive: Start U>>: with private option inactive: 51V: I>> blocked: 51V: I>>> blocked: Start VTS: Start V2>: Start V2>>: Start P>: Start P>>: Blocking Inrush: Start F1: Start F2: Start F3: Start F4: Start F5: Start F6: Non measured Freq.:
FUN<169>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<161>;INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <134>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <135>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <136>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <137>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <138>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <150>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <151>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <225>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<169>;INF <112>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <114>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <116>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <118>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<1> FUN<169>;INF <124>; TYP <2>; COT<1>
Fault Indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 + P125 Start / pick-up N: General Trip: Trip IN>: Trip IN>>: Trip IN>>>: with private option inactive: Trip UN>>>>: with private option inactive: Trip PN>: with private option inactive: Trip PN>>: FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <95>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<169>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<161>;INF <95>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<169>;INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<161>;INF <79>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<169>;INF <87>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 with private option inactive: Local Mode (input):
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 7/16 FUN<161>;INF <81>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <40>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
P127 + P126 Trip L1: Trip L2: Trip L3: Trip I>: Trip I>>: Trip I>>>: with private option inactive: Trip I<: with private option inactive: Trip I2>: with private option inactive: Trip I2>>: with private option inactive: Trip I2>>>: with private option inactive: Trip Therm: with private option inactive: Breaker failure trip: Broken conductor trip: with private option inactive: Manual Close (SOTF, input): SOTF trip: Logic Equation A trip: with private option inactive: Logic Equation B trip: with private option inactive: Logic Equation C trip: with private option inactive: Logic Equation D trip: with private option inactive: Logic Equation E trip: Logic Equation F trip: Logic Equation G trip: Logic Equation H trip: FUN<160>;INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <19>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <94>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <23>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <58>; TYP <2>;COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <75>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <77>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <16>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <39>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <114>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <238>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <239>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <144>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<161>;INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <145>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<161>;INF <87>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <146>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<161>;INF <88>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <147>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<161>;INF <89>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <196>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <197>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <198>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<168>;INF <199>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 8/16 P127 only Trip U<:
FUN<169>;INF <23>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
with private option inactive: FUN<161>;INF <99>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* Trip U<<: FUN<169>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
with private option inactive: FUN<161>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* Trip U>: FUN<169>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
with private option inactive: FUN<161>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* Trip U>>: FUN<169>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*
with private option inactive: FUN<161>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* Trip P>: Trip P>>: Trip F1: Trip F2: Trip F3: Trip F4: Trip F5: Trip F6: FUN<169>;INF <152>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<169>;INF <153>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,* FUN<169>;INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1> * FUN<169>;INF <115>; TYP <2>; COT<1> * FUN<169>;INF <117>; TYP <2>; COT<1> * FUN<169>;INF <119>; TYP <2>; COT<1> * FUN<169>;INF <121>; TYP <2>; COT<1> * FUN<169>;INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1> *
Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 Circuit Breaker ON by short-time autorecloser: FUN<160>;INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,* Autorecloser blocked: CB in O/O ( closed ) position: with private option inactive: CB in F/O ( open ) position: with private option inactive: Trip TC: with private option inactive: Close TC: with private option inactive: Circuit Breaker ON by long-time autorecloser: FUN<160>;INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,* FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <1>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<168>;INF <2>; TYP <1>; COT<1> FUN<160>;INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 1.3 System state It is given in the answer to the General Interrogation (GI).
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 9/16
Relay state information is Class 1 data, they are systematically sent to the master station, during a General Interrogation. The list of processed data, following a General Interrogation, is given below; it is a subassembly of the spontaneous messages list, so like spontaneous messages, these data are generated on rising and falling edge. Status indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 + P125 Local parameter Setting active: Setting group number 1 active: Setting group number 2 active: Auxiliary input 1: Auxiliary input 2: Auxiliary input 3: Auxiliary input 4: Logical input 1: with private option inactive: Logical input 2: with private option inactive: Logical input 3: with private option inactive: Logical input 4: with private option inactive: Logical input 5: with private option inactive: Logical output 1: with private option inactive: Logical output 2: with private option inactive: Logical output 3: with private option inactive: Logical output 4: with private option inactive: Watch Dog output: with private option inactive: Logical output 5: with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 10/16 Logical output 6: with private option inactive: P127 + P126 Autorecloser active:
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
Logical input 6: FUN<168>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<9> with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <166>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
Logical input 7: FUN<168>;INF <166>; TYP <1>; COT<9> with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <167>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
Logical output 7:
FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9> Logical output 8: FUN<168>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<9> Supervision Indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 Trip Circuit Supervision: FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
Fault Indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 + P125 Start / pick-up N: General Start / pick-up: Start IN>: with private option inactive: Start IN>>: with private option inactive: Start IN>>>: with private option inactive: Start UN>>>>: with private option inactive: Start PN>: with private option inactive: Start PN>>: with private option inactive: P127 + P126 Start I>: with private option inactive: Start I>>: with private option inactive: Start I>>>: FUN<168>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <11>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <12>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <13>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <78>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <80>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 with private option inactive: Start I<: with private option inactive: Start I2>: with private option inactive: Start I2>>: with private option inactive: Start I2>>>: with private option inactive: Start Therm: with private option inactive: P127 only Start U>: with private option inactive: Start U>>: with private option inactive: Start U<: with private option inactive: Start U<<: with private option inactive: Start P>: Start P>>:
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 11/16 FUN<160>;INF <66>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <57>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <74>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <76>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <108>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <15>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
FUN<169>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<161>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <150>; TYP <2>; COT<9> FUN<169>;INF <151>; TYP <2>; COT<9>
Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction): P127 + P126 Autorecloser blocked: CB in O/O ( closed ) position: with private option inactive: CB in F/O ( open ) position: with private option inactive: FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>; COT<9> FUN<160>;INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 12/16 1.4 1.4.1 Processed commands System commands Synchronisation Command: ASDU 6
FUN<255>;INF <0>; TYP <6>; COT<8> This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global. The time sent by master is the time of the first bit of the frame. The relay synchronises with this time, corrected by the frame transmission delay. After updating its time, the relay sends back acknowledgement info to the master, by giving its new current time. This acknowledgement message will be an event of ASDU 6 type. General Interrogation Initialisation command: ASDU 7 FUN<255>;INF <0>; TYP <7>; COT<9> This command starts the relay interrogation. The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see the list described above). The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers of the GI cycle generated by the GI command. If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to the master station. When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and the GI cycle is temporarily interrupted. The end of a GI consists in sending an ASDU 8 to the master station. If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialisation command is received, the previous answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle is started. 1.4.2 General commands Control direction: ASDU 20 P127 + P126 + P125 LEDS Reset: this command acknowledges all alarms on Front Panel: FUN<160>;INF<19>; TYP<20>; COT<20> Setting group number 1: Setting group number 2: Trip TC: with private option inactive: Close TC: with private option inactive: P127 + P126 Auto-recloser On / Off: FUN<160>;INF<16>; TYP<20>; COT<20> FUN<160>;INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT<20> FUN<160>;INF<24>; TYP<20>; COT<20> FUN<168>;INF<1>; TYP<20>; COT<20> FUN<160>;INF <142>; TYP <20>; COT<20> FUN<168>;INF<2>; TYP<20>; COT<20> FUN<160>;INF <143>; TYP <20>; COT<20>
After executing one of these commands, the relay sends an acknowledgement message, which contains the result of command execution. If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in a ASDU 1 with COT 12 (remote operation). If the relay receives another command message from the master station before sending the acknowledgement message, it will be discarded. Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negative acknowledgement message.
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 1.5 Relay reinitialisation
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 13/16
In case of relay reinitialisation, the relay sends to the master station the following messages , ASDU 5: relays power on FUN<160>; INF <5>; TYP <5> ; COT <5>
In case of Communication reinitialisation, the relay sends to the master station the following messages , ASDU 5: Reset CU FUN<160>; INF <5>; TYP <3> ; COT <4>
In case of Communication reinitialisation by Reset FCB, the relay sends to the master station the following messages , ASDU 5: Reset FCB FUN<160>; INF <5>; TYP <2> ; COT <3>
Each ASDU 5 message (identification of the relay) contains the manufacturers name in 8 ASCII characters and 4 ASCII characters containing the relay model ( P127 ) . 1.6 Cyclic Messages Only measurands can be stored in these messages. Measurands values are stored in lower levels of communication, before polling by master station. In ASDU 9 FUN<160>;INF <148>; TYP <9>; COT<2>
the following values are stored (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096): P127 + P126 RMS Ia, RMS Ib, RMS Ic,
P127 only RMS Ua, RMS Ub, RMS Uc, P, Q, Frequency (If frequency is out of bounds, the value is set to unvalid . FUN<160>;INF <147>; TYP <3>; COT<2>
In ASDU 3
the following values are stored (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096): RMS IN, RMS Un. FUN<168>;INF <209>; TYP <77>; COT<2>
In ASDU 77 which is a private ASDU,
the following values are stored (in IEEE 32 bits floating-point format): First value: invalid
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 14/16 P127 + P126 I1 (module, unit: V) I2 (module, unit: V) Thermal state (in %).
P127 + P126 + P125 Harmonic power Pe (unit: W). Harmonic power IeCos (unit: A). Angle Ie ^ Ue (unit: degree).
P127 + P126 Angle Ia ^ Ib (unit: degree). Angle Ia ^ Ic (unit: degree). Angle Ia ^ Ue (unit: degree).
P127 only Angle Ia ^ Va (unit: degree), or Ia Ûab if cabling mode is 2Vpp + Vr . Angle Ia ^ Vb (unit: degree), or Ia Ûbc if cabling mode is 2Vpp + Vr . Angle Ia ^ Vc (unit: degree), or Ia Ûca if cabling mode is 2Vpp + Vr . Apparent power (unit: KVA). Apparent energy (unit: KVAh).
These values are not rated. with private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <149>; TYP <77>; COT<2>
In second ASDU 77 (private option active) FUN<248>;INF <25>; TYP <77>; COT<2> the following 4 energy values are stored (in IEEE 32 bits floating-point format): P127 only Positive active energy (unit: KWh). Negative active energy (unit: KWh). Positive reactive energy (unit: KVARh). Negative reactive energy (unit: KVARh).
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 1.7 Disturbance record extraction
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 15/16
The disturbance extraction procedure with IEC870-5-103 in MiCOM Px2x relays is in conformance with IEC870-5-103 standard definition. The maximum disturbance record number stored in a P12y is 5. The disturbance record mapping is the following: P127 only Number of analog channels transmitted: 8, which are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1). Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2). Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3). Channel 4: IN current (Earth). Channel 5: Ua voltage. Channel 6: Ub voltage. Channel 7: Uc/U0 voltage. Channel 8: Frequency.
Identifiers of tags (16) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) for P127: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tag number 1: General start: Tag number 2: General Trip: Tag number 3: CB Failure: Tag number 4: tI>: Tag number 5: tI>>: Tag number 6: tIN> (Earth): Tag number 7: tIN>> (Earth): Tag number 8: PN>: with private option inactive: 8 Tag number 9: PN>>: with private option inactive: 9 Tag number 10: Log input 1: with private option inactive: 10 Tag number 11: Log input 2: with private option inactive: 11 Tag number 12: Log input 3: with private option inactive: 12 Tag number 13: Log input 4: with private option inactive: 13 Tag number 14: Log input 5: with private option inactive: 14 Tag number 15: Log input 6: with private option inactive: 15 Tag number 16: Log input 7: with private option inactive: FUN <160> INF <84> FUN <160> INF <68> FUN <160> INF <85> FUN <160> INF <90> FUN <160> INF <91> FUN <160> INF <92> FUN <160> INF <93> FUN <168> INF <86> FUN <160>,INF <79> FUN <168> INF <87> FUN <160>,INF <81> FUN <168> INF <160> FUN <160>,INF <161> FUN <168> INF <161> FUN <160>,INF <162> FUN <168> INF <162> FUN <160>,INF <163> FUN <168> INF <163> FUN <160>,INF <164> FUN <168> INF <164> FUN <160>,INF <165> FUN <168> INF <165> FUN <160>,INF <166> FUN <168> INF <166> FUN <160>,INF <167>
P12y/EN CT/A63 IEC 60870-5-103 Page 16/16 P126 only Number of analog channels transmitted: 6, which are: 8 9 10 11 12 13 Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1). Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2). Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3). Channel 4: IN current (Earth). Channel 5: Uc/U0 voltage. Channel 6: Frequency.
Identifiers of tags (16) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) for P126: 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Tag number 1: General start: Tag number 2: General Trip: Tag number 3: CB Failure: Tag number 4: tI>: Tag number 5: tI>>: Tag number 6: tIN> (Earth): Tag number 7: tIN>> (Earth): Tag number 8: PN>: with private option inactive: 24 Tag number 9: PN>>: with private option inactive: 25 Tag number 10: Log input 1: with private option inactive: 26 Tag number 11: Log input 2: with private option inactive: 27 Tag number 12: Log input 3: with private option inactive: 28 Tag number 13: Log input 4: with private option inactive: 29 Tag number 14: Log input 5: with private option inactive: 30 Tag number 15: Log input 6: with private option inactive: 31 Tag number 16: Log input 7: with private option inactive: P125 only TODO FUN <160> INF <84> FUN <160> INF <68> FUN <160> INF <85> FUN <160> INF <90> FUN <160> INF <91> FUN <160> INF <92> FUN <160> INF <93> FUN <168> INF <86> FUN <160>,INF <79> FUN <168> INF <87> FUN <160>,INF <81> FUN <168> INF <160> FUN <160>,INF <161> FUN <168> INF <161> FUN <160>,INF <162> FUN <168> INF <162> FUN <160>,INF <163> FUN <168> INF <163> FUN <160>,INF <164> FUN <168> INF <164> FUN <160>,INF <165> FUN <168> INF <165> FUN <160>,INF <166> FUN <168> INF <166> FUN <160>,INF <167>
P12y/EN CT/A63
DNP 3.0 DATABASE

MiCOM P125 P126 P127 VERSION V11.A
P12y/EN CT/A63 DNP 3.0 Database Page 1/16
CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document DNP V3.00 device Profile Implementation Table Point List Binary Input Points Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks Counters Analog Inputs
3
3 3 6 8 8 12 13 14
BLANK PAGE
1.
1.1
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this document The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12y MiCOM relays. P12y uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18. This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12y via the DNP 3.0 protocol. This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2, contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond Subset Level 3.
1.2
DNP V3.00 device Profile The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a Document, it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for P12y: the Implementation Table provided in Section 0 (beginning on page 9, the Point List Tables provided in Section 0 (beginning on page 12), and a description of configuration methods and user-interface in Sections
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 0, BEGINNING ON PAGE 9). Vendor Name: AREVA T&D Antomation & Information Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library, Version 2.18. Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: Master For Requests: Level 2 Slave For Responses: Level 2 Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (startstop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request qualifier code 06 (no range or all points). Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. 16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested. The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048 Received 292 Received: 2048 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None Fixed at 2 None Configurable Configurable
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 0, BEGINNING ON PAGE 9). Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Never Always Sometimes Configurable Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Complete Appl. Fragment: Application Confirm: Complete Appl. Response: None None None None Fixed at 100 m Fixed at ____ Fixed at 1s Fixed at ____ Variable Variable Variable Variable Configurable. Configurable Configurable Configurable
Others: Binary input change scanning period: 5ms Analog input change scanning period: 1s Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Always Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events no specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged for P122 and P123 Only non-time-tagged for P121 Configurable Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Never for P121 Binary Input Change With Time for P122 and P123 Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation) Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted.
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 0, BEGINNING ON PAGE 9). Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable Default Object: 20 Default Variation: 5 Point-by-point list attached Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached
P12y/EN CT/A63 DNP 3.0 Database Page 6/16 1.3 Implementation Table
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the P12y in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. In the table below the text shaded as indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as beyond Subset Level 3. Subset Level 3 beyond Subset Level 3 indicates functionality
OBJECT Object Number 1 Variation Number 0 Description Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Input
REQUEST (Library will parse) Qualifier Function Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)
RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Qualifier Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
1
(default see note 1)
1
22
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
(start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2)
Binary Input with Status
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
2 2
(only P122P123)
1(default see note 1 for P120 - P121) 2

Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Input Change without Time Binary Input Change with Time Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Output Status
(read)
(read)
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
(read)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
10
(read)
10
2
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
(start-stop) (index see note 2)
12
Control Relay Output Block
20
(only P122P123)
Binary Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Binary Counter
20
(only P122P123)
20
(only P122P123)
16-Bit Binary Counter
20
(only P122P123)
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Frozen Counter
20
(only P122P123)
21
(only P122P123)
3 (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read)
129
(response)
echo of request
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
21
(only P122P123)
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28

OBJECT Object Number 21
(only P122P123)

REQUEST (Library will parse) Qualifier Function Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty)
Variation Number 2
Description 16-Bit Frozen Counter
RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Qualifier Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
129 (response) 00, 01 17, 28 (start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2)
21
(only P122P123)
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Analog Input
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
21
(only P122P123)
10
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
30
(read)
30
1
(default see note 1
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
(start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2)
30
16-Bit Analog Input
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
30
32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
30
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
32
32 32 32
(only P122P123)
1
Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time Time and Date
(read)
(read)
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07 (limited qty=1) 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
2 3 4 0
1 1
(read) (read)
129 129
(response) (response)
17, 28 17, 28
(index) (index)
32
(only P122P123)
(read)
129
(response)
17, 28
(index)
50
(only P122P123)
(read)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
(start-stop) (index see note 2) (start-stop) (index see note 2)
50
(only P122P123)
1
Time and Date
1 2
(read) (write)
129
(response)
00, 01 17, 28
52 60 60 60 60 60 80
2 0 1 2 3 4 1
Time Delay Fine Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data Class 0 Data Class 1 Data Class 2 Data Class 3 Data Internal Indications No Object (function code only) See Note 3 No Object (function code only) No Object (function code only)
1 1 1 1 1 2 (read) (read) (read) (read) (read) (write) 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00 (start-stop) (index must =7)
129
(response)
07
(limited qty) (qty = 1)
129 129 129 129
17,28 17,28 17,28 17,28
13 (cold restart) 14 (warm restart) 23 (delay meas.)
Note 1: Note 2:
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) For P12y, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart the executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Note 3:
P12y/EN CT/A63 DNP 3.0 Database Page 8/16 1.4 Point List
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this implementation of DNP 3.0. uses the database protection. 1.4.1 Binary Input Points Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3. Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P125 et P121 and 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) for P126 and P127
P125 Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 P126 Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 11 12 13 14 15 16 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 P127 Point Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Name/Description Output relay 1 (trip) Output relay 2 Output relay 3 Output relay 4 Output relay 0 ( watch dog) Output relay 5 Output relay 6 Output relay 7 Output relay 8 Opto isolator 1 Opto isolator 2 Opto isolator 3 Opto isolator 4 Opto isolator 5 Opto isolator 6 Opto isolator 7 Phase overcurrent stage 1 start Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip Phase overcurrent stage 2 start Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip Phase overcurrent stage 3 start Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip Earth overcurrent stage 1 start Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip Earth overcurrent stage 2 start Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip Earth overcurrent stage 3 start Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip I min Start tImin trip I2> start tI2> trip I2>> start tI2>> trip I2>>> start tI2>>> trip U< start tU< trip U<< start tU<< trip init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P125 et P121 and 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) for P126 and P127
P125 Point Index P126 Point Index P127 Point Index 40 41 42 43 17 18 19 20 21 22 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 23 24 25 26 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 27 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 U> start tU> trip U>> start tU>> trip UN>>>> start tUN>>>> trip PN> start PN> trip PN>> start PN>> trip Thermal start Thermal trip Taux1 Taux2 Taux3 Taux4 Logical Equation A trip Logical Equation B trip Logical Equation C trip Logical Equation D trip Broken conductor cb failure Number of cb operation Cb operation time alarm sa2n trip circuit alarm cb close time alarm Locked autoreclosure Successful autoreclosure In Progress autoreclosure Final trip (autorecloser) Fault Configuration of autoreclosure logic Selectivity 1 logic Selectivity 2 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic 2 52a 52b Lack of SF6 Cold load Pick up Start tBF Trip SOTF Manual Close Local Mode I>> blocked (VCTRLI) I>>> blocked (VCTRLI) VTS Start V2> Name/Description init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P125 Point Index 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 P126 Point Index 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 35 36 37 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 P127 Point Index 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 38 39 40 94 95 96 97 98 41 42 43 44 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 45 110 111 112 113 114 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 Start V2>> De latching by a logic input De latching of the Tripping output relay by remote order Closing order by remote order Tripping order by remote order Thermal Resetting by communication Shifting to maintenance mode (remote order) Major material Alarms Minor material Alarms Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) tI< alarm (latched) tI2> alarm (latched) tI2>> alarm (latched) tI2>>> alarm (latched) tU< alarm (latched) tU<< alarm (latched) tU> alarm (latched) tU>> alarm (latched) tUN>>>> alarm (latched) PN> alarm (latched) PN>> alarm (latched) Thermal start alarm (latched) Thermal trip alarm (latched) Taux1 alarm (latched) Taux2 alarm (latched) Taux3 alarm (if latched by Trip) Taux4 alarm (if latched by Trip) Logical Equation A alarm (latched) Logical Equation B alarm (latched) Logical Equation C alarm (latched) Logical Equation D alarm (latched) Broken conductor alarm (latched) cb failure alarm (latched) trip circuit alarm(latched) Latching of Relay Logical Equation E trip Logical Equation F trip Logical Equation G trip Logical Equation H trip Name/Description init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1
P125 Point Index P126 Point Index P127 Point Index 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 115 116 117 118 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 Start P> Start P>> Trip P> Trip P>> Blocking Inrush Start F1 Start F2 Start F3 Start F4 Start F5 Start F6 Trip F1 Trip F2 Trip F3 Trip F4 Trip F5 Trip F6 Non measured Frequency Logical Equation E alarm (latched) Logical Equation F alarm (latched) Logical Equation G alarm (latched) Logical Equation H alarm (latched) Trip P> alarm (latched) Trip P>> alarm (latched) Trip F1 alarm (latched) Trip F2 alarm (latched) Trip F3 alarm (latched) Trip F4 alarm (latched) Trip F5 alarm (latched) Trip F6 alarm (latched) Name/Description init val. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
P12y/EN CT/A63 DNP 3.0 Database Page 12/16 1.4.2
Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0 polls.
Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
P125 Point Index 0 P126 Point Index 0 P127 Point Index 0 Name/Description De Latch of relays
st
Initial Status Value 0
Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On
Acknowledgement of the 1 alarm
Acknowledgement of all the alarms Remote control Triping Remote control Closing Change of Active Group
3 4 5
3 4 5
3 4 5
0 0 0
Thermal State Resetting
Average and Max rms values resetting Counters initialization of the autoreclosure Initialization of rolling demand (average) Initialization of Maximum
10
10
11
11
Reinitialization of I0 harmonic calculation Reinitialization of Energy counters Re initialization of autoreclosure
12
12
13
Communications MiCOM P125/P126/P127 1.4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point. Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls. P120 and P121 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters. Binary Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported
P126 Point Index P127 Point Index Name/Description Max RMS current phase A (A/100) Max RMS current phase B (A/100) Max RMS current phase C (A/100) Average RMS current phase A (A/100) Average RMS current phase B (A/100) Average RMS current phase C (A/100) CB operation number sa2n ia sa2n ib sa2n ic Total number of autoreclosure cycle Number of cycles 1 Number of cycles 2 Number of cycles 3 Number of cycles 4 Definitive Tripping number Number of closing order Rolling demand(average) RMS phase A (A/100) Rolling demand(average) RMS phase B (A/100) Rolling demand(average) RMS phase C (A/100) Maximum RMS phase A (after a new initialization) (A/100) Maximum RMS phase B (after a new initialization) (A/100) Maximum RMS phase C (after a new initialization) (A/100) Positive active energy (kWh/100) Negative active energy (kWh/100) Positive reactive energy (kVARh/100) Negative reactive energy (kVARh/100) Max RMS voltage phase A (V/100) Max RMS voltage phase B (V/100) Max RMS voltage phase C (V/100) Average RMS voltage phase A (V/100) Average RMS voltage phase B (V/100) Average RMS voltage phase C (V/100) Apparent energy (kVAh/100) Data type D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D2 D3 D3 D3 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
P12y/EN CT/A63 DNP 3.0 Database Page 14/16 1.4.4 Analog Inputs
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each point, the Scaling and Units column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also implies the value of a transmitted 32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the point. Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities. The Default Deadband, and the Default Change Event Assigned Class columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through DNP) control. Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3. Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
P125 P126 P127 Point Point Point Index Index Index 0 0 1 2 3 1 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 Name/Description Active Group Magnitude IA Magnitude IB Magnitude IC Magnitude IN rms IA Initial Value 1 0 0 0 0 0A Scaling and Units (representation of 32767 see above) 32767 40 In 40 In 40 In 40 IEn 327.67A Valid Range 12 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 IEn 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 40000000 A/100 0 to 500000000 V/100 0 to 500000000 V/100 0 to 500000000 V/100 0 to 500000000 V/100 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 260V 0 to 960V Change Event Deadband 1 0.02 In 0.02 In 0.02 In 0.02 IEn 2% 3 2% 3 2% 3 2% 3 2% 3 2% 3 2% 3 2% 0.5V 2V 0.5V 2V 0.5V 2V 3 3 3 Initial Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 3 3 3 3 3
rms IB
0A
327.67A
rms IC
0A
327.67A
rms IN
0A
327.67A
rms VA
0V
327.67V
10
rms VB
0V
327.67V
11
rms VC
0V
327.67V
12
rms VN
0V
327.67V
13 14 15
Magnitude VA Magnitude VB Magnitude VC
0 0 0
260V G1* 960V G2* 260V G1* 960V G2* 260V G1* 960V G2*
Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
P125 P126 P127 Point Point Point Index Index Index 4 10 11 5 12 16 17 18 Name/Description Magnitude VN Thermal State Frequency Initial Value 0 0% 0 Scaling and Units (representation of 32767 see above) 260V G1* 960V G2* 32767% 327,67 Hz Valid Range 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 65535 45Hz to 65 Hz and 99.99Hz == ERROR 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 260V 0 to 960V -9.999 E8 to 9.999 E8 kW/100 -9.999 E8 to 9.999 E8 kVAr/100 -9.999 E8 to 9.999 E8 W/100 -9.999 E8 to 9.999 E8 A/100 0 to 360 -100 to 100 (1/100) 0 to 10.00s 0 to 10.00s 0 to 65535 1 to 2 0 to 8 (F1) 0 to 29 (F2) 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 In 0 to 40 IEn 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 260V 0 to 960V 0 to 360 0 to 360 Change Event Deadband 0.5V 2V 10 1Hz Initial Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 3 3 3
13 14
19 20 21 22 23
Magnitude I2 Magnitude I1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V1 RMS active 3phase power RMS reactive 3phase power Harmonic power Pe
0 0 0 0 0
40 In 40 In 260V G1* 960V G2* 260V G1* 960V G2* 327.67kW
0.1 In 0.1 In 0.5V 2V 0.5V 2V 2%
3 3 3 3 3
24
327.67kVAr
3 2% 3 2% 3 2% 1 2 10 ms 10 ms 1 each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault each new fault 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
15
25
327.67 W
16
26
Harmonic power IeCos Angle Ie ^ Ue 3-phase CosPhi Tripping Time Closing Time Fault number group Fault phase Fault origin
327.67 A
17
27 28
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
32767
18 19 20 21 22 23
29 30 31 32 33 34
327.67s 327.67s 32767 32767 32767 32767
24 25 26 27 28
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Fault magnitude Fault magnitude IA Fault magnitude IB Fault magnitude IC Fault magnitude IN Fault magnitude VA Fault magnitude VB Fault magnitude VC Fault magnitude Ue Fault angle IA ^ UBC Fault angle IB ^ UCA
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
40 In 40 In 40 In 40 In 40 IEn 260V G1* 960V G2* 260V G1* 960V G2* 260V G1* 960V G2* 260V G1* 960V G2* 32767 32767
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
29
43 44 45
Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s
P125 P126 P127 Point Point Point Index Index Index 46 30 47 48 Name/Description Fault angle IC ^ UAB Fault angle Ie ^ Ue RMS apparent power Initial Value 0 0 0 Scaling and Units (representation of 32767 see above) 32767 32767 327.67kVA Valid Range 0 to 360 0 to 360 -9.999 E8 to 9.999 E8 kVA/100 0 to 360 0 to 360 0 to 360 0 to 360 0 to 360 0 to 360 Change Event Deadband each new fault each new fault 2% 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 Initial Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 2 2 3
31 32
49 50 51 52 53
Angle Ia ^ Ib Angle Ia ^ Ic Angle Ia ^ Va Or Angle Ia ^ Uab Angle Ia ^ Vb Or Angle Ia ^ Ubc Angle Ia ^ Vc Or Angle Ia ^ Uca Angle Ia ^ Ue
0 0 0 0 0 0
32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767
33
54
Format: F1: 0: None, 1: Phase A, 2: Phase B, 4: Phase C, 3: Phase AB, 5: Phase AC, 6: Phase BC, 7: Phase A B C, 8: Earth. F2: 0: Null, 1: Remote trip, 2: thermal overload, 3: tI>, 4: tI>>, 5: tI>>>, 6: tIN>, 7: tIN>>, 8: tIN>>>, 9: tI<, 10: broken conductor, 11: tU<, 12: tU<<, 13: Pe/Iecos>, 14: Pe/Iecos>>, 15: tI2>, 16: tI2>>, 17: tI2>>>, 18: tU>, 19: tU>>, 20: tUN>>>>, 21: tAux1, 22: tAux2, 23: tEqu.A, 24: tEqu.B, 25: tEqu.C, 26: tEqu.D, 27:tAux3, 28: tAux4, 29: SOTF, 30: tP>, 31: tP>>, 32: tF1, 33: tF2, 34: tF3, 35: tF4, 36: tF5, 37: tF6, 38: tEqu.E, 39: tEqu.F, 40: tEqu.G, 41: tEqu.H.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CM/A63
COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 1/22
CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

Important notes Injection test sets Communication Commissioning test sheets
3 4
4 4 4 5
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

Allocation of terminals Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Visual inspection Protective conductor (Earth) Terminal Current transformers (CT's) Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults Cable shields and core CT Core CT polarity Auxiliary supply Logic inputs Logic outputs RS 485 rear communication
6
6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9
4.
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.4
SETTING CHECK
Settings Measurements MiCOM P125 MiCOM P126 MiCOM P127 Thresholds validation MiCOM settings MiCOM P125 Settings MiCOM P126 Settings MiCOM P127 settings Earth current and neutral voltage test Final checks
10
10 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 14 15 19
5.
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.4 5.4.1
MAINTENANCE
Equipment failure Minor fault Major fault Hardware and software faults Method of repair Replacing the active part Replacing the complete relay Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Communication MiCOM relay no longer responds A remote command is not taken in account
20
20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22
1.
REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING

The MiCOM P125 P126 and P127 relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will provide an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical relays (static or electromechanical). To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to tests every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following method: Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software (preferred method) Via the front panel user interface.
To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided P12y/EN RS of this Technical Guide for completion as required. at the chapter
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
2.
2.1
COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT

Important notes All the commissioning tests of the MiCOM P125, P126, and P127 relays are carried out by injecting currents and voltages to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs and VTs using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose.
2.1.1
Injection test sets The test of directional protection within P125, P126 and P127 requires at least a phase current, phase to phase and residual voltage injection. The test equipment must provide tools to change the phase between voltage and current. For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-phased current injection and single voltage test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to perform all commissioning tests regarding overcurrent directional/non directional protection of MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays. Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a single-phase injection test set. However, for certain commissioning tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to understand and in this case the description is also given in three-phase format. Single-phase injection test set: 1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms). 1 voltage (30 to 130V), timer (precision 1 ms)
Three-phase injection test set: 3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms). 3 voltage (30 to 130V), timer (precision 1 ms)
Possibility to lag the current respect to voltage injection. Additional commissioning test equipment: 1 multimeter (precision 1%), 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%),
Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension according to the currents injected). 2.1.2 Communication Using the RS 485 communication on the rear connector of the MiCOM P125, P126 & P127 relays or using the RS232 front port can make all commissioning test records. All above in according IEC 60870-5-103,). to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS,
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.2 Commissioning test sheets
Commissioning test sheets are available in the chapter P12y/EN RS of this Technical Guide. The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests of this chapter. The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log: The name of the relay, station and circuit The characteristics of the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays The various settings The results of the protection and automation checks The result of the test records after commissioning.
3.
PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
3.1
Allocation of terminals It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in the chapter P12y/EN CO of this Technical Guide whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.
3.2
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the recommendations in Safety Section of this Technical Guide.
3.3
Visual inspection Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following installation. Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label situated under the upper flap of the front panel. When the relay is outside from its case, use a continuity tester to test that the current shortcircuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are closed.
3.4
Protective conductor (Earth) Terminal Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.
3.5
Current transformers (CT's) DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.6 Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults
If a core balance CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following points: 3.6.1 MV or HV cable screens and core CT, No current flow through the MV or HV cables, Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2)
Cable shields and core CT When mounting a core balance CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction through the core CT. This cancels the currents carried by the cable shields through the core CT.
Electrical cables directed to the busbar
Screen shields
P1 P2
S1 S2
Other ends of electrical cables

P0041ENa
SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE 3.6.2 Core CT polarity It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below: Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and to P2. The centre zero ammeter connected with + to S1 and to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is correct. The phase CT may be tested using the same method.
P1
S1
+ mA
+ _
P2 S2
P0043ENa
CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST NOTE: De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current starting from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal value and then decrease slowly to zero.
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 8/22 3.7 Auxiliary supply
Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127. You can read the Uaux range of the relay under the flap on the top of front relay. Uaux range (Volts) 24 - 60 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc/48 - 250 Vac 3.8 Logic inputs This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P125 has 4 opto-isolated inputs while P126 and P127 have 7 logic opto-isolated inputs. The opto inputs should be energised a time. The status of the input can be viewed using menu OP. PARAMETERS/Input Status, a 1 indicating an energised input and a 0 indicating a de-energised input. When each logic input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the menu display will change to the value show in the following table to indicate the new state of the inputs. Input Opto input 1 22-24 Terminals Opto input 2 26-28 Terminals Opto input 3 17-19 Terminals Opto input 4 21-23 Terminals Opto input 5 25-27 Terminals Opto input 6 58-60 Terminals Opto input 7 57-59 Terminals MiCOM P12x models P125, P126, P127 P125, P126, P127 P125, P126, P127 P125, P126, P127 P126, P127 P126, P127 P126, P127 OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs Satuts. cell value 0000001 0000010 0000100 0001000 0010000 0100000 1000000 Uaux nominal zone (Volts) 19 - 72 Vdc 38 - 300 Vdc/38 - 275 Vac Maximum peak value (Volts) 80 336
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.9 Logic outputs
This test checks that all output relays are functioning correctly. The P126 and P127 relays have 8 outputs, P125 relay has 6 outputs. The watch dog relay is always on. In case of relay failure the watch dog relay moves to the off and the terminals 35-36 are opened. The status of the outputs can be viewed using menu OP. PARAMETERS/ Relay Status, an indicating 1 means relay supplied and a 0 indicating means relay non-supplied. When each output relay is closed one of the characters on the bottom line of the menu display will change to the value show in the following table to indicate the new state of the output relays. Each output contact may have its own and independent power supply (refer to wiring schemes). OUTPUT RELAYS WD Relay Terminals 35-37 RL 1 Change over type. Terminals: 2 Common -4 NC-6 NO RL 2 Change over type. Terminals: 8 Common -10 NC-12 NO RL 3 Terminals 14-16 RL 4 Terminals 18-20 RL 5 Terminals 1-3 RL 6 Terminals 7-8 RL 7 Terminals 9-11 RL 8 Terminals 13-15 3.10 RS 485 rear communication This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted (refer to label under the upper flap). It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter necessary. Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port and check the communication with the appropriate command. MiCOM P125 range P125, P126 and P127 P125, P126 and P127 OP. PARAMETERS/Relay Status. cell value Normal close 00000001
P125, P126 and P127 P125, P126 and P127 P125, P126 and P127 P125, P126 and P127 P125, P126 and P127 P126 and P127 P126 and P127
00000010 00000100 00001000 00010000 00100000 01000000 10000000
4.
SETTING CHECK
The setting checks must ensure that all relay settings have been correctly applied to the relay for the specific application. Transfer the setting file to the relay using a laptop PC running the appropriate software via the RS232 front port or the RS485 rear port. This is the preferred setting transfer method, because it is faster and there are fewer margins for errors. If the setting software is not used, the relay settings must be checked manually via the relay front panel interface. The commissioning checks are as follows: 1. 2. 3. Settings verify and delivery to customer Validation of the measurements Validation of the thresholds and associated timers.
4.1
Settings Log the settings on the commissioning test sheets.
4.2
Measurements The MiCOM P125 P126 P127 relays measure phase and earth currents, phase (phase to phase) voltage, zero sequence voltage as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonics. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio and VT ratio. WARNING: MiCOM P125 P126 P127 RELAYS HAVE 1 AND 5 A CURRENT INPUTS, AND 57 130V OR 220 480V VOLTAGE INPUT. CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT AND VOLTAGE ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE.
4.2.1
MiCOM P125 Note the CT and neutral VT ratio. Energise the MiCOM P125 relay. Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien=1A) or 47-48 (Ien=5A) and verify the IN value shown on the LCD taking in account the relevant nominal current. Apply earth voltage to 39-40 terminals and verify in measurements menu the UN value shown on LCD. Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied value and relay value displayed).
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.2.2 MiCOM P126 4.2.3 Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio and neutral VT ratio. Energise the MiCOM P126 relay.
Apply current to input terminals 49-50 (In=1A) or 41-42 (In=5A) and verify the IA value shown on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 51-52 (In=1A) or 43-44 (In=5A) and verify the IB value shown on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 53-54 (In=1A) or 45-46 (In=5A) and verify the IC value shown on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien=1A) or 47-48 (Ien=5A) and verify the IN values on the LCD in relay measurement menu. Apply earth voltage to 73-74 terminals and verify the UN values on the LCD in relay measurement menu. Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed).
MiCOM P127 Configure the relay in CONFIGURATION-General Options item menu as: 2Vph-ph+Vr VT connection mode. (See User Guide, chapter P12y/EN FT, of this Technical Guide) Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio, phase voltage VTs ratio and neutral voltage VTs ratio. Energise the MiCOM P127 relay. Apply current to input terminals 49-50 (In=1A) or 41-42 (In=5A) and verify the IA value shown on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 51-52 (In=1A) or 43-44 (In=5A) and verify the IB value shown on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 53-54 (In=1A) or 45-46 (In=5A) and verify the IC value shown on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien=1A) or 47-48 (Ien=5A) and verify the IN values on the LCD in relay measurement menu. Apply voltage to inputs terminals 69-70 and 71-72 and verify the UAB and UBC values in relay measurement menu on the LCD. Apply current to input terminals 55-56 (Ien=1A) or 47-48 (Ien=5A) and verify the IN value in relay measurement menu on the LCD. Apply voltage to inputs terminals 73-74 and verify the UN value in relay measurement menu on the LCD.
Log the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed).
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 12/22 4.3 Thresholds validation
This test type demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application specific settings. 4.3.1 MiCOM settings Set the following thresholds for the relay. Applying the voltage and current to terminals as in wiring diagrams in chapter P12y/EN CO of this Technical Guide. The applied current and voltage must be great than setting value. 4.3.2 MiCOM P125 Settings Configuration Menu Transfo. Ratio E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT Sec E/Gnd VT primary E/Gnd VT Sec 1A 1A 0.100 kV 100.0 V Protection Menu Ie> Ie> tIe> tIe> (if DT) Curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT) K value (if RI) Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Yes 1 Ien DT or IDMT or RI 10 s IEC VI or IEEE VI 1 1 10 V 10 s Automation Menu TRIP tIe> TRIP tUe>>>> YES YES
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.3.3 MiCOM P126 Settings Configuration menu Transfo. Ratio Line CT primary Line CT Sec E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT Sec E/Gnd VT primary E/Gnd VT Sec 1A 1A 1A 1A 0.100 kV 100.0 V
Protection Menu G1 I> I> tI> tI> Curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT) K value (if RI) Ie> Ie> tIe> tIe> (if DT) Curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT)1 Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Yes 1 In DT or IDMT or RI (if DT) 10 s IEC VI or IEEE VI 1 1 Yes 1 In DT or IDMT or RI 20 s IEC VI or IEEE VI K value (if RI)1 10V 10 s Automation Menu TRIP tI> TRIP tIe> TRIP tUe>>>> YES YES YES
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 14/22 4.3.4 MiCOM P127 settings CONFIGURATION General Options 2Vpp+Vr Transfo. Ratio Line CT primary Line CT Sec E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT Sec Line VT primary Line VT Sec E/Gnd VT primary E/Gnd VT Sec 1A 1A 1A 1A 0.100 kV 100.0 V 0.100 kV 100.0 V
Protection Menu G1 I> I> tI> tI> (if DT) Curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT) K value (if RI) U> U> tU> Ie> Ie> tIe> tIe> (if DT) Curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT)1 Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Yes 1 In DT or IDMT or RI 10 s IEC VI or IEEE VI 1 1 Yes 20V 10 s Yes 1 In DT or IDMT or RI 20 s IEC VI or IEEE VI K value (if RI)=1 10 V 10 s Automation Menu TRIP tI> TRIP tU> TRIP tIe> TRIP Ue>>>> YES YES YES YES
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 4.3.5 Earth current and neutral voltage test
This test can be executed on the P125, P126 and P127 relay and the operating sequence is the same for all three relays. After the setting is completed connect the relay using the wiring diagram in chapter P12y/EN CO. 4.3.5.1 Earth fault overcurrent and residual over voltage test. Delay type: Definite time Used thresholds for this test: Ie>, tIe>, Ue >>>>, tUe>>>>. Supply the relay, inject current and voltage with magnitude greater then Ie> and Ue>>>> setting value. If the time delay tIe> is short, gradually increases injection current up to the value of the Ie> threshold. If the time delay tIe> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1,1 x Ie threshold and check the trip. Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop out Ie> threshold. The same procedure above for Ue>>>>. Checks: Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED on Ie>, Ue>>>> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. Ie>, Ue>>>> threshold output closes (if programmed).
Delay type: Inverse time (IDMT) Used thresholds for this test: Ie>, tIe> Supply the relay inject a current equal to 2 x Ie> threshold into one of the earth current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x Ie threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the table below (for TMS=1).
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 16/22 IEC curves Type of curve IEC
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Nominal Min - Max 1.62 - 1.98 9.1 - 11.1 12.2 - 14.9 24 - 29.5 108 - 132 10 x I threshold Nominal 0.5 3 1.5 0.8 13.3 Min - Max 0.45 - 0.55 2.7 - 3.3 1.35 - 1.65 0.72 - 0.88 12 - 14.6
STI SI VI EI LTI
1.78 10.1 13.5 26.7 120
IEEE/ANSI curves Type of curve IEEE/ANSI Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Nominal STI MI I VI EI Checks: 4.3.5.2 Ie> Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED on Ie> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. Ie> threshold output closes (if programmed). 0.25 3.8 2.2 7.2 9.5 Min - Max 0.22 - 0.28 3.4 - 4.2 1.9 - 2.4 6.5 - 8 8.5 - 10.5 10 x I threshold Nominal 0.08 1.2 0.3 0.7 0.4 Min - Max 0.07- 0.09 1.08 - 1.32 0.27 - 0.33 0.63 - 0.77 0.36 - 0.44
Phase overcurrent I> threshold test (P126 & P127) Phase overcurrent threshold check: If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the I> threshold. If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out off (I> threshold).
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Checks: Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED on I> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. I> threshold output closes (if programmed).
Delay type: Definite time tI> Apply a current into one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).
Checks: Alarm message on the LCD display for I> after that the setting trip delay time is expired. Alarm LED flashes > after that the setting trip delay time is expired. Trip LED on after that the setting trip delay time is expired. I> threshold LED on (if programmed) > after that the setting trip delay time is expired. Trip output closes > after that the setting trip delay time is expired.. I> threshold output closes (if programmed) > after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
Delay type: Inverse time (IDMT) Used threshold for this test: I>, tI> Supply the relay, inject a current equal to 2 x I> threshold into one of the earth current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x Ie threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the table below (for TMS=1).
IEC curves Type of curve IEC Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Nominal STI SI VI EI LTI 1.78 10.1 13.5 26.7 120 Min - Max 1.62 - 1.98 9.1 - 11.1 12.2 - 14.9 24 - 29.5 108 - 132 10 x I threshold Nominal 0.5 3 1.5 0.8 13.3 Min - Max 0.45 - 0.55 2.7 - 3.3 1.35 - 1.65 0.72 - 0.88 12 - 14.6
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 18/22 IEEE/ANSI curves Type of curve IEEE/ANSI
Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold Nominal Min - Max 0.22 - 0.28 3.4 - 4.2 1.9 - 2.4 6.5 - 8 8.5 - 10.5 10 x I threshold Nominal 0.08 1.2 0.3 0.7 0.4 Min - Max 0.07- 0.09 1.08 - 1.32 0.27 - 0.33 0.63 - 0.77 0.36 - 0.44
STI MI I VI EI
0.25 3.8 2.2 7.2 9.5
RI electromechanical curve Type of curve Electromechanical Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1 2 x I threshold Nominal RI 4.5 Min - Max 4-5 10 x I threshold Nominal 3.2 Min - Max 2.8 - 3.6
For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical values calculated according to the formula of the curves. NOTE: Checks: 4.3.5.3 I> Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED on I> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. I> threshold output closes (if programmed). Equations of IEC, IEEE/ANSI and RI curves are given in chapter P12y/EN TD of this Technical Guide.
Phase to phase (phase to neutral) over-voltage U> threshold (P127) Phase overcurrent threshold check: If tU> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection voltage up to the value of U> threshold. If U> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x U> threshold setting and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x U> threshold setting and check the trip output is close. Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out U> threshold.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Checks: 4.4
Alarm message on the LCD display for U> after that the setting trip delay time is expired. Alarm LED flashes after that the setting trip delay time is expired. Trip LED on, after that the setting trip delay time is expired. U> threshold LED on (if programmed) > after that the setting trip delay time is expired. Trip output closes U> after that the setting trip delay time is expired.. U> threshold output closes (if programmed) after that the setting trip delay time is expired.
Final checks 1. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc If it is necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replace in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service. For MiCOM P126 and P127 models, ensure that all event, fault and disturbance records, alarm and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay. If the relays are in a new installation or the circuit breaker has been just maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters (only P126 & P127) have to be reset using relevant command in RECORD/CB Monitoring menu (refer to User Guide).
2. 3. 4.
5.
5.1
MAINTENANCE
Equipment failure MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are full digital and permanent self-diagnosing. Any failure of software or hardware elements is instantly detected. As soon as an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one). An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.
5.1.1
Minor fault Regarded by the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays as a minor fault is a communication failure. If the communication is in fault, MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 protection and automation modules are not affected. Message: "COMM.ERROR": Cause: Hardware or software failure of the communication module Action: Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. Alternative: If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION menu (Communication ? = No). Communication fault
5.1.2
Major fault Major fault for MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are all software and hardware failures except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is closed and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication).
5.1.3
Hardware and software faults Messages: "DEFAULT SETTING": Indication that the relay is running with default setting "SETTING ERROR": Failure in the setting " CALIBRATION ERROR.": Calibration zone failure "CT ERROR": Analogue channel failure Cause: Hardware or software failure Action: Restart the protection software. If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.
Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 5.2 5.2.1 Method of repair Replacing the active part
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the MiCOM P12x relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the scheme wiring. NOTE: The MiCOM relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the active part is removed from the case.
Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the MiCOM relay. The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse, ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring. 5.2.2 Replacing the complete relay To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from the rear connector. Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and ensure that the relay is no more powered. DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs). Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc .These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are open. Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc carefully because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and case earth, communication are replaced. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instruction in sections 1 to 4 inclusive of this chapter. 5.3 5.3.1 Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Problem: Password lost or not accepted Cause: MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA. This password can be changed by the user (refer OP PARAMETERS menu).
P12y/EN CM/A63 Page 22/22 Action:
There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA local dealer or AREVA T&D P&C After Sales Dept. 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 Communication Values measured locally and remotely Problem: The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ. Cause: The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA T&D Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values. Action: Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second. 5.4 MiCOM relay no longer responds Problem: No response from MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 relays when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message. Cause: Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 communication parameters. Action: Check MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings. Check MiCOM P125, P126 and P127 network address. Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN. Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests. 5.4.1 A remote command is not taken in account Problem: The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept any remote command or file downloading. Cause: Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means that the password is active. Action: Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes.
Connections and Wiring Diagrams MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN CO/A63
CONNECTIONS AND WIRING DIAGRAMS
P12y/EN CO/A63 Page 1/10
CONTENT
1.
1.1
P125 REAR DESCRIPTION

P125 wiring diagram
3
4
2.
2.1 2.2
P126/P127 REAR DESCRIPTION

Scheme representing MiCOM P126 Scheme representing MiCOM P127
5
6 7
3.
3.1 3.2
P126 & P127 CURRENT INSERTION SCHEMES

P126 & P127 Holmgreen CTs insertion P126 & P127 Two phases CTs insertion
8
8 9
BLANK PAGE
1.
P125 REAR DESCRIPTION

Case earth
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
P0071ENb
Output 5 Common output 5 Output 6 Common output 6
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Common output 1 Output 1 (NC) Output1 (NO) Common output 2 Output 2 (NC) Output 2 (NO) Output 3 Common output 3 Output 4 Common output 4 Input1 + Input1 Input2 + Input2
Case earth connection RS485 Vaux + Relay faulty Relay healthy Residual volt. Input -
29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45
30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
Terminal RS485 RS485 + Vaux Common "Watchdog"
Residual volt. Input +
Input3 + Input3 Input4 + Input4
17 19 21 23 25 27
Current input (5A)
47 49 51 53
Current input (5A)
Current input (1A)
55
Current input (1A)
P12y/EN CO/A63 Page 4/10 1.1 P125 wiring diagram Scheme shows output relays off
A
35
/ ~ + 33 WD
Phase rotation
A B C
Auxiliary Voltage / ~ _ 34
55
S1
37 36 4 6 2 10 12 8 14 16 18 20 3 1 7 5 22 24 26 28 17 19 21 23
Watch Dog Programmable tripping output
RL1
Trip direction
P1
RL2
Programmable output Programmable output Programmable output Programmable output Programmable output
1A
56 47
32N 67N
50N 59N
51N
RL RL4 RL5 RL6
5A
48
da
40
MiCOM P125
*
_ +
Programmable input L1 Programmable input L2 Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4
dn
39
Case earth connection 29 Communication cable shield 30 Terminal RS485 31 RS485 Communicatio n Port 32
* terminating resistor for the last

relay to be connected between 30-32 P0074ENc
2.
P126/P127 REAR DESCRIPTION

Case earth
57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
P0072ENb
Input 7 + Input 7
57 58 Input 6 + 59 60 Input 6 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Output 5 Common output 5 Output 6 Common output 6 Common output 7 Output 7 Common output 8 Output 8 Input 3 + Input 3 Input 4 + Input 4 Input 5 + Input 5
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8
Common output 1 Output 1 (NC) Output1 (NO) Common output 2
Case earth connection RS485 Vaux +
29 30 Terminal RS485 31 32 RS485+ 33 34 Vaux
Relay failed 35 36 Common "Watchdog" Relay healthy 37 38 39 40 Current () 41 42 Current input IA (5A) input IA (5A) Current () 43 44 Current input IB (5A) input IB (5A) Current () 45 46 Current input IC(5A) input IC(5A) Current () 47 48 Current input Ie(5A) input Ie (5A) Current () 49 50 Current input IA (1A) input IA (1A) Current () 51 52 Current input IB (1A) input IB (1A) Current () 53 54 Current input IC(1A) input IC(1A) Current () 55 56 Current input Ie(1A) input Ie (1A)
10 Output 2 (NC)
11 12 Output 2 (NO) 13 14 Output 3 15 16 Common output 3 17 18 Output 4 19 20 Common output 4 21 22 Input 1 + 23 24 Input 1 25 26 Input 2 + 27 28 Input 2
Voltage () 69 70 Voltage input VA input VA Voltage () 71 72 Voltage input VB input VB Voltage () 73 74 Voltage input VC/Vr input VC/Vr 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
NOTE:
() means primary transformer polarity. VA, VB and VC voltage inputs only stay in P127 relay Vr (residual voltage) stays in P126 and P127 relays
P12y/EN CO/A63 Page 6/10 2.1 Scheme representing MiCOM P126 Scheme represents relays off
A C B
Phase rotation
A B C
P1 S1
35
~/+ 33 Auxiliary Voltage ~/_ 34

49
WD
37 36 4 6 2 10 12 8 14 16 18 20 3 1 7 5 9 11 13 15 22 24 26 28 17 19 21
RL1
1A
S1
50 51
50 67N
51 50N 46 79 TCS
32N 51N 49
RL2 RL RL4
P1
1A
S1
52 53
P1
37 59N 50BF
1A
RL5 54 55
Trip direction
BC
P1 S1
RL6 RL7 RL8
1A
56 41
5A
42 43
5A
44 45
5A
46
47
5A
A da
48
MiCOM P126
_ +
23 25 27 58 60 57 59
B 29 C 73 30 31 Case earth connection Communication cable shield Terminal RS485
dn
74
RS485 Communication
32
P0075ENb
Connections and Wiring Diagrams MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 2.2 Scheme representing MiCOM P127 Scheme represents relays off
A C
Phase rotation
B
/ ~ + 33 Auxiliary Voltage / ~ _ 34 49 S1 WD
35 37 36 4 6 2 10 12 8 14 16 18 20 3 1 7 5 9 11 13 15 22 24 26 28 17 19 46
A B C
P1
RL1
1A
P1 S1 50 51
50 32N
51 50N 37 79
67 51N 46
RL2 RL RL4
1A
52 53 S1
P1
67N 49 50BF 59
1A
RL5 54 55
Trip direction
BC
P1 S1
RL6 RL7 RL8
1A
56 41
TCS
5A
42 43
59N 81
27 32
5A
44 45
5A
47
5A
48 A a 69
MiCOM P127
*
_
21 23 25 27 58 60 57 59
70 B b 71
Case earth connection

29 30 31
Communication cable shield Terminal RS485 RS485 Communication
72 C c 73
74
32
Internal reconstruction voltage Ue
terminating resistor for the last * relay to be connected between 30-32
Two phase-neutral plus Open Delta connection

A B C
Ad a a 69
Two phase to phase plus Open Delta connection

A B C
Ad a a 69
70 B b 71 B b
70 71
n C
72 73 C c
72
dn
74
dn
73
Internal reconstruction voltage UC

74
Internal reconstruction voltage UCA

P0076ENc
3.
3.1
P126 & P127 CURRENT INSERTION SCHEMES

P126 & P127 Holmgreen CTs insertion
Three phases CTs (IA, IB, IC) + residual current by Holmgreen insertion
Auxiliary voltage
Phase rotation
MiCOM P126/P127
P0101ENa
Connections and Wiring Diagrams MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.2 P126 & P127 Two phases CTs insertion
Two phases CTs (IA, IC) + residual current insertion
Phase rotation
Auxiliary voltage
MiCOM P126/P127
P0102ENa
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127
P12y/EN RS/B63
COMMISSIONING TEST AND RECORD SHEET
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 1/48
CONTENT
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.13.1 1.13.2
COMMISSIONING TEST
Relay identification Commissioning test record Auxiliary supply control Measurements and analogue inputs control Introduction Phase overcurrent protection test Phase under current protection test Earth over current protection test Directional earth fault overcurrent Earth Fault Wattmetric protection test Over/Under Phase voltage protection test Residual voltage protection test Autoreclose basic test ARC test procedure with tI> ARC test procedure with tIe>
3
3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8 8 9 11 11
2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 3.7.5 3.7.6 3.7.7 3.7.8 3.7.9 3.7.10 3.7.11 3.7.12
COMMISSIONING RECORD SHEET P126 & P127 FURTHER TESTS

Introduction Test equipment Type used relay Test configuration Connections to test equipment Test Overcurrent Protection Non-directional overcurrent protection Overcurrent sensitivity tests Overcurrent characteristic tests Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection Neutral characteristic tests Directional earth fault overcurrent protection Reset time test Directional earth fault operating boundary Neutral characteristic tests Directionaloperating boundary PHASE overcurrent (only P127) Earth directional wattmetric test Negative sequence overcurrent Thermal overload
12 38
38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 41 42 42 43 43 44 45 45
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 2/48 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2 3.9.3 3.9.4 Voltage Protection (only P127) Under voltage Phase to neutral under voltage element Over voltage Phase to neutral over voltage element Residual over voltage Automatic control functions Trip circuit supervision Circuit breaker failure Cold load pick-up Broken Conductor
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 45 45 46 46 46 46 47 47 47 48 48
1.
1.1
COMMISSIONING TEST
Relay identification Commissioning date : Engineer : Substation : Circuit : Network nominal frequency: MiCOM relay model: Serial number: Rated current In : Rated current Ien : Rated Voltage primary : Rated Voltage secondary: Auxiliary voltage Uaux : Communication protocol : Language : P125 P126 P127
1.2
Commissioning test record (write OK or No after each checked stage where there is Serial number check ? All current transformer shorting switches closed ? Wiring checked against diagram (if available)? Case earth installed ? Test block connections checked (if installed) ? Insulation tested ? )
1.3
Auxiliary supply control (write Yes or No after each checked stage where there is Auxiliary voltage to relay Auxiliary voltage value Watchdog contacts With auxiliary supply off With auxiliary supply on Terminals 35 and 36 Terminals 36 and 37 Vdc/Vac )
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 4/48 1.4
Measurements and analogue inputs control Set the voltage wiring mode in CONFIGURATION/General options menu as 2Vpn+Vr (See User Guide ref. P12y/EN FT/XXX of this T.G.) Set in the configuration menu in the submenu Transfo Ratio as shown below. (See User Guide ref. P12y/EN FT/XXX of this T.G.) E/Gnd CT E/Gnd CT Line VT Line VT primary Secondary Primary secondary 1 1 0.10 kV 100V E/Gnd VT E/Gnd VT Primary Secondary 0.10 kV 100V
Line CT Line CT primary secondary 1 1
Phase Applied Current Phase A: Phase B: Phase C:
Measured value IA: IB: IC:
Earth Current Applied Earth current:
Measured value IN:
Phase Voltage Applied Phase A: Phase B:
Measured value UA: UB:
Residual Voltage Applied Residual Voltage: NOTE: 1.5 Introduction
Measured value UN:
The measured values are displayed in the Measurement submenu of the involved relay.
Any involved stage before beginning the test must be enable by the setting Yes. Above it is the first operation to do having so the parameters to disposal. To realise this operation you can use or S1 software interface or acting on the keys on the relay front panel directly. To have the trip on relay 1 to measure trip time drop off etc. it is necessary to assign the involved stage in the test to the trip relay. Ypu have to set Yes in the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Trip Command submen where the stage stays. It is possible to assign some led (from 5 to 8) to any function operating in the CONFIGURATION/LED submenu and output relays operating in the AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays.
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 1.6 Phase overcurrent protection test Type and setting threshold in In I>: Value applied in In 0.2 x I>
Delay Time Trip value in Setting In 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in In I>:
Value applied in In 2 x I>
Delay Time Measured Setting Trip Delay time 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in In I>>:
Value applied in In 0.5x I>>
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in In I>>:
Value applied in In 2.5x I>>
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in In I>>>:
Value applied in In 0.5xI>>>
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in In I>>>: 1.7
Value applied in In 2.5xI>>>
Drop value in In
Phase under current protection test Type and setting threshold in In I<: Value applied in In 0.2 x I< Delay Time Trip value in Setting In 1s Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in In I<:
Value applied in In 0.2 x I<
Drop value in In
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 6/48 1.8 Earth over current protection test Type and setting threshold in Ien Ie>:
Value Delay Time Trip value in applied in Ien Setting In 0.2 x Ie> 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in Ien Ie>:
Value Delay Time Measured applied in Ien Setting Trip Delay time 2 x Ie> 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in Ien Ie>>:
Value Delay Time Trip value in applied in Ien Setting In 0.2x Ie>> 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in Ien Ie>>:
Value Delay Time Measured applied in Ien Setting Trip Delay time 2 x Ie>> 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in Ien Ie>>>:
Value Delay Time Trip value in applied in Ien Setting In 0.5 x Ie>>> 1s
Drop value in In
Type and setting threshold in Ien Ie>>>: 1.9
Value Delay Time Measured applied in Ien Setting Trip Delay time 2 x Ie>>> 1s
Drop value in Ien, Ue, R
Directional earth fault overcurrent The setting range depends on the sensitivity of the relay type. However the setting value is expressed in Ien and this one bypasses the problem. The test is proposed for the first stage, but using the same values can be executed for the others stages two stages.
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Below it is listed the guide table.
Type and setting current stage Value Delay Time Measured in Ien, Ue> in Volt, in degrees for applied in In, Setting Trip Delay the torque angle and the trip zone in Volt and time the angles in degrees Ie>: Ue>:10V Torque angle : 0 Trip Zone : +/- 90 Type and setting current stage in Ien, the Ue> in Volt and in degrees the torque angle and the trip zone Ie>: Ue>:10V Torque angle : 0 Trip Zone : +/- 90 1.10 0.5 x Ie> 2 x 10V 0 +/-85 Value applied in In, Measured Delay Time in Volt and Trip Delay Setting the angles in time degrees 2 x Ie> 80V 0 +/-85 1s 1s
Drop value for Ien, Ue, Torque angle, and trip zone
Drop value for Ien, Ue, Torque angle, and trip zone
Earth Fault Wattmetric protection test The earth fault wattmetric protection can be tested but as above needs of the residual voltage injection the wattmetric power is calculated as Ie x Ue x cos (IeÛe+c) The calculation is referred to the secondary values. The same test can be repeated for the second stage. Type and setting Pe stage are in watt referred to the secondary. The setting value depends on the set nominal Ien current (1A). Value Delay Time Measured Trip Delay applied in In, Setting in Volt and time the angles in degrees 0.5 x Ien=0.5A Pe>: 20W Ue=45V UeÎe =0 tPe>=1s Drop value for Ien, Ue, Torque angle, and trip zone
c = 0
Note: Change the angle between UeÎe and verify the trip and drop off of the Pe stage and the value of the Pe in the measurement menu.
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 8/48 1.11
Over/Under Phase voltage protection test Type and setting threshold in Volt U>: Value applied in Volt 2xU> Delay Time Setting 1s Trip value in Volt Drop value in Volt
Type and setting threshold in Volt U>:
Value applied in Volt 2xU>
Delay Time Setting 1s
Measured Trip Delay time
Drop value in Volt
Type and setting threshold in Volt U<:
Value applied in Volt 0.2 x U <
Trip value in Volt
Drop value in Volt
Type and setting threshold in Volt U<<: 1.12 Residual voltage protection test Type and setting threshold in Volt Ue>>>>:
Value applied in Volt 0.2 x U <<
Measured Trip Delay time
Drop value in Volt
Value applied in Volt 2 x Ue>>>>
Delay Time Trip value in Drop value in Setting Volt Volt 1s
Type and setting threshold in Volt Ue>>>>:
Value applied in Volt 2 x Ue>>>>
Measured Delay Time Trip Delay Setting time 1s
Drop value in Volt
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 1.13 Autoreclose basic test
From the 6A firmware version the ARC function follows the other ones of the Px20 range. The testing of this functionality requires a bit attention and some more setting. Below the setting table and the test procedure is listed. MENU TEXT PROTECTION G1 [67] Phase OC I> I> Delay type tI> I>> I>> Delay tI>> I>>> [67N] E/GND Ie> Ie> Delay type tIe> tReset Ie>> and Ie>>> AUTORECLOSE Autoreclose? Ext CB Fail? Ext Block? tD1 tD2 tD3 tD4 Reclaim Time tR Inhibit Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> YES NO NO 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 5 sec 10 sec 0.2 sec 4 4 4321 1111 4321 0000 4321 0000 Yes 1 In DMT 1 sec 0,04s No Yes 1 In DMT 1 sec Yes 2 In DMT 1 sec No SET FOR THE TEST
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 10/48 MENU TEXT Cycles tIe> Cycles tIe>> Cycles tIe>>> Cycles tPe/Iecos>, Cycles tPe/Iecos>> Cycles tAux1 Cycles tAux2
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 SET FOR THE TEST 4321 2222 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000 4321 0000
In the below table are listed the setting to have a corrected functionality of the 79 function. The output relay, the digital input and the led assigne are free. The indicating setting are those used for internal test. In the output relay none other functionality can be assigned to the relay CB Close. AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU Output relay CB Close TRIP 79 79 Run Inputs menu 52a Trip Command tI> tIe> All the other ones Configuration menu LED Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 NOTE : I> Ie> tI> tIe> Recl. Blocked Recl Run To execute the ARC test you have to connect an external relay for the monitoring the CB status (52a OFF when the CB is open, ON when CB is closed). Further the flowing of the current to the relay must be interrupted when the 52a is OFF; CB is open. Yes Yes No input 1 relay 2 relay 8 relay 7 SET FOR THE TEST
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 1.13.1 ARC test procedure with tI> 1.13.2 Close the CB and inject current the led 7 lights for 0.2 s. After 1 sec the CB open tD1 start the led 8 lights After 5 seconf the CB closes and start tR After 1 sec. The CB open and td 2 start .
When we are to the td 4 when the CB close and after 1 sec the tI> trip the 79 trip and Recl Blocked will be actived. 4 shots was done.
ARC test procedure with tIe> Close the CB and inject the Ie current, the led 7 lights for 0.2 s. After 1 sec the CB does not open and tDx does not start none led will be light
This result is corrected because to the Ie was imposed the setting 2.
Commissioning Engineer : Date : Remarks
2.
COMMISSIONING RECORD SHEET

RELAY TYPE P125 P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max Step
OP.PARAMETERS Password Description Reference Software Version Frequency Active Group Date Time CONFIGURATION General Options VT Connection Default Display Transfo. Ratio Line CT primary Line CT sec E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT sec 57130V Input voltage Line VT primary Line VT sec E/Gnd VT primary E/Gnd VT sec 220480V Input voltage Line VT primary E/Gnd VT primary Led Led 5 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Yes No Cortec code: P12--BX---X N.A. N.A. 220V 220V 480V 480V 1V 1V Cortec code: P12--AX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 0.10kV 57V 0.10kV 57V 1000.00kV 130V 1000.00kV 130V 0.01kV 0.1V 0.01kV 0.1V N.A. N.A. 1A 1A 1A 1A 9999A 5A 9999A 5A 1A 1A 1A 1/5 N.A. N.A. 3Vpn or IA or 2Vpp+Vr or IB or IC or 2Vpn+Vr IN 50Hz 1 0131 / 0112 / 0099 0023 : 0059 : 0059 Alphanumeric uppercase characters ( X.X ) 60Hz 2 10Hz Alphabetic uppercase 4 characters

RELAY TYPE P125 tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Ther. Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 P127 Setting Range Min Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max
Step
No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

RELAY TYPE P125 tAux1 tAux2 tSOTF Led 6 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Ther. Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

Setting Range P127 Min Yes Yes Yes Max No No No Step
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No

RELAY TYPE P125 tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 tAux2 tSOTF Led 7 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 N.A. P127 Setting Range Min Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max
Step
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

RELAY TYPE P125 I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Ther. Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 tAux2 tSOTF Led 8 I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> tIA> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

Setting Range P127 Min Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Step
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No

RELAY TYPE P125 tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Ther. Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Fail Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 P127 Setting Range Min Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max
Step
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

RELAY TYPE P125 Recloser Run Recl. Blocked tAux1 tAux2 tSOTF Inputs Configuration Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Voltage Input Start/Stop tAux1 by Start/Stop tAux2 by Start/Stop tAux3 by Start/Stop tAux4 by RL1 Output relay Fail safe relay Group select Change Group By Input Setting Group Alarms Inst. Self-reset Reset Led on Fault Battery Alarm Rel. Maintenance Maintenance Mode Rel. Command Date Date Format COMMUNICATION Communication Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bit Relay Address 65W4321 7865W4321 N.A N.A N.A N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

Setting Range P127 Min Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max No No No No No Step
Active Low or Active Low or Active Low or Active Low or Active Low or Active Low or Active Low or DC LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL
active High active High active High active High active High active High active High AC EDGE EDGE EDGE EDGE
Yes
No
LEVEL 1
EDGE 2
Yes Yes Yes
No No No
Yes 7865W4321 0
No 1
PRIVATE
IEC
Yes or
No
300 600 1200 2400 9600 19200 38400 None7 or 1 or 1 8 2 255 1 EvenOdd

RELAY TYPE P125 PROTECTION Group1Group2 G1 G2 P126 G1 G2 P127 G1 G2 Setting Range Min Max
Step
P127 [67/50/51] Directional/no Directional Phase Overcurrent; P126 [50/51] Three Phase Overcurrent I> I> Delay type I> Trip delay time I> TMS k I> Reset char I> RTMS I> tReset Interlock I> .. I>>I>>> I> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) I> Trip zone I> > I> > Delay type I>> Trip delay time I>> TMS K I> >Reset char I> >RTMS I> >tReset I>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) I>>Trip zone N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A. N.A. N.A N.A N.A. N.A. N.A N.A 0 10 No, P126 0.1 In Yes or No, P126 0.1 In Yes or DIR in P127; 25 In No, 0.01 In Yes in
DT or IDMT (AREVA STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 359 170 DIR in P127; 25 In 1 1 No, 0.01 In Yes in 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
DT or IDMT (AREVA STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s 0 10 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s 359 170 0.025 0.01 s 1 1 0.01s 0.025 0.001
I>>> I>>> I>>>Trip delay time I>>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) I>>> Trip zone
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A N.A. N.A. N.A N.A
No, Yes, DIR or PEAK in P127; Yes or PEAK in P126 0.5 In 0s 0 10 40 In 150s 359 170 0.01 In 0.01s 1 1
No,

RELAY TYPE P125 [67N] Earth Fault Overcurrent P126

Setting Range P127 Min Max Step
High sensitivity: Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien Cortec code P12-C-X---X Ie> Ie> Delay type Ie> Trip delay time Ie> TMS k Ie> Reset char Ie> RTMS Ie> tReset Interlock Ie>. Ie>> Ie>>> Ie> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue> 220480V Input voltage. Ue> Ie>> Ie>> Delay type Ie>> Trip delay time Ie>> TMS K Ie>> Reset char Ie>> RTMS Ie> tReset Ie>> Ie>> Ie>> Trip delay time Ie>> tReset Ie>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie>> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue>> Cortec code: P127CAX---X 1V 260 V 0.1 V Cortec code: P127CBX---X 4V No or 0.002 Ien 960 V Yes or DIR 0.001 Ien 0.5 V Cortec code: P127CAX---X 1V 260 V 0.1 V 0 10 No or 0.002 Ien Yes or DIR 0.001 Ien
1 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 359 170 1 1 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
1 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or 0.002 Ien 0s 0.00 s 0 10 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s Yes or DIR 0.001 Ien 0.01s 0.01 s 1 1 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
1 Ien 150s 100 s 359 170

RELAY TYPE P125 220480V Input voltage. Ue>> Ie>>> Ie>>> Ie>>>Trip delay time Ie>>> tReset Ie>>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie>>> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue>>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>>> Med. sensitivity Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien Ie> Ie> Delay type Ie> Trip delay time Ie> TMS k Ie> Reset char Ie> RTMS Ie> tReset Interlock Ie> Ie>>Ie>>> Ie> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue> 220480V Input voltage. Ue> Ie>> Ie>> Delay type Ie>> Trip delay time Ie>> TMS K Ie>> Reset char Ie>> RTMS Cortec code: P127BBX---X 4V No or 0.01 Ien Cortec code: P127BAX---X 1V 0 10 Cortec code P12-B-X---X No or 0.01 Ien Yes or Cortec code: P127CBX---X 4V Cortec code: P127CAX---X 1V P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
Cortec code: P127CBX---X 4V No or 0.002 Ien 0s 0.00 s 0 10 960 V Yes or DIR or 0.5 V Peak 0.001 Ien 0.01s 0.01 s 1 1
1 Ien 150s 100 s 359 170
260 V
0.1 V
960 V
0.5 V
DIR 0.005 Ien
1 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 359 170 1 1 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
260 V
0.1 V
960 V Yes or DIR
0.5 V
1 Ien
0.005 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 0.025 0.01s 0.025 0.001

RELAY TYPE P125 Ie>> tReset Ie>> Ie>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie>> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>> Ie>>> Ie>>> Ie>>>Trip delay time Ie>>> tReset Ie>>> R.C.A. (Torque Angle) Ie>>> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue>>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>>> Low sensitivity Current input from 0.1to 40 Ien Ie> Ie> Delay type Ie> Trip delay time Ie> TMS k Ie> Reset char Ie> RTMS Ie> tReset Interlock Ie> by Ie>>Ie>>> Ie> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue> 220480V Input voltage. Ue> Ie>> Ie>> Cortec code: P127ABX---X Cortec code: P127AAX---X Cortec code: P127BBX---X Cortec code: P127BAX---X Cortec code: P127BBX---X Cortec code: P127BAX---X P126

Setting Range P127 Min 0.00 s No or 0 10 Max 100 s Yes or DIR 1 1 Step 0.01 s
359 170
1V
260 V
0.1 V
4V No or 0.01 Ien 0s 0.00 s 0 10
960 V Yes or DIR or
0.5 V Peak 0.005 Ien 0.01s 0.01 s 1 1
8 Ien 150s 100 s 359 170
1V
260 V
0.1 V
4V Cortec code P12-A-X---X No or 0.1 Ien
960 V
0.5 V
Yes or
DIR 0.01 Ien
25 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or 0 10 Yes 359 170 1 1 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
1V
260 V
0.1 V
4V No or 0.1 Ien
960 V Yes or DIR
0.5 V
25 Ien
0.01 Ien

RELAY TYPE P125 Delay type Ie>> Trip delay time Ie>> TMS K Ie>> Reset char Ie>> RTMS Ie>>tReset Ie>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie>> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>> Ie>>> Ie>>> Ie>>>Trip delay time Ie>>> tReset Ie>>> R.C.A.(Torque Angle) Ie>>> Trip zone 57130V Input voltage. Ue>>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>>> [32N] Earth Fault Wattmetric Mode High sensitivity 57130V Input voltage Pe> Pe> Delay type tPe> Trip delay time Pe> TMS k Pe> Reset char Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> Current input from 0.002 to 1 Ien Cortec code: P12-CAX---X No or Yes Pe or IeCos Cortec code: P127ABX---X 4V Cortec code: P127AAX---X 1V Cortec code: P127ABX---X 4V No or 0.5 Ien 0s 0.00 s 0 10 Cortec code: P127AAX---X 1V P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s 0 10 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 3.2 100 s 359 170 0.025 0.01 s 1 1 0.01s 0.025 0.001
260 V
0.1 V
960 V Yes or DIR or
0.5 V Peak 0.01 Ien 0.01s 0.01 s 1 1
40 Ien 150s 100 s 359 170
260 V
0.1 V
960 V
0.5 V
0.2 x K W(*)
20 x K W(*)
0.02 x K W(*)
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001

RELAY TYPE P125 Pe>> tPe>> Trip delay time Pe>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle 220480V Input voltage Pe> Pe> Delay type tPe> Trip delay time Pe> TMS k Pe> Reset char Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> Pe>> tPe>> Trip delay time Pe>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle Med. sensitivity 57130V Input voltage Pe> Pe> Delay type tPe> Trip delay time Pe> tReset Pe> TMS k Pe> Reset char Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> Pe>> tPe>> Trip delay time Pe>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle Current input from 0.01 to 8 Ien Cortec code: P12-BAX---X Cortec code: P12-CBX---X P126

Setting Range P127 Min 0.2 x K W(*) 0s 0.00 s 0 Max 20 x K W(*) 150s 100 s 359 Step 0.02 x K W(*) 0.01s 0.01 s 1
No or 1 x K W(*)
Yes 80 x K W(*) 0.1 x K W(*)
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or 1 x K W(*) 0s 0.00 s 0 Yes 80 x K W(*) 150s 100 s 359 0.1 x K W(*) 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
No or 1 x K W(*)
Yes 160 x K W(*) 0.1 x K W(*)
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.00 s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.04 s No or 1 x K W(*) 0s 0.00 s 0 Yes 160 x K W(*) 150s 100 s 359 0.1 x K W(*) 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 100 s 1.5 10 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.01 s 0.025 0.001

RELAY TYPE P125 220480V Input voltage Pe> Pe> Delay type tPe> Trip delay time Pe> tReset Pe> TMS k Pe> Reset char Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> Pe>> tPe>> Trip delay time Pe>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle Low sensitivity 57130V Input voltage Pe> Pe> Delay type tPe> Trip delay time Pe> TMS k Pe> Reset char Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> Pe>> tPe>> Trip delay time Pe>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle 220480V Input voltage Pe> Pe> Delay type tPe> Trip delay time Cortec code: P12-ABX---X No or Yes Current input from 0.1 to 40 Ien Cortec code: P12-AAX---X No or Yes P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
Cortec code: P12-BBX---X No or 4 x K W(*) Yes 640 x K W(*) 0.5 x K W(*)
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.00 s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.04 s No or 4 x K W(*) 0s 0.00 s 0 Yes 640 x K W(*) 150s 100 s 359 0.5 x K W(*) 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 100 s 1.5 10 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.01 s 0.025 0.001
10 x K W(*)
800 x K W(*)
1 x K W(*)
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 800 x K W(*) 150s 100 s 359 1 x K W(*) 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001
10 x K W(*) 0s 0.00 s 0
40 x K W(*)
3200 x K W(*)
5 x K W(*)W
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 150s 0.01s

RELAY TYPE P125 k Pe> TMS Pe> Reset char Pe> RTMS Pe> tReset Pe>> Pe>> tPe>> Trip delay time Pe>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle High sensitivity Iecos set IeCos> IeCos> Delay type IeCos> Trip delay time k IeCos> TMS IeCos> Reset char IeCos> RTMS IeCos> tReset IeCos>> IeCos>> IeCos>> Trip delay time IeCos>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle Med. sensitivity Iecos set IeCos> IeCos> Delay type IeCos> Trip delay time k IeCos> TMS IeCos> Reset char IeCos> RTMS IeCos> tReset IeCos>> IeCos>> Cortec code P12-B-X---X Cortec code P12-C-X---X P126

Setting Range P127 Min 0 0.025 DT or 0.025 0.00 s No or Yes 3200 x K W(*) 150s 100 s 359 5 x K W(*) 0.01s 0.01 s 1 Max 10 1.5 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s Step 0.001 0.025
40 x K W(*) 0s 0.00 s 0
Yes or 0.002 Ien
No 1 Ien 0.001 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0 0.025 DT or 0.025 0.00 s Yes or 0.002 Ien 0s 0.00 s 0 No 1 Ien 150s 100 s 359 0.001 Ien 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 10 1.5 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.001 0.025
Yes or 0.01 Ien
No 8 Ien 0.005 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0 0.025 DT or 0.025 0.00 s Yes or 0.01 Ien No 8 Ien 0.005 Ien 150s 10 1.5 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.001 0.025

RELAY TYPE P125 IeCos>> Trip delay time IeCos> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle Low sensitivity Iecos set IeCos> IeCos> Delay type IeCos> Trip delay time k IeCos> TMS IeCos> Reset char IeCos> RTMS IeCos> tReset IeCos>> IeCos>> IeCos>> Trip delay time IeCos>> tReset Pe/IeCos Angle [46] Neg.Seq. OC I2> I2> Delay type I2> Trip delay time I2> TMS k I2> Reset char I2> RTMS I2> tReset I2>> I2>> Current set I2>> Trip delay time I2>>> I2>>> Current set I2>>>Trip delay time N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. No or 0.1 In Yes 25 In Cortec code P12-A-X---X Yes or 0.1 Ien No P126 P127 Setting Range Min 0s 0.00 s 0 Max 150s
Step 0.01s 0.01 s 1
100 s 359
25 Ien
0.01 Ien
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0 0.025 DT or 0.025 0.00 s Yes or 0.5 Ien 0s 0.00 s 0 No 40 Ien 150s 100 s 359 0.01 Ien 0.01s 0.01 s 1 150s 10 1.5 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.001 0.025
0.01 In
DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0s 0.025 0 DT or 0.025 0.04 s No or 0.5 In 0s No or 0.5 In 0s Yes 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01s Yes 40 In 150s 0.01 In 0.01s 150s 1.5 10 IDMT 1.5 100 s 0.025 0.01 s 0.01s 0.025 0.001

RELAY TYPE P125 [49] Thermal Overload Therm. OL I Te k Trip Alarm Alarm [37] Under Current I< I< Current set tI< [59] Phase Over Voltage U> 57130V Input voltage. U> 220480V Input voltage. U> tU> U>> 57130V Input voltage. U>> 220480V Input voltage. U>> tU>> [27] Phase Under Voltage U< 57130V Input voltage. U< 220480V Input voltage. U< tU< U<< 57130V Input voltage. U<< 220480V Input voltage. U<< tU<< N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

No or 0.1 In 1 mn 1 50% No or 50%
Yes 3.2 In 200 mn 1,5 200% Yes 200% 1% 0.01 1mn 0.01 1%
No or 0.1 In 0s
Yes 1 In 150 s 0.01 In 0.01 s
No or
AND or
OR
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 2V 260 V 0.1 V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 10 V 0s No or 960 V 600 s AND or OR 0.5 V 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 2V 260V 0.1 V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 10V 0s 960V 600 s 0.5 V 0.01 s
No or
AND or
OR
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 2V 130 V 0.1V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 10V 0s No or 480 V 600 s AND or OR 0.5 V 0.01 s
Cortec code: P127-AX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 2V 130 V 0.1V
Cortec code: P127-BX---X N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 10 V 0s 480 V 600 s 0.5V 0.01 s

RELAY TYPE P125 [59N] Residual Over voltage 57130V Input voltage. Ue>>>> Ue>>>> tUe>>>> 220480V Input voltage. Ue>>>> Ue>>>> tUe>>>> [79] Autoreclose Autoreclose Ext. CB Fail Ext. CB Fail time Ext. Block td1 Dead time 1 td2 Dead time 2 td3 Dead time 3 td4 Dead time 4 tR Reclain time Inhib Time tI Phase Cycle E/Gnd Cycle Cycles tI> Cycles tI>> Cycles tI>>> Cycles tIe> Cycles tIe>> Cycles tIe>>> Cycles tPe/Iecos>, Cycles tPe/Iecos>> Cycles tAux1 Cycles tAux2 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 4321 Yes or Yes or 0.01s Yes or 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.02 s 0.02 s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No No No 600s Cortec code: P12BX---X No or 5V 0s Yes Cortec code: P12AX---X No or 1V 0s Yes P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
260V 600 s
0.1V 0.01 s
960 V 600 s
0.5 V 0.01 s
0.01 s
300 s 300 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2
0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
4321 4321 4321 4321
4321 4321 4321 4321
4321 4321 4321 4321
4321 4321 4321 4321
0 0 0 0
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

RELAY TYPE P125 AUTOMAT. CTRL Trip Commands Trip tI> Trip tI>> Trip tI>>> Trip tIe> Trip tIe>> Trip tIe>>> Trip tPe/IeCos> Trip tPe/IeCos>> Trip tI2> Trip tI2>> Trip tI2>>> Thermal Trip Trip tI< Trip tU> Trip tU>> Trip tU< Trip tU<< Trip tUe>>>> Trip Brkn. Cond Trip tAux1 Trip tAux2 Trip tAux3 Trip tAux4 Trip SOTF Ctrl Trip Equation A Equation B Equation C Equation D Latch relays Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 N.A N.A N.A N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RELAY TYPE P125 Blocking Logic Blocking Logic 1 / 2 Block tI> Block tI>> Block tI>>> Block tIe> Block tIe>> Block tIe>>> Block tPe/IeCos> Block tPe/IeCos>> Block tI2> Block tI2>> Block tI2>>> Thermal Block Block tI< Block tU> Block tU>> Block tU< Block tU<< Block tUe>>>> Block Brkn. Cond Block tAux1 Block tAux2 Block tAux3 Block tAux4 Logic Select 1 / 2 Sel tI>> Sel tI>>> Sel tIe>> Sel tIe>>> t Sel Output Relays Output Relays Trip I> tI> I>_R I>> tI>> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 65432 765432 765432 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 2 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 1 2 1 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 0s N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. 2 N.A. N.A. N.A. 1 2 1 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
No No No No 150 s 0.01 s
1 1 1 1 1 1

RELAY TYPE P125 I>>_R I>>> tI>>> I>>>_R tIA> tIB> tIC> Ie> tIe> Ie>_R Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>_R Ie>>> tIe>>> Ie>>>_R Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Therm Alarm Ther. Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

Setting Range P127 Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RELAY TYPE P125 tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond CB Alarm 52 Fail CB Fail CB close tAux1 tAux2 tAux3 tAux4 79 Run 79 Trip SOTF Control Close CTRL Trip Active Group t EQU A t EQU B t EQU C t EQU D Inputs N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126 P127 Setting Range Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Input 1
None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
N.A.
Input 6
N.A.

RELAY TYPE P125 P126

Input 7
N.A.
None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, Blk Log 1, Blk Log 2, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux 4, CB FLT, Reset, Change set, Log Sel 2, Log Sel 1, Cold L PU, Strt Dist, Block 79, Trip Circ , Start tBF, Maint.M.Man.Close,Local 0 0 0 0 200s 200s 200s 200s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s 0.01s
Aux1 time Aux2 time Aux3 time Aux4 time Broken Conductor Brkn.Cond Brkn.Cond Brkn.Cond Time Cold Load Pick Up Cold Load PU Cold Load PU tI> Cold Load PU tI>> Cold Load PU tI>>> Cold Load PU tIe> Cold Load PU tIe>> Cold Load PU tIe>>> Cold Load PU tI2> Cold Load PU tI2>> Cold Load PU tI2>>> Cold Load PU Thermal Level tCL 51V (57-130V) (U<ORV2>)&I>>? V2> (U<<ORV2>>)&I>>>? V2>> 51V (220-480V) V2> (U<<ORV2>>)&I>>>? V2>> VTS Blocks 51V? VTS Alarm? N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
Yes or 20% 0s
No 100% 14400 s 1% 1s
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% 0.1 s
No No No No No No No No No No No 500% 3600 s 1% 0.1 s
Yes 3V Yes 3V Yes 20V Yes 20V Yes Yes
No 200V No 200V No 720V No 720V No No 0.5V 0.5V 0.1V 0.1V

RELAY TYPE P125 CB Fail I> BF CB Fail CB Fail Time tBF Block I> Block Ie> CB Supervision TC Supervision t Trip Circuit CB Open Svision CB Open time CB Close Svision CB Close time CB Open Alarm CB Open NB Amps(n) n CB Open pulse tOpen Pulse tClose Pulse SOTF Sotf tSotf I>> I>>> AND LOGIC EQUAT A I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Pe/IeCos> tPe/IeCos> Pe/IeCos>> N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. B C D A B C D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. Yes 100 ms Yes Yes N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 0 0 Exp6 A 1 Yes 0.1 s 0.1 s 5s 5s Yes 0.1 s Yes 0.05 s Yes 0.05 s Yes 1s 1s N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 0s Yes Yes 0.02 In Yes 1 In P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
0.01 In
No 10 s No No 0.01 s
No 10 s No 0.01 s No 0.01 s No 50000 4000 Exp6 A 2 No 0.1 s 0.1 s 1 1 Ecp6 A 1 0.1 s
No 500 ms No No 100 ms
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

RELAY TYPE P125 tPe/IeCos>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> I2>>> tI2>>> Thermal Alarm Thermal Trip I< tI tU> U>> tU>> U< tU< U<< tU<< Ue>>>> tUe>>>> Brkn. Cond 79 Trip tAux 1 tAux 2 tAux 3 tAux 4 AND LOGIC EQUAT Tdelay EQU. A Toperator EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperator EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperator EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperator EQU. D Treset N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. P126

Setting Range P127 Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s 0s
600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s
0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s

RELAY TYPE P125 RECORDS Fault Record Record Number Disturb Record Pre-Time Post-Time Disturb rec Trig Time Peak Value Time Window Rolling Demand Time Window N.A. N.A. N.A. 5 mn, 5 mn, 1 mn 10 mn, 10 mn, N.A. N.A. N.A. 0.1 0.1 ON TRIP or 3 3 N.A. 1 5 P126 P127 Setting Range Min Max
Step
0.1 0.1
ON INST.
15mn, 15mn, 60 mn
30mn, 30mn,
60mn 60mn
1 mn
3.
3.1
P126 & P127 FURTHER TESTS

Introduction The following procedures are written for demonstrating the main protection functions of the MiCOM P126 (where possible) & P127 relays using an Omicron test or similar. The tests do not test the limits / boundaries of all available function characteristics. They do tests that the function is operating at one or two chosen points an a characteristic. This document is not a complete commissioning procedure but could be referred to when performing commissioning tests in association with the commissioning section of the service manual. The procedures will state if a deviation from the standard connections or default settings is required for testing a particular function. For specific on site applications only enabled functions would be tested using application specific settings.
3.2
Test equipment The test procedure has been written on the assumption that an Omicron, or equivalent, test set will be used. Auxiliary supplies of adequate rating will also be required.
3.3
Type used relay The following tests have been done using a P127 with the following characteristic. Earth Current : Voltage input : Auxiliary supply voltage : Communication protocol : HMI Language : Relay software : 0.01 to 8Ien 57-130V 130-250Vdc/110-250Vac Mod Bus English Current Version
3.4
Test configuration Input the factory default settings. These settings shall then be downloaded and recorded in the test results. Any changes to the settings required by this test procedure shall be recorded in the test results. Any deviation from the default settings will be indicated for each test.
3.5
Connections to test equipment The test equipment will be wired as described in the table below unless otherwise stated.
3.6
Test Overcurrent Protection The following general settings for the relay are suggested VT Connection : Line CT primary : Line CT secondary : E/Gnd CT primary : E/Gnd CT secondary : Line VT primary : Line VT secondary : 3Vpn 1A 1A 1A 1A 0.10 kV 100 V
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.7 3.7.1 Non-directional overcurrent protection Overcurrent sensitivity tests Object:
The following tests verify that the relay overcurrent elements operate at the set thresholds. Test with the following relay settings (all thresholds set as non-directional): ON 1 In Characteristic Curve TMS Reset time delay IDMT IEC_SI (Standard Inverse) 0.025 0.04 s
Inject current of 0.95 In into the A phase input. Increase the current in 0.01In steps, pausing for 2.5s between each step, until the relay operates. The current must then be reduced in the same manner until the protection resets. Repeat the above tests for all phases. Repeat the above test for other overcurrent stages taking in account that the delay time for nthe second and third threshold is DMT (t=0s). Make the test before on I>> after on I>>>. 3.7.1.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. Delay trip IDMT (inverse time only for I>): Pick-up should occur at Reset should occur at 1.1Is 2%. 1.04Is 2%.
Delay Trip DT (definite time for I>, I>>, I>>>) 3.7.2 Pick-up should occur at : Reset should occur at 0.95 Is 2%. Is 2%.
Overcurrent characteristic tests Object: The following tests verify that the relay overcurrent elements trip in the correct time. Test with the following relay settings: Is Characteristic Curve TMS Time Delay Directionality Reset time delay 1 In DT / IDMT IEC_SI (Standard Inverse) 1.0 1s Non-directional 0s
Enable stage 1 overcurrent and prepare the tests set so that A phase current can be instantaneously applied at 2In and 10In respectively. Measure the operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element set to IDMT. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. Repeat the above testing for all phases and stages (with the exception of IDMT which is only for the first stage).
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 40/48 3.7.2.1 Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below 3.7.3 3.7.3.1 DT operating time IDMT operating time: 2.991s 2% at 10 In. 1.0s 2% 10.070s 2% at 2 In.
Non-directional earth fault overcurrent protection Neutral sensitivity test Object: The following tests verify that the relay earth fault elements operate at the set thresholds. Test with the following relay settings: 0.1Ien Characteristic Curve TMS Delay time Directionality Reset time delay IDMT IEC_SI (Standard Inverse) 0.025 0s Non-directional 0.04s
Enable stage 1of Earth Fault protection and inject current of 0.095Ies into the Ie current input. Increase the current in 0.001In steps, pausing for 2.5s between each step, until the relay operates. The current must then be reduced in the same manner until the protection resets. Repeat the above test for all stages of Earth fault protection (delay type is DT). 3.7.3.2 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. 3.7.4 Pick-up should occur at Reset should occur at 1.1 Ies 2%. 1.05 Ies 2%.
Neutral characteristic tests Object: The following tests verify that the relay earth fault elements trip in the correct time. Test with the following relay settings: Characteristic Curve TMS Time Delay Directionality Reset time delay Is DT / IDMT Standard Inverse 1.0 1s Non-directional 0s 1 Ien
Enable stage 1 of Earth Fault protection and prepare the tests set so that Ie current can be instantaneously applied at 2 Ies and 10 Ies respectively. Measure the operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element set to IDMT. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. Repeat the above testing for all stages (IDMT is only for the first stage).
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.7.4.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. 3.7.5 3.7.5.1 DT operating time 1.0s 2% IDMT operating time : 10.07s 2% at 2 Ies 2.999s 2% at 10 Ies
Directional earth fault overcurrent protection Neutral sensitivity test Object: The following tests verify that the relay directional earth fault elements operate at the set thresholds and boundary trip zone Wirng scheme: 3Vpn for the voltage, Holmgreen insertion for the currents. The Ie current is the output common of the phase current inputs. Test with the following relay settings: E/GND Primary E/GND Secondary Ie> Characteristic Curve TMS Ue Trip Zone Torque Angle Directionality Reset time delay 5A 5A 0.2 Ien IDMT IEC_SI (Standard Inverse) 1 1V -45/+45 180 Directional 0.04s
Set the phase voltage adn phase current as following Ua=50V, Ub=57.70V, Uc=57.70V.
Set the Ia current to have the ratio Ia/Ie> as: 3.7.5.2 Ia/Ie> =2 Trip time in 10.08s Inject the current and verify the delay trip time. Repeat the test for the following ratio Ia/Ie> =3 Trip time in 6.36s Ia/Ie> =4 Trip in 5.022s
Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. Pick-up should occur at 1.1 Ies 2%. Time accuracy +/-2% or 20.40ms
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 42/48 3.7.6 Reset time test
Repeat the test at the paragraph 6.8.1 using definite time setting the tIe> to 10s and Treset to 10s. Make the sequence: On Input current 2A, after 5s inject 0 A after 5 seconds again 2A 3.7.6.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass; it shall operate as detailed below. The trip occurs after 5s. Time accuracy: +/-2% or 20.40ms 3.7.7 Directional earth fault operating boundary Object: The following tests verify the operating boundary of the characteristic and to verify its pick-up and drop-off. Test with the following relay settings: VT connection Characteristic t Is Torque Angle(RCA) Boundary trip zone 3Vpn. DT 10s (Operation to be determined by start contacts) 0.2 Ien 180 +/-45
Enable stage and configure the test set applying Ua=50V, Ub=57.70V, Uc=57.70V. Apply A phase current of twice setting at 50 leading the A phase voltage. Increase/decrease the angle between the phase A voltage and current in step of 1 every 2.5s and determine the angle at which the start contacts non-operate and operate, once the element has started decrease/increase the angle and determine the drop-off. Repeat the same test for IDMT delay trip time using the previous settings. 3.7.7.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass the following must be satisfied: The directional decision shall be from the following equations: Directional forward -45 < RCA (Torque angle) < 45
The operating boundary shall be within 3 of the relay characteristic angle 45. The element shall drop off within 3 of pick-up.
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.7.8 Neutral characteristic tests Object:
The following tests verify that the relay earth fault elements trip in the correct time. Test with the following relay settings: Characteristic Curve TMS Time Delay Directionality Reset time delay Is DT / IDMT Standard Inverse 1.0 1s Non-directional 0s 1 Ien
Enable stage 1 of Earth Fault protection and prepare the tests set so that Ie current can be instantaneously applied at 2 Ies and 10 Ies respectively. Measure the operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element set to IDMT. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. Repeat the above testing for all stages (IDMT is only for the first stage). 3.7.8.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. DT operating time 1.0s 2%,
IDMT operating time : 3.7.9 10.07s 2% at 2 Ies 2.999s 2% at 10 Ies
Directionaloperating boundary PHASE overcurrent (only P127) Object: The following tests verify the operating boundary of the characteristic and to verify its pick-up and drop-off. Test with the following relay settings: VT connection Characteristic t Is Characteristic Angle (RCA) Boundary trip zone 3Vpn. DT 10s (Operation to be determined by start contacts) 1 In 0 +/-80
Enable stage 1of Overcurrent and configure the test set to apply balanced three phase nominal voltages (57.7V) to the voltage inputs. Apply A phase current of twice setting at 30 leading the A phase voltage. Increase/decrease the angle between the A phase voltage and current in step of 1 evry 2.5s and determine the angle at which the start contacts non-operate and operate, once the element has started decrease/increase the angle and determine the drop-off.
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 44/48 3.7.9.1 Pass Criteria
For the relay to pass the following must be satisfied: The directional decision shall be from the following equations: Directional forward -80 < RCA (Torque angle) < 80
The operating boundary shall be within 3 of the relay characteristic angle 80. The element shall drop off within 3 of pick-up. 3.7.10 Earth directional wattmetric test Wiring scheme is: 3Vpn for the voltage Holmgreen insertion for the phase and earth current CT phase and E/GND ratio primary and secondary to 5A VTs primary and secondary set to 0.1kV and 100V
Relay settings: Pe> 5 x K W -> 25W Delay type IDMT: IEC SI CURVE Reset time 0.04s Torque angle 180 Inject: Ua=57.7V, Ub= 57.7V, Uc=57.7V with these values the Ue is equal to 0.
Inject the Ia phase current with displacement 0 with Ua to have the following ratios Pe/Pe> : 2, 3, 4 Inject Ua=27.7V, Ub= 57.7V, Uc=57.7V Ue=1/3(Ua+Ub+Uc) (vectorial summation)
The relay calculates the Pe as: Pe= Ue x Ie x Cos(IeÛe + Torque angle) Pe= (27.7-57.7)/3 x Ia x cos(180) with Ia = 5A you have 50W the ratio is equal 2 follow the other ones. Inject 5A for a ratio equal to 2; theoretical delay time 10.03s, measured delay time 10,273s Inject 7.5A for a ratio equal to 3 theoretical delay time 6.3s, measured delay time 6.43s Inject 10A for a ratio equal to 4 theoretical delay time 10.03s, measured delay time 5.077s 3.7.10.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. IDMT operating time : Accuracy: 2% or 30..40ms
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.7.11 Negative sequence overcurrent Object:
To verify that the negative sequence overcurrent operation is recorded as a fault record. Test with the following relay settings: DT time Delay I2> 10s 0.1In
Apply three phase currents to the relay at a magnitude of In. Step change the A phase current to a magnitude of 0.5In. Verify that the fault record indicates that the negative sequence overcurrent has started. Repeat the above testing with the time delay set to 0s. The fault record should now indicate trips. 3.7.11.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above. 3.7.12 Thermal overload Object: The following tests verify that thermal overload starts and trips applied to the relay operate correctly. Test with the following relay settings: Thermal trip current I> Thermal alarm > Time Constant Te K Trip 0.5 In No 1 min 1 100%
Configure the test set to apply 3 phase balanced current to the relay Reset the thermal time state of the relay. Inject three phase 0.55 In to the relay and measure the operating time of the contact. Verify that the fault record indicates that the thermal overload alarm has operated followed by a thermal overload trip after 107 s 2%. 3.7.12.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above. 3.8 Voltage Protection (only P127) The voltage protection 27 and 59 compare the line voltage to the setting elements of each protection. 3.8.1 Under voltage Object: The following tests verify that under voltage starts and trips applied to the relay operate correctly. Test with the following relay settings: Mode Characteristic DT OR DT 30s
P12y/EN RS/B63 Page 46/48 3.8.2 Phase to neutral under voltage element Test with the following relay settings: U< 50V
Enable stage 1 over voltage and apply rated three phase voltages (57.7V per phase) to the relay. After 2s reduce the phase A voltage and phase B voltage to 20V. Measure the operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. Repeat the above tests for stage 2 under voltage. 3.8.3 Over voltage Object: To verify that over voltage starts and trips applied to the relay operate correctly. Test with the following relay settings: 3.8.4 Mode Characteristic DT OR DT 10s
Phase to neutral over voltage element Test with the following relay settings: U>100V
Enable stage 1 and apply three phase voltages (50V per phase) to the relay. After 1s increase the phase A voltage and phase B voltage to 60V. Measure the operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. Repeat the above testing for stage 2 overvoltage. 3.8.5 Residual over voltage Object: The following tests verify that residual over voltage starts and trips applied to the relay are recorded as fault records. Test with the following relay settings: Ue Ue>>>> Trip Delay Derived (VT Connection setting 3Vpn) 10V 10s
Enable stage of the residual overvoltage protection and apply balanced three phase voltages to the relay (57.7V per phase) after 2s reduce UA phase voltage to 25V . Measure the operating times of the relay start and trip contacts. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. 3.8.5.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below.
Commissioning Test and Record Sheet MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 3.9 3.9.1 Automatic control functions Trip circuit supervision
Connect the coil of the external auxiliary relay as the example in the Technical Guide P12y/EN AP page 55.
+ Vdc 52a
Trip order
MiCOM P126/P127
Optoinput
- Vdc
P0096ENa
Set the following parameters. Set in the CB Monitoring TCS ON and Input menu: Assign Trip. Circ. to input 1 Assign an output relay to the 52 Fail Procedure Supply the input and verify that the led and the relay are OFF Remove the supply from the input and verify that the output relay are ON after the set of the TCS timer. 3.9.2 Circuit breaker failure Object: The following test verifies the Breaker Failure operation. Test with the following relay settings: Overcurrent: CBF: Time Delay I<BF tBF 0s 0.5 In 5s Characteristic Time Delay Directionality Reset time delay Is (I>) DT 0s Non-directional 0s 1 In
The relay shall be configured with trip commands relay assigned to t_I>, with relay 2 assigned to CB fail function and with relay 2 assigned as latched. Enable stage 1 overcurrent and apply three phase currents to the relay at 0.8 In for 1s; instantaneously increase the currents applied to the ABC phase inputs to 2 In for 7s. Verify after the increase that tat the relays number 2 change in the status display windows to level 1 after 5s. 3.9.2.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above. 3.9.3 Cold load pick-up Test with the following relay settings: Cold load pick-up: t_I> Level tCL Yes 200% 5.0 s
Overcurrent: Characteristic Time Delay Directionality Reset time delay Is (I>) DT 2s Non-directional 0s 1In
Inputs: Input 1 Cold L PU
Apply three phase currents to the relay at a magnitude of 1.5 In and supply the input 1. Verify after 8 sec the trip of the overcurrent is recrided as a fault record 3.9.3.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed above. 3.9.4 Broken Conductor Object: The following tests verify that a broken conductor condition causes the relay to operate correctly. Test with the following relay settings: I2/I1 setting Characteristic Time Delay 20% DT 10s
Apply rated three phase currents (1In). After 10 seconds have elapsed, reduce the current in A phase to zero and measure the time taken for the relay to indicate a broken conductor trip. Repeat the test with the element disabled and verify that no start or trip elements operate. 3.9.4.1 Pass Criteria For the relay to pass it shall operate as detailed below. DT operating time 10.0s 2%
Publication: P12Y/EN T/A63

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Alstom Micom

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alstom Micom

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alstom Micom

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

Technical Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN T/A63 Page 1/2

MiCOM P125/P126 & P127 Directional/Non-directional Relay CONTENT

P12y/EN T/A63 Page 2/2

Technical Guide MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 Safety Section 1/8

Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 2/8 Safety Section

HEALTH AND SAFETY

Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 Safety Section 3/8

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.

Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 6/8 Safety Section

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.

Pxxxx/EN SS/E11 8/8 Safety Section

RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 1/48

OVERWIEW DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ENERGISING THE RELAY

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 2/48

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

REMOTE CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR P125, P126 & P127

COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 3/48

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 4/48

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 5/48

USE OF THIS SECTION

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 6/48

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 7/48

GENERAL ON MiCOM P125, P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 8/48

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 9/48

Arrow keys Arrow key

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 11/48

P12y/EN GS/A63 Page 12/48 9.3 Withdrawing Module from Case

Getting Started MiCOM P125/P126 & P127